CEYLON ELECTRICITY BOARD SRI LANKA CLEAN ENERGY AND ACCESS IMPROVEMENT PROJECT

(ADB Loan No. 2518-SRI)

PART 1: SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE MODERNISATION PROJECT
PACKAGE A – CONSTRUCTION OF NATIONAL SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE AND INSTALLATION OF SCADA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Procurement of Plant
Design, Supply and Install
Single-Stage, Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure BIDDING DOCUMENT for
Establishment of: National System Control Centre and SCADA System

VOLUME 5 of 8
Part II- REQUIREMENTS
Section 6-Employer’s Requirements Part B-Technical Specification

Issued on: February 2011 Invitation for Bids No: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/IFB/010 ICB No.: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/ICB/010 Employer: Ceylon Electricity Board Country: Sri Lanka © Transmission Design Branch, CEB

Transmission Division Ceylon Electricity Board, P.O. Box 540, Colombo 2 Sri Lanka February 2011 Document-Revision 1

Contents - Summary Description
VOLUME 1 of 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders (ITB) ------------------------------------------------ 1-1
This section specifies the course of actions to be taken by Bidders in the preparation and submission of their Bids following a Single-Stage, Two-envelop bidding procedure. Information is also provided on the submission, opening, and evaluation of bids and on the award of contract.

Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS) --------------------------------------------------------- 2-1
This section consists of provisions that are specific to each procurement and supplement the information or requirements included in Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders.

Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC) -------------------------- 3-1
This section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders. In accordance with section 1-E (ITB 28-41), no other factors, methods or criteria shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).

VOLUME 2 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4A-1
Part A-Price Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

VOLUME 3 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4B-1
Part B-Technical Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

Section 5 - Eligible Countries (ELC) ----------------------------------------------------- 5-1
This section contains the list of eligible countries.

VOLUME 4 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) ---------------------------------------- 6A-1
Part A-Scope of Works

VOLUME 5 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6B-1
Part B-Technical Specification

VOLUME 6 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6C-1
Part C-Drawings

VOLUME 7 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6D-1
Part D-Supplementary Information,

Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6E-1
Part E-Bank Guarantees, Certificates and Change Orders

VOLUME 8 OF 8 PART III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract (GCC) ---------------------------------- 7-1
This Section contains the general clauses to be applied in all contracts. These Conditions are subject to the variations and additions set out in Section 8 (Special Conditions of Contract).

Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) ----------------------------------- 8-1
This Section supplements the General Conditions of Contract (GCC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GCC. The clause number of the SCC is the corresponding clause number of the GCC.

Section 9 - Contract Forms (COF) --------------------------------------------------------- 9-1
This Section contains the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement and Appendices to the Contract Agreement which, once completed, will form part of the Contract.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

PART B – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – SCADA/EMS, TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OUTSTATIONS, POWER SUPPLY AND NSCC BUILDING

CONTENTS CHAPTER No. 1. TITLE PAGE No.

INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................... 24 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION .................................................................................. 24 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE ........................................................... 25 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS ....................................... 26 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM ........................................................ 30 NSCC BUILDING ............................................................................................................ 31 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY ................................... 31 1.6.1 SCADA/EMS System ...................................................................................... 31 1.6.2 Telecommunication System ............................................................................ 32 1.6.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works ................................................. 32 1.6.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre ....................................................... 33 1.6.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System ............................................................. 33 1.6.6 NSCC Building................................................................................................. 33 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS ...................... 34

1.7 2.

NSCC SCADA/EMS ................................................................................................................. 35 2.1 2.2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 35 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 35 2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................ 35 2.2.2 System Architecture ........................................................................................ 35 2.2.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing ................................................................................ 36 2.2.4 Reliability and Availability ................................................................................ 36 2.2.5 Risks ................................................................................................................ 36 SCADA APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1 Communication................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.1 Data Acquisition........................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.2 ICCP Data Links ....................................................................................... 37 2.3.2 Data Processing .............................................................................................. 37 2.3.2.1 Measured Values...................................................................................... 38 2.3.2.2 Status Indications - Digital Points ............................................................. 39 2.3.2.3 Derived Data ............................................................................................. 40 2.3.2.4 Meter Values ............................................................................................ 41 2.3.2.5 Tap Position .............................................................................................. 41 2.3.2.6 Data Quality Attributes ............................................................................. 41 2.3.2.7 Controls .................................................................................................... 42 2.3.3 Alarm and Event Processing ........................................................................... 43 2.3.3.1 Definition ................................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.2 Event Handling ......................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.3 Alarm Management .................................................................................. 44 2.3.3.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists ................................................................. 46 2.3.3.5 Sequence of Events Processing .............................................................. 46 2.3.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring ............................................................................ 46

2.3

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 1 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

2.3.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) .......................................................................... 46 2.3.4.1 General ..................................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.2 Access Control ......................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.3 Displays .................................................................................................... 47 2.3.4.4 Supervisory Control .................................................................................. 49 2.3.4.5 Sequence Control ..................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.6 Set Point Control ...................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.7 Manual Dressing....................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.8 Trending ................................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.9 Diagram Tagging ...................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.10 Printing ..................................................................................................... 53 2.4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .............................................................................. 54 2.4.1 General Introduction ........................................................................................ 54 2.4.2 Transmission/Generation Network .................................................................. 54 2.4.3 EMS Database ................................................................................................ 55 2.4.4 Real-Time Network Analysis ........................................................................... 55 2.4.4.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 55 2.4.4.2 Network Topology..................................................................................... 56 2.4.4.3 State Estimation ....................................................................................... 57 2.4.4.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation .................................. 58 2.4.4.5 Security Assessment ................................................................................ 58 2.4.4.6 Bus Load Forecast ................................................................................... 59 2.4.4.7 Loss Penalty Factors ................................................................................ 59 2.4.4.8 Optimal Power Flow ................................................................................. 59 2.4.4.9 Save cases ............................................................................................... 60 2.4.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation ................................................................ 60 2.4.6 Study Mode Network Analysis ......................................................................... 60 2.4.7 Generating Plant Scheduling ........................................................................... 61 2.4.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 61 2.4.7.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data ..................................................................... 62 2.4.7.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs ......................................................................... 63 2.4.7.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes ................................................ 63 2.4.7.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring .................................................................. 63 2.4.8 Demand Forecasting ....................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts ................................................................ 64 2.4.8.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility ................................................... 64 2.4.9 Economic Load Dispatching ............................................................................ 65 2.4.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 65 2.4.9.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching ............................................. 65 2.4.9.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching ................................................................. 66 2.4.10 Reactive Power Scheduling ............................................................................ 66 2.4.10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 66 2.4.10.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data ................................................................. 66 2.4.10.3 Reactive Power Calculation ..................................................................... 67 2.4.10.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs ..................................................................... 67 2.4.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant ............................................................ 67 2.4.11.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 67 2.4.11.2 Automatic Generation Control .................................................................. 67 2.4.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations ..................................... 68 2.4.12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 68 2.4.12.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules ..................................... 68 2.4.12.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays ........................................ 68 2.4.12.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control .......................................... 69 2.4.12.5 Embedded Generation Data ..................................................................... 69 OTHER APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 69 2.5.1 Switching Schedules ....................................................................................... 69 2.5.2 Job Management ............................................................................................. 69 2.5.3 Fault Detection, Location and Load Restoration (Option) ............................... 70 2.5.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) ................................................................. 70

2.5

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 2 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.7

Under Frequency Load Shedding ................................................................... 70 Load Shedding Schedules .............................................................................. 70

HISTORICAL DATA ........................................................................................................ 70 REPORT GENERATION ................................................................................................ 71 2.7.1 Routine Reports............................................................................................... 71 2.7.2 Energy Reports ................................................................................................ 71 DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 72 2.8.1 General ............................................................................................................ 72 2.8.2 Data Entry........................................................................................................ 73 2.8.3 Data Manipulation Function ............................................................................. 73 2.8.4 Graphic Display Construction .......................................................................... 73 2.8.4.1 Configuration Responsibilities .................................................................. 74 2.8.5 Changes to Configuration Data ....................................................................... 75 2.8.6 Change Control ............................................................................................... 75 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES ..................................................................................... 75

2.8

2.9

2.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR ........................................................................... 75 2.10.1 Objectives ........................................................................................................ 75 2.10.2 Simulation Functions ....................................................................................... 76 2.10.3 Relay modelling ............................................................................................... 77 2.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE .................................................................................. 78 2.11.1 Operating Systems .......................................................................................... 78 2.11.2 Antivirus Software............................................................................................ 78 2.11.3 Servers ............................................................................................................ 78 2.11.4 Data Acquisition Servers ................................................................................. 78 2.11.5 Operator Workstations .................................................................................... 79 2.11.6 Local Area Network (LAN) ............................................................................... 79 2.11.6.1 Ethernet switches ..................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.2 Routers ..................................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.3 LAN Management..................................................................................... 80 2.11.7 Printers ............................................................................................................ 80 2.11.7.1 General ..................................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.2 Laser Printers ........................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.3 Colour Printers .......................................................................................... 80 2.11.8 Video Wall ....................................................................................................... 80 2.11.8.1 Display Units ............................................................................................. 81 2.11.8.2 Controllers ................................................................................................ 81 2.11.8.3 Video Wall Construction ........................................................................... 81 2.11.8.4 Software ................................................................................................... 81 2.11.8.5 Management............................................................................................. 82 2.11.9 System Time.................................................................................................... 82 2.11.10 System Displays .............................................................................................. 82 2.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................ 82 2.12.1 Normal Activity Conditions .............................................................................. 82 2.12.2 High Activity Conditions ................................................................................... 83 2.12.3 Computer Start Up........................................................................................... 83 2.12.4 Transfer of Operation ...................................................................................... 83 2.12.5 System Response Times ................................................................................ 83 2.13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE................................................................................. 84 2.13.1 Operator Desks ............................................................................................... 84 2.13.2 Operator Chairs ............................................................................................... 85 2.13.3 Equipment Stands ........................................................................................... 85 2.13.4 Office Furniture ................................................................................................ 85

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 3 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

3.

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 86 3.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 86 3.1.1 Specification and Design Criteria .................................................................... 86 3.1.2 Reference Documents and Standards ............................................................ 86 3.1.3 Site and Environmental Conditions ................................................................. 87 3.1.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities ......................................... 87 3.1.5 Implementation Programme ............................................................................ 88 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.................................................. 88 3.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 88 3.2.2 Design and Operational Philosophy ................................................................ 89 3.2.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ................................................................. 90 3.2.4 Telecommunication Network ........................................................................... 90 3.2.4.1 Configuration and Topology ..................................................................... 90 3.2.4.2 Network Design ........................................................................................ 91 3.2.4.3 Network Protection ................................................................................... 91 3.2.4.4 Fibre Optic Links....................................................................................... 92 3.2.4.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links .............................................................. 97 3.2.4.6 Communication Facilities ......................................................................... 97 3.2.4.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC ................................ 99 3.2.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations .............. 99 3.2.5 Telecommunication Management System .................................................... 100 3.2.5.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.5.2 Time Synchronisation ............................................................................. 101 3.2.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.7 Telephone Network ....................................................................................... 102 3.2.7.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment ........................................................... 102 3.2.7.2 Voice Recording Equipment ................................................................... 102 3.2.8 Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 103 3.2.8.1 At NSCC ................................................................................................. 103 3.2.8.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations .......................................... 103 3.2.8.3 At Employer‘s HQ Building ..................................................................... 103 3.2.9 Equipment Locations ..................................................................................... 103 3.2.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System ........................ 104 3.2.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment .................................................... 104 3.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 104 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................................................... 106 3.3.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 106 3.3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 106 3.3.2 Loss Budget Calculations .............................................................................. 106 3.3.3 Safety ............................................................................................................ 107 3.3.4 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 107 3.3.4.1 General ................................................................................................... 107 3.3.4.2 System Capacity and Performance ........................................................ 107 3.3.4.3 Service Channels ................................................................................... 108 3.3.5 SDH Equipment ............................................................................................. 108 3.3.5.1 General ................................................................................................... 108 3.3.5.2 Optical Line Interface ............................................................................. 109 3.3.5.3 Electrical Line Interface .......................................................................... 109 3.3.5.4 Tributary Module..................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.5 Switching Unit ......................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.6 Control and Alarm Functions .................................................................. 110 3.3.5.7 Engineer Order Wire............................................................................... 111 3.3.5.8 Service Data Interface ............................................................................ 111 3.3.5.9 Power Supply Unit .................................................................................. 111 3.3.5.10 Centralized Function............................................................................... 111 3.3.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment ....................................................... 111 3.3.6.1 General ................................................................................................... 111 3.3.6.2 Multiplexer .............................................................................................. 111 3.3.6.3 Alarm Indications .................................................................................... 112

3.2

3.3

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 4 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

...3 Carrier Oscillators .......................................... 124 3..............................................2 Safety 124 3.....................1 General ..........3......... 123 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM ...............2....................................................... 126 3...........................................3........2....Section 6 ............................9 Power Supplies Requirements ...........................3.3 Digital PLC Equipment .........7................2 Alarm indications .2..............2......................1 General .......7.....................................2..3 Telecommunication Management System ................................................1 Control Desk ..................................2........3.............................10 Power Supplies Requirements .................................4 System Functions ... 126 3.........3.........2....2..................................................................................8..................................................1 Introduction ...............................................4....2 Carrier Frequency Allocation ......4.7 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant ......................................7........................ 129 3.............................. 124 3..................2 Functional Requirements .................................................... 128 3............6.....................1 Introduction ............ 130 3............5..........................3............ 116 3..... 128 3..4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture ....6.....2 Design Characteristics ...........................3 System Performance ...........4........... 124 3... 129 TELEPHONE SYSTEM ..................... 130 3.................................4 Management Functions ............... 125 3.........................2.................7..2.............. 128 3................................3............5....................................2........................... 114 3.5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment ..................................................................... 124 3............ 121 3...................................3.......................2........ 122 3........................................................................4.....................................................5............1 General .......................................4....... 117 3....4.................................................4................... 126 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT ................6..............................2........ 130 3................9 Alarms .. 114 3.................................4....5..................................5............................ 126 3..............4 User Interfaces ......................4 Interfaces ............6....................3..................................7.....4............................................................................ 116 3....5........6 Test Facilities ...................................................................................1 General ..............4........ 119 3..........6......1 General Requirements ......................3....4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces .....5..........3...............4.......................2 System Architecture and Design Concept .....3 Network Management Facilities ... 112 3..............7.........................4 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ........5................................1 General .......5......................5......4.......................... 117 3...................5 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope 3.........1 General .8.............................................4............3 Stands ........................................5............... 114 3.....8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters ..............5 3....................2 System Capacity................. 126 3............ 116 3................................................................... 117 3........2 System Performance .....................................................................7 User Interfaces .......................... 124 3..................... 125 3........................................ 129 3.................. 129 3.. 123 3....................... 124 3............................... 130 3.... 116 3...........5 Alarms indications .....................................4.................................2........2 Functional Requirements .......3......................................................................1 General .......................... 114 3.. 124 3. 132 Page 6B.7 Cross Connection Equipment ............................................................................... 126 3.......................................................5....1 Introduction .............................................. 125 3.........6................5..........3......3.........2 Chairs 123 3.............................5................5..............3............................................................................ 130 3........................................................8 Monitoring ................. 131 3........1 Introduction ........Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3.....5............ 119 3.........................6 Power Supplies Requirements ..................................2 Central Computer System ............................................................2..................................6.....2 Functional Requirements ..........................5 Service Telephone..............3......................... 119 3...5...........................................2...4.....................6............2 Functional requirements ....................4...................................................................... 115 3........2...............3 Software .........................3...... 115 3.........................3 System Performance ....7......10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels ..... 128 3...........1......4.........................3...3...........6......................3..............................3........................... 123 3...............................6 3.. 130 3.................................. 129 3.....................................................................1..................................................................................................4 Automatic Gain Control ................................ 124 3......................................................4...

........................5........................................................5.............................................6.............................................................7....................... 145 4................................7. 148 4......4 4.........................................9 Hardware ..............................3 Functional requirements .............................................................................................3....................... 136 3.................................3...6...8................................................7...................................................3 Burden ...................... 150 4.............5 Response time..................................................... 133 3. 137 3............................. 147 4........................3.................................................................... 136 3....... 146 4....................... 150 4...3........................................................................................................................3..4 Synchronisation ........................................................ 147 4............ 150 4..5...3..................................7........................................5........................................................................ 146 4....... 133 3...........................5 Switching Capacity .................5............................... 148 4............2 Overloads .....................8 Configuration and Maintenance ............ 145 4.........................................7........................7.....................7.........1 Configuration Tools .......................................7.5...............................3...3..............4 Pulse Counting ..................4 Control Security ... 148 4........................................1 Master Stations ........7 Analogue Outputs .... 150 4................................................ 137 3...........................8 Maintenance .........5............. 134 3........................................3......... 144 4........3..............Section 6 ..........4 Extension Facilities .............................................6 Transmission Performance ..5..... 139 4.............................. 144 4.7........................3 Configuration and Maintenance ...................................8................. 135 3........ 147 4..7...3.......................................... 148 4.......................................................7..................................5......................... 133 3......2 Switching Facilities .........................................................................................8....................1 General ...........1 General .........................3..................3....... 149 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS ..........................................3....................... 146 4...9 Telephone Handsets .3................................7............................................ 139 4.............. 148 4.......................5............2 Expansion and Upgrade Capability . 147 4..7.....3....... 138 4..............3.....................................................7....Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3.......................................5 Telephone Numbering Plan ...............3............3..............7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities .....1 General ............................................4 Output .......................6 Digital Outputs .3 System Facilities...................................................................7..... 147 4.....11 Voice Recording Equipment ..................5.................3 Communication Protocols .....................3.........................................................3........3................................. 139 DESIGN OBJECTIVES ..................................................................................................7....................................3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities .....................5 Hardware Requirements .. 149 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL ...3..10 Main Distribution Frame ...... 144 4...................8 Telephone System Management Console ...........................7.........6 Power supply ...............................................3......................................................... 136 3..5 Command Outputs ........3........................... 137 3.................................................................2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) ............5.....................5........................................2 4.............6 External Communications Interfaces.................................................3................................................................................................. 146 4.............3 Analogue Inputs......................................................... OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS .7 Power supplies ......................................................................... 137 3................................3............................3.......................6....... 132 3....................................... 132 3....................................................3... 134 3.............. 149 4................... 147 4..........6 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ............... 149 4............2 Database Management System .......................................7 Software ............6 Telephone Signalling .......7.......................................3.........................................................................3.......................... 150 4...................1 Initial Equipping of Outstations ...3 INTRODUCTION ................. 148 4..........5 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.........................3.......2 Digital Inputs ....................3..............1 General ................................................ 136 3..................3 SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment .................................................. 139 OUTSTATIONS . 135 3...3.......................3...................................................................3.......................1 4........2 Time Synchronisation ............ 139 4.... 145 4....

2... 158 5............3.............................................................................................................................3..................................................................................2...........2 UPS Configuration ................3 Performance .............................................................3 Battery cells and containers .........................................................................................................................6 Daily Service Tank............... 162 5.......... 160 5........................................................................................5...............................6.......................3..... 157 5............3.3....15 Starting System ..............2...............3.........3................................................ 162 5...............5........................3 Engine/Generator Controls ...1 General ...........................3.................. 160 5.......... 156 5..............................3 Overload ..... 157 5................5 Bulk Fuel Storage .......................................................3....4 Engine/Generator Instrumentation .. 153 5.....18 Silencers ............ 164 5..........5 Noise limits ....3......................................7 5......1 General .......................................... 165 5............................3...................................................2..........................2 Battery and DC Circuit .........................................2 Emergency Shut-down Relay ..................................6.................................................................................................... 152 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES ............ 152 5..2...............................................................3...............2....3...... 157 5..........................................................2 Main Supply Failure .......2 Modes of Operation ............................................................................. 153 5...........................3....2 Control interposing relays .............................................................. 152 5................. 161 5..17 Safety Guards ..........................................................3 Status indication repeat relays ....1..3 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B..4 Static Bypass ......................................................... 161 5.................... 153 5.....................6 RELAYS ........................................... 160 5.............................4 Distribution Board .................................................................................3.. 153 5.......................20.....2....1 Functional Requirements ..................... 162 5............2.........22 Stator ...........3...........2 Converter components ..............20 Engine/Generator Control Panel ..............6.....................1 5.....................4 Controls and Instrumentation ................... 158 DIESEL GENERATOR .. 160 5............................ 164 5...............19 Air Filters ...........................11 Set Mountings .........................................3........ 155 5..........................3.....5..........3...........................3 Inverter ...3............ 162 5............................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 4............................................... 151 SAS GATEWAYS .................3........Section 6 .......2........................................3................................. 159 5......................2 Design Requirements ........................... 164 5........... 153 5.20..14 Engine Protection ............. 160 5..3..................20.......5..................3......2........................................16 Cooling System ......2 GENERAL ................................................................ 153 5................................................................23 Rotor .....................................................................................3....................................................................2..................................................................................................................................................1 General Requirements ......................................2...............................................................................................................3..................................... 152 5.....................................3.......................................................................2.. 161 5............20.. 158 5................................................2...............................2......... 156 5...........3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions ...................8 Fuel boost Pump .........................1.................................................... 157 5.......... 163 5............1 Normal ..............................2......................................................................3..........................................................................2....... 161 5.................................................2................................... 152 5............................... 152 5............. 151 4........... 160 5........2.................................................................12 Crankshaft ........................7 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ................................................................1 Rectifier ..............9 Fuel Oil Piping .....................................................................................................................1 Enclosures .................2......4 Fuel .......................................................... 161 5................................. 151 4................. 150 4....... 160 5............................................................................... 153 5...............................3.......... 158 5..............21 Generator .......2.............................................................................................. 155 5...................................... POWER SUPPLIES ......................13 Governor ...........................2.3.................................................. 150 4......2..................... 163 5........2.....1 Alarms Annunciator ....................... 156 5......................................4 Static by-pass switch ....10 Engine Lubrication ................................3.................................................... 162 5...................3.....7 Fuel transfer Pump ......................................5 Construction Requirements ................................................... 163 5.............

172 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF ....... 166 5..4.....................................14........ 172 EQUIPMENT ROOM ....................................................................................................3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure....14............13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS ....10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA .........3.......................................................31.......4...........14...........................................1 6........................................................5 INTRODUCTION .......................... 176 6...........................................................................4 6...........................29 Parallel Running .......................................................................5........................24 Exciters .........14......... 175 6...........................1 Batteries ...............................3.........................................8 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant ......................................................................12 MEETING ROOM ........................2 Instruction Manuals ................................................................................. 170 6..................4.................. 174 6....................... 166 5................................................ 173 6....................2 Battery and Charger Equipment ..........................26 Voltage Regulation ....................2....................................................... 171 CONTROL ROOM .......5 LV Distribution Panels ...........................1.......... 167 5................................................................................................................................................ 175 6............................................................3......... 168 5................................................................................................................14...... 175 6..2 System Capacity and Performance .......14..........4.3 6.............1 Drawings ..........................2...................................................................2 Battery Chargers ........................... 168 5...............Section 6 .............2 Control Centre LV In-feeds ....................................................................3..............................2 6.................................. 175 6.................................... 166 5..................2...................................................................................... 167 5...................... 174 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM ...........................4........................4 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ............................................................ 174 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY.......................................................4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies ..................31........3...............................28 Alternative Generators ........................................... 175 6.. 167 5.. 168 5...................14.............4..................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 5................................... 167 5............27 Pulley Block .............................................................5 48V DC Distribution Board ......................................................2.......................4...30 Tools and Spare Parts ................4 Construction ............................................1 Functional Requirements ........... 169 5.............1.....................................................6 UPS Battery Room .......... 176 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B......................1 General ..........................................3...... 175 6..................................... 166 5.......1 General . 166 5...................... 167 5. 166 5..............................................................................................7 6........1 General Requirements ..................................4....3...........................1....................4......31 Documentation ............. 166 5......................................... 166 5... 165 5...... 171 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS ................3..........7 DC Supplies .................... 165 5................................ 174 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM ............6 6..................25 Ventilation .............................................................................. 176 6.................9 6....... 175 6...................4.......... 170 5......3.............2.......... 171 6..................32 Inspection and Testing .....................................................................................................................................14 POWER SUPPLIES ....................8 6........................................................................................................11 CONFERENCE ROOM ............................ CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS .......... 165 5..................... 173 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES ..........3 Control and Instrumentation ......................................3 Alarm Indications ..................................................................... 176 6...................3............ 174 6..3..................................................................................

.............................................1 GENERAL ...........4.................................. 178 7.....................................................................1......................3 7.....................2 System FAT .................................................................. 176 6. 190 8......................... 181 8..................8 Conduct of the Tests ........................5 Power Supplies ..............1 Master Stations ...................................................................................................3....................................... 183 8.3 General FAT Requirements .........1.................. 189 8.......1..............................11 Repeat Tests ......................................................................3..........................4 Testing Stages ......................Section 6 ........................................ 190 8.9 Failures ....... 193 8. 186 8....................... 193 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING.................. 176 6.............................................1......................1 SCADA/EMS Availability ............. 181 8.................................................................3 8.....................3......................................................... 179 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS.................... 181 8.................5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests . 194 8............ 182 8................................................ 176 6.............................4.................................... 177 7..... 189 8.4 Specific Test Requirements .................2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................1............................................3.9 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ....... 186 8.................................16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM .............. INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY ....................................2.....1 General SAT Requirements .4 8.............................1....................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 6........ 186 8.........4 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B...3.......................... 184 8......................................................................................................... 176 6.....................4................................................19 LIGHTING .10 Fault Categories ................................................2............... 184 8............ 183 8............................................................... 189 8................................. 184 8............................................................................................................. 183 8.....................................18 HVAC .................................... 179 7..2 Communication System Availability ...................................................14 Software Failure Reports ....2 8....................................................................................................................... 183 8............................ 179 VERIFICATION ............1.................................12 Fault Log .......20 MATERIALS ............................. 178 7......................... 177 6...................17 LAN ........1...................................................................1................................................................................................ 177 6..................................13 Hardware Failure Reports ...........2 Responsibilities ................. RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ...... 184 TYPE TESTS ........ 182 8................ 185 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS ...............................................................................................................21 MAINTAINABILITY ......................................................................................3............1.................................................................... 184 8........................................................3..............2 Outstations ......................................3 Outstation Availability ..........3 Energy Management Software ...................... 181 8......................................................................4.................................................................................................4..............................................................1 Approach to Testing .......1........................................................................................7 Contractor's Prior Tests ..............................................3...........................................................................4 Telecommunication ................... 183 8....................................................... 179 7............................................ 186 8..............................................................1..1.....1 7...............4........................................3................................................2..............................1.......3 Test Equipment and Facilities .......15 ACCESS CONTROL........ 178 7.........................................1 Subsystem FAT ........................................... 178 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS ......................................................6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets.........................................................................................

........... SPARES AND MAINTENANCE ............................1 General .4............ 202 CONSUMABLES ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Site Update Period .................. 201 9................ 204 9................... 200 9.... 198 NON-CONFORMANCE ......................................................................................................4..................................................................... 198 8............................................... 199 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE .......... 201 9..........10.....................5.......................Section 6 ...................... 199 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY .................3.................................. 204 9.................................6 9.............................5 Site Acceptance Tests .......... 197 8..............................................4........................................... 202 9........................ 196 8...................................................................... 203 9...........................5 Termination of the Agreement ......7 9........6 9..9 9. 204 9.....................................................4...................... 197 8..................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 8..............................................................5.......10 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ............. 197 8......................9..9.5.......................9.. 205 10.......................................................................9.....................................................4 Access ................ 199 9.............................10..........8 9..............................................................1 System Acceptance .........1 GENERAL ..5 GENERAL ............................................................................ 204 9...................................... 201 9........................................3 Digital multimeter ................. 199 SPARE PARTS ........................EMS ...........................5 Maintenance laptop computer .................................................................................................................6 Acceptance Tests ..........Telecommunications .......5...3 Quality Control ...5.1 Telephone Support ..1 SDH/PDH tester ..................................................................................2 Datacom tester .... 204 9....................... 196 8.........1 SCADA/EMS Database ..5 TESTS ON COMPLETION ........................................................................................... 199 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT ..... 195 8........3.................................4 9........................................................................................................ 202 9................2 Attendance . 203 9...2 Remote Access Support .......................................5...................10....... 195 8..........4 Maintenance Services .................... 195 8...............4. 198 8..............10............4........................................................................................................................................................... 201 9................. 200 9..........................................................4 Signal generator ...........2 Site Installation Tests ...............1 9.................................................. 206 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.........................................................................2 Point To Point Testing ............................5.......5......4......2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement ...................................................... 202 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS ........... 195 8.................................................................. 200 9...........10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ...................................... 201 9...................7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion ......................................................4.............................................3 Charges for the Maintenance Agreement ...................... 201 9......................................1 Scope of Agreements .......................................................................4.......................2 9....................................................4 System Site Acceptance Tests ..........................................5..................................... 206 10........3 9..............................................9......................................................4.......................5.................. 202 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS ..............4.................. 204 9.................5.....4 New Software Releases ......................................... 203 9...........................10....................................................................2 Partial & Operational Acceptance ....4.....5 Replacement Parts ...... TRAINING .....3 Fault Rectification .......................SCADA ................................................. 202 COMMISSIONING PERIODS .

....................................................... 209 10.................................... 209 10.............................5 System Administration Courses ............................................. 219 11....................... 220 11........ 216 11.4 TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES ...2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building .....................3......3............................................................................3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES ....................................................3 System Engineer's Manual ...........................11 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .........................1 General ........................................ 221 11.........................................................................4..................................... 219 11..................2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation ........................................... 216 11...............6..................1 Course Duration .................3...........................................................Section 6 .........................................................................6..................................... 225 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B........................ 224 SITE SURVEYS ..........................6..............................6............................................... 208 10.................................... DRAWINGS ................ 220 11.............................3 Test Reports .... 208 10.. 221 11................1 Standard Operating Software ......................6..................................................................... 221 11..........................................3......8 ‗AS BUILT‘ DOCUMENTATION .................... 221 11.............. 223 11.......................6 Equipment Manual........5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES ....4....................3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings .3..................................................4 Design Control Document ....................4.............................................. 218 11..............................3................3 Software Design Documentation ..............3...........2 CONTENT ...........6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................................1 Test Plan and Schedule ........................... 219 11.........5 Maintenance Manual ......3..............................................................................................................1 GENERAL ............................................ 213 11....... 210 10......................................... 13..........................................4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION ...............2 Test Procedures ..................................5........................................................................4 Programme of Work .....5...................................7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL .............. 214 11.................................1 System Manual ................................................4......... 222 11..............2 System Operation Courses .................................... 222 11.......8 Communication Documentation ..........................6...........................................................1 Overview Course ................6.... 213 11....... 212 11.......................................................................................................3.......................4 Hardware Manual ...............6.................................................................................................... 223 12...................... 221 11....... 214 11............................................... 220 11............................................................. 218 11......................................................................................................................... 222 11.............. 221 11........ 221 11.........5.....................................5 Monthly Progress Report .......... 217 11...............................2 Applications Software . 207 10..............................3.......6... DOCUMENTATION .....................................................6 COURSE ATTENDEES ............3 DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT ...4........................ 207 10...5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS ....................... 210 10........................................7 Programmer's Manual .............................................3............. 213 11........................... 209 10......... 220 11.....................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 10...................................................................................... 220 11......................3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses .....................................................1 Functional Design Specification ....2 Operators' Manual .................................................... 218 11......................................................3...4........................ 207 10.........4 EMS Applications Courses ...........................2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID ......

................2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ........ 237 16.................................. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY...............4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY .......................3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS ..... 236 15........................................12 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant ........................................... QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT .............4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM ................................3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ......1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS .................................. 237 16.................................................................................. 237 17. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS ...................... 227 14.......................................... 226 14........................................7 EMC STANDARDS ................ 225 13................................5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE ................. 234 14...........................................3 PROTECTION............... 237 16.......................10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ..............................1 GENERAL ....................................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 13. 225 13................................... 238 17....................................................................... 225 13....................Section 6 ......... 228 14...................................................................... METERING AND CONTROL ..................................................... 234 14..... 233 14.......................................6 LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS ............................................................. 236 16..... 238 17....... 227 14........................................................................................................... 234 14.........................................................................4 SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT .......... 225 13..............................................................................................8 EARTHING SYSTEMS .....................................2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE .2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS .7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS............................6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ..... 237 16...... 237 16....................2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS ..................................................................5 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES ............................................................................................................................1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227 14....................................................................9 INSPECTION AND TESTING................. 227 14.....2 GENERAL STANDARDS .... 237 16............................................................................. 237 16............................ ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .........................................1 GENERAL ........ 234 14.............................. 238 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B................. 236 15............................................ 234 15....................................5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED .1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS.......

.........7.................... 246 18......................1 Alternating Current (ac) ... 240 17...............................................................8 PLANNING .........................6 RELIABILITY.................7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .....................7........................................... DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ................. 248 18...7........3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) ..............................................8................................................................. 244 18.....................................13 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .......................11 CORRECTIVE ACTION ....................1 Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................................................................... 248 18...........1 Fuses and Links ............................................................. 241 18.............12 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT ............................ 240 17..... 239 17........................................................9..........................................................................7.................................8........................ 243 18....................3................................................. 245 18......................................................................................................... 239 17................ 248 18...6 Painting and Finishing ...............................................................................................................4 Plug-in Cards ............................................................................................................................... 243 18........................... 245 18..... 239 17.......................... 244 18.................................................................................8.................................................2 Direct Current (dc) .........8...........4..................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 17.................................................................................... 244 18..........Section 6 ................................... 238 17...................... 240 17.5 AUDITS ....... 243 18............. 248 18.............3 SUB-CONTRACTORS ........................... 249 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B................................5 Degrees of Protection ........3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels ........................................................................................ 242 18..9......................... 248 18.....8 CUBICLES...................................................8. 239 17. 245 18........................................................1 General ....................... STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY .................. 247 18........ 245 18.........................................9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES .......8......... 242 18....................... 245 18.......... 245 18.....10 TESTING .........................4 Equipment......................................................................................................................3 DESIGN.............................................2 SYSTEM OF UNITS ................................................................................................................................................9 REVIEWS ................................................... 247 18...............................................3 Indicating Lamps ......................................... 242 18............................................................................ 239 17....9................. 238 17......................................8.... RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS ..........................................................................4 Protection ...........................................................5 EQUIPMENT LIFE .................................2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers ............................ CABINETS.............................2 Cubicle Wiring ......................................................7.....3.....................................................................................8............................13 ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE ..................................9..............7......2 Indicating Instruments . Components and Terminal Identification ........ 242 18...............................6 QUALITY RECORDS........4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ........4......................... 246 18...2 Connectors .................................................. 247 18..1 GENERAL .. 248 18.....................1 Keys and Push Buttons .......................................................7 ORGANIZATION...4 QUALITY PLAN ........

.............................................3................ 255 19...3 Program and Data Security .........5.............3 Cable Screens and Armouring ..................... CIVIL WORKS ..........................11. 256 19........................... 249 18............................................................. 253 19........................... Termination and Identification ................................................................ Verification and Testing .................................4 Software Validation...................1 General ....... 254 19........................... 252 19.............................................................................................1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring .........................................................................4 Text Editor .............. 251 18.....2 Software Life Cycle............................................ 252 19...........................5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities .........6................. 261 20..................7.......... 253 19.....4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE ...3 Cable Laying...........................2 Error Detection and Reporting ........................... 257 19........................................................................ 260 19......... 254 19...............Section 6 .5.........5 Functional Design Specification ............................................................1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS....................6.............. 253 19......................1 GENERAL ..........4 Telemetry Communications Statistics ..............1 General ...... 253 19.10........... 254 19...........................................................................4 Documentation . 253 19.................................................................................... 260 20.......................................4..........5.................. 253 19.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 18.........................................6 Detailed Design .....................................10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES ............................2 Cable Types ..........................3.....................4....11.............................................................5................................. 250 18....... 256 19....................1 New Software ........................................................7......................................8 LICENCES ........................... 251 18...3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS ..............................................................2 Safety Earthing .....5......................... 253 19..........................................6................ 257 19.............................................. 260 19.11...................... 257 19.......6 OPERATING SYSTEMS ....... 254 19....................... 249 18...............................2 Security ...........3..............5...............................................................................................4................... 255 19...................... 253 19.3 Backup Copies of Software ..................5........ 256 19...4................................................................................................. 249 18.......5...... SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................1 Programming Languages ................................................14 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .............10......6................................................................................................................................................................................... 255 19............................................................................................................. 254 19...........................5 Software Maintenance .........5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE ... 251 18.................. 252 19............................6.............4 Right To Modify .......1 Patent Rights .....6............7.............................. 255 19........................ 251 19.....................................................7 PATENT AND COPYRIGHT .........................2 Existing Software .2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights ................... 254 19.............. 254 19............6............................................... 254 19.................. 256 19....................3 System Utilities .............................................1 General ..3 Configuration Data.5 Change and Issue Control .................................................. 261 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B..............................................2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ........3 Online Performance Measurement .......................6......................................................................................................................................................................... 260 19..6....2 Database Structure..................... 259 19.................... 253 19...10......................4....................6................................................................5.............7...........................................................................3 System Development Methodology........................... 259 19..11 EARTHING ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5..............5.........................................1 General ..................................................................

4....6.............. 287 20.............15 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ............. dismantling steel structures ......................................................3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ....................2...............11 Transportation ........ 271 20..2................1.....3 Earth retaining structures .............2. Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice 261 20.......................... 269 20.......4......................... 273 20.......2...............3 Test Certificates and Samples ...........15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing .... 289 20.......................... 266 20.................................................................................5............................................................................................................................................3 Sanitary Fittings ....6.........................................6..........................3.........6...............................9 Mixing ................ 271 20........4..................2..4......................2 Concrete Beds and Casings ........6............... 280 20....3..............2 Explosives .21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground .................................................2.............16 Curing ......6..................................... 271 20.........2.4 Anti Termite soil treatment ........4......... 289 20.......................6 Concrete Work.......4......6......... 262 20....................................... 274 20........2 Removing existing equipment...............................5 Land escaping & tree planting ...........................................6.......22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant .4. 271 20....2......2 Water Pipes ......... 272 20.7 Plant ..........6. 266 20.............................................6............ 271 20....................................................1 Site Survey ............................2.......................................4...................................................................... 274 20.....................................2.....4.....4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM .......6.....4...........2...................6 Admixtures ....................2................3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures .... .....4.2 PRELIMINARY WORKS ............................2...............................................................1 Drain Pipes .........................................2 Materials ......................2............ 268 20.................................. 288 20............6...................2.................................2..........2..................... Foundations & Piling Work ................ 266 20......4........................2............... 280 20.............................................................................................. 263 20.....................................................4.......3................2...................................... 266 20.........10 Workability .........................2..1 Cutting and filling earth ...............................4 Waste Water Sewerage System ...3.................................................19 Reinforcement .1 Civil Engineering................................ 288 20.................................................... 289 20................. 287 20.............................................1 Copper ......... 266 20.................. 266 20............Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20............................................. 272 20....... 263 20......................6.5 Water .........6................................................2..............4 Site formation and up keeping.........8 Concrete Strength Requirements .....................2................ 281 20..................2..2 Materials......................1 Water supply system .........2...4.......................................6 Surface chipping .................................................23 Grout under Base Plates ............................. 287 20..............3............4........................2.... 288 20........................ 288 20.Section 6 .. 288 20.......................................1 Lightning Protection for Buildings .6............6..................................1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts ............................................. 273 20......................................... 287 20..........13 Construction Joints ...................................4 Aggregates .... 277 20...2..........................2................4 Sewerage Treatment Plant ....2...........6......6........20 Foundation Bolts....... 269 20................. 263 20.3............2..................................... 267 20.................... 265 20............................4............................................................................. 263 20.............3 Septic Tank & soakage pit ...............2.....18 Formwork ...............................................................................2........... 280 20................................................................................2... 274 20...................2.........................2...................... 279 20.................................................... 263 20............5....................6..................12 Compaction .............................3 Cable Pits ...2................5 Surface water drainage system ....................... 280 20.... 266 20.......................................17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather .................................................2........................................................................2.............................4...... 263 20..................2..............6.2.......1 Concrete Work.................. 288 20............................................................................................... 274 20.2 Manholes ...........................3 Site Clearance .............................2 Soil Investigations..........................................................................2............................. 267 20.........5 Cable Trenches & Ducts .......2.............5..........................6..............2..............6...........................................6...1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs .......24 Foundations and Piling Work ......................................................................................................14 Construction Bays ...............4. 266 20.....................4................6.................. 262 20........................ 291 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B...... 263 20....2...............

. 303 20.............1 Structures for approach roads.................................. 297 20......................................5............................................................................. 296 20........7 MISCELLANEOUS WORK ...................14 Timber .............................................................. 292 20........8 Locking System .......................11 Aluminium Patent Glazing ..............................5... 298 20.......................................2 Sub-Base .................... 298 20.5.................................... 301 20....................................1 Preparation of Formation . 292 20.........................8......8................... 299 20..........................2 Access road and structures ...............................................18...........6 Door Closures ................................................. 299 20.......................2 Workmanship..............................8......... 295 20.........................................16 Trenches ............................................5......8.. 292 20........ 297 20..........................................................5................................................................. 297 20.............................. 291 20...............1 Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheet Roofing ........................................8.......................................... 297 20.....14..................................................................................1 Wall and ceiling finishes ...............................................................................................................................14...... 293 20.............................................2................................................................... 299 20.................................................................................................................9 FINISHES AND FITTINGS ....................................18 Floor Finishes ..4 Brick work ............................................................8......................................................................................2 Workmanship.........................5 Pin Tumbler Cylinders ......................................12 Other Materials .....3 Timber Doors and windows ......................8........................ 299 20.......................14....................................... 294 20....................................................19 Roof and ceiling .................Section 6 .......................................................................8.........................................14...............14......7 Door Fittings ................8......................8.................................8.............. 295 20........6 FENCE AND GATE .......................8 Cement..........................................16 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant ..5...................................... ...........3..................................17..........................6........................5...........8..8........................ 300 20.................5 Lime ............................................................... 296 20...................................................................................................19..........1 Generally ..............................15 Glazing .............. 297 20.................................................................1 Screeded Beds .........................................4 Bituminous Surface ......2 Gypsum board Ceiling .9..............2 Galvanized Barbed wire fence & Gate ....................................................................17 Damp Proof Course (DPC) ......2 Fire criteria .........................................1.............................................................2...................................................2...........5.............. 294 20..................14..1 Indoor cable trenches .4................8.............................................. 292 20...........Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20... 303 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B..............................................General .......1 General ...9.......................1 Damp-Proof Membrane ..8... 295 20...... 297 20......8....5 Roadsides ... 295 20................................... 293 20.............. 292 20..............19..............13 Fire Resisting Steel Doors ............................. 303 20............ 299 20............................ 292 20.......16....3 Prime Coat ..........9 Doors and Windows ....................... 303 20....14.......... 293 20............................................8....10 Aluminium Windows and Doors ................................................................................................................5.........3 Approach road ...............................4......... 298 20.....................................................5..14...........1 20....................1..8.......................................... 299 20................................. 296 20............. 298 20.............................3 Super structure (Structural frame & walls) ........2....8.....2 Road carriage way........ 291 20...............16......................................................................8.......... 293 b) Gates .................8.......................................9.................... 296 20...8...................8......7 Building in Frames ....................................... 292 20.6.2 General .................1 Chain link fence and Gate ..........2 Checker Plate ......... 299 20...........8...........8 CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS .................... 298 20.....8.................2 Raised Modular Floors .8.....................................................................5...........................................8............3........... 291 Gradient .............. 292 20...... 296 20.......2............................ Brick work and Plaster .8.......................8............ 292 20... 294 20.8...................8......................................................................................................................... 297 20.............5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS ...................8.4 Builder‘s Ironmongery ........... 301 20...6 Lintels .........................................................1 General ........................ 291 20.............................5........................................................................................... 298 20.......1 Preservative ..............................8.........................................................8........................... 303 20................................18..................................................

.........9........................Section 6 ................................. 305 20.........9..7 Physical Properties ........... 306 20........................................4 Iron and Steel works (Except Structural Steelworks) ... 309 20................................ 319 20..3....... 306 20...........10......10...9...........9..................4 Waterproofing of water retaining Structures .5 Certificate Warranty .........................................................9 Workmanship.........................................9.............................................................................3 Materials ....6..6 Copper Surfaces...........6................5.........2 Painting .....8 Dimensions and Tolerances .............. 318 20..... 306 20.......6................................................. 313 20............................................. 312 20.6....... 308 20..........................9................................................3.........................10................2.............................. 312 20.........9.... 319 20............................................10.....................9............5 Material Manufacture ...................10.............9........14 PVC Adhesion Test..2 Description of work ........................1 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SERVICES.............6........ ...........3 Terminology ....................1............................................................ 323 21..............15 Weld Shear Strength of Fabric: ..9..................................................... 312 20.........................9......2..................................9.......4.......................10................................................ 306 20.................................4................ 307 20.......................5 Bitumastic Painted Surfaces and Coated Pipes ................4 Classification ...........................1 Site office .........................................................................................10...................................9......................................10.......6.....................................................2 Paints and Other Materials ....................3...............................5............................................................ 319 20.................................. 318 20......... 314 20...................1 General . 312 20......................................... 308 20.......................................................... 312 20...9...6................... 309 20....9...........6..... 305 20............ 308 20. 313 20............. 319 20......................................1....................6...............10.........................................................................................2.....................................................10.............................. 306 20...............4...............................3.................................10............................................................................2...6.................................................1 Painting on Metal Surfaces .........................4......3 Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs & Masonry Walls in Toilet Areas ............................10....................... 315 20................................... 304 20......................................................................................... 321 20..6.......11 LABELLING ...............................................6 Mechanical Properties ...........9..........3...........9.......................9...............5.....................5 Guard House .6.......4 Execution ... 323 21..............4......4 Execution ...............................13 PVC Coating Thickness: .............3 Woodwork ..............................6 Gabion Wall .....2 Description of Work .......................................................5 Waterproofing of Concrete Roofs ..........................9...10.............10........................................................................................................................................................................5......................................................... 314 20...10.................................................................................................9.............. 308 20..............................................6 Internal Finishes .....3 Materials ..........................................6. 307 20..............................1 General ..................2 Referenced Documents ................................16 Inspection .............10...................................................................... BUILDING SERVICES...............2 Temporary Works ..........................4 Hand railing . 307 20.......................................................................... 323 21............11 Number of Tests ................6..........1...9............ 315 20...................................................................................... 321 20....................6.... 305 20............................................. 304 20..............................12 Test Methods .............................. 307 20........10......4 Certificate Warranty ....... 323 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.................. 322 21.............9........2...1 General .......1 Contractors responsibilities ..................................................10 OTHER STRUCTURES ...3 Materials ............................. 313 20..3 House for Diesel Generator ..................17 Certification ............... 306 20...............................................................................6...1...............................9..10 Sampling .9........................2...........10.......................................... 323 21.... 307 20...... 307 20..... 312 20................... 316 20..........................3 Materials ......................................9............................ 306 20......5 Certificate Warranty ........................10............. 306 20......Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20......... 319 20..................10............................................................................................................10...................2 Project requirement ............. 308 20..1 General ......................10........................................................................2 Description of work ....................................6....17 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ........................9........ 308 20.............10.......................3 Design and liaison of work .............4 Car parking ...9........................1............... 318 20....................................................

2................7 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets .. 332 21........ 326 21................................................3...............................3..2.....................15 Clocks ........................3........4 Switches and Push buttons ......3.... 323 21.................................................4...........................4....................................................5 Bifurcated fans .....2..........1 Portable wall mounted extinguishers ....3..............1 Fire Alarms ...........3..................1............... 334 21.......................... 327 21.....................................................2.......................... 325 21.......... 338 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B........................9 Visible Alarms .......5.......................................................1.......... 326 21.............3........................................................2.....................................................1........ 334 21....10 Interior Installations .....5........ 338 21.4 Mechanical Ventilation ........................................... 325 21...............14 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Sockets Outlets ...3....................................5......................3..................3................................................ 335 21........................................................4 Vibration ...............................................2 Contractors Responsibilities .12 Earthing and Bonding ................. 324 21.......................................4.......................4......................................................8 Conduit and Fittings.......................... 337 21................................................ 327 21...2 Mobile trolley extinguishers .................3 Thermal Insulation ...................9 Poles .................................3 Contactors ..................... 325 21.................. 336 21..................................................................... 324 21.................................................. 328 21.......... 331 21.......................................... 338 21.................3.....4..............3........................................................................................................2...2 Split System Air Conditioning Units . 329 21..................1....3 Fire Protection Coating for Cables .............................................................................................11 Fire Protection Equipment .....2..................................13 Emergency Lighting .12 Signs ..................................11.............................. 331 21.......5 Supplying and installation of service ...................18 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ............................................1.............................................................1...1..................................1......................3..................................... 329 21......................................3...................................................11 Exterior Installation ........6 Lighting Fittings ..........................1 AC Distribution boards ................................................7 Automatic Fire Detectors .....2...............................................5....1 General ......3.....................2 Internal design conditions ...................................7 Ceiling fans .........1. 324 21... 323 21......................................2 FIRE PROTECTION AND DETECTION FACILITIES ............4 Fire Detection and Fire Alarm System .............................................................4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ......2... 328 21................................................................................. 333 21.......2.........3 Project Requirement ................3...................................3........1........................................................................ 330 21................................................................ 326 21..........3....6 Design Calculations .....................................3...1......5 Fire Alarm Panel ...... 323 21..................................................1...... 338 21.3............................... 329 21...............................4...........................6.......... 328 21....................................4. 335 21....................6 Axial flow fans ..........Section 6 ............................3...............................................1..................2 Schedule of Design Requirements .................... 332 21........................3.........................................10 Cabling ....3...5 Control Equipment ........................................... 329 21......... 324 21..............................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 21.........................................1 Coding System ..............3.1 External design conditions ...................3........................6 Manual Fire Alarm Stations ................3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SUPPLY WORK ............................ 335 21........... 324 21...............................................8 Audible Alarms ....................................................................................... 330 21... 329 21.7 Electrical Connections ..2... 327 21.................3 Internal Sound Levels ...........................................................................2 Cables .....3...............................16 Maintenance ...................................... 324 21...........4 Supplying and installation of services ....................................1 Manufacturers .........4.................3...... 325 21................................... 325 21.....11............................ 331 21.......................1.................3...........2.................1................... 330 21............. 326 21.......................4...................................................................................................................................................................8 Maintenance ........... 330 21........................ 334 21.................................................2 Bulk Heads for Cables and Pipes .................1................................................................... 335 21.......................4 Design and liaison of work ...............5 Standards ..................... 324 21... 330 21....................................................................................... 336 21............................2............6 Electrical Control ....1 Lamps 335 21.......2................................1................ 330 21..........................................3..................................................4.....................1 General ....................... 337 21............................. 326 21....1.......................

...6........................................4................................................4 Linked Audio Processor ....... 339 Assistance Alarms ..................................................................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 21......................................................2....... 342 21................................................................................... 340 Intruder Alarm System .................4.......5...........7 21.......................................8 CCTV System ......6 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM ..............................6 Entertainment Rack . 340 21....................... 344 21..........................................................6.......... 341 21....................................6 21... 350 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B... 340 Induction Loop Systems ..........................3 21.......5.............. 340 21.....6.....5..........19 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .................................. 346 21...................... 341 21.......5...........................................................1 General .... 341 21........ OTHER SERVICES ..................2 21............... 347 21....7 Pendant Full Range Speakers .................................................. 342 21. 348 22.......................................................... 341 21........................................................................3 Distributed Amplifier Unit (DAU) ..................................................................4.......................................................................................................................... 340 21..........................................................................................................................................1 Main Project Office for Employer‘s Representatives .................................5 Car Control ..........6........................................... 339 Refuge Alarms ...................5 LIFT .4.............................2 System Description................................... 340 Window Actuator Control Panel .........................................2 EMPLOYER‘S REPRESENTATIVE‘S OFFICE ...............................6.............6.......5 Man Machine Interface Unit (MMI) .............................................................................................................1 Capacity .........................................2 Erection ............ 342 21............................................. 350 22......4.... 345 21.....................................4...................... 339 Panic Alarms ...............................1 TRANSPORT .....3 Guarantee and Maintenance ........................ 350 22..................................................5 21.....5.......................................4....................Section 6 ...............................................................4 Drawings ...........................................6........................... 350 22................4 21................

MB. GB) Bit Error Rate Bits (kb. Gb) Cabinet Appointed Procurement Committee Closed Circuit Television Conférence Européen de Poste et Télécommunication Communication Functional Design Specification Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check Cathode Ray Tube Current Transformer Direct Current Dynamic Data Exchange Digital Light Processing Dots Per Inch Digital Power Line Carrier Digital Video Interface Electrically Alterable Programmable Read Only Memory European Broadcasting Union Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Earth Fault Earth Fault Indicator Extra Low Voltage Electro Magnetic Compatibility Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.20 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AC or ac ACE AGC ASCII AVR B BER b CAPC CCTV CEPT CFDS CPU CRC CRT CT DC or dc DDE DLP DPI DPLC DVI EAPROM EBU EEPROM E/F EFI ELV EMC Alternating Current Area Control Error Automatic Generation Control American Standard Code for Interchange of Information Automatic Voltage Regulator Bytes (kB. Mb.Section 6 .

Section 6 . Ventilation And Air Conditioning Internal Acceptance Tests Inter Control Centre Protocol Identification Intelligent Electronic Device International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Institute of Engineering and Technology Variation on MODBUS Input/Output International Standardisation Organisation International Telecommunication Union Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Meter Bus Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.21 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications EMI EMS ESD FAT FDS FEP GPS GSM GUI HMI HD HFDS HIS HRC HVAC IAT ICCP ID IED IEC IEEE IET JBUS I/O ISO ITU LAN LCD LED LV MBUS Electro Magnetic Interference Energy Management System Electrostatic Discharge Factory Acceptance Tests Functional Design Specification Front End Processor Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile (communication) Graphic User Interface Human Machine Interface High Definition Functional Hardware Design Specification Historic Information System High Rupturing Capacity Heating.

Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications MCB MDB MDI MTBF MTTR MV NERC NCC O/C ODBC OPGW PCB PDH PLC PMC PMR PSU PTW PVC Q QA QAR QC QMS RAL RAM RFI RTU SAT SCADA SDH Miniature Circuit Breakers Main Distribution Panel Maximum Demand Indicator Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Medium Voltage National Electric Regulatory Committee National Control Centre Over Current Open Data Base Connectivity OPtical Ground Wire Printed Circuit Board Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Power Line Carrier Protection Monitoring Computer Post Mortem Revision Power Supply Unit Permit To Work Poli Vinyl Chloride Reactive Power Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Representative Quality Control Quality Management System Reichs-Ausschuss für Lieferbedingungen (German Colour Standards) Random Access Memory Radio Frequency Interference Remote Terminal Unit Site Acceptance Tests Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.22 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

The SI units and recommendations are defined in ISO 1000. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.23 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .metric system) but are not listed here.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications SDM SFDS SIP SOE SQL SQP STT SXGA+ TASE.2 TCP/IP U/G UI UPS UTC VGA VDU VRLA VT WAN XLPE 4GL Software Development Methodology Software Functional Design Specification SCADA Interface Panel Sequence Of Events Structured Query Language Software Quality Plan Sanction To Test Super Extended Graphics Adapter + Telecontrol Application Service Element 2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Under Ground User Interface Uninterruptible Power Supplies Universal Time Coordinate Video Graphics Adaptor Visual Display Unit Valve Regulated Lead Acid Voltage Transformer Wide Area Network Cross Linked PolyEthylene Forth Generation Language Other abbreviations used in this document generally conform with the System International (SI .

Applications. spare parts. 5. Outstation Data Acquisition Servers (Fault tolerant duplicated system) Duplicated ICCP link Interfaces to other DCCs Duplicated Operational LAN Printers. manufacture. 1. INTRODUCTION The principle objectives of this contract are to provide the Employer with a National System Control Centre (NSCC) for managing the electricity transmission/generation system in Sri Lanka.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. and inspection and testing. 4. 1 Maintenance. The works required to achieve these objectives shall include establishing the NSCC in a building also to be provided under this Contract. The Bidder shall also complete the detailed Price Schedules that will determine the quantities of equipment that will be required to meet the full requirements of the project. This functionality and performance specification defines an outline design and user requirements in terms of five major elements that will deliver the contract objectives. drawings and documentation. 1 Remote) Operator Training Simulator hardware (Including Trainee and Trainer Workstations) Rear projection video wall displays to be located in the NSCC control room. In particular the existing System Control facilities must remain in operation until such time as they are replaced by the new facilities after they have been tested and accepted. special tools and test equipment. The works for the new SCADA systems include but shall not be limited to the design. SCADA. The five main elements of the outline design comprise 1. Additionally the Bidder is required to complete a set of Technical Schedules that state the standards. The installation of all equipment and interfacing to existing equipment shall be organised and executed such that the least disruption is caused to existing plant and equipment. installation and setting to work of following principal subsystems/facilities and services: A SCADA Master Station Hardware and System Software a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) SCADA Hardware (Fault tolerant redundant Master Station Computer System with servers for. characteristics and types of equipment that the Contractor guarantees to supply. 3. 1 NSCC Manager. completing plant interface works in substations and power plants throughout the country. SCADA/EMS Master Station – specified in Chapter 2 Telecommunications Infrastructure – specified in Chapter 3 Outstation and Substation Works Adaptation Works – specified in Chapter 4 Uninterruptible Power Supply System specified in Chapter 5 NSCC Building – specified in Chapter 6 In addition there are further requirements relating to the delivery of the works including requirements covering general engineering standards and environmental conditions. Master Clock System Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. training. 2.24 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . The following Chapters specify the overall scope of work for each of the foregoing sections of work and must be read in conjunction with the General and Particular Technical Specifications that form part of this Bid Document. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance.1 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION The Contractor shall supply a new SCADA/EMS master station and supporting equipment and services for the new Control Centre being established in Sri Jayewardenepura in the outskirts of Colombo. Work requiring access to sites and plant requiring Permits to Work (PTW) or access permission shall be coordinated with the Employer. and establishing a country wide telecommunications network linking each substation and power plant to the control centre. Historical Information) Operating Systems and Antivirus software for all servers and workstations Workstations (3 Operator.

This works shall establish interface points.25 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Population and Testing Services and other contractual requirements r) s) t) u) v) w) x) Training Inspection and tests Documentation Specialised tools and test equipment Spares Consumables Post Warranty Maintenance Support The existing System Control Centre (SCC) uses an ABB Micro SCADA system which is at present able to communicate with the existing RTUs and Substation Automation System Gateways. The Contractor shall plan the implementation work such that all monitoring facilities currently available in the existing SCC continue to function until the new facilities are put into service. The optical fibres are available from OPGW on the 220kV and 132 kV overhead lines and it is expected that SDH nodes will mainly be located in the 220kV and 132 kV stations. The works shall include but are not limited to: a) A full survey of all proposed sites for communications equipment shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the work required in substations. generating stations. all multiplexing and supporting equipment to provide a fully integrated telecommunication network for the transmission of SCADA telemetry. location of equipments. There shall also be summary indication and alarm outputs to the SCADA system. the existing telecommunication facilities are to be upgraded and expanded.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE In order to accommodate the additional telecommunication facilities required for the new NSCC SCADA system. protection signalling. Implementation of a new telecommunication management system to monitor and supervise the SDH network as well as alarm monitoring of other telecommunication equipment. as well as supporting the growing telecommunication services required for the expansion of the power network to be built during the planned expansion projects. To achieve this may include the provision of dual porting at outstations or via a data connection between the existing master station and the new one.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications B SCADA/EMS Master Station Applications k) l) SCADA Software Data Archiving and Report Generation Software m) Network Analysis Applications n) o) p) q) C Energy Management Applications Remote Access (ICCP) Software Operator training simulator software Database and Display Configuration. data and speech.Section 6 . b) Design and implementation of a resilient. The design shall accommodate the changing network configuration anticipated during the course of the Contract and the Contractor should expect to reconfigure the SDH network a number of times during the course of the Contract. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB. condition and operability of existing equipment associated with the works and availability of power supplies. c) d) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Control Centre and any intermediary locations. Installing and interfacing. 1. high bandwidth. cable routes. digital telecommunication fibre optic network backbone based on SDH technology.

Additionally.3 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS The Contractor shall supply and install new Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) to enable control and monitoring of the (400kV in the future).101 protocol. Where additional signals are required the additional interfacing devices and cables shall be provided under this Contract. 220kV. The works shall include but not be limited to: a) A full survey of all 220kV. Telephone exchanges for the new telephone network. f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) 1. Special tools and test equipment. Stations equipped with ABB INDACTIC 33 outstations (there are 18 of these) shall be equipped with replacement RTUs and the existing RTUs removed from the site and delivered to the Employer‘s Stores in Colombo.104 protocol. PMC(Protection Monitoring Computer) Interface and Substation Automation Systems with Gateways . The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links to the new NSCC with the respective outstations and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database. There are 9 outstations that are equipped with ABB RTU 560 devices. into the new system.Section 6 . transducers and cabling required for the full monitoring and control requirements at these sites will be carried out by the Employer. Monitoring signals at present used by the existing SCC are wired to Marshalling Cubicles adjacent to the RTUs along with the required interposing relays and mA transducers. location of equipment. etc. interposing relays.101 protocol. New digital power line carrier (DPLC) links for 132 kV substations and their integration with other communications systems and equipment. The installation of the additional RTU modules. Documentation. cable routes. Post warranty maintenance support. The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links with these outstations via their respective Gateways and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications e) The Contractor shall plan the work so that the initial SDH network configuration is in place ahead of the requirement to establish links between the remote sites and the NSCC. the Contractor shall integrate existing RTUs. The Contractor may at his option adapt the devices to use the IEC 60870 – 5 .. The manufacturer and model of each is indicated in the Table 1. relays Page 6B. For example they do not include controls. Implementation of new digital teleprotection signalling equipment for electrical protection. Consequently the scope of work shall include the modifications necessary to invoke the additional signals required for the new NSCC. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 – 5 . b) There are 27 Outstations Substation Automation Systems with which communication with the new NSCC will be via a Gateway. This works shall establish interface points. Inspection and tests. Consumables. Spares.26 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope c) d) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant . The works shall include adaptation works at some substations to provide monitoring and control facilities not yet available. Where the survey establishes that the existing cabling. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 – 5 . 132 kV substations and all generation stations shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the substation works. At present these Outstations communicate with the existing SCADA Master Station but the data subset is not as comprehensive as that required for the new NSCC. 132kV generating and transmission substations including the 33kV sections of those stations. Training.

There are 7 IPP stations the data for which will be available at marshalling points within the substation to which the generation is injected. Details of the operating settings for the protocol at the respective outstation will be made available to the Contractor early in the Contract. For Stations that will be implemented under other projects by 2012 the Contractor shall establish the communication links between the new outstation and the new NSCC. In the locations where Marshalling Cubicles are already installed the Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of any additional signals that are required. SDH. Alternatively a link between the existing and new SCADA Master Stations shall be provided. age or capacity the Contractor shall provide secure 48Vdc Charger and Battery system to support the SCADA and Communication facilities being implemented as well as those that may exist (e. They shall be connected to the new NSCC Master Station via the communication links established under this Contract.27 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.101 or 104.Section 6 . The existing RTUs and SASs utilise the 1EC 60870–5-101 protocol. PLC). e) In stations with no existing outstation equipment (there are 17 of these) a new RTU shall be provided and a new Marshalling Cubicle (or SCADA Interface Panel) except in cases where there is an existing Marshalling Cubicle.g. it shall only be necessary to connect the new Outstation device and carry out the point to point testing to put these Outstations into service f) g) h) i) j) k) There are 4 generating stations that shall be equipped for operating with AGC on a total of 10 generators Set Point displays are to be provided at defined stations to facilitate the despatch of MW and MVAr values. Duplicated communication ports may be provided to permit communication with the existing Control Centre and the new NSCC such that parallel running is possible during the transition of control from the present SCADA master to the new NSCC SCADA master station. Where no signals or Marshalling are provided the Contractor shall provide all the cabling. Following provision of a new SDH node at the substation and identification of the new substation in the SCADA/EMS database. l) m) Training n) o) p) q) r) Inspection and tests Documentation Post Warranty Support Specialised tools and equipment Spares The details of RTUs and SASs that are already installed in transmission substations and generation stations are contained in Table 1. These signals shall be connected to the new RTU in the respective location with the exception of Heladhanavi whose data will be accommodated at the Puttlam SAS. For those stations to be implemented between 2012 and 2016 (SP11-SP20) the Contractor shall ensure that all necessary equipment. In locations where no secure 48Vdc or 110Vdc supply exists or the existing equipment is unsuitable because of condition. interfaces and capacity is available at the Master Station and within the Telecommunication System to support these new stations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications and transducers are not in good condition or are otherwise unsuitable the replacement shall be part of this Contract. Where appropriate these RTUs may be of a distributed design. Where +/-5mA transducers are used these shall be changed for 4-20mA type. The communication protocol shall be IEC 60870 – 5 . interposing relays and transducers that are required.

IPP Barge Power Colombo .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Table 1.28 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .IPP Data Points 468 538 553 612 975 91 126 476 543 340 398 530 533 353 737 457 470 488 474 404 403 511 446 157 593 442 262 581 451 393 290 96 370 296 266 176 15299 260 260 520 232 384 90 Data at SIP in Matara GSS Data at SIP in Kelaniya GSS Data at SIP in Kelanitissa GIS DCC Colombo Project DCC Colombo Project Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU One of each type supplied under this contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Outstation List No. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 NSCC Station Name Ampara GSS Anuradhapura New GSS Anuradhapura Old GSS Balangoda GSS Biyagama GSS Bowatenna PS Canyon PS Embilipitiya GSS Habarana GSS Hambantota GSS Kelanitissa PS (Export) 33kV Kelaniya GSS Kiribathkumbura GSS Kosgama GSS Kothmale PS Kotudoga – 132kV GSS Kurunegala GSS Laxapana PS (Old) Matara GSS Nuwara Eliya GSS Panadura GSS Pannipitiya GSS 132 kV Polpitiya PS GSS Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana GSS Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskanda GSS Sapugaskanda PS Seethawaka GSS Trincomalee GSS Ukuwela Valachcheni GSS Veyangoda 132 kV Victoria PS NSCC Building Total Data Points (New RTUs) IC1 IC2 S1 S2 S3 Fort (Substation F) Kolupittiya (Substation E) Total Data Points (DCC) ACE Power Matara .Section 6 .IPP Asia Power PS (KHD) .

IPP Total Data Points (IPP) Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Total Data Points (RTU 560) Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (Sub A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (Sub I) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal Power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Data Points 232 337 336 118 1729 533 387 122 429 249 338 514 320 425 3317 202 332 498 416 329 463 302 361 1024 586 147 455 330 318 363 271 414 377 385 376 356 103 292 595 468 Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Data at SIP Chunnakam GSS Data at SIP in Embilipitiya GSS Data at SIP in Puttlam GSS Data at SIP in Sapugaskanda GSS Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 .IPP Lakdhanavi PS .TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SCS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.IPP Heladhanavi PS .29 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .IPP Embilipitiya ACE Power PS .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications No. S4 S5 S6 S7 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 Station Name Chunnakam PS .Section 6 .

c.30 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 .4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM An Uninterruptible Power Supply System is to be installed at the new NSCC building to provide secure electrical supplies to the Control Centre complex. They will also be used to test spares and replacement modules. UPS.2016 Under station project 2012 . temperature and humidity. HVAC. 1.2016 The Scope of Work shall include the provision of 1 of each type of RTU supplied under the Contract to be installed in the NSCC building.2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 . diesel generator. intruder detection etc..2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 . Computer Interface to VATech Stat. A diesel generator capable of supply the complete NSCC building demand including the UPS when charging its batteries Automatic change over panel and distribution boards configured to provide segregation of duplicated or alternative supplies and allow maintenance without disruption to essential supplies A duplicated 48V charger/battery system for the supply to telecommunication equipment and RTUs with a standby capacity of 10 hours. V1 V2 Station Name Kukule PS Matugama GSS Total Data Points (SAS Gateway) Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala Weligama GSS Total Data Points (Under Station Projects) Grand Total Data Points 263 548 10574 339 639 362 300 369 248 319 209 300 184 300 300 300 300 300 300 244 300 300 6213 37652 Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Interface to VATech Stat. Computer SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 . The system shall comprise but not be limited to: a. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2016 Under station project 2012 . Dual Uninterruptible Power Supply with batteries capable of providing 3 hours of standby capacity b. d.2016 Under station project 2012 . They will be used to gather data associated with the building services and ancillary equipment that is important for the functioning of the control centre such as Equipment Room.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications No.2016 Under station project 2012 .

Control Room furniture and fittings. superstructure. and supervision to execute the works Construction including piling. The Contractor shall provide temporary bracing and shoring required for installation of all components of the Contract. testing and Commissioning of all building services Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supply System: UPS Distribution Boards provided within the UPS part of Works Communication System: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling and participation in testing and commissioning. h. lateral load stability.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. supplies. d.1 SCADA/EMS System The complete System including the Master Station Equipment. c. techniques and sequences of procedures required to perform the work.6. The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety precautions and the methods. The limits of supply for the respective Sections of Work are as follows: 1. materials. ground works. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.31 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . e. walls. foundations. labour. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. The Contractor shall be responsible in conjunction with those other Contractors or the Employer for the resolution of any technical issues that may be required to successfully complete the works. g. The design shall be appropriately prestigious that reflects the importance of the System Control Function. The Contractor shall coordinate all trades and verify dimensions and interfaces in the field. i.6 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service of all equipment within his scope of supply and interfacing to existing facilities or equipment supplied under separate contracts. It is a requirement of this Contract that the Contractor actively coordinates all interface requirements with other Contractors and with the Employer. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided with the Tender Documents to the Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: a. f. drainage Complete fitting out Installation. Conceptual Design b. 1. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements Detailed Design Provision of all necessary equipment. coordination of floor slabs to slope to floor drains shown on other drawings and support and bracing of mechanical and electrical related structures as well as all minor structures and any other work to complete the building(s). floor and roof diaphragms. The complete structural system for the building shall include but not be limited to. framing and connection of any architectural features.5 NSCC BUILDING A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing utilities and structures affecting the work. roof framing. The Contractor‘s Structural Engineer of Record shall be responsible for the design of the complete structural system for the building.Section 6 . any auxiliary or miscellaneous items or connections are required to complete the working system.

Substation equipment: Interfaces to Distance Fault Recorders and frequency measurement devices. The Contractor shall ensure that the Master Station equipment can be located where required. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications OPGW: NSCC Building: - Miscellaneous: - Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. Communication Systems: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling. OPGW:Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. teleprotection signalling equipment. where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. the environmental conditions are as required for the Master Station equipment. mounting frames cable racks. telephone system. Outstations: Outstation communication ports.SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the RTU devices define the hardware interface boundaries Stations equipped with INDATIC 33 RTUs – The existing marshalling cubicles shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. Stations equipped with ABB RTU 560 Outstations . mounting frames cable racks. access for equipment is feasible and that the Control and Equipment Room designs have been correctly implemented. connectors. connections and participation in testing and commissioning.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Stations equipped with Gateway devices – SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the SAS devices define the hardware interface boundaries. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supplies: Primary Distribution Boards provided at the Control Centre building and Distribution Boards in Substations and other required locations that are provided by the Employer. However. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards. 1. Protection etc. required to complete the installation. required to complete the installation.2 Telecommunication System The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service the complete Telecommunication system including the SDH backbone network. The contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works.6. Protection signals via OF:Input point on SDH or PDH channel cards NSCC Building: As for the SCADA Master Station Miscellaneous: The Contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works. cabling. ventilation devices etc. PLC links. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays.Section 6 . and associated interfaces or connections required to complete the working system.32 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the telecommunication network management system. cabling. DPLC/PLC links: Existing line coupling equipment and connections to terminal equipment. 1. all cable routes that are required are defined and implemented.6. connectors. connections to channel equipment from Outstations. ventilation devices etc.

structural. The Contractor shall also provide suitable termination points for these services. All cables.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Stations that are not equipped with Outstations – In cases where no marshalling cubicles are provided the Contractor shall provide all wiring. switch rooms and battery room in the new NSCC building.Section 6 .6 NSCC Building The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete architectural. In addition to the coordination required with the other sections of work under this Contract the Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of access and routes for services. 1. Similarly. design. However. 2 Coordination with the supplier of the DCC system to set up the required exchange of data. In the case of the electricity services two independent and segregated routes shall be provided by the Contractor that are protected from mechanical damage. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards.6. civil.6. ducting.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre The Works involved with the Distribution Control Centre will require the following considerations: 1 Installation of necessary telecommunication equipment for the implementation of an ICCP links between the DCC and the new NSCC. The Contractor shall provide suitable routes from the boundary of the construction site to enable the electricity. administration.6. protected and segregated routes up to the boundary of the construction site for the communications cables to enter the building. the Contractor shall provide independent. architectural. where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. civil and building services works associated the provision of the NSCC building. In the cases where there are existing marshalling cubicles these shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. travel. interfaces that are required to implement the full monitoring and control requirements detailed in the station signal lists. accessories and other materials required to complete the installation and setting to work shall be included in the scope of work.33 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 1. building services and all other associated works and services to complete the design. construction and fitting out of the NSCC building. electrical. 1. storage and other related activities have occurred. The Contractor shall provide all required management. The Contractor shall coordinate with the parties responsible within the Employer‘s organisation to ensure that all required data is defined and made available and that all activities required to complete and put into service these facilities for data exchange are carried out. The service cables shall be provided by the Employer who will terminate them on Distribution Boards provided by the Contractor. cable trays. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the complete UPS. cubicles. telephone. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. mechanical. equipment. Diesel Generator and associated control panels and distribution boards and their termination in the primary intake. The Contractor shall include all work required including reinstatement of disturbed areas within and surrounding the site of construction including areas where the Contractor‘s work force. Connection for IPP stations – The marshalling point in the respective GSS shall be the defined boundary. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays. labour. earthwork. water and drainage services to be connected. connectors.

34 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In the case of Computer Based and other electronic equipment the general system shall comply with this requirement whereas the devices used and architecture shall follow the latest models and standards. Main Product List: SCADA Application Soft ware EMS Application Software SCADA Hardware Rear Projection Video Wall RTUs Outstation interfacing equipment Fibre Optic terminal equipment Communication interfaces Power line Carrier Equipment Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems (including Diesel Generator. is designed/manufactured/produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of fifteen (15) years successful experience in designing/manufacturing/producing comparable products.7 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS The bidder shall ensure.Section 6 . the bidder shall ensure that identical products in design have been in service for a minimum period of five (5) years. The Bidder shall provide adequate evidence of compliance to the above requirements to the satisfaction of the CAPC. UPS. In respect of design of products offered under this bid. Batteries & 48Vdc Chargers). Bids that do not comply with the above requirements or with incomplete evidence of compliance may be rejected. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. to the products offered under the contract. for the strict adherence to the environmental safeguard measures stipulated in the environmental approvals and the relevant documents forming part of such approvals obtained under the above acts/regulations/guidelines with respect to this project.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1.8 THE ENVIRONMENT AND ADHERENCE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTS. REGULATIONS AND / OR GUIDELINES The selected contractor is responsible for the full compliance with the following acts. If the offered products are manufactured under license. 47 of 1980 including all the amendments Relevant Environmental safeguard requirements and reports under ADB‘s safeguard policy statement. the service experience of products manufactured by the parent company shall not be counted as service experience of the licensee's products. that each main product (listed below) offered under this contract. Building Services M&E equipment 1. The bidders also shall take into consideration the relevant costs that will be incurred. regulations and/or guidelines with respect to the execution of this project   National Environmental Act No.

The design is required to ensure that failures of components or sub-systems are detected promptly and that previously redundant components are brought into operational use. Communication and power cabling shall be physically segregated to support the segregation of redundant hardware and software facilities. As a defence against this it shall be possible to utilise any of the workstations located outside the control room as operational workstations including those associated with the maintenance and training facilities. as well as for data management. As defence against internal equipment failures the Master Station shall comprise a set of redundant hardware and software facilities as required to meet the availability requirements of this specification. The Bidder shall identify whether the offered solution is a deviation from the specified requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. as far as is possible. 2. certain subsystems shall be replicated such that no single failure shall cause loss of functionality and that the availability of the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. redundant elements of the master station (principally servers) shall be capable of being located in physically segregated rooms within the Control Centre building(s). documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a fully operational system whether or not those items are explicitly specified or requested. However. In this context it is recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system. Due to its pivotal role in the operational management of the power network the SCADA master station at the Control Centre must be secure against internal failures and external hazards. without operator intervention.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS General This specification document details the functional requirements of the SCADA/EMS Master Station software to be supplied under this Contract.2 System Architecture The System design and architecture shall have followed industry standard open systems concepts with regard to interconnections with other equipment conforming to open standards and system upgradeability. such as fire.2 2.2.35 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In this respect. within the Contract price. be configured to meet these functional requirements. For example cabling to workstations outside the control room should not run through the control room and cabling to each workstation within the control room should be segregated. potentially common mode hazards. In normal operation all subsystems and functions shall be available. 2. the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying. System to be supplied shall be based on mature products that have evolved and been proven in comparable projects. all software. The Contractor shall endeavour to meet the specified requirements using their standard software products. The control rooms will be the only common point of failure with respect to external hazards. it is important that the objectives of the requirements are met even though the solution may not entirely comply with the Specification. Further to this. The design shall be such that no single failure shall cause the loss or disruption to essential facilities. NSCC SCADA/EMS 2.Section 6 . The Bidder shall include details in their offer how each of the specified requirements will be met by naming the standard product/module that provides the specified functionality or by stating the extent of software development required to implement the functionality. and without causing a degradation of functionality or performance. This Chapter of the specification details the requirement for the Master Station and supporting equipment to be provided at each location. The system and applications to be supplied shall be based on proven products that shall. To provide a first level of defence against external. for hardware and software. A new SCADA/EMS Master Station is to be supplied and installed in the newly constructed Control Centre building to provide the control and monitoring facilities.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. However. the Contractor shall develop new software to provide all specified functionality that cannot be achieved using the Contractor‘s standard products.2.1 INTRODUCTION A new NSCC is to be established to facilitate control and monitoring of the 220/132kV network and the primary feeds to the 33kV networks. hardware.

would be required in order to ensure that the performance of the system is not compromised by such an expansion in the number of workstations. then duplication is not required. indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed.g.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing The initial sizing of SCADA Master Station shall meet the requirements of the Outstation telemetered data and non telemetered data. The system must be designed to allow a faulty item to be removed from service and to be replaced without the functionality of the system being affected.2. etc shall be accounted for separately by the Contractor.). Similarly for Master Station printers. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications functions meets the specified reliability requirements. The Contractor shall demonstrate in the Factory Tests that these expansion requirements can be achieved without such degradation. Facilities shall be incorporated to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated.000 data points. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure. The design shall be such as to avoid interruption of data acquisition because of faults. other than the workstations themselves. d) The above expansion shall be achieved without degradation to the availability or performance of the master station. The Bidder shall indicate if any additional hardware or software or licences. 2. No additional hardware or software shall be required to accommodate the expansion defined above for the Master Station. 2. The introduction of an additional voltage level (e.2.2.5 Risks The construction of equipment and its installation shall be such that common mode risks from external hazards are minimised. The expansion capability of SCADA Master Station system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. switches etc. generators. The Master Station software including SCADA and applications databases and display facilities shall be dimensioned to accommodate a four fold increase in size of the power network elements (nodes. if suitable diversity of printers on servers is provided and automatic reassignment. This is estimated to be some 50.Section 6 . Redundant items shall not be vulnerable to the same events. operator workstations to be located elsewhere via a remote connection. Any additional capacity required for internal management. the Master Station shall be capable of expansion to support 2 additional operator workstations within the control room and a further 2. The Contractor shall identify where subsystems need to be replicated to meet the specified requirements: The SCADA Master Station workstations need not be replicated provided the functionality previously available at a failed workstation is automatically available at a pre-defined workstation and by suitable access codes at other operator workstations.36 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . for example Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. Indicative outline design for the SCADA system is shown in Drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001. A two-fold increase in the number of Outstations. 400kV). transformers. The Bidder shall demonstrate in the sizing calculation to be provided with the offer that these expansion requirements are provided for and can be achieved without such degradation. In addition.4 Reliability and Availability It is a fundamental requirement that each system (and individual items of equipment within them) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the systems shall have been proven in service. The delivered systems shall be dimensioned according to the following: a) b) c) A four-fold increase in the number of all database points both telemetered and nontelemetered. Under no circumstances shall it be possible for the system to lose data and be in an indeterminate state with respect to data validity.

2 Data Processing The SCADA system shall provide a comprehensive and flexible set of facilities for processing telemetered. Statistics on the performance of each communication channel shall be available for display. manually entered.3. The installation plan shall include the measures to be taken to prevent such contingencies and will be subject to approval. The data acquisition system shall send out polling requests for data in accordance with a preprogrammed routine so as to maintain the database updated with the latest data from all Outstations. For each communication channel the data acquisition software shall detect loss of communication with an Outstation and raise an alarm. It shall only be possible to ―switch‖ Outstations by manual command from an appropriate display.1 Data Acquisition The data acquisition software shall be capable of supporting multiple telecontrol protocols for the monitoring and control of substation plant via RTUs and Substation Automation Systems (SAS) with Gateway access. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure.Section 6 . Where a report by exception technique is used the data acquisition software shall initiate a full scan of an RTU to retrieve the actual state of the RTU under the following circumstances: a) b) c) d) e) Master Station cold start RTU or SAS reset Restoration of communications Cyclically every 24 hours On request by the operator The facility to ―switch‖ Outstations into or out-of-scan for maintenance or commissioning purposes shall be provided. The following requirements relate to specific types of data.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications damage in a location shall not affect both parts of the duplicated/redundant equipment/component or cabling. 2. The status of all Outstation communication shall be available for display at any of the Master Station Workstations. The data acquisition software shall continue to operate on the alternate communication channel until instructed to switch-over to the main link by the Operator. Where an alternate communication channel to the Outstation is available communication shall be switched automatically by the data acquisition software.3.3. 2.37 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Facilities shall be incorporated however to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated. All operator actions required to enable and disable data acquisition in the manner outlined above shall be recorded in the events list. The system shall also maintain a separate list of all data points which have been manually taken 'off scan'.3 2.3.1 SCADA APPLICATIONS Communication 2.1. The data acquisition system shall monitor the performance of each communication channel. All existing Outstations that are to remain in service operate using the IEC 60870-5101 protocol new Outstations shall communicate with the master stations using the IEC 60870-5-101 or 104 protocols. indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed on the workstations. The IEC 60870 – 6 TASE 2 protocol shall be adopted for these links. Segregation shall be used where possible and/or suitable means of protection.1.2 ICCP Data Links Duplicated ICCP Data Links are required between the NSCC and the Colombo City Distribution Control to support the exchange of operational and commercial data including real time data acquired or calculated by the respective SCADA systems. calculated and data from other systems accessible at the NSCC.

For monopolar measured values. It shall be possible to specify for each voltage. A*X+B conversion . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.The value in raw counts is stored directly in the database unchanged. If this value is exceeded the last valid value shall be displayed and an out-of-range attribute shall mark the data item. Suppressed zero . For bipolar measured values alarm supervision shall be between four adjustable alarm limits. at database construction.2.A and B are constants that provide the scaling and offset for the analogue value X.1 Measured Values Scaling Measured values shall be converted. a value in engineering units. It shall be possible for the alarm limits to be amended on-line by the Operator. All limit violations shall be annunciated as an alarm to the operator and recorded on the event list.Section 6 . An A*X conversion is provided by setting the B constant (offset) to zero. Whenever a measurement returns within limits from a limit violation. alarm supervision shall be between two adjustable alarm limits. The following conversion types shall therefore be provided for measured value scaling: a) b) No conversion . below which the voltage shall be stored as zero. All active and reactive power flowing out of a busbar shall be negative.38 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where conversion of raw data to engineering units is required this shall be configurable on an individual point basis. A time-delay filter shall be provided to ensure that any transient limit-transgressions do not result in transient changes to the displayed or annunciated alarm state. the system shall not consider a value to have returned within a set of limits until it has done so by a predefined and operator adjustable margin. c) Each measured value shall have an associated 'value out of range' raw data value threshold. scaled and presented dependent upon the form in which the data is collected from the Outstation. When enabled the scanned measured value shall be continuously checked against assigned limit values. The following sign conventions for real and reactive power flow shall be used universally throughout the SCADA system: a) All active and reactive power flowing into a busbar shall be positive b) Limits All limit values shall be in engineering units.3. Amendments to the active limits shall generate a message indicating the changes made to the limit values within the event list. an event shall be recorded in the event list. based on the number (1 or more) of consecutive scans for which the transgression is true. To ensure that items whose values are varying just above and just below alarm limits do not generate a constant stream of alarms. To avoid annunciation of certain transitory conditions it shall also be possible to delay the annunciation of an alarm for a defined period. This period shall be a system wide parameter. and shall be amendable on-line by the Operator. When disabled no limit checking shall apply to the selected measured value. Unique pairs of A and B are provided for each analogue point requiring this conversion.For each value of this conversion type a database value is specified below which the converted value will be set to zero.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.

Two forms of alarms shall be supported. shall not result in an alarm signal until a predetermined period has elapsed to allow the device to reach its final position. All status changes shall be processed immediately. The ability to differentiate between ‗authorised‘ status changes.g. a protection signal that is present for the duration of operation only) and non-fleeting or persistent (signal that remains in changed state until state changes again e. such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. In many cases the indication wiring and interposing relays are existing and have been implemented as single point status signals. protection operation. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited.39 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope by a return to normal alarm when the Procurement of Plant . and ‗unauthorised‘ changes such as occur from other actions.2.g. Double Points Double point indications shall be used to indicate the status of circuit breaker and switch position (Open or Closed) and other devices where a higher integrity is required than is possible with single point indication. . Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding measured values with fixed values entered via the User Interface. The system shall also be able to process these as switch position but without the ‗validity‘ logic.g. shall be provided. 2. The appearance of values on displays shall be different when an override has been applied. Transitory conditions that generate intermediate signals as may occur with disconnects.g. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as an alarm condition.Section 6 . Unacknowledged limit alarms shall be annunciated again measured value returns within limits.Digital Points Status Indications comprise signals formed as single or double point values. these being fleeting (momentary signal e. The System shall only permit the application of overrides for measured values by users with the appropriate area of authority. All measurements shall be eligible for overriding.2 Status Indications .g. An output must be obtained from each of the two positions (e. The appearance of digital points on displays shall be modified when an override has been applied. Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding digital point values with fixed values entered via the user Interface. 00 or 11) shall result in the data being declared invalid. 10 or 01) so that a persistent invalid combination (e. On removal of an override the value shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated. most signals are in this category) alarms. Single Points In general this category encompasses alarm and status indications.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Acknowledged limit alarms associated with the measured value shall not generate an additional alarm. All digital points shall be eligible for overriding. but shall be removed from the alarm list when the measured value returns within limits.3. e. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the value is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications On removal of an override the digital point shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the digital point is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority.3. On removal of an override the SCADA shall immediately request the present status of the point from the RTU.3 Derived Data Facilities shall be provided for deriving data values from other data items (including other derived measured values and digitals from anywhere in the system).Section 6 . The operands that shall be supported are as follows: a) Arithmetic       b) Unary   c) Square root Unary negation Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Modulus Boolean     Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive-OR Logical NOT d) Relational       Greater than > Greater than or equal to  Less than <  Less than or equal to Equal to Not equal to =  e) Functions      Absolute Minimum Maximum Logarithm Natural logarithm Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The definition of a derived measured value shall permit the prioritisation of elements within a calculation.40 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. 2. The construction of these derived data values shall be operator orientated and not require the use of the tools used for database management and manipulation.

day.6.2 Event Inhibited The event inhibit attribute is applied when the data item is active and up-to-date but no event or alarm is to be annunciated or recorded even if a limit is transgressed or a change of status is detected. A lack of any other quality attribute can be used to indicate this state. e. And be available in one line and tabular displays. The SCADA system shall be able to report the daily. with appropriate functional authority. 2. The quality attributes required as a minimum are given in the following sub-clauses.41 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .g. cosine and tangent and their inverse functions. The energy metering data collected by the SCADA shall be stored within the SCADA system. etc. limit checking and propagation of quality attributes.6. The alarm generated by the tap position processor shall be used to determine whether there is a fault on the tap position indication circuitry.4 Meter Values Energy metering values will be available as pulsed inputs to Outstations.2. area. These attributes shall be propagated with the status or value of each data item.3. This condition shall be annunciated as an alarm. area. Examples of derived values that will be used are: -Line currents calculated from MW. 2. There would normally be an out of step indication as well derived directly from the AVR system.2. The arrangement should be such as to ensure the integrity of the data after temporary loss of the SCADA or communications.12.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications    Statistics Summation Sine.3.2. to set or clear the event inhibit attribute on-line.2. region and for the total system. A facility shall be provided for setting up and synchronising the stored values such that there is consistency with the actual measuring device. MVAr and Voltage measurements -MVA calculated from MW and MVAr values -MW values calculated from MWh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MVAr values calculated from MVArh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MWh and MVArh values calculated from MW values over defined periods or accumulative values 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Where master-follower equipment is installed the process shall identify whether a slave tap changer is out of step with the master. 2. derived data and received via ICCP data link shall have attributes associated with each value that define the current quality of the data.3. monthly and annual energy figures by substation. up-to-date and uninhibited. The performance requirements for the processing of derived values are specified in Clause 2. The system shall provide facilities to enable the user.1 Normal Data A normal data item is defined as one which is active.6 Data Quality Attributes All telemetered data. A derived measured value shall be processed in the same way as any other measurement.3.2. It is anticipated that the storage will be achieved by use of the historical data processing and storage facilities and may include some pre-processing such as totalisation by period.Section 6 .5 Tap Position These shall be processed from transducers with mA or binary coded outputs and displayed as integer number tap positions. 2.

2. The failed control shall generate an alarm and initiate audible annunciation.3.6 Propagation of Quality Attributes A derived item shall have its suspect. to trip a breaker which is in the open position. such as when: a) A control check-back failure occurs at any stage b) c) d) A control is not executed within a predetermined time of selection There is a failure of a main computer resulting in a restart or changeover to a standby computer. It shall not be possible to control an item where an applied tag is specified as an interlock. Facilities shall be provided to inhibit control of any plant item suitable for supervisory control. Successful completion of a control shall be indicated by update of its new telemetered state and the presentation of a confirmatory message. A change of state resulting from a successful control shall not generate an audible annunciation.3.7 Controls The system shall provide the facility to control plant and equipment by telecommand.6. control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. The transmission of a command signal.3. The override feature shall be separate from the facility to change manually-dressed (non-telemetered and non-derived) data items. 2. then the command shall be blocked and an appropriate message given to the operator. Controls may be individual or part of a user definable sequence.g. 2. then an incorrect selection indication shall be given.4 Overridden Data The overridden attribute shall apply when the value of a data item has been manually replaced. but the device is selected to local control at the substation. Only one valid control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. ‗close‘ or ‗trip‘ shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation.3.g. e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. overridden or value-out-of-range attribute(s) set if any of its constituent elements has the corresponding attribute(s) set.3. The system shall also cancel controls automatically.6. Errors occur in the control protocol sequences. An item shall remain suspect until a valid update is received. e. 2. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation. the following conditions must be satisfied: a) b) Initiation of a command shall involve a ‗select before operate‘ procedure.6. In communicating commands to the Outstations. Any plant item so inhibited shall have suitable identification on the displays.2. If equipment is selected which is unsuitable for remote control or if the wrong control initiation is attempted. However. If equipment suitable for remote control is selected.Section 6 .2.3 Suspect Data Data shall be marked suspect if the item is active but the updating of its value or status is discontinued for any reason other than an applied override.2.6.5 Value-Out-of-Range The value-out-of-range attribute shall mark a measured value as exceeding the metering range of the measuring device. 2.2. Failure of a control shall be indicated by de-selection of the plant item and the presentation of an informative message.42 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

2.3.g. Event description text shall be appended to each item in the event list and be available for printing. This situation shall also give rise to an alarm and the representation of the corresponding device upon diagram displays as being in an 'undefined' state.e. In the case of double point indications. fault messages Log 'ON'.3 Alarm and Event Processing 2. An ‗alarm‘ is defined as an annunciated event.2 Event Handling As events are processed. single bit state changes shall be evaluated by the system in the context of a coded group of bits for the purpose of registering an event.3. both contacts open or both contacts closed for longer than a defined time). a) A state change of a binary signal input at an Outstation b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) A supervisory control action issued from the master station System generated messages. time and date of the occurrence of each entry.   2. it will be required that the transitions between both states are recorded as events. the resulting changes shall be used to update the real-time database.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Cancellation shall return the plant item to a state in which a new operation may be selected. 2. All control actions and individual steps of switching sequences shall be logged in a single Telecommand Log which shall be available for display on-line and/or printed if required. 2. Illegal values shall be alarmed.3. In the case of double point status indications (e. in the majority of cases. the signal shall be processed to give a discrete integer value output corresponding to the tap position and changes between these discrete values shall be handled as an event. e. c. alarms may be generated from any of sources a. Illegal values shall be alarmed.g.3. However. The actual events to be defined as alarms shall be user configurable.3. Many events will arise from initiating conditions that have two well defined states and. requiring acknowledgement by an operator. log 'OFF' actions Measurand limit violations Manual diagram dressing actions Alarm acknowledgements System configuration and data amendment actions Conditions derived from the logical combinations of signals. control action tracking messages. Typically.Section 6 .43 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . where both the open and closed states are monitored by separate auxiliary contacts) it will normally be required to record as events only two of the four transitions (i. Where binary coding of transformer tap positions is employed.g.1 Event Descriptions Event descriptions shall comprise the following information for each event: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. whether or not a transition is recorded as an event shall be user configurable. a further event shall be derived from any incongruent condition arising between the independent contacts (e. and dynamic display facilities.1 Definition An ‗Event‘ is defined as any change of state or threshold transition and includes the following. circuit breaker status. The Telecommand Log shall identify the user. Where analogue transducers are used to provide transformer tap position indications. e and selected instances of i above.3. Certain exceptions to the normal interpretation of events shall apply:  A state change [source (a) events] normally expected to result from a supervisory control action [source (b) events] shall only be interpreted by the system as an alarm when the associated control command has not been issued. when the breaker moves to the closed position and when it moves to the open position).

Event list shall be sized to accommodate at least 10 000 events and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. The list shall be updated automatically with new entries as they enter the system. An operator shall be able to send the search output to a printer or a disc file. etc. The operator shall be able to page through the lists in either direction. source location. A list of substations and SCADA system groups with unacknowledged alarms shall be available to the operator.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) 2. status. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible.3. message descriptions. upon operator request.3. it shall be paged automatically. manual dressing actions. 2. message type. If page 1 (most recent entries) of a list is displayed. filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. commands. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. 2. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence. to achieve rapid location of any portion of a list. whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list. the value of the limit transgressed and the actual value of the measurand The value entered for manual entries Event list When an event list is first called up for display in a list window. so that it always displays the most recent entries. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up. alarm acknowledgements) For limit violations.3.3. Additionally.44 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and device or other identifier. It shall be possible to use the jump and page controls at will.Section 6 . The search and sort facility shall be very flexible. as required. whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list.g.2 Date and time from the event message time stamp Location description (e. In addition to the paging mechanism. but each new page displayed shall retain some lines from the previous page.3. incorporating features such as variable Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. it shall be automatically brought to the Operators‘ attention via the Graphic User Interface GUI. filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. When the page is full the system shall refresh the display to ensure that the latest events are shown. source location. location.g. action. there shall be a facility to jump immediately to an approximate position within the list. message descriptions. to provide visual continuity. operator identity. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time. OPERATED. it shall be possible to generate an audible annunciation for selected alarms by setting attributes in the database.g. including either end of the list. substation name) Voltage level (where appropriate) Circuit description (where appropriate) Signal specific description (e.1 Alarm Lists Alarms shall be displayed on Acknowledged and Unacknowledged alarm lists. NORMAL) Operator's identity (for e. operator identity.2.g.3. The alarm lists shall be displayed in chronological order with the most recent alarm first with the occurrence of new alarms handled in the same manner as events. etc. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator. backup protection) Signal state (e. the most recent page of entries shall be presented. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up.3 Alarm Management Where an event is configured as an alarm. incorporating features such as variable length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters. message type. value and normal limits. as required.

2 Alarm Sequence All alarms shall be brought to the attention of the operators. Where the reset condition occurs before the onset has been acknowledged. If the alarm is persistent it shall be displayed on the Acknowledged alarm list. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. The presence of an unacknowledged alarm which has reset shall be indicated by colour in the alarm list. The alarm message will be acknowledged by the operator. The acknowledgement shall be logged in the event list.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters.3. the message for both conditions shall remain in the alarm list and device symbols shall flash at half the rate of the alarm conditions.3. Symbols on the one line diagrams shall cease flashing when the alarm is acknowledged. The alarm sequence shall be as follows: a) At the onset of the alarm condition the alarm will be entered into the alarm window. it shall be possible for the operator to suppress the processing of individual alarm.3 Alarm suppression The software shall support two forms of alarm suppression manual and automatic. d) e) f) The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually.45 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . A nuisance alarm shall be defined by the occurrence of a user definable number of changes of state within a user definable period Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Each suppression command shall be recorded on the event list. Flashing shall not be used in the alarm lists. on a page basis and from diagrams on a device basis. a) Priority b) c) d) e) f) g) Voltage level Substation Equipment type System Area of responsibility Time period A display shall also be provided which identifies all substations with unacknowledged alarms. 2.Section 6 . If the alarm is fleeting it shall disappear from the alarm lists. For manual suppression. It shall be possible to navigate directly to the substation unacknowledged alarm page from this display. It‘s priority shall be highlighted with the use of colour.3. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm.3.3. Any device being displayed on a one line diagram to which the alarm is associated shall flash. b) c) The audible alarm may be silenced by the operator(s). 2. Reset of alarm condition shall be treated in the same manner as the onset except that on acknowledgement the onset and reset messages shall be removed from the alarm list. This facility is intended for use in cases where faulty signals generate repetitive nuisance events and alarms. Alarm list shall be sized to accommodate 5000 Alarms and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. and into the Unacknowledged alarm list where displayed. The system shall support the automatic suppression of nuisance alarms.3.

3.Section 6 .3. The process shall also group the data on an event basis. All suppressed alarms either manually by the operator or automatically shall be displayed on a list suppressed alarm list. is preferred. 2. Access control shall be provided which requires all users to identify themselves and enter passwords before being granted access. the main functional requirements and principles of operation have been defined and it is required that the Contractor shall develop his design accordingly.6 Disturbance Monitoring A facility to record events associated with disturbances shall be provided. The data shall be readily available to include in reports. The operator shall be able to define the start and end points in terms of message identity numbers or date/time stamps. An organised approach to handling multiple windows. System Manager. The initiating of such recording shall also be possible from logical rules and calculated values. 2. Engineer.4. An alarm reset shall be generated indicating the removal of the automatic suppressed condition. per fault. e. The records shall be available for inclusion in reports and shall be readily viewable by Operators at their workstations. The list will have the facility to sort the alarms suppressed by to display those by station and/or by type either manual or automatic suppression.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications of time. The design of the User Interface shall be based on standard software packages. Rather.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists Operators shall also be able to request the printing of all or a portion of any event or alarm list or search for an output list (see above) by defining the start and end points through a screen pro-forma or dialogue. Supervisor. Under these conditions the SCADA software shall automatically suppress the processing of this alarm. When the number of changes of state fall below the user defined threshold then the SCADA software shall remove the automatic suppression of the alarm. 2.3.3.4.5 Sequence of Events Processing Sequence of events processing shall be provided whereby the order of occurrence of events shall processed for: a. The workstations shall be capable of supporting as a minimum the number of windows per display specified in the Schedules.3. A ‗first in first out‘ log of values and events shall be maintained such that following predefined alarm conditions the values of measurements and status (received from the entire telemetry system) for the previous 5 minutes and the values for the following 10 minutes shall be stored and made available in a disturbance monitoring record.2 Access Control The SCADA system software shall be capable of supporting different levels of user. The total pre event and post event storage times shall be readily adjustable using simple user instructions.46 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall be possible to alter the duration of the pre and post event recording by simple Operator settings. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. which allows the operator to save and subsequently restore the screen layout and its contents. An alarm shall be generated indicating that the event has been automatically been suppressed. Events where a time stamp is applied to a signal on receipt by the Master Station b.3.1 General The following sub-clauses outline the general functional requirements and principles of operation for the Graphic User Interface. The Bidder may offer a system that records all data samples and provides facilities to construct such reports. such as Operator. It is not intended that they should define in detail the methods of presenting information to the operator and the means of operator interaction with the system. Events that are time stamped on occurrence by the Outstation The sequence of events processor shall maintain a chronological list of events that can be viewed on a station. 2.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) 2. circuit or system basis.3. 2.3. etc.g.3. incorporating all additional detail necessary to furnish a comprehensive and fully functional interface for interaction with the system.

with progressively more detail including measurement values shown as the display is zoomed in.3. isolated. The main network display shall be updated in real time with plant status and measurement information from SCADA or manually dressed and shall be used for initiating control actions and recording a variety of information concerned with the operation of the network. When fully zoomed in the diagram shall show the level of detail traditionally included on substation one line diagrams making these unnecessary.4. The search facility shall allow the use of 'wild cards' so that it is not necessary to enter the full name. earthed.3. reports.4. as a result of telemetered status changes and/or manual diagram dressing.1 Network Displays The network display facilities shall use the principle of a ‗world map‘ whereby different levels of detail from geographic overview to detailed substation plant/circuit are accessible. 2.3.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The access control facilities shall be arranged to restrict functional access to predefined users. including transformers. Fast panning shall be supported to traverse the entire network display and zoom/declutter facilities shall allow a large area of the network to be seen with a low level of detail. earthing switches.47 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc. The connectivity data shall be updated automatically whenever a topology change is detected. Additional means of navigating the network diagram shall be provided apart from panning. over/under voltage etc.) Geographical areas Designated areas of responsibility Editing or creating data files. buses. etc. Database and graphic display amendment The actual access privileges and users will be defined during the detailed implementation phase of the project.) b) c) d) e) f) Data (real time. displays. shading and line format. bus couplers/section switches. disconnected. Schematic layouts shall be represented in which the substations are laid out in approximate geographic positions with the interconnections shown by orthogonal lines with minimal crossovers. Connectivity shall be determined and held for each version of the network image resident in the database.3. degree of loading including (warning and alarm states). whether real time or study cases.2 Network Connectivity Display Network Topology Processing The topology of the power network shall be monitored to determine the network connectivity.4. historical. by use of colour. Access privileges shall be freely definable and shall determine access to areas such as: a) Functions (controls. These shall include selection of individual stations from the overview diagram and by database search selection using the station name or mnemonic. etc.Section 6 . It shall also be possible to navigate directly to the network display of an item of plant which is in alarm by selection from the alarm list (and similarly to an alarm list entry from an item in alarm on the network diagram). disconnects/isolators. The displays shall include most items of plant explicitly. reports. Generally the design of displays shall focus on clarity and bringing abnormal conditions to the attention of operators.3 Displays 2. etc. An alarm event shall be generated whenever the topology processor encounters a circuit arrangement resulting in the interconnection of the secondary windings of two transformers in either the same or different substations at the distribution level (11 kV or 33kV).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The system shall be capable of supporting a minimum 32 different levels of users. It shall be possible to show the operating status of any circuit. It shall also be possible for the operator to access any data which has been associated with the plant item by selecting the item on the diagram displayed on the workstation. energised. 2.

originating at the primary substation source circuit breaker and terminating at the open point(s) of the circuit (feeder). each connectivity trace (i. all islands of interconnected equipment shall be highlighted. selection of the connectivity presentation function by the operator shall cause the lines of the relevant portion of the network to be displayed in yellow.3. In addition to these displays being available on Operator VDUs and the Video Wall. style or thickness but not flashing).3. frequency (Hz). transformer tap positions. The actual line attribute change invoked shall be freely user definable.3. different colours or line types). voltages (kV). near spill and whether operation is near minimum limits. Area Control Error in MW derived by the AGC application Actual Time as real clock time and date Synchronous time derived from the system frequency Time deviation calculated from Actual Time – Synchronous Time Water levels for reservoirs and ponds System Frequency derived directly from the HV busbars of the adjacent Grid Sub Station. The identification shall be carried out by means of a change of colour. each feeder) shall be distinguishable from others (i. although default selections shall normally apply.4. 2. In operator selective mode.e.        Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. more than one feeder) on a display at any one time. permanent pictorial displays shall be located adjacent to the Video Wall.e.g.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Connectivity Presentation The operator shall be able to call up connectivity information for superposition upon a network diagram display.Section 6 .3.e. the operator would position the cursor on a circuit element in the portion of the network of interest and all circuit elements electrically connected to that selected shall be traced and identified by the System. but not during panning and zooming actions. The operator shall have the facility of an independent command to visually accentuate the open points in the network.3.3 Hydro Complex Displays Displays representing the hydro complexes shall be provided that show water levels for reservoirs and ponds in a cascade overview indicating spill gate operation. 2. In global mode.3.4.48 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . For example. These displays shall be driven by telemetered and manually entered data and shall indicate warning and alarm conditions. Separate commands shall be available to enable the operator to clear down the connectivity traces both individually and globally.5 Video Wall displays The video wall display shall be capable of presenting any of the Graphic and Tabular displays available in the system. MW. TSD = TSG + ACE Total System Generation (TSG) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system by summing the generation outputs of all synchronised generators. 2.3. This function shall have both global and operator selective modes. or a change of line type (e. 2. kVAh) and other measurements shall be available for display. MVAr).3.6 System Displays The following ‗System‘ displays shall be provided with the purpose of providing the operators with key system information:  Total System Demand (TSD) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system which shall calculate the TSD by comparing the TSG and the system frequency deviation. tables of measured values comprising circuit loading (A. energy meter advances (kWh.4. Automatic clear down shall occur upon closure of the display window. The line display attributes for the connectivity presentation function shall be set up in a priority display table such that when an operator invokes multiple connectivity traces (i. if yellow colouring is set up by the system engineer as the default line attribute.4 Tabular displays For each station.4. Clear down shall be by manual command and automatically upon closure of the display window.

g.3.4.3. Where practicable.4. previous values or default values shall be entered into the interactive fields by the system. the (latched) selection of a softkey function shall be visually indicated by a change of softkey appearance.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications   System Frequency Trend derived directly from the above measurement A further 6 frequency measurements shall be available for display that are derived from other GSS or generating stations and provided by direct communication via digital channels supplied under this contract. the help screens shall consist of the relevant pages of the Operators' Manual. Selection of a softkey function shall automatically cancel any alternative (mutually exclusive) selections previously made. pointer selectable "softkey" symbols shall be available for use by the operator. Where a command sequence requires selection from a series of menus. These shall contain field descriptions that readily identify the required information to the operator. It shall then be possible to continue the sequence with a valid entry. These reasons shall include the following: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. rather than completely filling the pro forma each time. Softkey control shall avoid the use of more cumbersome menu selection sequences in situations where one step execution of and rapid switching between functions is desirable. pro forma screens (data entry masks) and dialogue boxes shall be used. they shall be displayed sequentially at approximately the same position on the screen. Linking shall also be possible between text lists (e. 2. via the workstation.g. With the exception of the latter 6 frequency measurements these values shall be permanently displayed on a panel adjacent to the video wall. Context sensitive help screens shall always be available to the operator to assist him to interact with the system. An explanatory message shall be displayed.4 Supervisory Control The sequences employed to execute all required selection and control tasks. Wherever possible. as offered. All operator entries shall be checked by the system for validity and plausibility. 2. step zooming). For rapid selection and control of diagram manipulative functions in particular. shall be by standard methods. For example. an alarm list) and other windows. The operator shall not be permitted to make invalid entries. selecting an alarm entry in a list may be configured to open a diagram window and display the related substation at an appropriate level of detail.49 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. Provision shall be made for 3 such frequency measurements to be displayed simultaneously. It should be noted that the frequency measurements are the most critical system control variables and are required to be displayed without any delays incurred in the SCADA acquisition process and must be available in the event that the SCADA system fails.g. step-by-step. Any invalid entry shall be detected by the software and ignored. so that an operator only needs to make amendments. smooth panning and zooming) and to provide one step control functions (e. through each sequence by identifying the remaining valid entries. Where text entry is more appropriate for the interaction or dialogue between an operator and the system. Where appropriate. The software shall also guide the user. The display of the other 6 frequency measurements shall be operator selectable and presented in the same panel. preferably via the use of pop-up menus. Warning messages shall indicate if for any reason the selected control action is not possible. All such facilities shall be context sensitive and.Section 6 . It shall be possible to navigate directly from station single line level to both station acknowledged and unacknowledged alarm lists. Such soft keys shall duplicate equivalent selections available via the keyboard and through menus and shall typically be used to switch between mouse controlled actions (e. only menu options relevant to the command sequence being executed shall be presented to the operator for selection. for example.7 Display Interaction The User Interface shall be designed to maximise the use of graphical interaction implemented using standard software wherever possible and to this end it must be stated where the standard software. dialogue prompts and help screens. does not comply with the functional requirements detailed herein. All user actions shall be initiated using a mouse/trackball and keyboard using standard methods.

a watchdog timer expires. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. Certain circuit breaker closing command schemes will incorporate synchronising relays. (b) Where voltage exists on only one side of a 'circuit breaker. control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. e. "incoming" and "phase angle" voltages to bus wires. ‗close‘ or ‗trip‘ shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation. The ''circuit breaker sync select' command is latched within the switchgear control panel and connects the appropriate "running".4. the ''circuit breaker sync close' command should be issued by the operator. which will latch the command until one of the following occurs: the relay closes the 'circuit breaker.3. subsequent inadvertent operation of the ‗execute‘ key shall be prevented. In the event that a command sequence is left incomplete. This command shall be interlocked in software to prevent its issue if voltages exist on both sides of the 'circuit breaker. However. and ‗unauthorised‘ changes such as occur from other actions. b) The ability to differentiate between ‗authorised‘ status changes. The transmission of a command signal. Alternatively the validity of the command should be checked at the main computer and. circuit breaker closing will be initiated by a 'circuit breaker close' command issued by the operator. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation. e. Checking for synchronism and dead line conditions will be carried out locally by the switchgear control scheme.1 Circuit Breakers Only one valid circuit breaker control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. ''circuit breaker sync close' and ''circuit breaker deadline close'.50 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . This will initiate the synchronising action of the local synchronising relay. by means of appropriate check synchronism and dead bus relays.4. the ''circuit breaker deadline close' command should be issued by the operator. or through the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command (common for the substation). to trip a breaker which is in the open position d) Device or other device at the Outstation is already selected for control e) Device has controls inhibited f) Device has a tag applied which is specified as an interlock All command sequences shall be terminated by pressing an ‗execute‘ key. the following conditions must be satisfied: a) Initiation of a command shall involve a ‗select before operate‘ procedure.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) Device is not suitable for remote control b) Device is selected to local control at the substation c) Redundant control initiation is attempted. transmitted to the Outstation at very high security. i. Normally. shall be provided. protection operation.e.g. In communicating commands to the Outstations.g. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as alarm conditions. These voltages shall also be transmitted to the Master Station for display to the operator. Three special control signals are associated with such breakers: ''circuit breaker sync select'. or the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command is issued by the operator. if correct.Section 6 . A ‗cancel‘ key shall be provided to allow termination of the command sequence. such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator. This shall be achieved either by a 30 s time-out function initiated by the key sequence reaching the ‗execute‘ stage. Unlatching will be performed locally by the closing logic. Circuit breaker closure will be controlled as follows: (a) Where voltages are present on both sides of the 'circuit breaker.

Where the transmitted values have been manually set by an operator or the output of an EMS function has been manually endorsed by an operator receipt of new set point values at the remote station will produce an indication that they require acknowledgement by power station operators. A failed check shall cause the sequence to suspend operation and alert the operator that this has occurred.3. Checks shall provide the facility within a sequence to verify that an item of plant is in a particular state or that an analogue value is within pre-defined limits. the following principle of operation is expected to apply. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. Such set points may be used for machine control or remote indication.3.4. All sequences shall consist of checks. then an appropriate operator alarm message shall be generated and the sequence shall enter a paused state. Any check must be successful before the system proceeds to the next step.4. the need for set point acknowledgement may vary. it shall be possible for raise and lower commands to be issued to the tap changers from the master station.2 Tap Changers Under normal operation.4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. transformer tap changers will be controlled by automatic voltage regulating (AVR) relays. automatic controls. at the substation. which are manually-dressed by the operators. The operator shall be required to enter that the control instruction has been issued before the sequence will continue. The initiation and completion of a predefined control sequence shall be logged. Associated with each sequence shall be a text description to allow the operator to identify what will be achieved by the sequence and a summary of the steps involved. These facilities shall include syntax and logical validity checks on the sequence. Automatic controls shall be issued by the control sequence function. Where set points are used for the transmission of MW and MVAr target indications to displays at power stations. It shall be possible to execute a sequence automatically or on a step by step basis. line switching. therefore. The raise and lower commands shall not require an execute action by the operator. Manual controls included within a sequence shall be carried out under instruction from the operator.1 Non-telemetered data Network diagrams may contain variable elements.3.Section 6 . Power station operators‘ acknowledgements shall be transmitted to the master station via the respective Outstations. If acknowledgement is not received after a preset time (user configurable) an alarm shall be generated and a message shall be displayed to the System Control Room operators. It shall be possible to configure such set points independently for manual entry. This shall require the operator to decide whether to continue by retrying the check or to cancel the sequence. or for automatic transmission (eg. the master station automatically resets the indication to show that acknowledgement is no longer required.6 Set Point Control Means shall be provided to transmit set point values to Outstations for output as analogue or binary coded signals.3. and this aspect shall be user configurable. Facilities shall be provided to allow the switching between automatic and manual control of the AVR‘s.3. busbar changing. with a single control.7 Manual Dressing 2. 2.4. The system shall handle a sequence generated control exactly as if it had been manually generated and shall provide all of the necessary time-outs and check of plant status. Once acknowledgement is received.51 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . via the GUI.7. 2. etc. from an EMS function). If a control sequence fails because of an unsuccessful check or control. Feedback of command execution will be by an associated change in the indicated tap position.4.5 Sequence Control Facilities shall be provided for the creation and editing of predefined control sequences to facilitate complex switching operations such as feeder switching.4. Circuit breakers and other remote controlled plant included in a control sequence selected for execution or being executed shall be identified on displays by a symbol. manual controls and delays. When selected to manual control.

The system must recognise an attempt by the operator to make an invalid manual-dressing operation and this should be blocked. from the workstation.4. as described above. shall be logged as an event. The notepad pages shall enable supporting textual and graphical information to be held in the system. It shall be possible to set a number of tags for the same object but only the tag with the highest priority (Operator definable/selectable) will be displayed. In particular. The trend display shall have adjustable x and y axis.4.52 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . where it shall act as a selection point to tag data and corresponding notepad pages associated with each tag. This shall be suitably indicated on the display by a symbol or tag to indicate the removal from scan. the following tags shall be provided.2 Telemetered Data It shall be possible from the operator workstation to remove from scan any measurement. Manual-dressing operations.8 Trending The system shall be capable of displaying any measured value in graphical form to show the trend of the value over a selected time period.Section 6 . so that control actions (e.g. to insert a new (manually-dressed) value for the element. with the manual-dressing also suitably indicated by a symbol or tag. but the system shall also support user-definable tags: a) Permit-to-Work (PTW) b) c) d) e) f) g) Sanction for Test (SFT) Operational restriction Point of Isolation Earth point. On manual restoration of the elements back into service the readings shall again be recorded in the database.1 General The operator shall have the facility to tag network diagrams to indicate various conditions. or indication that comes within the operators area of responsibility. It is essential that all tag lists and associated notepad pages are held on disc to ensure non-volatility of data in the event of a total Master Station shutdown. returned to their normal presentation and hence regularly updated on the displays.4.3. up to sixteen trends of real-time data or historical data. It shall be possible for the operator to link the tag to diagram elements. These other tags shall be readily opened via the ‗priority‘ tag. 2. The system shall support as a minimum 16 different tags.4. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and thus on all other displays on which that element occurs. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. It shall be possible to compare on the same display. with a suitable error message being displayed on the screen. Fault Information It shall be possible to place a tag marker anywhere on a diagram. circuit breaker closure) associated with the element is disabled.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Operators may change the status of manually-dressed elements on receipt of verbal instructions from site stating the actual element position.3. It shall then be possible. In such cases of multiple tags the tag shall be presented in such a way to show that other tags are present.9. Each tag placement.7. modification and removal shall be accompanied by an entry in the event list.9 Diagram Tagging 2.3.3. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and logged as an event. 2.

4 Earthing List The earthing list shall hold a comprehensive record of all earths applied to the network.1 Printing Printer Management Facilities All printers supplied shall be under the control of printer management facilities which provide buffering such that print requests do not disable operator interaction at a workstation whilst printing is taking Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.3 Permits-to-Work and Sanction for Test Tags It shall be possible for an operator to easily link points of isolation and earth point tags to PTW/SFT tags.3.9. 2.9. Expiry time Where a tag has reached its expiry time the Operator shall be alerted to this automatically.4.3. such that: a) b) c) Quick access links shall be established between the associated notepad pages. The list shall hold earth tag entries. The system shall issue an alarm when the PTW/SFT files are 90% full.9.3.4.2 Tag Lists Each tag type shall have its associated listing. 2.3. It shall be possible to link any such entries to a PTW/SFT.4.Section 6 . advising that archiving is due to be carried out.4.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.4. with the following supplementary information: a) Unique tag number (automatically allocated by the system and corresponding to that displayed on the diagram) b) c) d) e) f) g) Date and time of placement or removal Location and circuit description of tagged item Operator's identity Description of tagging action . The notes shall be stored in the System and their existence shall be indicated on displays to catch the attention of operators. this fact shall also be notified to the operator attempting to remove a PTW/SFT tag or the relevant isolation/earth tag Removal of a PTW/SFT tag shall cause associated operational restriction tags to be identified to the operator.10 2. in the manner described for tag list entries. Expired PTW entries shall be retained on the system until manually archived.9. An operator shall be able to view and print out both current and expired PTW/SFT lists. telemetered earthing point status information and manual diagram dressing information. 2.placement or removal The associated PTW/SFT numbers. Where an isolation/earth point is associated to more than one PTW/SFT.53 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10. 2. list entries and diagrams An operator shall be able to initiate an automated search of the earth list for those entries linked to a particular PTW An attempt by an operator to remove a PTW tag shall cause the corresponding isolation/earth points to be identified. It shall be possible to define notes which include displays or segments of displays.5 Operator’s Notepad The System shall provide a facility to allow operator‘s to create notes or messages to other operators.3. d) An operator shall be able to display and/or print out the PTW or SFT list in both tag number and PTW/SFT number order. which shall record all tags placed on diagrams.

This facility shall be user configurable. The Contractor shall demonstrate the accuracy of solutions and optimisation result for each application prior to operational acceptance of the system. trend displays. Any EMS module requiring special development for this project shall be identified. in order to ensure that the specified requirements are met. In addition to the main offer. redirect print output to an alternative printer to that originally selected to cater for situations where the originally selected printer is unavailable for printing.Section 6 . periodic or continuous printing. The Bidder shall provide sufficient technical detail in the offer to enable a full assessment of the suitability and compliance of facilities. offer improvements or cost savings. 2. The EMS system shall be able to interface with such a facility. future. The Bidder shall describe the method and tools that are used in his standard system to achieve this. such as the use of accelerating factors. optimisation algorithms.10. It is a requirement of the Contract that an interface be provided between the PSS-E applications and the SCADA/EMS system to enable interchange of data. in his opinion. in any location. diagrams.2 Transmission/Generation Network The transmission network presently comprises 220kV and 132kV cables and overhead lines. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.2 Screen Prints An operator shall be able to initiate a screen print to a full graphic colour printer upon demand. Wherever possible. Any decision relating to the selection of particular methods. The suite of software shall comprise two principal sub-systems: (a) Network Analysis and Security Assessment (b) Forecasting.3. 2. to be made. the Bidder is invited to propose applications/modules as options which. study cases etc. This facility shall be additional to those for printing of lists. which feed an extensive radially operated 33kV and 11kV networks.4.54 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Employer uses the PSS-E application suite for operational and network planning. etc that are specified elsewhere. etc. The estimated CPU loading factors and execution times for each major application program shall also be stated in –the Technical Schedules. reports.4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. sparsity techniques or special file management and accessing techniques. control and management of the 220kV and 132kV transmission network. or manually upon operator request.1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM General Introduction A comprehensive and integrated suite of power system computational assistance programs is required for the monitoring. The printer management facility shall warn operators of pending print buffer overflow. to aid the operator. the Bidder shall offer standard EMS modules with proven software. at each request. Printer selection should preferably be via a menu list although the system shall preset the selection to a user defined printer. results. at the time a print-out is ordered.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications place. It shall be possible for the print manager to automatically. In the near future the Employer intends to implement a ‗Transparent Despatch‘ facility to enable the details of daily despatch to be made available on line to market participants. The Bidder shall identify in Technical Schedules those EMS modules which will require modification to meet the specified requirements and shall provide an estimate of the extent of amendments necessary. whether for immediate. topology. Production Scheduling and Despatch. Printer buffers shall also retain data waiting to be printed to cater for events such as printers being temporarily off-line for paper loading. The set-up and execution initiation for each application shall generally be through an Execution Control Display which shall have a similar layout for each application or facility. and any proposed alternatives.4 2. The application of 400kV is likely in the future.4. The functional and performance requirements of the EMS are described in the following Clauses. It shall be possible to direct output to any appropriate printer type. as appropriate. The Bidder shall state the service experience of each module. 2.

their creation. without the need for any hardware or software upgrade. 2.55 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . At times the generated output from these units exceeds the local load and provides an infeed to the transmission system. It is important that. These give a guide to the size of network that the network analysis programs will need to handle at the time of commissioning. The triggering events shall be user definable and shall include system load changes and circuit loading thresholds. The real-time network analysis software shall comprise the following programs: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow. so that no special purpose or customised support software or procedures shall be provided solely for the real-time network analysis functions.4 Real-Time Network Analysis 2. When the triggering event is detected. and upon operator demand.3. The collective capacity of these sources of generation is significant and must be taken into account in the EMS modelling and optimisation.g. hydro or wind turbines exists in various parts of the network. input/output pro-forma.4. The general functional requirements of the User Interface (e. The programs shall be executed within a user-definable Network Analysis Sequence with a userdefinable periodicity. Facilities shall be provided to allow the operator to specify that some of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence. shall be standard modules within the EMS environment. However.3 EMS Database The general requirements for databases. embedded generation which may include small thermal.3. diagram displays.1 General Requirements The real-time network analysis software shall comprise a number of power system application programs. as required. These programs shall execute in response to trigger events and/or cyclically.4. The EMS shall be capable of handling a 400% increase in network size. etc) are defined in the Graphic User Interface Clause 2. for operator interaction with the EMS functions. loading values in time-based schedules) shall be provided. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that these functional and performance requirements are met with practical and reliable software implementation.4.4.4. The EMS shall cater for both existing and future multiple voltage network configurations and for a comprehensive mix of generating plant. The following Clauses describe some aspects of the functional and computational requirements of various key functional blocks in the EMS. The design of the database shall be such that any new application program can be integrated with minimum interruption to the normal operation of the EMS. it shall only be necessary to carry out database amendments to incorporate the increase in network size. are defined in Clause 2. to monitor and assess the security of the transmission system. as well as breaker status changes. construction of display pages.Section 6 .g. All support software for the real-time network analysis programs. as appropriate.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The transmission network is an island network but may in the future be interconnected with the Transmission System in Southern India. the data entry task is minimised through the general use of default (or previous value) entries within screen pro-forma. Each "load" above can comprise up to twenty individual 33kV feeders.8 and specific data management facilities for the SCADA/EMS functions are defined in this Clause 2. or as a result of the occurrence of a triggering event. There are a number of hydro and thermal generating stations within the Country. such as the security assessment and loss penalty factor programs can be executed not in every cycle but for every pre-defined number of state estimation runs. typically every fifteen (15) minutes for the complete sequence and at least every few minutes for state estimation. amendment and data entry. or upon operator demand. the initialisation of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. This is a significant issue and the system shall model this characteristic clearly. 2. trend plots. The scope of coverage of the EMS shall extend to the 33kV load points. each of which may be independently monitored for status and load (current). Means of easily duplicating data entries (e. Bid drawings show the Employer system for 2012 and 2016.4.

g. or a message to indicate that the sequence is currently in execution. The Network Topology program determines the connectivity of the network components. The convergence index for the last run of the State Estimator shall be displayed. The period shall range from one (1) minute to sixty (60) minutes in increments of one (1) minute (c) Definition and display of the cyclic execution ratio for any program in the Network Analysis Sequence relative to the State Estimation runs.2 Network Topology The Network Topology program is one of the basic functions of the real-time network analysis software. power lines and cables. Real-time Network Analysis Execution Control Displays shall be provided for the following functions: (a) Definition and display of the selection and sequence of programs to be executed in the Network Analysis Sequence (b) Definition and display of the cycle period for the automatic execution of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence.4. The system shall deal with the non-convergence of any program in a manner which requires the minimum amount of interaction with the operator but results in a sensible outcome. Execution Control Displays shall show the time remaining until the next scheduled periodic execution of the sequence. blocked.e. i. if necessary. shall be accepted by the program. The mismatch threshold defines the trigger for execution of the External Equivalent Network Modelling program (g) Definition and display of occurrences of anomalous data. convergence status. run the Security Assessment software for every two State Estimation solutions (d) Definition and display of the events that will trigger the real-time network analysis sequence. e.56 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . or upon operator request. and shall include a cursor selection point that allows a manual request for execution of the real-time network analysis sequence or any one of the programs in the suite of real-time network analysis software.g. This is particularly important where the values generated by a program which does not converge would normally be used by a subsequent program in the EMS execution cycle. etc. It shall be possible to define triggering thresholds for total system load change and percentage of circuit loading. In addition. upon operator demand. the controlled termination of a program which will not converge. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All inputs required for the proper execution of the real-time network analysis sequence shall be entered via Execution Control Displays and/or screen masks. capacitors. shall be executed in the sequence. through the single line diagram of the internal as well as the external networks. For example. Overall the EMS facilities shall provide a coherent and integrated approach and produce and present information in a form that is readily assimilated by system operators. reactors. terminated. It shall also be possible to define the priority levels of the outages in the list (f) Definition and display of the threshold boundary mismatch between the internal and external networks. It establishes the single line node-branch model of the current power network using status values from the real-time database.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the real-time Network Analysis Sequence shall be delayed for a pre-defined time interval to allow the power system to attain a steady state condition. Any one of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence shall be executable independently. those that cause measurements to be declared as bad data and raise alarms/messages (h) Identification and display of the status of each program including whether it is running. stopped. irrespective of the execution frequency relationship defined above. For operator demanded and event triggered runs. switches. When a new real-time network analysis sequence is initiated. any previously scheduled real-time network analysis sequence shall be removed from the pending queue or. It shall be possible to include both single and multiple outage contingencies in any one list. as well as to identify those breakers whose status change shall trigger the sequence (e) Definition and display of the contingency lists. using power system nomenclature.4. e. due to the occurrence of a triggering event. 2. The default contingency list used by the real-time Security Assessment program shall be defined via the Execution Control Display.Section 6 . Manual input or override of measurement values and states of devices such as breakers. if currently in execution. all network analysis programs. are removed automatically from the execution cycle. generators. Execution displays should provide details of program status under these conditions. programs which cannot be sensibly run without data from the non-converging program. Only one real-time network analysis sequence will be executed at a time.

The Network Topology program shall detect network islands and identify them to the operator. It shall also perform digital smoothing to minimise data acquisition time skewing for measured values and shall generate a vector of digitally smoothed MW. 2.3 State Estimation The State Estimation program is necessary in order to provide an accurate and reliable database for all subsequent energy management functions. 132/33kV and 132/11kV transformer MW. MVAr injections The State Estimator shall make use of all measured values where available. far external networks. bus voltages and phase angles for the observable portion of the transmission network. which may include the near external networks. MVAr injections (vi) Reactor. To assist with the presentation of network topology the program shall include a facility for tracing network connectivity and presenting this on network diagrams either by a change or colour or a change in line type. Bad data and measurement bias information shall be summarised in suitable Tables for presentation to the operator. MVAr flows (iv) Transformer tap positions (v) Generator. grossly erroneous measured values shall be detected. at all relevant line ends and buses for the state estimation and external network model calculation programs. Measured values which do not pass the checks shall be flagged and listed. (i) Busbar voltage magnitudes (ii) Line MW and MVAr flows (as shown on drawings) (iii) 220/132/33kV.57 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In addition. If an Outstation fails the State Estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance for those areas of the power system for which it still has telemetered values. (c) Transformer Tap Position Estimation Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The State Estimation program shall also perform plausibility checks. It shall be possible to invoke a trace from any point in the Transmission network for selected voltage levels. as well as parts of the internal network which become unobservable due to temporary loss of telemetered measurements. The state-estimator is required to maintain an accurate balance between the estimated flows on the boundaries between the external and internal networks. The State Estimator shall also be able to detect and report measurement biases. identified and eliminated from the solution process. alarms shall be issued and messages logged. MVAr and voltage magnitude. pseudo-measurements shall be computed and made use of with appropriate weighting factors.4. When a measurement is identified as bad data for a number of specified occurrences. (b) Bad Data and Measurement Bias As part of the state estimation function. equipment with an abnormal status. etc. a list shall be provided to indicate the electrical island to which each device /substation/power station is connected.4. The state estimator shall re-determine the best estimation of the system state after all such anomalous data is eliminated. For the un-observable portions of the network.Section 6 . line currents.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Network Topology program shall perform switch status validation to determine a consistent set of switch states. including line power flows. pseudo measurements shall be used. open ended circuits. as stated below and indicated in the Bid Drawings and Schedules. The State Estimator shall be able to re-incorporate the measurements once they are checked as being nonanomalous. The State Estimation program shall make use of all relevant measurements in the network and calculate the best estimated system steady state solution. MW. This checking process shall ensure that data points which have been identified as anomalous are not utilised by the state estimator until they are shown to be permanently recovered. The state estimator shall have the following features: (a) Measurement Data Real-time measurements will be available. The state estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance should the network split in to two or more observable areas (islands). For the unobservable portion of the network. The program shall generate summaries of equipment and network status including de-energised equipment. The calculated state values for both the internal and external networks shall be available for use by the other EMS application programs and for display on the single line diagram. based on assumption and historical data.

Rather. the current system state. Significant deviation between the estimated values and the telemetered tap positions shall be reported. there will not be any real-time measurement values.4.4. and generator power injection limits. For security monitoring purposes.4. There shall be user friendly facilities for defining. the limits may not be the actual operating limits of the components of the network. The Bidder may offer other applications as options which would assist the operators assess security and network stability in a predictive manner. (d) Security Monitoring The solution of the State Estimator shall be checked against the operating limits of the transmission network components. It selects the contingencies from the contingency list according to priority.g. 2. shall be utilised to establish the pseudo-measurements for the times of interest. (a) Contingency Selection The Contingency Selection program is the first stage of security assessment.58 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . as defined via a realtime Execution Control Display. Each security assessment mode shall also be executable on demand or by user definable triggering events. (d) Contingency Analysis The second stage of security assessment is Contingency Analysis. forecast of bus load distribution and generation schedules. the post-contingency branch flow and nodal voltages.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The State Estimator shall be able to estimate both in-phase and phase-shifting transformer tap positions when requested by the operator.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation The network modelling program shall be able to accommodate external network models as may be required in the future. which shall evaluate in detail post-contingency branch flows and bus voltages of the contingencies in the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. voltage limits. shall be used as the base case. the State Estimation program shall allow the operator to define an operating margin for each type of limit. the results of the state estimation programs. Power circuits that are loaded to their security limits in the base case shall be selected automatically for screening. State estimation programs shall then be executed to provide the base case system state. historical data. for both the internal and external networks.5 Security Assessment The function of security assessment is to predict post-contingency security violations using the solutions of State Estimation and External Network State Estimation programs. real-time mode and predictive mode: (a) Real-time Security Assessment In this analysis. 2. Security assessment divides into two solution processes. irrespective of whether they are in the contingency list or their priority in the list. annunciated and displayed on the single line diagram. Instead. Two modes of operation are required. for the current network condition. the system condition for future time horizons of up to two hours ahead shall be treated as the basis of the assessment. Constraint violations shall raise alarms in the alarm list. including line/cable ratings.4. Violation of the redefined limits shall be listed. loss of a transformer infeed at a substation results in restoration of supplies by automatic switching) and their impact on the security of the system. using power flow techniques with adequate accuracy. Automatic and periodic execution of either or both security assessment modes shall be accommodated in the real-time network analysis sequence. (b) Predictive Security Assessment (Optional) In the predictive mode. It shall be possible to define time steps at which the predictive security assessment will be made within the overall time horizon. The program shall take due account of any automatic switching regimes (e. Circuit ratings and voltage limits shall be checked and the severity of security violations of the contingencies shall be ranked in order of their relative seriousness. Contingency Selection and Contingency Analysis. The program shall determine. scheduled switching actions. validating and ranking contingencies for addition to the contingency list. At this point in the development of the transmission system the operators experience difficulties with voltage stability and load despatch which is often security constrained. via the execution control display.Section 6 . In this predictive mode.

Full AC network model equations. immediately prior to generator plant scheduling calculations and periodically in support of load dispatching calculations. as configured by the operator via the Execution Control Display. A penalty factor matrix for typical system loading shall be stored and updated. The output of the Bus Load Forecast program shall be available for viewing by the operator in the form of tables and on network diagrams. It shall be possible to configure the OPF facility for a wide variety of optimising tasks via a user friendly interface which can be configured to speed up the execution of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. It shall be possible to limit the number of contingencies that will be analysed to a user defined maximum (typically 50. The results of each contingency analysed shall also be available for displaying with information (e.6 Bus Load Forecast A Bus Load Forecast program shall be provided to forecast the loads at all the internal and external buses.g. 2. Load characteristics and time switched loads shall be taken into account by the forecasting process. These factors and patterns shall be modified by applying smoothing techniques. that result in branch flow and voltage limit violations. The Bus Load Forecast program shall be executed after each state estimation calculation. The analysis shall incorporate any subsequent and multiple tripping arising from violations caused by the first contingency.4.59 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . the active and reactive loads and generation injections and voltage magnitudes at different buses of the system. Results of security assessment programs shall be available for viewing.Section 6 . the re-distribution of power injections shall be according to participation factors which are pre-defined by the user. including any combination of: (i) Generators/Loads (ii) Transmission lines/cables (iii) Shunt capacitors/reactors (iv) Series capacitors/reactors (v) Transformers/Synchronous condensers (vi) Bus Couplers (vii) Outages causing islanding For generator and load outages.4.4. The security assessment programs shall have the capability to handle single and multiple outage contingencies. 2. a list of equipment subject to violations for each contingency. shall be forecast.8 Optimal Power Flow This facility shall enable an operator to optimise a target functions such as minimisation of losses.4. shall be used to derive these penalty factors.7 Loss Penalty Factors The network Loss Penalty Factors program shall calculate the marginal losses with respect to active and reactive power injections at the Employer generator buses. where N is user definable via the real-time execution control display.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications ranked contingency list produced by the Contingency Selection stage. based on current network configuration and State Estimator results. a list of violations for each contingency analysed. The matrix is required to support operational planning studies. The Bus Load Forecast shall provide modelling of embedded generation sources in order to effectively represent the effect on bus loads when in operation. Output from the Contingency Selection program shall include a ranked contingency list. minimise generation cost via manipulation of the physically controllable devices or quantities on the system subject to a set of constraints. The values for the factors used in producing the forecast shall also be available. and any other outages which cause loss of generation or load. The program will generally be activated following a user definable number of state estimation runs. location and type of violations) presented in a format approved by the Employer. for different times of the day. The bus load forecasting program shall analyse the results from the state estimation programs and update the stored distribution factors and load patterns with regard to both active and reactive power injections for different times (48 half hourly values) and day types covering the complete yearly cycle of climatic conditions. The results of the Bus Load Forecast are particularly useful to provide a source of information for pseudo-measurement values for those non-observable parts of the internal and external networks. although this should not be the ultimate limit) or to define that analysis will cease after N successive contingency evaluations have resulted in no limit violation.4. The Contingency Analysis program shall provide outputs including: lists of contingencies. 2. Displays shall also allow estimated and forecast values for individual loads to be compared. ranked in severity order.4. Based on these distribution factors and patterns.

selecting appropriate control variables. modifying variable limits. If the system cannot restore a save case reports shall be produced advising on the probable cause and shall include details of all inconsistencies which it cannot resolve. It shall be possible to set up scenarios for analysis from save cases and historical data. The program shall be executed upon operator demand. observing the effects of constraints and control actions on the target function. The following types of fault evaluation shall be provided: (a) Three-phase and Phase-to-Phase Short Circuit Faults The system states as determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition.4.9 Save cases Facilities shall be provided for generating save cases from study or real time databases. Output of the program shall include lists of post-fault branch currents/powers. It shall be possible to use the OPF in the real time and study mode environments. shall be possible even though the current database configuration (study mode or training simulator environment) is different from the one which was current when a particular save case was generated. The operator shall be able to specify the faulted phase(s) (single. Detection of any fault which would overstress any circuit breaker shall be annunciated (b) Phase-to-ground Faults Similarly to the three-phase fault calculations. including: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications repetitive tasks. Restoration of save cases. selecting appropriate constraint limits. from disk or archive. All real-time network analysis programs shall be available in study mode for operators to select for execution. The operator interface to the OPF facility shall facilitate the selection of target functions.4. There shall be facilities for identifying save cases and maintaining a record of those which have been stored on disk or archived. 2. ground fault current/power and bus voltages.4.Section 6 . the system states determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. Data for the study mode is based on saved copies (snapshots) of the relevant section of the real-time database.4. It shall also be possible to display the results of the analysis on one line diagrams and in graphical format as well as in tables. monitoring the optimisation analysis. It shall not be possible to recover a save case into the real time environment. An operator shall be able to retrieve saved case databases and then modify them via single-line diagrams (using the pointing device and keyboard) and the study mode Execution Control Display. Output of the program shall include lists of fault currents/powers and faults causing over duty of circuit breakers.6 Study Mode Network Analysis Study mode network analysis provides facilities to allow operators to carry out short term or operational planning studies. interactively. The operator may choose to calculate the fault level at all buses or at selected buses. 2. pointing device and keyboard.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation The Real-time Short Circuit Calculation program determines the possible over duty of circuit breakers. 2.60 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . reviewing the active constraints and causes of infeasibility. and reviewing the performance and nature of the results of the OPF analysis. The OPF facility shall produce solutions quickly and shall be able to deal with situations where an optimal solution does not exist without frequent interaction with the operator. any external fault impedance and the bus fault location. It shall be possible to maintain at least ten save cases of each type on disk and archive save cases to a readily retrievable medium. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. through the graphical interface. double or all three).

In the on-line mode. in order to minimise expected operating costs. By using interactive network editing capabilities. up to several days ahead of the event. 2.4. The system shall be capable of supporting the simultaneous execution of three different studies on three different workstations concurrently with the Real Time Sequence.61 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The HMI for the application programs in study mode. The plant scheduling facility shall be fully integrated with the other EMS facilities to ensure commitment schedules do not. it shall be possible for an operator to carry out security checking prior to any switching operation. During the lifetime of the SCADA/EMS system. The study mode Execution Control Display shall provide facilities to allow operators to select some or all the study-mode application programs to be executed sequentially and automatically. the facility will be used to derive daily commitments. as far as possible. shall be. similar to that for the real-time network analysis facilities. the Employer proposes to install additional thermal and hydro generating capacity and there is expected to additional mini hydro and wind generators. It shall be possible to apply the network analysis programs to save cases originating from the real time and study mode databases.HVDC Interchange Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Under these conditions the associated studies shall not interact at any level including event and alarm processing. some of which are based on IPP agreements and a number of mini hydro and wind turbine stations. upon demand. The EMS facilities shall include a plant scheduling calculation for optimising the start-up and shut-down times of all generators. including the study mode Execution Control Display. however.Hydro Chain/Complex . It shall be possible with the right access privileges.Single and dual fuel fired Gas Turbines (Open and Combined Cycle) . for example. In study mode it shall also be possible to use the output of the power flow and bus load forecast programs to generate base cases for the security assessment and other programs. using estimated demand data from the demand prediction facility. only be possible to initiate one study at a time from an individual workstation. The facility shall run in both on-line mode.Section 6 . to access the study mode environment from any workstation.Coal fired steam turbine .Embedded generation . The scheduling facility shall be able to accommodate the following types of generation and produce optimal hydro thermal coordinated schedules taking into account network constraints: . It shall also be possible to return quickly to the real time environment and without terminating the study session.7 Generating Plant Scheduling 2.4.Hydro Storage .Hydro Run of River . A workstation shall indicate clearly whether it is in the real time or study mode environment. It shall be possible for operators to define and save a number of such study-mode Network Analysis Sequences for subsequent selection and execution. These revisions may also be used to refine the scheduling of plant up to several hours ahead of the event. There shall be simple procedures for quickly utilising a study session based on the current real time situation regardless of the previous state of the study mode environment. The EMS functions shall be capable of incorporating these additional units as they are introduced onto the network. together with the study mode application programs. following changes in plant availabilities or demand expectations. The input/output data for the above programs shall be relevant to study mode analyses. There shall be facilities which allow an operator to modify a save case after it has been recovered. consistent with all system operating and security constraints.1 Introduction The system generation includes hydroelectric units and thermal units.Diesel . and in study mode. It shall. for longer term costing evaluations with manually prepared data. with the ability to calculate short-term revisions of these schedules.7. Typically. the facility shall permit the calculation of unit commitment schedules and expected generation power outputs at user defined intervals from 15 minutes to 1 hour. result in any constraint violations.

The Employer has database of historic data associated with the quantity of water that was available in a given year on a monthly basis since 1950. The applications offered shall satisfy the current operational practice in addition to the requirements specified in the section.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Further information on the generating plant. start-up delays. the scheduling input data comprises four principal data sets. with sufficient detail to demonstrate its efficacy for the Sri Lankan hydro system. hydro systems and current operational practice are given in Volume 7 Part D.4. the bidder shall present in his bid the hydro optimization algorithm that he proposes to use. to prepare preliminary schedules and to assist in operational planning and maintenance programming. their contribution shall be taken into account in the scheduling and despatch models.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data In the on-line mode of operation. After sufficiently studying the Sri Lankan hydro system detailed in volume 7. These are 'Fixed' Data. It shall also be possible to use the output of the generation scheduling facility as an input to other network analysis programs such as the security assessment program.62 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . This imposes constraints on the use of water for generation. The present mini hydro and wind generation stations are not subject to scheduling and despatch as their production is dependent on weather conditions and is usually automatically activated. (b) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. The data include: (i) Boiler and Turbine Plant Availabilities for all periods of the scheduling timehorizon (ii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iii) Temporary modifications to plant capabilities.g. functions describing turbine heat rate and boiler efficiencies (xiii) Regulating Reserve functions and parameters (xiv) Emergency Reserve parameters (xv) Start-up heat as function of boiler and turbine down times (xvi) Governor regulating gains (xvii) Output dependent operational and maintenance costs. Variable Data. The scheduling application shall incorporate detailed hydro topology models of each of the hydro complexes that represent the reservoirs and plant characteristics. However.Section 6 . e. the scheduling facility will be used to evaluate hypothetical future situations. (a) 'Fixed' Data (i) Minimum stable output for each generating unit (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings for each generating unit Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings of combined cycle units Maximum generation for each turbine (taking into account the MW/MVAr operating limits) (v) Boiler and turbine start-up delays as functions of down times (vi) Maximum sustained turbine output ramping rates (vii) Maximum sustainable step output changes (viii) Minimum turbine run periods (ix) Minimum turbine down periods (x) Overall generating unit heat-rate curves (xi) Efficiency curves for hydro units (xii) On combined cycle stations. Restricted outputs. Variable Data These data are held in a variable generation data file that is updated systematically and regularly by the on-line data system and by manual input of information. water flow or fuel restrictions. In study mode. This historic data will be made available to the Contractor for use in the water forecasting models of the scheduling applications. The hydro schemes also provide water for irrigation and domestic potable use. run-up rates.7. etc. Facilities shall be provided for establishing a library of commitment schedules. The scheduling application shall take into account any constraints arising from the water flow management restrictions. predicted system demands and system operational constraints. minimum run periods.

or other transmission loss coefficients.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs The plant scheduling facility shall derive the optimal unit commitment schedule taking due account of all plant operating costs and constraints. the short-term demand prediction facility shall be invoked to derive predicted demands over the time horizon of the scheduling period.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (iv) (c) (d) Variations from normal heat rates and efficiencies.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring The power system requires comprehensive reserve and plant monitoring facilities. In study mode. These will promote the improved management of system security and economy of operation.4. Outputs from the plant scheduler shall include: (a) Synchronising times and shut-down times for all generating plant over the scheduling time span (b) Run-up and loading profiles for all synchronised generators for each scheduling interval of the scheduling time-span (c) Expected emergency and spinning reserve generation for each scheduling interval (d) Expected active transmission security constraints for each period (e) Start-up costs of each plant item and system totals (f) Variable system generating costs by period (g) Total and marginal system generation costs (h) Hourly and daily summaries of the anticipated maximum and minimum load. On-line monitoring facilities are required for four principal categories of power reserve: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.7. over the relevant time span. and production costs.63 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . derived from on-line data (vi) Time elapsed since last shut-down.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes In on-line mode.7. together with system operational requirements and security constraints. energy generated (MWh). e. 2. as derived from network load flow calculations. using manually derived generation. Penalty factors. ambient temperature and other restrictions (v) Time elapsed since last start-up.g. shall be included as input data.7. due to cooling water temperatures. derived from on-line data. It shall be possible to automatically adjust the demand data for present and scheduled load management using data from load management programs. The predicted quantities shall include the total system demand at quarter-hourly intervals. 2.Section 6 . (vii) Water availability for hydro units taking into account irrigation and domestic requirements/limitations (viii) Value of water (to be calculated by this application) and marginal rate curves (ix) IPP agreement values and conditions Predicted Demand and System Data At each initiation of an on-line scheduling calculation. These shall include: (i) Minimum system spinning reserve (ii) Minimum system emergency or immediate reserve (iii) Generating Plant must-run constraints (iv) Simplified transmission security constraints in the form of modified generator or station output constraints and maximum zonal or group export and import limits (v) Minimum system frequency regulating gain These constraints should be defined for each quarter-hour period of the scheduling time-span. System Operational Constraints The calculated generation schedule is required to satisfy the relevant system operating constraints. together with any bulk supply point loads that are within network zones whose exports or imports are limited by transmission security considerations [see item (d) below].4. the scheduling calculation shall have the capacity to derive weekly or daily unit commitment schedules together with short-term revisions following system changes or unexpected demand levels. The operator shall be able to use stored data files for this purpose. demand and system data. It shall be possible to run the scheduler on demand without degrading the performance of the SCADA/EMS System. 2. the scheduling function shall enable the operator to initiate long-term studies.4.

3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility Short-term demand predictions are required for plant scheduling. Modelling of turbine response capabilities.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) (b) (c) (d) Emergency Reserve . The calculation of this reserve.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts Long-term demand forecasts are required for the purposes of operational planning. both for manually operated units and those under automatic generation control. The facility is required to run both automatically with on-line data and in study mode for longer-term network and economic calculations: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. This calculation shall be based upon bus demand data and under-frequency settings. Also to be included in this calculation is the expected load shedding via underfrequency relays over this timescale. but it shall not require immediate access to on-line demand data. available to respond within a defined (user-configurable) time of a few minutes. generator trips).this capacity will be evaluated as the sum of the unloaded reactive generation that can be made available by increasing the excitation of synchronised generators. 2. Reactive Reserve Generation .this reserve is the active power that is available within a few seconds of an incident. together with governor gains and response rates.4.4. for predictive security assessments and for operational planning purposes.1 Introduction The requirements for computer aided demand forecasts divide into two categories: long-term predictions for production and operational planning and short-term forecasts for scheduling and load dispatching. on request. The EMS facility is required to model individual generating units in sufficient detail to permit the accurate estimation of emergency reserves available in response to credible system incidents.g. 2. Predicted information requirements include the following items: (a) Predicted system peak monthly demands under average weather conditions. including production planning and plant maintenance scheduling.8.4. Input data will include historical demands over previous months and years. Standby Reserve . adjusted to standard weather conditions and corrected for deviations from nominal frequency and supply voltage. a consequence of plant scheduling and load dispatching.8.this component is the reserve generation provided by the unloaded capacity of the synchronised generation. The long-term facility shall run in study mode.8. including impending monthly peak demands and expected times of occurrence (b) Estimated monthly integrated energy demands under normal weather conditions (c) Estimated monthly and annual load duration functions for production planning and costing purposes.8 Demand Forecasting 2. These requirements are summarised below. together with the reactive capacities of all unused static reactors that can be made available by switching. for load dispatching.64 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Spinning Reserve .this reserve will include that available from fast starting gasturbine or hydro generation. standby and zonal reactive reserves shall include the values of the prevailing user-specified targets for these quantities. 2. The facility shall also provide statistical measures of the accuracy of compliance of generating units with scheduling and dispatching instructions. The display of spinning. It shall be possible to generate save cases for load forecasts produced in the study mode and to generate a number of forecasts for the same period but using different assumption for each forecast. to cater for occurrences such as circuit breaker trips resulting in infeed losses (e. using historical demand data from previous months and years. Plant monitoring facilities shall include the collation of data required to evaluate plant response models in relation to both steady-state and emergency operation. The reactive reserve in userspecified network zones shall also be derived.4. This component may be subdivided into auto-standby and manual standby. requires the aggregation of the expected responses of individual generators. is required for this purpose.Section 6 . as well as unsynchronised but ready to generate steam driven plant. Forecasts up to a year or more ahead of the event are required.

disable and set the execution periodicity for this facility through an Execution Control Display. approximate bulk supply point demands for security assessment and network studies (ix) Predicted total reactive demand. The function of the on-line demand prediction facility shall be to forecast total system demand. In this mode. Data outputs shall include: (vii) Predicted total system demand for each forecast interval for up to one day ahead (viii) By application of load ratios. The load dispatching facility is required to operate in two main modes: Computer-Aided On-Line Dispatching Mode and Study Dispatch mode. wind speeds and precipitation. relating principal substation demands to total system demand (v) Historical load data relating to typical standard daily load curves. load management and load shedding.65 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . with a user definable periodicity of 3-30 minutes.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching The computer aided on-line load dispatching facility is required to run automatically and cyclically.4. (b) These studies require the same input data as the on-line load forecasts. together with adjustments for voltage and system frequency deviations. taking due account of all operational requirements and system security constraints. interchange schedules and IPP schedules.9 Economic Load Dispatching 2. weekend days. time of day and year. and its distribution. corrected and adjusted demand data for updating the historical demand database. and prevailing or expected meteorological parameters.4. and its distribution. These are detailed in the following Clauses. Due account shall be taken of the current fuel or water utilisation of the generating plant.9. The calculated generator loadings shall take due account of all relevant input data as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. obtained by averaging historical active and reactive recorded demands. holidays and other special days (vi) System power factor at principal demand points. It shall be possible to enter weather data manually and to acquire it automatically via Outstations which interface with appropriate sensing/measuring equipment.9. the economic allocation of load. in order to minimise the minute-to-minute operating costs.1 Introduction The functional requirements for load dispatching include the economic allocation of loads to committed generating plant. but the input data will be manually alterable off-line by the user. (iii) Meteorological data relating principally to weighted ambient temperature (for humidity). embedded generation. The forecast interval shall be user configurable with a minimum interval of not more than 15 minutes. or upon operator demand. It shall be possible to enable.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) On-Line Short-Term Forecasts On-line forecasts are required up to one day ahead of the event for scheduling plant and for loading of plant. Study Mode Short-Term Forecasts Study mode short-term forecasts are required for system security and plant scheduling studies.4. Input data for the on-line facility will include the following items: (i) Recent on-line demand data obtained from the state-estimation facility (ii) Demand corrections arising from. the dispatch facility shall utilise both on-line data and database resident plant parameters to calculate the optimal trajectories of the outputs of all synchronised generating units. derived from the power factor data in (vi) above (x) Statistical information relating to previous prediction accuracy (xi) Validated. 2.Section 6 . taking due account of historical and on-line demand data. 2. (iv) Bulk supply point demand ratios. the type of day. by time-of-day and season. including weekdays. illumination index. by time of day and season.

the dispatch facility shall enable the operator to evaluate the dispatch problem associated with any feasible set of committed generating plant and demand data. by means of manual modification of selected previous output data. or achieving an alternative objective function.4. whilst satisfying all system operating constraints. The reactive power scheduler shall utilise an optimal power flow calculation for optimising reactive power controls. together with defined run-up loading schedules (xii) Transmission circuit and zonal security constraints that may require out-ofmerit operation.66 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . with manually entered generator commitment schedules and predicted future demand profiles.g. whilst minimising losses. minimum stable generation. capacities. economic continuous rating. Plant commitment schedules and demand profiles shall be prepared by the operator.1 Introduction A requirement of the EMS facility is the inclusion of a reactive power scheduling function for maintaining an acceptable power network voltage profile.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching In this mode.e.g. 2.10. within a study mode dispatch.10. load flow relating to security contingency analysis. maximum capability. The on-line reactive scheduling calculation shall be initiated automatically following execution of the on-line generation plant scheduling program or significant network topology changes. It shall be possible to run the program in study mode using saved case and manually entered data. stability and reactive power considerations).9. In particular. overall heat rates as functions of sent out (SO) active powers (i.Section 6 . Dispatch System Outputs (i) Target outputs of all synchronised generating plant. short circuit levels. reactors) (f) Transformer tap options Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.10 Reactive Power Scheduling 2.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data In on-line mode.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) (b) Dispatch System Input Data (i) For all committed and scheduled units and interchanges over the period: generator operating limits. By relaxing on-line plant or system security constraints. 2. the facility shall run on request. MW net of unit and static station MW requirements) (iii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iv) Water values and marginal rate curves (v) Interchange transaction costs (vi) Energy dependent costs of operation and maintenance (vii) Emergency reserve availabilities.4. prevailing and dispatched (iv) Active transmission security constraints (v) Average and marginal generation costs (vi) Transmission constraints MW. these constraints will be defined by the user typically as a result of off-line studies (e. or upon operator demand. The facility shall enable the operator to evaluate load dispatching under hypothetical plant and demand conditions. start-up delays.4. plant ramp rates and reserve functions (ii) For unit generators. (ii) Identification of target outputs which have varied by more than a userdefinable threshold since the previous load dispatch calculation (iii) Active power reserve generation. loading rates and operating costs (viii) Prevailing load shedding profiles (ix) Reserve generating capacity requirement (x) Transmission loss penalty factors obtained from load flow studies (xi) Scheduled start-up and shut-down times of all generating plant. 2. an operator shall be able to evaluate the out-of-merit operational costs due to those constraints. They will take the form of additional limits on the power outputs of individual power stations or generating groups.4. the reactive power scheduler shall utilise the following input data: (a) Predicted quarter-hourly bulk supply point active and reactive demands (b) Network configuration and parameters (c) Generating plant schedule and expected loads over the period of interest (d) Permitted generator operating regions in active/reactive power output planes (e) Availability of reactive compensating devices (e.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.67 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . in the on-line mode.4.3 System voltage limits Other security and operational limits. Subject to user-specified operational constraints. The control variable schedule shall include the following: (a) Generator MVAr set-points (b) Multi-step reactive compensator switch positions and settings (c) Transformer tap positions (d) Switching of bulk reactive compensation. including those not under AGC operation. It shall also provide means for automatically regulating power system frequency. for example. the generator active output limits will be constrained to those determined by the plant scheduling calculation. which will result in the determination of the optimal reactive control settings associated with the projected plant schedule and loading profile.1 General Requirements A means shall be provided for directly controlling the output of those generating units with interfaces for supervisory control by the SCADA/EMS System.11. 2. area interchange.2 Automatic Generation Control An Automatic Generation Control (AGC) facility shall provide the interface between the active power scheduling and load dispatching functions of the EMS and the generating plant. via the SCADA interfaces. Study mode operation will aid the operator in evaluating the effect of different operating regimes. thus allowing any sub-optimality resulting from the plant scheduling function to be discerned. The function shall provide power loading base points for all generators.4.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant 2. 2. including the minimisation of generation cost.4.10. Scheduled MVAr set points. for each generating set available for automatic control. the algorithm shall determine the values of the reactive control variables that minimise the objective function. 2. if required.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (g) (h) 2. the minimisation of active power losses and the minimisation of a measure of the deviation of the voltage profile from a desired user-specified profile.4. so that. The output of the Reactive Power Scheduler shall be in the form of detailed schedules of settings for the above devices. system time deviation and. However.Section 6 . Control of both active and reactive outputs of generators. It shall be possible both manually to modify and to store the schedules and to use them to provide the data source for setting the foregoing power network devices. Reactive Power Calculation The optimising calculation shall permit a choice of objective function. in study mode the operator shall be able to run the optimal power flow program without the constraints of the plant schedule (active power schedule). It shall be possible for an operator to enable the function to automatically issue controls to the devices (or values to set point displays). Control of active power shall be handled by the AGC function described below. shall be converted to the corresponding generator AVR and generator transformer tap positions and the control actions shall be executed by issuing the necessary raise and lower output pulses to the devices concerned.11. shall be catered for.10. The reactive schedule shall satisfy the following operational constraints: (a) User specified voltage limits and stability margins (b) Generator MVAr output limits (c) Circuit capacity and other security limits (d) Generator MW output limits. network configuration and system demand expectations. Reactive control of generating plant is required to follow the output of the reactive power scheduling function. in accordance with the schedules. means of enhancing the network voltage profile can be investigated.4. in response to the output of EMS scheduling and dispatching functions.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs The reactive power scheduler shall derive a schedule for reactive control variables over the daily load cycle and shall allow revisions of the schedule following significant changes in power plant availabilities. Normally.

4. installation and commissioning of frequency measurements derived from selected station busbars. as calculated in the On-line Load Dispatcher [Clause 2.1 Introduction The interfacing to the SCADA/EMS System with each of the transmission and generating stations for the transfer of operational information may take various forms.10] shall be arranged into schedules for issue to the power stations via the Data Exchange Facilities [Clause 2.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules Each active power target output data. Specific functions utilising the above interfaces are specified in the following Clauses.12. 2. The PCE will include terms dependent upon the difference between required and actual plant output. control deadbands and predictive loading signals.9].Section 6 . The AGC operation shall initiate a change in unit power output by means of proportional and integral control action in terms of the plant control error (PCE). The AGC system shall include comprehensive monitoring facilities to enable the operator to analyse control system performance and to promote the tuning of control system parameters. together with terms dependent on system frequency error and system time error.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The power loading base points shall take account of the operating limits and dynamical rate constraints of the individual generating units to ensure that the base point load is within the plant's feasible operating region. (e) Data via GSM channels from certain plant (e.9].4. and reactive power schedule data. The AGC facility shall include the facility for operating under Interchange and Area Control Error (ACE) modes. It shall also be possible to do this using Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Facilities for avoiding excessive governor set-point control action shall be provided by the use of filtering. 2.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations 2. The AGC function shall provide outputs for plant loadings in two alternative forms. These will provide the reference frequency measurements for the AGC function and will assist operators managing islanded sections of network.4. The first form shall comprise raise and lower pulses for governor speeder-motor action and the second form shall comprise set-point values for display and manual implementation. 2. depending on the facilities provided at each location. excessive control action will be avoided and the plant loading instructions follow a smooth trajectory. It shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to manually amend the schedules prior to their issue to the power stations.4.4. the load dispatch operator at the NSCC shall be able to either manually dispatch target active and reactive power output values to the set point displays of each generating set. embedded generation) The general requirements for the above types of facilities are covered elsewhere in this Specification.68 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In particular. Parameter tuning and control system testing shall require the temporary disabling of the control outputs to the plant controllers.g. The AGC system shall include facilities for adjusting independently all control system parameters and plant static and rate limits.12. The normal mode rate limit shall refer to sustained response whereas the emergency rate will be higher.12.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays For generating sets with set-point displays driven from the power station SCADA Outstation. and may include the following: (a) Telephony communication between the NSCC and station control rooms (b) SCADA Outstations at the stations for: Data acquisition Output to set-point displays Output of controls to plant (c) Facsimile communication between the NSCC and IPP stations control rooms (d) Via e-mail or CEB internal messaging facilities. as derived by the On-line Reactive Power Scheduler [Clause 2. the AGC function shall operate in both emergency and normal modes and it shall be possible to independently set operating limits and control parameters for each mode.4. The Contract shall include the supply. both for normal and emergency modes of operation. By means of user specified deadbands and filtering of the plant control error.

g.g. This shall include pro forma facilities for: a) Identifying a job b) Noting the reason for the job c) Identifying the work to be carried out d) Identifying the time.2 Job Management There shall be an integrated facility for controlling scheduled and unscheduled work on the transmission network.5 Embedded Generation Data Production data for embedded generators may be available from the respective locations via GSM channels or Operator entered values. save. issue and cancelling of the associated Permit to Work (PTW) f) Monitoring the progress of the job g) Managing the authorisation. e.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control For generating sets with plant controllers able to be remotely controlled via the power station SCADA Outstation. and execution (local or supervisory) of the associated switching e) Managing the authorisation. 2. it shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to either manually dispatch active and reactive power output set points to each generating set.e.Section 6 . The job management facility shall generate all necessary supporting documentation necessary for the execution of each job.5. The scope of work shall include provision and implementation of set point displays for each unit defined in the signal lists as having set point outputs.4. 2. 2.4.69 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 OTHER APPLICATIONS The applications described in the following Clauses shall be provided at the NSCC. for outages resulting from faults. 2. or to enable those EMS functions to output the controls directly to the plant.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role. The data will include whether a machine is running and the MWh production value for predefined and operator adjustable periods (typically 15 & 30 minutes). 'jobs' or outages.1 Switching Schedules There shall be facilities for assisting the operator to compile. The outage management facility shall receive inputs or requests for jobs/outages from the Employer‘s maintenance department via remote workstation(s) located in that department or from an NSCC operator. Once compiled and tested. issue and cancelling of any associated Sanction to Test (STT) h) Noting comments during and on completion of the job i) Identifying the relevant portion of the network diagram. review and authorise switching schedules. 2. e. using the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role. permits to Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. sequence.5. This includes documents for use in the field. it shall be possible to copy a switching schedule to other functions such as the Job Management and Load Shedding facilities. or to enable those EMS functions to directly output the target values to the displays automatically.12.12. The data shall be used to provide approximate MW values for the preceding period. switching schedules. i. The stations that are initially assigned for load frequency control are: Kotmale PS 3 units New Laxapana PS 2 units Samanalawewa PS 2 units Victoria PS 3 units The scope of work shall include the adaptation works to connect the set point at each generator unit and to set to work the AGC function with these generator units. test.

2. authorised. 2. This shall be one alarm or alert associated with the load shed list so that one annunciation for any number of cases is required and where the list shows the remaining disconnected loads.g. later.6 Load Shedding Schedules A function shall be provided that facilitates setting up of Load Shedding Schedules. The facility should also assist the operator. location and restoration.g. Switch status indications. identifying faults. 2. and provide advice on appropriate remedial action including recovery of unserved load. sanctions to test. The facilities shall be able to support the fully expanded System without degradation of performance. the situation shall be brought to the Operator‘s attention by periodically annunciated alarms or by other suitable visually effective means.g. The facility shall be linked to the Switching Sequence facility so that shedding can be instructed using simple instructions from the UI which will result in the required sequence to effect shedding to be initiated. As each stage of tripping is reached signals are sent to the local Outstation.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) Bidders shall include in their offer as an option any 'expert system' based facilities they could provide that would be appropriate and effective in the context of the Employer‘s transmission system. It also includes any documentation to be kept as a hardcopy record of the work. The list shall indicate the last recorded load of each feeder. alarms. It shall also be possible to archive job records. Although the load restoration is to be under operator control. their location and effect on the network.Section 6 . by compiling a list of those feeders shed through under frequency action.5. the System shall simplify the task by means of cross-linking the lists to diagrams and/or permitting initiation of control actions from the lists. each stage resulting in tripping of the connected feeder circuits at the frequencies set. The under frequency scheme is currently arranged in a number of stages. 2. identifying those who planned. performed and approved the work.6 HISTORICAL DATA The SCADA System shall incorporate historical database facilities for all measured.3 Fault Detection. Such facilities should provide the operator with assistance in analysing alarms and events.5.5. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each signal. It shall be possible to extract statistical information from these job records. Where shed load has not been reconnected after an Operator definable period following its interruption. The facility shall provide assistance to the operator to restore load following an under frequency event.70 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . if required and appropriate. e. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. The scheme is designed primarily to protect the power network in the event of a loss of infeed (e. digital and other internally calculated or generated signals.5 Under Frequency Load Shedding An under frequency load shedding scheme is implemented at a number of substations. to utilise the switching schedule facility to compile a schedule for isolating the fault and recovering any load that has been lost and. for restoring the system to its normal configuration. fault isolation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications work. The facility shall enable selection of loads and/or MW to be shed. hospitals). All signals shall be scanned periodically and updated values or digital status changes stored with station/point or other identifier. Such schedules would be used in times of shortage of generation or limitation of circuit loadings in order to curtail demand and protect the system or circuits. and subsequent system reconfiguration. the duration expected and to provide for a rotor system whereby the curtailment is shared by all but consumers with essential supplies (e.5. Location and Load Restoration (Option) Bidders shall include in their offer as an option facilities to assist the operator with fault detection. network connectivity information and other relevant data shall be utilised by a fault identification and location facility to assist the operator to identify faults. generator trip).

report and manage the daily system production and related factors. The format of all reports prepared by the Contractor shall be to the approval of the Employer. The data extraction via the spreadsheet client shall be user definable on a point by point basis in terms of the start and finish times and pre-processing of the data before delivery to the spreadsheet. it is able to automatically un-spool data that has been saved instead of being passed into the historical database. Facilities shall be provided for the printing of these reports either automatically at specific times or on request by the operator. where consistent with the above requirements.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Data shall be stored online for up to 12 months and be available for subsequent recall at any time. It shall be possible to use current online data. and presented either in tabular or graphical form.2 Energy Reports The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of reports to assist the Control Centre to record. These shall include daily. There shall be facilities for extracting data periodically and on demand from the historical database directly into third party spreadsheet programmes such as MS Excel™. The format of these reports shall be fully configurable by the operator using any system data acquired and/or calculated. There shall be facilities for selecting on a point by point basis whether or not an historical record is maintained for each telemetered data point. The reports shall be on a daily. There shall be user friendly facilities for archiving data to archive files to hard disk and to back up media and for recovering archived data. restored archive data or a mixture of both as the source data for reports. This ensures there is easy access to historical data and that. weekly and annual basis and derived from half hourly values of: (a) Pulse accumulator MWh and MVArh values acquired from energy meters (b) MWh and MVArh values calculated by integration of MW and MVAr values (c) Generator unit despatch instructions (d) Generator unit incremental costs Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All reports shall be available for display on the operator workstations. Data recovered from archive shall be accessible via the same tools as the current historical database. The design shall ensure that historical data is not lost if the historical database goes out of service and that when it comes back online. The historical data database shall use highly efficient compression algorithms to store the data. report configuration and presentation is very flexible. The operator shall be able to request an immediate printout of any report and this shall include the values stored up to the time of operator request. The Bidder shall describe the report generation facilities offered.7. It shall be possible to restore the data from the long term archive facilities at any time for viewing without disrupting the online historical data. 2.7 REPORT GENERATION Operators shall have the facility to configure periodic and ad-hoc reports. etc. The content and format shall be developed during the preparation of the Functional Design Specification. Historical data held on the existing SCADA system shall be imported into the new SCADA/EMS System and consideration should be given to retaining the present data structure. date. 2. 2.71 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . monthly and annual reports of network conditions and loading. These reports shall be routinely printed at a designated time. and support arithmetic and logical operations that may be needed on the data before presentation in the reports.7.1 Routine Reports The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of routine reports.. All changes in each real time data point (analogue and digital) received from the plant shall be recorded in the historical database. Ideally this should be done through a client facility that is integrated directly into the spreadsheet. The report generation facility must allow for selective searching for data by location.Section 6 . An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches its capacity at which time the data shall be sent to the Data Archiving System for long term storage and retained for future reference.

The System shall prompt for supplementary data. It shall not be necessary for the same data to be entered more than once in order to provide the source data for different SCADA/EMS functions. to accommodate such changes as:      Modifications to the power network topology Addition and deletion of substations (and Outstations) Amendment of signals at Outstations Signal processing requirements Reconfiguration of the communications network It is essential that database amendments propagate through the System and that all necessary consequential changes are carried out automatically.1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT General A data engineering tool with a graphical user interface shall be provided to generate and maintain all data and displays.Section 6 .8. The ability to activate downloading of stored databases to the online system shall not be limited to the System Maintenance Workstation user or to any specific workstation.72 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . as required. The system shall be capable of updating retrospectively any data that was not available at the half hourly interval (e. (g) The system energy balance between production and energy delivered to the 33kV system The weekly and monthly reports shall present cumulative values in a similar manner. The user shall be able to amend the real time database using screen pro forma and menu driven techniques. The daily reports shall present the following information: (a) Daily Despatch schedule per half hour (b) Daily Despatch actual per half hour (c) Load forecast per half hour (d) Load actual per half hour (e) Energy per half hour and daily cumulative values per unit and station (f) Other data and information shall be presented in a suitable text form to give a clear presentation of the factors influencing the daily production results. 2.g. as necessary.8 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (e) Generator variable and fixed costs (f) Generator unit availability (g) Generator scheduling constraints including permitted starts. in Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. The format and presentation shall be developed during the preparation of the database. For example. because of telemetry failure) but retrieved at a later time. stops (h) Generator unit regulation participation (i) Hydrological data pertinent to despatch and production (j) Weather data (k) Load forecast values (l) Transmission constraints (m) Transmission loss factors (n) Scheduled maintenance (o) Unscheduled outages (p) Other data available within the SCADA/EMS system or entered by users. It shall be possible to store offline amendments ready for incorporation into the real time database. it shall be possible to create an offline amendment of the database on the System Maintenance Workstation.

The diagram editing function shall be implemented using the same type of graphical user interface as that used for the power network control function. operators familiar with the facilities shall be able to use quick selection methods such as the use of function keys and/or short form command line entries. This shall be capable of imposing different access restrictions to different display editing functions. Facilities shall also be provided which ensure that when restoring.2 Data Entry The data entry task shall be made as simple and error free as possible.8. At one level the user shall be fully guided through the interaction with the editor by the use of menus and context sensitive help screens. The derived data shall be held in the database and shall be accessible. for display. character fonts and user definable symbols. However. So for example. or below specified limits over a selected time period. manipulation and printout facilities as are found in current proprietary products. User interaction with the editor shall support different levels of user familiarity by providing parallel paths for command entry.Section 6 . The access authority of the operator activating such a predefined database amendment shall be definable by the System Engineer and shall not be restricted to levels at or above those normally permitting on-line database amendments.8. The user shall have access to the facility. reporting and historical data compilation. These facilities shall enable operators to define status lists which list data points. 2. a user may be able to copy. block copying.3 Data Manipulation Function A facility shall be provided to enable the user to generate derived data using arithmetic and logical functions. The library shall hold a minimum of 256 symbols. The Contractor shall prepare a set of 20 displays or status lists covering 20 different sets of selection criteria to be defined during the course of the contract and provide a pro forma template which enables an operator to quickly set up additional status lists. These facilities shall include functions for generating duration curves for showing graphically when measurands were above. Construction of the diagrams shall use graphic primitives. There shall also be a facility for interrogating the Master Station database via SQL type queries. For example. as for any other real time data. wherever possible. but be prevented from updating the current (operating) diagram files. amending or regenerating the system database it is not necessary to re-enter all data which had previously been entered manually. The Bid shall provide a detailed description of the facilities he will be providing in respect to the requirements of this clause. etc shall be the sort of mechanisms provided to facilitate this activity. The spreadsheet facility shall also include normal spreadsheet calculation. 2. User access to the function shall be controlled through the normal system access control mechanism. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Facilities shall be provided which allow operators to quickly restore the original database on the operational system where amendments have been incorporated and found to be unsatisfactory. To assist the operator in making a query which relates to one or more items of equipment there shall be simple procedures for identifying the item or items of equipment to be queried on one-line diagrams.8. modify and store diagrams.73 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . substations etc in accordance with user defined criteria and which can be designated for updating on a cyclic basis and on demand by the operator. and initiate its incorporation into the online System from a control room workstation at a later time. measurand alarm limits shall automatically be checked to ensure that HH>H>L>LL and that dead bands (which shall be user definable) do not overlap with adjacent limits. The user shall be able to construct the definable symbols using other symbols and graphic primitives. which shall include spreadsheet format or 4GL language. through an interpretive high level interface. menu selections. equipment. Each symbol shall be capable of being scaled and oriented at will during construction of a diagram. Such user defined symbols should be capable of being stored in a library for ready retrieval and use in diagram construction. Screen proof reads.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications advance.4 Graphic Display Construction Diagrams shall be prepared and modified using an interactive screen display editor that shall be available at any workstation incorporating graphic display capability. within. Validity and plausibility checks shall be carried out on all data entries.

for example. eight fill patterns and 32 colours. and that of the associated communications arrangements. Independently. etc. circuit breakers. prior to making the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities available for use by the Employer. For the purpose of training and becoming fully familiar with techniques and methods for data configuration.g. comprising 96 characters each. arc. Bidders shall clearly define in their Bid the tasks they have allocated to be performed by the Employer. the design of report formats. polygon. The remaining database and graphics work will be completed by the Employer‘s staff following suitable training and under the supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out any necessary training. They will use the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities in the task of entering the project specific data required to configure the new SCADA/EMS System database(s). The text strings constructed from them shall be capable of being freely scaled and oriented as for user defined symbols.1 Configuration Responsibilities It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all configuration tasks are completed correctly and in accordance with the approved project programme. The Contractor shall be responsible managing this work through to successful implementation is completed. produced by the Contractor. e. The Contractor‘s training regime shall ensure that the Employer personnel shall be fully competent to undertake these tasks as the system evolves over time following completion of the Works under this contract. measured values. the required programme for the performance of those tasks to meet the overall project programme and the resources required to complete those tasks. where the states of corresponding busbar isolators.Section 6 . For construction of the multiple layers of a world map. the entry of network electrical parameters. at a certain magnification level the substation diagram may represent each line end status as a single symbol. circuit breaker.74 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc). circle. etc. line isolator. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the 'first fit' of user definable displays including the world map single line and geographical representations and individual object summaries together with displays relating to the SCADA System status (including Outstations). Diagram construction shall be made less arduous by providing editing tools. etc. The responses for active and interactive elements shall be determined by user definable default values of attributes for each element type. although default values (last setting) shall normally apply until changed.g. e. the editing facilities shall enable the diagram elements from an adjacent plane or overlay to be transferred to the layer being constructed.g. It is anticipated that this configuration task will include the preparation of network diagrams. During diagram construction. rectangle. It shall be possible to select from a minimum of eight line types. To facilitate the tasks of data engineering the Contractor shall arrange for the Maintenance Workstation to be delivered at an early stage of the Contract. it shall be possible to define line type (thick/thin. to build screen displays and report formats. It shall also be possible to define the element as passive. It shall be possible to define elements such that they respond to a logical combination of database points (e. the number of workstations required to be used to perform those tasks. A minimum of two vector character fonts. colour. as appropriate. To assist the Employer in future data gathering and collation activities the Contractor shall specify the detailed requirements of all data necessary to configure the SCADA/EMS System to enable it to meet its specified functionality. line type. In this way the user shall be able to define how an element changes its appearance in response to a change in a database point or points to which it is linked. the Employer will provide a number of staff to assist in this exercise. but they shall be capable of independent amendment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Graphic primitives typically comprise: line. alarm points. etc. it is intended that some members of the Employer‘s data engineering team will spend at least one month in the Contractor‘s Works assisting with Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. ellipse. screen displays. This shall provide a means for readily aligning the diagrams on different layers of the world map and speeding diagram building. Diagram elements may be defined as the component parts of the power network representation. 2. active or interactive. Additionally. both in terms of man power and System facilities. solid/broken) fill pattern and colour for each. the user shall be able to define certain attributes associated with the elements (e.4. to facilitate the copying of areas of the diagram and replication of them within the world map and to permit the relocation of areas of the diagram without disrupting connectivity. etc are logically combined to a single status indication). text labels. This information shall be provided as part of the Contractors training effort. shall be defined.g. power lines. field signal definitions..8.

Previous revisions of graphics and databases shall be retained for manual deletion by the system manager. The Contractor or the Employer's staff under the supervision of the Contractor shall incorporate any such changes into the system. b) Interface to the Employer‘s PSS-E study and planning applications. and update the source data under supervision of the Contractor.8. c) Interface to a future ‗Transparent Despatch‘ facility.1 The major objectives of the training simulator are summarised as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.75 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . word processors and graphics programs. and shall advise the Employer of these implications. d) Dynamic data linkages such as ODBC. until the modified item is specifically substituted for the original. The facilities shall be able to provide an audit trail to identify changes and the by whom the changes were carried out by.10.Section 6 . alarm/event lists and reports available within the system h) E-mail i) Facsimile The external access shall not affect the operational performance of the system in anyway and shall be via a highly secure mechanism whereby non authorised user cannot access the system and no authorised external user can make modifications other than providing data such as may be required for reports or operational planning. If any changes are required to database. 2. DDE and OLE shall be provided to access real time and historical data by Windows™ based applications such as Word. trends.5 Changes to Configuration Data During the initial configuration period prior to provisional acceptance initial source data may change as the Employer's staff gain a deeper understanding of the process and they or the Contractor gather more complete and or accurate power system data. screen or report configuration data after completion and before final acceptance. 2.9 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES The System shall be capable of supporting the following data interchange facilities: a) Import/export of data via a standard SQL interface. e) Export of files in standard formats suitable for import into spreadsheets. The data engineering tools shall have built-in extensive validation checks on power system components and their integration topology.6 Change Control When modifying the database or displays.8. etc. The Contractor shall consider the implications of any such changes on the hardware and software capacity and performance of the system. Excel.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the initial data engineering tasks. the Employer will provide details of the changes to the Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall include the cost of travel and subsistence for 6 persons in his Bid. f) Import/Export of data via ICCP (TASE 2) interface g) Web server that permits external users with appropriate access rights to obtain network displays. The original item shall be available for selection as part of the normal real time system operation. the item to be modified shall be copied into a work area for modification. The Contractor shall ensure all changes are subject to formal change and version control procedures.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR Objectives 2. 2.

active and reactive power loading static and dynamic limitations.10. AGC. scheduling. -Simulate load shedding -Simulation of the operation of protection relays -Simulation of the operation of re-closers. -Load sensitivity to voltage and frequency. it shall be possible for save cases and database snap shots available on the main system to be loaded and used in simulation sessions. turbine controls (primary frequency regulator and interactions with AGC for secondary frequency regulation). Instructor facilities shall be provided to set up any number of pre-determined sequences of timed chronological events to change the state or value of any point defined in the simulation model. -Long-term dynamic models for generating unit components. A specific console shall be dedicated to the instructor for supervising the training. The software facilities to be provided shall be fully described and are expected to include the features described in the remainder of this section. including boiler and boiler controls. However. -Simulate random disturbances to measurements. forecasting. The simulation software shall display to the trainee the redistribution of network voltages and powers based upon the simulated operating conditions. b) To provide realistic simulation of power network events in quasi-real-time so that control room operators can be exposed to a wide range of power network contingencies and interactively initiate remedial actions. The simulator shall present the following features: -Variations of loads according to predefined models. -Simulate multiple islanding of the network Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. -Simulation of the operation of synchronous-checks. despatch. voltage regulators. 2. To fulfil the above objectives a separate operator workstation as a training simulator is envisaged.2 Simulation Functions The SCADA User Interface functions provided for the training simulator shall be the same as those provided in the Control Room except that the data acquisition functions shall be replaced by an event simulator. The basic functions available in the simulation environment shall be the same as those used in the operational system including SCADA functions. power system analysis functions in real-time and study-mode.Section 6 .76 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The facilities shall not cause any disruption to the normal operation of the NSCC whilst training is taking place nor adversely affect the reliability and availability of the on-line SCADA system whilst training is taking place. The man-machine interface of the instructor and of the trainee-Operator shall be the same as that of the Operators in the control room. -Simulation of the effects of a fault. The simulation model used shall be identical to that for the power network applications. The network behaviour shall be presented either at real-life speed or with some acceleration or slow down factor. The instructor shall be able to monitor simulated events and trainee responses during simulation and be able to introduce further scenarios at will. The event simulator shall provide simulation of the real-time power system offering a realistic perspective to the trainee. Individual points shall be described in these ‗scenario files‘.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) To enable control room operators to become fully practised with the SCADA/EMS facilities under steady state conditions. water flow and controls for hydro generators. The instructor shall also be able to activate individual events or chains of events at will from the instructors console without first having to set up a scenario. The bidder may offer a simulator meeting the full EPRI standard as an option.

a predefined end of a tripped transmission line will attempt three reclose operations at specified times. transformers. phase angles.. the check is done on voltage magnitude and frequency differences. In the case where the two ends are in different islands. Otherwise. and frequencies across a breaker before attempting closure. -Under/over voltage relays which trip bus load breakers or generators according to the value of the bus voltage. -Allow / prohibit supervisory control of breakers. -Synchronous check relays shall be modelled which check voltage magnitude. Relays which operate rapidly during transients in the system need not be modelled and only their effects are introduced into the simulation. -Set RTU and communication lines out-of-service. The simulator shall be configurable to serve as testing tool during Factory and Site Acceptance Tests 2. -Change plant control mode (local / AGC). -Trip generating units. Inverse time over current relays shall be modelled. These relay models shall trip the associated breakers if the violations exceed predefined thresholds based on duration and magnitude. When both ends of the breakers are in the same island. If the line has a permanent fault. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . -Active and reactive branch flows. or conditional to some designated variables satisfying some instructor specified condition. For example.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications -Simulate reconnection of network islands The simulator shall compute a complete AC load flow solution in the acceleration framework.10. -Active and reactive generations. -Loads. Through predefined scenarios or through manual interventions during a session. the difference between the voltage magnitudes and phase angles at the two ends have to be less than a specified value for closure to occur.3 Relay modelling Protection relay models which trip or close circuit breakers and switches for the purpose of protecting and controlling the Power System and its components shall be provided. the successful reclose at the near end is simulated in the power flow with subsequent reclosing of the far end. Such events shall occur either at instructor specified times. a short circuit on a high voltage transmission line activates protective relaying within a few cycles but this process shall be modelled in the scenario as the tripping of certain circuit breakers. Relays shall be modelled in such a way that the automatic switching operations in the network are accurately portrayed in the simulation. Those relays that operate because certain simulated variables reach particular thresholds shall be explicitly modelled. -Frequency in the range 45 to 55Hz. The following relay types shall be represented explicitly: -Under/over frequency relays which are activated by the value of system frequency. -Trip lines or transformers. For example. voltage and frequency excursions shall be processed by relay models. the reclose operations are unsuccessful and there is no effect on the simulation except for circuit breaker status closing and opening. -Automatic reclose relays attempt the reclose of transmission line circuit breakers after they have tripped. the instructor shall be able to: -Modify the loads (individually or globally and time scheduled). The near end breaker (s) attempt reclose for a maximum of three times. It shall provide: -Bus voltages in the range nominal +30%/-30%.77 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Line or transformer overloads.

The detection of the loss of a communication channel shall include the following conditions. a) No carrier from the Outstation over a user configurable time period (where appropriate) b) No reply from the Outstation for a user configurable time period and number of tries. The data acquisition server shall be capable of being equipped with the following interfaces for communication with the Outstation equipment: a) V.1 Operating Systems It is required that each category of computer has its own operating system and that this operating system is capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer. 2. Highly reliable mass storage devices shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system. c) A user configurable number of bad responses in a user configurable period of time. 2.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE 2. Each data acquisition server shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. On completion of the project update and maintenance of the Antivirus product will be undertaken by the Employer IT staff.3. All servers shall be rack mounted within a cubicle. graphics and the archive and retrieval of historical data on magnetic or optical media.11.2 Antivirus Software Antivirus software shall be supplied on all computer systems. is exceeded for a predefined time.2.28 interfaces for unbalanced communication configurable up to 9600 bps. including CRC errors. The operation of this device shall not require that the device be physically connected to each computer in turn. database configuration. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion for future use as specified in 2. 2.11. 2.3 Servers All servers shall be of a well proven design suitable for ‗real-time‘ operation where reliability is a prime consideration. b) 64kbps interfaces c) TCP/IP 100/10 Mbps (where appropriate) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. applications and data.Section 6 . The Bidder shall describe the management process by which this will be carried out. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software. Where a number of servers are mounted within in a cubicle or suite of cubicles it is permissible for these servers to share a single system console connected via a KVM switch. All servers shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications -Directional and non-directional inverse time MVA or current flow relays which trip a line or transformer if a limit. length errors in data etc.11. However it is not acceptable for the system console to be shared with a server or servers located in another equipment room.78 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . MVA or current.4 Data Acquisition Servers Data acquisition servers shall be provided at the Master Station to independently carry out all acquisition and processing of telemetered data. and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. For each communications channel the data acquisition server shall detect loss of communications with an Outstation and raise an alarm.11.24/V. All servers shall have redundant hot swappable power supplies.

5 Operator Workstations Each operator workstation shall be equipped with alphanumeric keyboard and mouse/trackball and LCD screens.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. operator workstations. The LAN shall be complete with all necessary terminal/printer servers. The dual redundant LANs will be constructed.1 Ethernet switches Where dual redundant LANs are required. All transfers of devices between redundant LANs shall be performed automatically without disruption of any logical channel between applications.79 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . multiple independent Ethernet LANs shall be concurrently supported. There shall be 50 per cent spare capacity above that required for the fully expanded system.11.11. bridges. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software. Hot-swappable boards. Media support for Ethernet Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6. Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades. separate Ethernet switches and power supplies shall be supplied for each. routers/gateways etc necessary for the operation of the SCADA system. Failure or degradation of LAN operation shall be reported via alarms. 2. or malfunction of a piece of hardware on a LAN shall not interfere with the operation of that LAN. The removal. The LANs must be constructed to provide the necessary throughput to meet overall system performance requirements. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion capacity for future use as specified in 2. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate main memory for the required tasks with 50 per cent spare capacity. The Ethernet switches provided by the Contractor shall have the following minimum features: a) Multiple LANs supported concurrently.6. powering off.2 Media support for Ethernet Category 5 e UTP or better. separate LAN switches equipped with redundant power supplies. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm.2.11. Failure of a LAN in a redundant configuration shall not degrade system performance below the specified performance requirements of Section 2. Single-mode fibre up to 2 kilometres. In particular. All LAN equipment shall be rack mounted within a cubicle. and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. repeaters. When required a firewall or filtering router shall be provided to separate the SCADA master station LAN from all other LANs and WANs. Redundant power supplies (for main switches).Section 6 . Routers Where routers are provided for connections of other LANs to the SCADA LAN for the purposes of remote access or the exchange of operational data these shall have the following minimum features: a.11. Centralised network management via SNMP. The operator workstations shall meet the requirements defined in Technical Schedules 2.12.6 Local Area Network (LAN) Interconnection between computers. communications servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant LAN which conforms to IEEE standards. b) c) d) e) f) g) h) 2. The number of workstations and LCD screens shall be as stated in Technical Schedules.

Hot-swappable boards. The construction shall provide for an aesthetic mounting and finish. or via hardware switch through a standard GPIO port. Printers shall have separate black and coloured toners and printers using individual colour cartridges are preferred to those that use single multi-colour cartridges. network equipment.Section 6 . Each printer shall be capable of printing at minimum speed of 15 ppm. The projection system must be capable of being controlled via remote keypad (wired or IR). Centralised network management via SNMP. 2. f.11. The system shall include both digital (DVI) and analogue inputs and allow easy expansion to support additional inputs for compatibility and redundancy purposes. d. The design of the construction and appearance shall be subject to approval by The Employer. 2. The joints between panels shall be such that lines or diagram elements crossing them are clear and without discontinuities (a maximum screen to screen gap of 1mm).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications   b. 2.8 Video Wall The Video Wall shall provide for a 8 panel display with overall size of approximately 160 inches wide x 60 inches high comprising 50‖ (diagonal) panels.11.11.7.11.1 General The devices shall contain off-line self-test systems that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. e.2 Laser Printers All laser printers shall produce clear black & white copies on standard A4 paper or transparencies with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi..11. and support peripherals. Each printer shall be capable of manual and automatic paper handling and be equipped with 500 sheet paper tray.11. 2.3 Colour Printers Colour printers shall comply with the above requirements for general purpose printers. The printers shall be able to print A4 and A3 black and white and colour pages.80 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Printer consumables shall be readily available locally in the Employer‘s country. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. via external computer or terminal via networked RS-232.7 Printers 2.6. LAN Management LAN management facilities shall be provided via a full graphical user interface that shall be supplied and configured. 2. Each panel shall be set and be capable of automatically maintaining equal levels of contrast and brightness to each other in order to achieve an even and homogenous presentation of displays and information.7. Redundant power supplies. The number of laser printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules. This management function shall provide overall control and monitoring capabilities to reconfigure and indicate the status of the LANs. by external computer via Ethernet. The number of colour printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules.3 Category 5 e UTP or better G703 optical fibre interface Multiple routing protocols including RIP and IGRP Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades.7. The equipment offered in this Contract shall be suitable for continuous 365 day per year 24 hour control room operation and have been proven by satisfactory operating experience in similar environmental conditions elsewhere. c.

The entire video wall must be available for presentation of a minimum of 16 windows containing graphical displays. The projection system shall not contain arc lamps. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.3. c.4.g.11.3. 2 off DVI inputs 2 off VGA inputs The video wall controller shall be resilient to single equipment failures e. The Bidder shall specify the heat loads generated by the video wall equipment.2 Controllers Video wall controllers shall be supplied for interfacing to the SCADA system equipment.8. Outline details shall be submitted in the Bid and agreed with the Employer prior to manufacture.4.Section 6 . The screen technology shall be of a Fresnel lenticular construction and not use a Blackbead screen technology.4 Software The video wall controllers shall be capable of displaying windows from all sources simultaneously. Duplicated Giga/Fast Ethernet connections 2 off video/CCTV camera inputs. motorized colour wheels. d. The installation of the display wall units shall be such that they appear as an integral part of the overall enclosure.8.3 Video Wall Construction The minimum overall size of the video wall display area shall be as stated in the technical schedules.8. 2.11. In addition panels shall be located at each end to house the displays described in sections 2. The display units and their supporting structure shall be enclosed in an external finish to the approval of the Employer.8.11. Fixed access shall be provided for maintenance of the units as part of the video wall supporting structure. through the provision of independently fed redundant power supplies. These panels shall be sized and constructed to house additional active video wall screens which may be implemented at a later date.11. The Bidder shall specify the viewing angle which must be at least 180 degrees horizontally and 120 degrees vertically. or motorized apertures.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. 2. The Bidder shall describe the resilience features of the equipment supplied. The Contractor shall be responsible for the confirmation of actual enclosure dimensions prior to commencing manufacture. The display units and associated equipment are to be installed in a suitable enclosure for location in the control room. Samples of the proposed finish shall be provided to the Employer for agreement prior to manufacture.3. The video wall controllers shall be supplied with Microsoft Windows based operating system.3. b. The Bidder shall state the brightness which shall be at least 450 Cd/m2 and also the brightness uniformity between centre and edge of screens which must be greater than 90%. It must be possible to move and resize these windows to use any part of the video wall area.6.81 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . All maintenance of the display units shall be from the rear of the units. Green and Blue LEDs. The lower edge of the display units shall be 1. Each display unit shall be equipped with a three colour LED light source using single separate Red. 2. It must be possible to enlarge any single window to use the whole display area. Each video wall controller shall be equipped with the following interfaces as detailed in the technical schedules: a. The display units shall be installed fully in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and in such a manner that allows safe access for maintenance.5 metre above the floor level.1 Display Units Each rear projection display unit shall be equipped with projector based on DLP technology capable of 1400x1050 SXGA+ pixels or higher resolution.3 and 2. The system shall automatically ensure a consistency of colour and intensity between each display panel.

2.1 Normal Activity Conditions The normal activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 2 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. 2. g) All application and standard software running as normal. as the information is permanently on display separate dedicated display devices shall be mounted adjacent to the Video Wall and fitted with surrounds and bezels in keeping with the Video Wall design. However. 2. The performance test shall be carried out at different times of day including crossing hour.3.11. Outstations shall normally be synchronised directly from GPS equipment located at each of the substations. Similarly Hydro Complex Displays shall be provided in an adjacent panel to the Video Wall. To this end the Video Wall housing shall have a panel at each end both with matching bezels. day. in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations.11. It shall also be possible to synchronise the Outstations from the Master Station via the SCADA telecommunication channels in cases where no GPS is installed or the GPS has failed.82 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . the Master Station equipment shall initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure. and monitoring of performance shall be provided with the video wall controllers. Facilities shall be provided for the definition of up to 8 video wall window layouts which can be recalled from the management interface. backup.11. Where the Master Station equipment is required to maintain time synchronisation of the Outstations.12. d) A total of 2 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute.3.4.5 Management Management facilities for the control. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. Updating shall take place automatically at start-up and regularly thereafter to ensure that the error between the GPS master clock time and Master Station Servers does not exceed 1 ms.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. e) A new display being requested every minute (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications).Section 6 . The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure. This shall be from a dedicated console that provides control to all equipment connected to the video walls.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE The following Clauses describe the performance requirements for the System operating in its normal configuration. The time synchronisation procedure shall maintain time synchronisation between the Master Station equipment and each of the Outstations to better than 10 ms and to better than 20 ms between Outstations. 2. Time synchronisation between workstations and servers on the Master Station LAN shall be better than 10 ms. month and year boundaries.10 System Displays System Displays shall be provided to present the information described in section 2. with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. With the exception of the directly derived frequency measurements the system shall be able to present this information on the Video Wall.8. b) A total of 1 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. f) One alarm page ‗accept‘ every 3 minutes.9 System Time Time synchronisation of the Master Station equipment shall be from the GPS master clock system located in the NSCC.6.

2. shall not exceed 15 minutes. The time for the display to be refreshed following each step shall be no longer than 0. all functions shall be available to the operators.5 System Response Times The performance of the System shall meet or better the maximum response times specified in Table 2.25 second.3 Computer Start Up Total time for the start up of a computer. The response times for events and alarms shall be measured from the time of occurrence in the field of the initial event/alarm to the time the relevant operator display is updated with real time data or an event or alarm appears in the respective list. Panning and zooming in/out movements shall be achieved in increments of no greater than 1/8 the screen size.12. All applications and standard software running as normal.g. b) A total of 10 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. Automatic restart following a power down shall not exceed five minutes. at each operator workstation (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications). Thus. including full update from the field.83 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . failover to a hot standby computer or reconfiguration of networked tasks) or for any other reason. Updating from outstations may extend beyond this time but the full update of the System with data from the field shall not exceed a further five minutes. The Bidder shall provide detailed calculation that demonstrates that the proposed system has the capacity and response capability to meet the full requirements for performance initially and when a fully Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station.12. shall not exceed five minutes. a complete restart of the System. including automatic program load.4 Transfer of Operation No operational feature of the SCADA/EMS System shall be unavailable for more than 30 seconds at any time due to the transfer of operation from one processor to another following processor failure (e.12.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications h) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes.5 seconds after the panning/zooming operation has completed. 2. Immediately after failover. with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. i) f) One alarm page ‗accept‘ every 30 seconds. The operators shall not need to login again and the display selections should remain as they were prior to the failover.12. g) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes.2 High Activity Conditions The high activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 10 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations. 2. initialisation and database updating. e) A new display being requested every 15 seconds. the time for the display to be refreshed shall be no more than 0. 2.12 The response times for interactions with the UI displays shall be measured from the time of completion of the initiating action on the operator display to the time the relevant operator display has been fully updated with the respective real time data resulting from the action. d) A total of 10 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute. If a display is suspended during panning and zooming.Section 6 . Complete SCADA/EMS functionality shall be available within a further five minutes following a start up or automatic restart of the last computer in the minimum set of computers required to be running to support this functionality.

The control desks shall be of robust. The design.Section 6 . They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a communication console. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. processing power and main memory to achieve the requirements.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications expanded. durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them. The calculations shall demonstrate that there is sufficient disc capacity. Table 2. MVAr & Voltage measurements b) Other measurements The time between successive updates of the main computer database with pulse meter values shall not exceed Loading of a save case and initialisation of a study mode EMS application Results available from a derived calculation Time from request of hard copy output to the commencement of printing Normal Activity 1 2 2 2 2 High Activity 1 4 2 4 2 1 1 2 4 2 4 5 5 20 40 30 30 10 2 2 30 2 5 2.13.12 Maximum System Response Times (seconds) Description Confirmation of point selection on a VDU The time between selection of a display and the VDU diagram fully updated shall not exceed Acceptance of a single alarm Acceptance of a page of alarms The time between selection of a control function and check back from the outstation as to whether or not the control can be performed shall not exceed The time between execution of a control function and initiation of the control at the outstation shall not exceed The time between the occurrence of a change of state or an alarm at an outstation and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between a change of state at an outstation due to a control action and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between successive updates of the main computer data base with analogue measurements shall not exceed a) MW.13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE 2. appearance. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desks shall be subject to approval.1 Operator Desks The Operator Workstation VDUs and associated keyboards described in this Specification shall be mounted on control desks to be supplied under this Contract.84 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and finish of the control desk shall be to approval.

construction and finish.2 Operator Chairs High back reclining swivel.13.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. tables and chairs in the quantities stated in the Price Schedules. The furniture shall be of a good quality. arm rest chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks.3 Equipment Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands. shall be provided by the Contractor.13. 2. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling. The design of the furniture shall be in keeping with the general office décor.4 Office Furniture A range of standard office desks. 2. durable and appropriately designed for office work where staff members are expected to be seated for several hours at a time. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the design and finish of which shall be subject to approval. and shall be subject to approved.13. The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use. The proposed furniture will be subject to approval by the Employer.85 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design.

The Bidder shall identify where the solution offered is a deviation from the requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. IEEE Standards. It is also recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system.86 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . hardware. It should be emphasised that the existing telecommunication system should be modified. 3. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer. ISO Standards. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. including details of necessary survey work to be undertaken by the Contractor.1. The transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network should be carried out in a staged and overlapping manner to minimise ―cut-off‖ time and disruption to power system operation The strategy of working with one communication link (main or secondary) only at a time should be applied wherever possible during upgrading/reinforcement of the existing telecommunication network. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 3.1 INTRODUCTION The Telecommunication System Specification details the requirements for the modification. The Bidder shall provide cross referencing for his Bid submission identifying where the particular clauses of this Specification and the associated General Technical Specifications are addressed. technical and functional requirements of the new telecommunication system as a base for preparation of offer by the Bidders. The intention of these documents and drawings is to provide the basic design concept. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance. to be supplied to meet the requirements set out in this document shall be based on mature and proven products that have evolved and been field proven in comparable projects. The proposed telecommunication system shall fully comply with the requirements stipulated in all these documents. extension and upgrade of the existing telecommunication system and associated works. The Telecommunication System Specification is to be read in conjunction with other documents containing the Technical Schedules and Drawings. Therefore existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or de-commissioned and re-commissioned elsewhere and be integrated into the new telecommunication network wherever possible. performance and general hardware and software requirements for the new telecommunication system needed to support the new NSCC SCADA system. Further to this the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying. the modification. extension and upgrading works carried out by the Contractor must be well planned and co-ordinated with other parties involved in the NSCC Project.1 Specification and Design Criteria The equipment.1. Together. all software. In order to minimise disruption to the Employer‘s power system operation. documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a complete and fully operational system that is fit for the intended purpose whether or not those items are specified herein. As far as possible these products shall be customised to meet the specified functional requirements. Such future flexibility shall be borne in mind in the detail design of the telecommunication system. extended and upgraded in a cost effective manner to meet the new telecommunication requirements. The Bidder‘s attention is also drawn to the Schedule of ―Confirmation of Compliance‖ which is contained in Volume 7. International Telecommunication Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification. including software. In this context it is important to recognise that the systems being provided are likely to be expanded in the future and new facilities added. within the Contract price.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3. It also describes the overall functional.Section 6 . installation requirements and other project specific particulars. the SCADA system and telecommunication system designs shall constitute a fully integrated and complete operation and control system. 3.2 Reference Documents and Standards All equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications.

redundant telecommunication paths do not exist. 3. fibre optic (FO) links have been increasingly used for these functions. Teleprotection signalling equipment. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005). The existing telecommunication network is composed of a mix of communication media. In recent years. The system can monitor the transmission network and power system only.1. VHF radio links. ADSS and underground fibre optic cables. The SCADA RTUs communicate with the master stations at the existing SCC via data communication channels. It is responsible for the despatching of load to the power stations and the operation of the power transmission network. The FO links are based on synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) technology operating at a STM-1 transmission rate (155 Mbps). The party line telephone system (PLTS) is a dedicated non-switched telephone system. Section 6. voice and teleprotection signals.Section 6 . The present system is based on an older ABB Spider Micro SCADA system commissioned in the year 2000. ADDS or underground fibre optic cables. via OPGW.3 Site and Environmental Conditions All equipment supplied shall be fully suitable for operating at the temperature and humidity as specified in the General Technical Specification contained in Volume 4 Section 6 Part A and Volume 5. It was commissioned in 1985. 48 Vdc power supply system for both SCADA RTU and telecommunication equipment. Optical ground wire (OPGW). Party line telephone system Administrative telephone system.(see drawing no. which is exclusively used for system control purposes. It only covers about one third of the power stations and grid substations and further stations cannot be connected without severe degradation of the already insufficient system performance. The existing telecommunication system comprises the following sub-systems:         PLC equipment.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities At present a System Control Centre (SCC) is in operation and is located near Kolonnawa substation. which include the following:     Fibre optic links. Except for some voice links. operating over high voltage transmission lines. Part D. Pilot copper cable links. Most of the PLC links are double channel equipment with one channel being used for party line telephone system and the other channel used for PAX system. The existing telecommunication network (see drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006-PLTS not shown).1. The existing SDH equipment is FOX515 from ABB. The telecommunication network is used for the transmission of SCADA data. with a SCADA system based on ABB BECOS 20 system. The system comprises of a master station equipment at the SCC and terminal equipment at all power stations and grid substations. does not provide sufficient communication channels / capacity required for the efficient operation of the power system. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. consisting mainly obsolete and aged analogue Power Line Carrier (PLC) equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3. SCADA data transmission between the RTUs and the control centre is using data channels with transmission speed of 200 bps via the analogue PLC links and 9600 bps via the FO links.87 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Multiplexing equipment and modems. having no remote control facility. Fibre optic terminal equipment. PLC links.

5 Implementation Programme The telecommunication system shall be implemented in accordance with the milestones set out in the Contract Implementation Programme contained in Volume 7 Part D Schedule E section 11. with the objective of making both SCADA and telecommunication facilities progressively available throughout the power system. The prime function of the telecommunication system is to provide the necessary speech. Part C may not be up to date and that a site visit by the Bidder will be needed to confirm the extent of work required. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment.28 (RS232C) asynchronous data channels with speed up to 9. Section 6.4.6 kb/s for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via DPLC links. c. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 shows an overview of the new telecommunication system requirements. High speed (nx64 Kb/s) data channels for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via optic fibre links. d. The Contract Implementation Programme that is proposed takes into consideration the above constraints. 3. b.1. The Telecommunication Specification describes the project specific requirements to fulfil the telecommunication objectives including detailed functional and performance requirements of the various sub-systems comprising the telecommunication system. The sub-systems include: a. the existing telecommunication network shall be modified. It should be noted that since some elements of the fibre optic backbone communication network rely on optical ground wire (OPGW) to be fitted on existing overhead transmission lines as well as the provision of some SDH equipment by others. To facilitate future expansion of the telecommunication system to meet the requirements of power system expansion. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the telecommunication system and the provision of telecommunication equipment under the Contract. To accommodate the telecommunication services needed to meet the Employer‘s operational and administrative requirements. c. V. data and teleprotection signalling communication channels. b.2. e. The telecommunication system shall provide. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) communication system. Telecommunication management system (TMS). Voice channels.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Bidder should be aware that due to constant expansion of the Employer‘s power network. upgraded and expanded to meet the following: a. To have sufficient telecommunication system spare capacity for selling to third parties at a later date. the Contractor shall take into account possible changes to the OPGW and SDH installation programmes and plan his work in a manner that mitigates against delay to the implementation of the telecommunication system in general. Digital power line carrier (DPLC) equipment.2 3.24/V.Section 6 . the existing telecommunication drawings contained in Volume 6. 3. d. the following facilities: a. Drawing No.88 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. To meet the Employer‘s present and future operational and business requirements. Telephone system. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Introduction A reliable and high performance telecommunication system is needed to support power system operation. b. 2 Mb/s transport service. as a minimum. c.

Video transmission service (at a later date). Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the new fibre optic network. The system must be fault tolerant. The primary multiplexers shall be used widely at substations to combine at maximum of 30 pulse code modulation (PCM) voice channels or 64 kb/s data channels into a 2048 b/s signal. g. Transmission of ―main‖ and ―secondary‖ channels over physically separated multiplex equipment as much as possible. Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. data and teleprotection signalling channels can be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk/node failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the network.89 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The proposed design shall incorporate proven technology. The design objective with respect to reliability is to ensure that no single contingency results in loss or unacceptable degradation of service. where the existing PLC equipment is relatively new the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services except teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. Cross-connection criteria of channels shall be as follows: a. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Teleprotection signalling commands will be transmitted as before via the existing PLC equipment. to demonstrate by means of tests at site that the Employer‘s existing equipment and any supplied by the Contractor perform satisfactorily together. the existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or dismantled and re-commissioned elsewhere to form part of the integrated telecommunication network. However. In order to provide a cost effective telecommunication network. where the existing PLC equipment is old and obsolete the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. In addition. Major telecommunication equipment malfunction alarms shall be transmitted to the NSCC via the SCADA system. to alert the system operators of the operational status of the telecommunication system. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the parameters of the existing systems and equipment owned by the Employer and to ensure that new equipment supplied by the Contractor is fully compatible with such existing systems and equipment. address the requirements set out in this document with respect to availability and reliability. assisted by the Employer. Remote monitoring of telecommunication equipment operational status including alarms and performance shall be under the supervision of the telecommunication management system (TMS).2. 3.Section 6 . subject to the proviso that any fault or failure of existing equipment shall be the responsibility of the Employer.2 Design and Operational Philosophy The design philosophy of the new telecommunication network is that failure of any single component shall not cause failure of critical function. the telecommunication network shall be capable of providing a fully resilient network in which all speech. In general. Transmission of teleprotection channels over physically separated multiplex equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications e. f. which shall meet in all respects the performance specified under the prevailing site conditions. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor. The equipment shall preserve configuration data during power failure and all modules shall be capable of hot swappable. resilient to hazards and robust in all respects. Other non-critical operational and administrative data communication services using TCP/IP. and that the incidence of failure of components/elements is consistent with achieving high availability. Teleprotection signalling channels. All necessary additional user interfaces shall be provided to meet the new communication requirements. These criteria will normally require dual routing or dynamically allocated virtual circuits. b. The Contractor shall furnish equipment.

b.2. the exact number and type of communication channels required shall be determined by the Contractor during the detailed engineering design of the telecommunication system. 3. existing equipment such as indoor fibre optic cables. However. terminal hood closures. It shall be possible to purchase the additional telecommunication hardware and software needed for future expansion and upgrade from different vendors. Single fibre operation. the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters including solar power supply and all associated works and plant to enable the proper operation of the repeaters. The following future upgrade options shall be possible: a.Section 6 . The Contractor shall carry out optical loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to determine the most suitable operating wavelength to be used. optical terminal boxes.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability The telecommunication system supplied by the Contractor shall employ open standard concept in the design and shall offer greatest flexibility for future expansion and upgrade of the system and facilities. At substation sites currently with fibre optic communication facilities. fibre approach cables. All systems shall. be supplied already equipped with a minimum of 25 per cent spare capacity including interface modules for each type of communication circuit.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Contractor shall deliver any unused dismantled telecommunication equipment to the Employer‘s store. The new SDH network backbone shall be linked to the existing SDH network and also to the new DPLC network to form an integrated digital telecommunication network. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of existing channel assignment required to ensure that the telecommunication system can be developed and existing facilities are fully migrated to the new network with minimal disruption to power system operation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM). It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed.90 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 Configuration and Topology The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall employ SDH technology with STM-1 (155. SDH and primary multiplexers and cross-connect units will remain the same and be re-used for the new SDH network. with 1310 nm being the preferred choice as most of the fibre optic span lengths are generally less than 50 km. such as corporate business computer applications and regional administrative communications etc. TCP/IP Ethernet networking. if the distance involved so requires. The telecommunication network backbone shall be based on ring topology with self healing protection capability. Longer span lengths may require the use of 1550 nm operating wavelength window. The operating wavelength of the SDH network shall be 1310 nm or 1550 nm. however. Open topology network allowing the most flexible way of building the SDH network shall be adopted and the network shall be able to evolve in functionality just by simply adding plug-in units. 3. A minimum of 50 per cent system expansion capability shall be provided over and above the capacity/channel requirements that are needed for the new telecommunication system. the telecommunication system shall have built-in flexibility to cater for communications requirements outside the power system operation of the Employer. System expansions and upgrades carried out at a later date shall be possible by means of minor modifications and/or by the addition of extra equipment modules to the telecommunication system. Details of system expansion and upgrade capability shall be submitted with the Bid.4. In addition.2. However.4 Telecommunication Network Approximate numbers and types of various communication channels required are detailed in the Specification for Bid purposes.52 Mb/s) transmission level. It is preferable that one common telecommunication network management system is used to monitor and supervise the new integrated digital telecommunication network. c.2.

The proposed SDH network design is shown in Drawing No. in particular. The 2 Mb/s transmission system will interconnect the following end-user facilities: a.2. c. The Contractor‘s design should therefore be flexible and be able to accommodate of such possibilities. to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations. data.28).3 Network Protection The telecommunication network shall employ the following network protection methods as appropriate: a. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002. The Bidder shall comment on the proposed SDH network topology. nx64 kb/s data channels according to ITU-T V. It should be emphasized that due to unforeseen circumstances it may be necessary to change some of the routing during the course of the Contract. The proposed SDH network should be designed in such a way to allow easy migration to a fully integrated multi-service TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet protocol) networking for voice. Remote subscriber channels.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The SDH network shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the relevant ITU-T recommendations for STM-1 transmission bit rate. b.Section 6 . e. Fibre optic links that will be made available by others for use to implement the SDH fibre optic network backbone are shown in Drawing No.35. Voice channels (VF E&M 2/4 wire). Due to the variety of equipment available in the market place the final solution may not exactly mirror the equipment and connectivity shown here but it should achieve design objectives in terms of functionality.2. and with the appropriate quality of service (QoS) required for power system operation at a later date without sacrificing current investments in telecommunication infrastructure. if any. 2 Mb/s tributaries on the STM-1 system will be utilised to provide voice. 3. The maximum transmission capacity which the proposed SDH network can be achieved and whether the upgrading can be carried out whilst the system is carrying live traffic shall be stated in the Bid. The SNCP shall be in accordance with ITU-T G.91 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . d. If a problem occurs in the working traffic path. Each SDH ring shall be designed to operate independently and a failure in one ring should not affect the normal operation of other rings. SDH equipment shall be equipped with dual redundant hotstandby control modules and power supply units.24/V.6 kb/s asynchronous V. Details of how this can be achieved shall be submitted in the Bid. In order to increase the availability and reliability of the telecommunication fibre optic network. performance. data and teleprotection signalling connectivity between substations and NSCC using first order multiplexing equipment at all the stations. Low speed data channels (up to 9. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design and implementation of the network so that it achieves the design objectives set out in this document.841. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003.703. with regard to any deficiencies.4. SNCP (Sub-Network Connection Protection) where working traffic flows in one direction and protected traffic flows in the opposite direction. The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level STM-4 (622 Mb/s).4. the receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The telecommunication network shall also have provision for an engineering order wire (EOW) facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between nodes. teleprotection signalling and video. reliability and availability. by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date. A diagram showing the Bidder‘s proposed integrated telecommunication network and a detailed description on the functionality provided shall be submitted with the Bid.2 Network Design The design of the telecommunication network backbone should make use of independent fibre path where available to provide the necessary resilient. 3. High speed (64 kb/s) data channels according G.

b. Existing fibre optic links. Details of the proposed network protection shall be submitted with the Bid.4 Fibre Optic Links The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall make the best use of the following available fibre optic links: a. Details of the available fibre optic links can be found in the Table 3.4.92 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Fibre optic links to be supplied under the NSCC OPGW Cable Contract. d.1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications b. The Contractor must provide all information and complete comments on designs produced by others that relate to the works to be supplied under this Contract in a timely manner and in accordance with the programme for the works under the related contracts. The switch over times for SNCP and MSP shall be less than 50 ms. Each fibre optic link generally comprises a total of 24 discrete single mode optical fibre cores. c.2. Demarcation of responsibility between this Contract and optical fibres supplied by others is at the optical terminal box.652. Fibre optic links currently under construction by others. 2 fibre bi-directional self healing ring. The Contractor under this Contract shall take whatever steps necessary to ensure the works supplied by others are properly co-ordinated with the works supplied under this Contract and that together they provide the functionality and performance defined for the works in this Contract. conforming to ITU-T recommendation G. c.Section 6 . A maximum of 4 fibres in each fibre optic link will be made available for telecommunication use. Linear MSP for point to point applications. 3. The remaining fibres will be for other purposes and/or served as spares. Ring MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) shares the ring bandwidth equally between working and protected traffic. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

5 6.0 6.0 0.6 0.2 2.0 6.0 8.2 0.5 12.9 0.6 4.93 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .0 2.0 0. route (km) 14.6 4.1 – Available fibre optic links Region FO Link 1 2 From Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Sri Jaywardanapura Sri Jaywardanapura Pannipitiya Pannipitiya Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana CEB HQ CEB HQ CEB HQ Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa Kelanitissa GIS Kolonnawa Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama To Athurugiriya Sri Jayewardenepura Pannipitiya NSCC Ratmalana Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa ESCC Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa ESCC Barge Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Sapugaskanda PS Pannipitiya Kotmale Kelanitissa Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx.5 70.0 2.0 0.3 4.0 6.Section 6 .0 6.4 0.9 9.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.5 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW Contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract ------As per NSCC OPGW contract --------Dec 2010 Dec 2010 Dec 2010 ----------------As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract SCC Colombo Region 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 15.

route (km) 22.2 86.8 27.0 100.0 37.0 17.0 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing UGFO (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2013 Apr 2013 Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract ----------------------As per NSCC OPGW contract Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.7 11.0 68.0 14.94 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .0 31.Section 6 .3 18.3 30.1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) Region FO Link 25 26 Northern Region 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 From Kotmale Kiribathkumbura Kiribathkumbura Kotmale New Anuradhapura Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Pannala Pannala Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kotugoda Veyangoda Kotugoda Kotugoda Ukuwela Ukuwela Ukuwela Naula Habarana To Kiribathkumbura Ukuwela Kurunagala New Anuradhapura Norochchole PS Maho Madampe Pannala Diesel gen.0 17.4 0.0 117.0 45.5 100.5 29.6 163.9 34.6 10.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.3 29.0 42. 100MW Madampa Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kerawalapitiya Veyangoda Norochchole PS Aniyakanda Kelaniya Bowatenna Pallkele Naula Habarana Valachchenai Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Approx.

3 53.Section 6 .5 75.3 18.1 16.5 29.1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) Region FO Link 48 49 Northern Region 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Kotmale Region 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 From Habarana New Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura Vavuni Kilinochchi Old Laxapana New Laxapana New Laxapana Old Laxapana Kotmale Kotmale Badulla Nuwara Eliya Old Laxapana Badulla Madagama (T-off) Old Laxapana Kotmale Victoria Randenigala To Old Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura Puttalam Trincomalee Vavuni Kilinochchi Chunnakam New Laxapana Balangoda Canyon PS Polpitiya Upper Kotmale Polpitiya Rantambe Badulla Nuwara Eliya Madagama (T-off) Monaragala Wimalasurendra Victoria Randenigala Rantambe Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx.1 30.4 3.2 0.0 5.95 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .0 35.4 38.5 74.1 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing ADSS Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Existing UGFO Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Dec 2011 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2012 Jul 2012 --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.9 10.5 37.6 43.5 16.0 103.0 8.8 32.1 67.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3. route (km) 48.9 1.

0 28.1 30.4 10.0 40.0 1. route (km) 21.0 17.96 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2 52.0 33.0 8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.0 24.Section 6 .1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) FO Link 70 71 Kotmale Region 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Southern Region 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 Approx.3 48.0 89.1 25.0 19.0 34.0 38.0 24.0 Region From Rantambe Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Badulla Polpitiya Seethawake Athurugiriya Pannipitiya Panadura Horana Matugama Matugama Embilipitiya Matara Matara New Galle Embilipitiya Embilipitiya Balangoda Balangoda Balangoda Matara Matara-Embilipitiya (T-OFF) To Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Ampara Wallawaya Seethawake Kosgama Thulhiriya Panadura Horana Matugama Kukule Ambalangoda AES PP ACE Matara PP New Galle Ambalangoda Samanalawewa Hambantota Samanalawewa Rathnapura Deniyaya Embilipitiya Beliatta Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 33 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Remark Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Expected completion date Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --------------Aug 2012 Dec 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Dec 2011 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.0 44.0 35.6 0.0 60.0 40.

coupling capacitors and matching units will remain the same.2. data and teleprotection signalling channels at the following locations: Table 3. by replacement of some of existing old analogue PLC equipment with the new digital one. The existing PLC terminals operate on nominal carrier frequency band between 50 and 500 kHz. 3.4. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The DPLC shall comply with IEC 60495 recommendation with channel capacity of at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9.Kosgama The Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands onto the new DPLC links. The scope of work shall include dismantling of existing analogue PLC terminal units and delivering them to the Employer‘s store and shifting the existing communication services to the new DPLC equipment. An engineering order wire facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between PLCs shall also be provided. up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 b/s (ITU-T recommendations V. The new DPLC shall have the capability to fall back to analogue mode should the noise on the overhead power transmission lines is high.Section 6 . Badulla . The new digital PLC equipment shall use existing frequency bands in accordance with the existing PLC frequency plan.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band.2.6 Communication Facilities The new telecommunication network shall be capable of providing the necessary speech.24/V.2 SDH Nodes No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AES power plant Ambalangoda 132/33kV Ampara 132/33kV Aniyakanda 132kV Anuradhapura 132kV (old) Anuradhapura 220kV (new) Athurugiriya 132/33kV Badulla 132/33kV Balangoda 132/33kV Beliatta 132/33kV Biyagama 220kV Bolawatta 132/33kV Bowattenna PS Canyon PS CEB HQ Chunnakam 132/33kV STM-1 By Others.Inginiyagala Kolonnawa . The following existing analogue PLC links are to be replaced with new digital PLC links: a. b.6 k/s.4.97 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links New digital PLC (DPLC) links shall be established as reinforcement of the existing PLC links via 132 kV O/H lines.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. PLC equipment such as line traps. The Contractor shall ensure that the new DPLC equipment to be supplied is fully compatible with the existing analogue PLC system. Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment or modules shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the DPLC links.

FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 Embilipitiya 132/33kV Galle 132/33kV (new) Habarana 132/33kV Hambantota 132/33kV Havelock Town 132/11kV Horana 132/33kV Katunayake 132/33kV Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kelanitissa 132kV Kelaniya 132/33kV Kerawelapitiya 132kV GSS Kerawelapitiya 220kV PS Kilinochchi 132/33kV Kiribathkumbura 132/33kV Kolonnawa 132/33kV Kosgama 132/33kV Kotmale 220kV PS Kotugoda 132kV (old) Kotugoda 220kV Kukule 132kV PS Kurunagala 132/33kV Laxapana 132/11kV PS (new) Madampe (Chillaw)132/33kV Mahiyangana Maho 132/33kV Maradana 132kV Matara 132/33kV Matugama 132/33kV Monaragala 132/33kV NSCC (National System Control Centre) ESCC (Existing System Control Centre) Naula 132/33kV Norochcholai 220kV (Puttlam PS) Nuwara Eliya 132/33kV Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others.98 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . STM-1 By Others. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others. FOX515 STM-1 . .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification No 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Colombo City DCC Dehiwala 132kV Deniyaya 132kV Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 .

3.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations Communication facilities to be provided by the new telecommunication system are: (1) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via fibre optic links the minimal communication requirements shall be as follows at each site: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Each communication link shall initially cater for 4xE1 (i. 4x2048 kb/s) but can be upgraded to a higher speed at a later date if required. The Contractor shall determine the required speed of this link based upon the amount of operational data to be transferred between the NSCC SCADA system and DCC SCADA system. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 New SDH Node Polpitiya 132/12.4. Details of the proposed ICCP links shall be included in the Bid.e.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC Dual redundant ICCP (inter-control centre communication protocol) links shall be provided between the NSCC and DCC (Colombo City Distribution Control Centre) for the transfer of operational data.2.99 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 .5kV PS Puttalam 132/33kV Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana 132/33kV Ratnapura 132kV Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskande 132/11kV GSS Sapugaskande PS Seethawake 132/33kV Sri Jayawardanapura 132/33kV Thulhiriya 132/33kV Trincomalee 132/33kV Ukuwela PS Ukuwela GSS Upper Kotmale PS Valachchanai 132/33kV Vaunativu 132/33kV Vavuniya 132/33kV Veyangoda 220kV Victoria PS Wimalasurenda PS Wimalasurenda GSS TOTAL 37 STM-1 By Others STM-1 By Others .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification No 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Pallekele 132/33kV Panadura 132kV Pannala 132/33kV Pannipitiya 220kV Location Existing SDH Node STM-1 By Others.2. STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 43 3.Section 6 .

b.Section 6 . f. This link will be used to allow remote access to substation data that would be inappropriate to transmit over the SCADA links. d.100 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the following features: a. Two 64 kb/s data channels for connection of new RTU at the substation to the NSCC. The TMS shall enable the telecommunication network be configured in such a way that there shall be a preferred routing for normal operation for speech. the requirements shall be as follows at each existing site: a. TCP/IP Ethernet communication link to NSCC via gateways for non-critical substation data.2. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route. User friendly computer based network management.28 data channels for connection of existing RTU at the substation to the NSCC. Three voice communication channels. No single point of failure in the design. (2) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via transmission media with limited capacity such as PLCs. Two voice communication channels. f. b. and vice versa. The switching and channel reallocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users and shall cause no loss of information. c. b. and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing. TCP/IP communication link is required for connection to the Substation Automation System (SAS). e. d.5 Telecommunication Management System A telecommunication management system (TMS) shall be provided to monitor the new SDH network performance and status and to make alternative routing and channel allocation changes as necessary. e. as a minimum. . Independently routed teleprotection signalling channels as required. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. The speed of data channels shall be able to be upgraded to nx64 kb/s if it is necessary to meet the performance requirements. For example fault waveforms from the substation protection equipment. teleprotection signalling for first and second main protection associated with existing circuits shall be implemented using separate multiplexing equipment and routed via physically segregated paths wherever possible. 3. Ability to integrate with other propriety equipment sub-management systems. c.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification a. In addition. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The TMS shall have. g. Two V 24/V28 data channels for connection of RTUs at the substation with NSCC. data and teleprotection signalling communications. Four spare 64 kb/s data channels for future use. SCADA data communications protocol shall be based on IEC60870-5-101 and/or 104. c. Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities. g. This link may also be used to remotely reconfigure the SAS database or to adjust protection relay settings. End to end circuit management. Two V. To ensure secure and reliable transmission at all times. Multi-user capability.24/V. Non-critical substation data communication link based on IEC60870-5-104 should be available as an option at a later date. Independently routed teleprotection signalling.

Nuwara Eliya Embilipitiya .Canyon PS Badulla . Security management.Rantambe Old Laxapana .Samanalawewa The Contractor shall provide necessary teleprotection signalling equipment including all necessary ancillary equipment so that existing teleprotection signalling commands can be transmitted via the new fibre optic network for the above PLC links: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. However. The application/communications servers shall be interconnected with the operator workstations and printers via a dual LAN. Details of how this is achieved shall be fully described in the Bid. Teleprotection signalling equipment. PAX equipment. e. e.2. d. 3. Digital PLC equipment. In addition to monitoring and supervising the SDH network. it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. i.2 Time Synchronisation The TMS shall interface with the master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the TMS central computer system. b. The following PLC links are using old and obsolete PLC equipment and the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. Human machine interface (HMI) at the NSCC shall include two operator workstations. PDH equipment. b. The TMS central computer system shall in turn initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure to maintain time synchronisation of the remote network elements. c.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. the TMS shall also be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a.2. d.Samanalawewa Balangoda . f. 3. Compliance to international standards such as ITU-T. one black/white laser printer and one laser colour printer. j. A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. Reports management The TMS shall include facilities that enable the system to be extended without interruption to existing services.2. Kiribathkumbura -Kurunegala New Laxapana .5. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification h. a.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment Dual redundant application/communication servers shall be provided at the NSCC.5. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure and method of interfacing with the master clock system.101 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . Analogue PLC equipment. 3. c.

The capacity of the new PAX at the substations shall be as follows: a.Section 6 . The PAX shall automatically use available alternative routes in the event of faults or congestion. b. The old exchanges as well as the existing PLTS in the SCC shall be decommissioned.102 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 200 subscriber lines. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 shows the proposed telephone network.7 Telephone Network 3. removed and returned to the Employer‘s store. 3. b. Kotmale. All necessary interfaces shall be provided to enable hotline and party line functions are available in the new telephone system. Laxapana. The existing PLC equipment shall be decommissioned. The Bidder shall comment on the effect of failures within the PAX on the integrity of communication channels routed through the PAX. d. The existing telephone extension lines. The new telephone exchanges shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) exchanges. c. 500 subscriber lines.2. Drawing No. 150 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels. 5 PAX-PAX tie lines.2 Voice Recording Equipment A PC based voice recording equipment shall be provided and be capable of interfacing with the new NSCC PAX to automatically log all telephone communications between operators in the NSCC and other personnel. A voice recording equipment and a main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided at the NSCC. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Bidder shall include details of the proposed teleprotection signalling system in the Bid. The voice recorder shall record all voice communications on the telephone network.7. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events. The capacity of the new NSCC PAX shall be as follows: a. The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed telephone network and method of providing hot line and party line functions. 3.7. Kotugoda. a. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. The new telephone system shall be capable of providing at least similar PLTS functions such as hot line telephone communications between Control Centres and Grid Substations/Power Stations. It should be possible to preset individual channels to bypass some PAXs on the trunk routes to reduce the number of intermediate steps on the long haul routes. c.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment Some of the existing telephone exchanges are old and operating at their design capacity and these are to be replaced with new modern telephone exchanges. New private automatic exchanges (PAX) are proposed at the following locations. 20 PAX-PAX tie lines. telephone numbering system and network shall be modified according to the Employer‘s new telephone network requirements. removed and returned to the Employer‘s store. 50 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels. c. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. NSCC. b.2.

b. The Contractor shall liaise with other parties to ensure that there is sufficient space and suitable environmental conditions for the installation of the 48 Vdc power supply system. operator workstations and printers) shall be powered from a new 48 Vdc power supply system. 3. 3. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours.2. 3. the new telecommunication equipment shall be designed to operate from a nominal 48 Vdc.2. The Bidder shall include the supply and installation of all necessary interconnecting cables required for the proper installation of the telecommunication equipment in the NSCC and substation sites. operator workstations and printers that are to be installed in the NSCC shall be designed to operate from a 240 Vac uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system.8. The digital voice recording equipment shall have sufficient built-in redundancy to prevent a single point of failure causing the equipment to malfunction. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc). Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable.Section 6 . c. d. The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a.2. 3. f.8 Power Supply Requirements In general. The TMS workstations and printers shall be powered from a 240 Vac UPS. User friendly.3 At Employer’s HQ Building A new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be provided at the Employer‘s HQ Building by the Contractor to support the new telecommunication equipment. Voice playback facility. positive earthed supply. However at some sites. Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. However. 3. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. As majority of new telecommunication equipment will be powered from existing power supply systems.8.9 Equipment Locations The majority of the telecommunication equipment will be located at the NSCC and at existing substation and power station sites. details of the anticipated power requirements and power consumption of the new telecommunication system shall be included in the Bid. Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode.103 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Transfer to tape cassettes and other archive media . e. The new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be sized to meet the electrical loading of the telecommunication equipment plus 100 per cent spare capacity. a new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be required. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations The new telecommunication equipment shall be powered from the existing 48 Vdc power supply system. g.2.1 At NSCC The new telecommunication equipment (excluding the TMS central computers.8. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. the TMS central computers.2. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s).

The proposal shall also include any anticipated duration of outages required for the installation. Failure to co-ordinate or delay in providing or timely requisition of the necessary interfacing information/ requirements shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the Contractor shall bear any costs which may arise as a result thereof for the provision of modification to other works which are involved with or subject to another contract.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) As the telecommunication equipment will be installed in substations and power stations it must be able to co-exist and operate within the electromagnetic environment with adequate immunity to any electromagnetic disturbances in order that operations will be free of malfunction and safe.2. Master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the telecommunication management system and telephone exchange equipment. Existing fault recorders. timing and phasing of the removal of existing telecommunication equipment that are to be replaced by the new telecommunication equipment. Existing power supply systems that are to be utilised for the new telecommunication equipment. new telecommunication equipment will be located adjacent to existing telecommunication equipment or in a location previously occupied by existing equipment. Equipment and system designs proposed by the Bidder shall take into account the requirements outlined in the relevant internationally recognised Standards and Regulations to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. e. h. (SAS) Existing telephone exchanges Existing ABB FOX515 SDH equipment New SDH equipment (supplied under the ongoing Station Projects) PMC Interface-Protection Monitoring Computer Interface d.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In general. A detailed method and programme for the removal of existing telecommunication equipment and transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer.2.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment The telecommunication system shall be equipped with the necessary hardware including interconnection cabling and software to enable interfaces with the following systems to be made: a. Fibre optic cables (supplied under the NSCC OPGW Contract). Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b. 3. f. i.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System The Contractor shall determine the method. j. The discarded equipment shall be returned to the Employer to be used as spares. g. The removal of existing telecommunication equipment shall cause minimal disruption to the power system operation. Co-ordination with other contractors shall therefore be required to ensure that the equipment cubicles are arranged in an orderly manner to facilitate ease of equipment identification and access for maintenance. The telecommunication equipment will also be co-located with existing or new NSCC RTU and equipment supplied by others. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of channel assignment required to ensure that the network can be developed and be capable of providing the necessary communication facilities and security required from one phase to the next. c.104 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 3.2. NSCC SCADA system. Existing Substation Automation Systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving and co-ordinating with other contractors or Authorities to ensure that the interfaces and the final installation between the telecommunication system with the other systems are fully compatible both physically and operationally. testing and commissioning work. 3.

performance or loss of function. filtering. for example. grounding. etc.. equipment and cable screening.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The design shall take account of all aspects of EMC including. The inclusion of EMC requirements in the equipment/system design shall not cause any degradation of quality. bonding.Section 6 . circuit design. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.105 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

All test loops and loopbacks shall conform to ITU-T recommendation X.3. The digital fibre optic communication backbone shall be based on the SDH technology and network architecture. The multiplexing structure of the proposed FOC system shall allow existing PDH signals to be carried over the synchronous network and shall permit the extraction of individual circuits from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole system. interconnecting cables including pigtails and patch cords. 3. installation of SDH and primary access multiplexing equipment.3 3.2 Loss Budget Calculations The Contractor shall carry out loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to ensure the FOC system meets the requirements of this Specification. optical repeaters if required. Where the performance of the equipment could be susceptible to electromagnetic interference. digital cross connection units including necessary optical line terminal equipment. which will not cause equipment malfunctioning. prioritising of channels. Cross connect facilities shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels and network components.150. The proposed SDH system shall be capable of interworking with lower order PDH systems.703. The FOC system shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. G. Mean launch power. the system shall include network management capability so as to facilitate system performance monitoring. In order to facilitate maintenance work and trouble shooting. automatic re-routing. and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. be highly reliable and provide secure communication for real time signals such as voice.707.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a high bandwidth digital fibre optic communication (FOC) system and associated works. handheld maintenance terminal units. The calculations shall include both a ‗worst case‘ and a ‗typical‘ loss budget calculation. the fibre optic equipment shall also have remote loopback test facilities. In order to maximise the benefit of the telecommunication network and to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the FOC system. alarm and fault monitoring. teleprotection and status/control signals. Any failure shall produce automatic switch-over to the back-up unit and initiation of an alarm.957. using the respective maximum and average attenuation predicted for each component in the system. The equipment shall be suitable for operation in a substation with harsh environment as is found on site and with high electromagnetic interference. All electrical and electronic equipment supplied shall be properly grounded and shielded to protect the equipment and operating personnel from effects of induced currents and voltages.704. Built-in test and self-monitoring facilities shall be provided to enable maintenance personnel to break-in and/or make bridging measurements without degradation or interruption of service.3.Section 6 .783 and G. G. equipment cubicles and enclosures.1 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM General Requirements 3. system configuration. testing and maintenance facilities etc. Bidders shall provide detailed design philosophies for equipment and routing redundancy. This Specification includes for all design and engineering. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.106 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The enclosures shall be provided with lockable doors. The optical power budget calculation shall take into account of the following parameters: a. service telephone handsets. The equipment shall be rack mounted and be of modular design construction and be housed in approved equipment enclosures. SCADA.3. dynamic allocation. The FOC system shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the ITU-T recommendations G. G. the Bidder shall state the maximum level of such interference. A redundant configuration for ensuring minimum down time in case of equipment failure shall be provided. all associated connectors. Receiver sensitivity.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. b. optical fibre distribution frames and patch panels. bandwidth management.1. power supplies.

Laser products shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60825 specification. k. Integrated monitoring facilities. e. Flexibility for adaptation to the desired transmission capacity. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to enable integration with the TMS shall be provided under the Contract. i. The possibility of automatic laser shit down adjustment through the telecommunication management system should be supported. High operational security and reliability.4. As far as practicable all fibre optic equipment shall self diagnose internal fault conditions and separately alarm their occurrence. f. d. Maximum installed cable loss.1 General The FOC system shall have the following features: a. Detailed calculations shall be submitted during the detail design stage for the approval of the Employer. d. e. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. High quality transmission in accordance with ITU-T recommendations. The system shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provision for the safety shut-off of the optical source to prevent exposure to laser light during installation. Connector losses. The FOC system shall be capable of normal operation with or without the TMS. g.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification c.3. metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. Comprehensive operation and fault diagnosis.4 Functional Requirements 3.3 Safety The FOC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. 3. The TMS shall enable circuits to be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the telecommunication network. j. b. Capability of routing TCP/IP traffic. System design penalties. Preliminary loss budget calculations shall be included in the Bid. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment. 3. f. All metal parts. h. Direct connection to multiplexing equipment employing pulse code modulation (PCM) techniques.4. c.Section 6 . maintenance and repair work. Support Q3 interface in accordance with ITU-T G.2 System Capacity and Performance The SDH network backbone shall be designed initially with transmission rate of 155.107 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Capable of integrating/upgrading with existing system. Margin for age degradation and temperature. 3. The FOC system shall be required to interface with the telecommunication management system (TMS) for the purpose of centralised supervision and monitoring of the telecommunication system performance. Redundancy capability where required. The designs shall also include diagnostic test facilities to allow step-by-step checking of the performance of the equipment. Direct and easy access to the transmitted base band signal.52 Mb/s (STM-1).3.3.3.773. System performance calculations shall include a minimum safety margin of 3 dB.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The switchover shall be transparent to the data stream. 8 Mb/s. Jitter performance on STM-1 interfaces shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendations G. The automatic switch-over to standby transmitter criterion shall be BER>10 -9. The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall permit the extraction of individual 2 Mb/s tributaries from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole STM-1 frame.825.813 and G. add/drop multiplexer or terminal multiplexer. if any. 34 Mb/s. The SDH equipment shall be capable of upgradeable from STM-1 to STM-4 without disruption to existing traffic. by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date.108 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The SDH equipment shall be capable of being configured as a hub. 140 Mb/s. Compact unit design and flexible shelf architecture shall allow for housing of various plug-in units. details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic communication network shall be included in the Bid. but not be limited to. The SDH equipment shall be equipped with a range of plug-in tributary interfaces to support a comprehensive range of plesiochronous and synchronous tributaries including 2 Mb/s.5 SDH Equipment 3. Each SDH equipment shall comprise.3 Service Channels Each optical line terminal equipment shall provide at least two analogue and four digital service channels for voice communications and testing purposes between any two terminal stations. c. The 64 kb/s digital service channels shall be suitable for any data transmission requirements. Details of the performance of the proposed FOC system shall be included in the Bid. the following functional elements: a.826.3. wideband and narrowband applications. Each terminal equipment shall have a handset for voice communications. VC3 and VC-4 to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. The typical error rate for each traffic path shall be stated. repeater. and from STM-1 operation.4. Optical line interface. All features and functions of the SDH equipment shall be readily software configurable to suit operational requirements of the SDH system. between any terminal and repeater station and between any two repeater stations (if applicable) exclusively for the use of installation and servicing personnel. Cross connection levels shall include nx64 kb/s. In addition. Tributary module. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively. The capacity shall be 63 E1 (2Mb/s) signals for STM-1 and 252 E1s for STM-4. Switching shall also be possible manually for maintenance purposes. The FOC system shall include provision for overcoming impairments caused by transmission delays. The equipment shall provide interfacing and multiplexing for broadband. The overall mean equivalent bit error rate (BER) of the SDH system between any two end terminals shall not be worse than 10-9 under normal operating conditions. P12.5. End to end error performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITUT recommendation G.3. 3. and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. The FOC system shall preserve configuration data during power failure or management connection failure.1 General The SDH equipment shall perform both multiplexing and optical line terminating functions.Section 6 .3. The aggregate ports of the SDH equipment shall be duplicated and shall be capable of operating in a ‗1 + 1‘ protected mode as part of a point to point link. b. or as an ‗east/west‘ mode when used in a drop and insert chain in a ring. 3. to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations. Electrical line interface. for example from STM-1 to STM-4. cross connection. During power or management connection failure alarm logs and performance monitoring statistics shall be preserved. VC-12.

Engineering order wire (service telephone) unit. to simplify spares and maintenance aspects. Each optical line system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm over 2 optical fibres. L1.109 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d. Service data interface. STM-1 electrical line signals shall be in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. Transmitters which output optical power of sufficient intensity to cause hazard to health shall have mechanical interlocks to isolate the diode supply current during the installation or maintenance of the equipment. It shall be possible to use an electrical interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an ‗Add/Drop‘ mutiplexer. SDH equipment shall be located on a fibre optic backbone system that serves the major facilities within the system. S-1.957. Control and alarm functions.1. The optical source shall have minimum life of at least 50 000 hours at an ambient temperature of +50ºC. h. It shall be possible to use an optical line interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an ‗Add/Drop‘ multiplexer.703. Where necessary receiver optical attenuators shall be provided to optimise link performance. g. The electrical interface shall perform the same electrical functions as the optical interface unit. The receiver shall automatically accommodate signal level changes due to temperature effects and ageing of the system. Transmitters shall provide the continuous transmission of data timing information.5.1. f. Sign warning of possible hazard shall be permanently fixed at all appropriate points. which will provide status indications. 3. Switching unit.709.5. b. Centralized function. All transmitter equipment shall use the same laser type. A 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN interface shall also be supported. 3. The transmitter shall have internal diode current and output power monitoring.2 STM-1 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G. The optical section shall convert electrical signals into an optical signal for transmission over an optical fibre and perform a reciprocal function on the receive side. S-4. The optical interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion of traffic from the switch unit into a STM-1 155 Mb/s stream.3. Power supply unit. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3 Electrical Line Interface The equipment shall support standard electrical tributary interfaces in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.2 STM-4 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G. the launch power shall be significantly reduced to a safe level. L4. e.2 Optical Line Interface The SDH equipment shall be capable of supporting the following optical interfaces: a. The electro-optic converter shall have a power output suited to the requirements of the fibre optic links and shall be suitable for transmission length of at least 120 km without any use of intermediate repeaters. The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance suited to the requirements of the network. i. with optical amplifiers or attenuators provided to suit the optical performance requirements for each fibre optic link as far as is practical.1 and L-1.Section 6 .957.1 and L-4. It is preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment are interconnected in such a way that a broken fibre will automatically switch off the optical transmitters at both ends of the section. The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions.3.

The switching unit shall provide the change over facility from faulty units to the standby units to achieve 1+1 protection. The tributary module shall be capable of supporting tributary data rates of 2 Mb/s. e. The following alarms shall be provided on the SDH equipment as a minimum: a.5. b. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. Multiplex input fail. system configuration. Equipment power supplies shall be monitored and a fuse alarm indication shall be provided for each cabinet or rack. The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the telecommunication management system.5 Switching Unit A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface unit to be connected to any tributary port or any other line port. date and time of the occurrence of alarms. 3. k. Test points shall be available on each unit to help in failure diagnosis. testing and maintenance facilities etc. Distance alarms. 3. Optical receive level low. j.4 Tributary Module The tributary module shall perform the selective extraction/insertion of tributaries to and from the STM-1 signal whilst enabling other traffic to pass through without interruption. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. bandwidth management. The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers and tributary units in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. Power supply fail or out of limits. automatic rerouting.3. prioritising of channels. Loss of clock signal. The fault location and supervision system shall provide in-service bit error monitoring facilities.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. The equipment shall be provided with a fault location and supervisory system to monitor the status and alarms of the SDH equipment. f. Digital data streams shall be monitored at all levels.3. Loss of frame synchronisation. g. h. An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to monitor and display the locally derived alarms and if applicable adjacent repeater station alarms. Bit error rate (BER) threshold high.Section 6 . Optical transmit power low. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment.774 which shall make up the SDH payload before being sent to the switch unit. dynamic allocation. Failure of check bits. In addition it shall allow full cross connections between tributaries. It shall be possible to change alarm severity and threshold levels manually.5.6 Control and Alarm Functions Comprehensive control and alarm functions shall be included to provide performance monitoring. showing the location of each alarm displayed. The alarm monitoring system shall form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. alarm and fault monitoring. 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. The alarm concept shall conform to ITU-T recommendation G.3. 8 Mb/s. c.110 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . i.784. These functions shall interface to the telecommunication management system to allow the control and alarm monitoring of the equipment to be carried out locally and remotely. d. Laser current high.5. The system shall be capable of providing details of origin.

e.2 Multiplexer The primary digital multiplexing equipment shall be capable of combining 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels with standard frequency ranges of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz into a digital 2048 kb/s data stream conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G.6. Future extension shall be possible by simple field installation of appropriate modules.3. selective calling to reach any station along the route and an audible alert provided at each terminal and repeater site.3. c.Section 6 . with a telephone handset. b. teleprotection and telecommunication equipment to the fibre optic communication system.1 General Primary access multiplexing equipment shall be provided as necessary and shall comply with the relevant ITU-T recommendations.5. The system shall operate on a service channel in the STM-1 bit stream. 3. The system shall be configured as an omnibus circuit.5. 3.9 Power Supply Unit The power supply unit shall be capable of being paralleled with another power supply unit in the same shelf to provide redundancy in case of a single unit failure. demultiplexing and signal processing and conditioning equipment shall be provided to interconnect SCADA. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency. 2-wire to 2-wire voice frequency.10 Centralized Function The SDH equipment shall have comprehensive monitoring and high capacity management channels to facilitate centralised network controls and maintenance through the network. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the types and quantities of primary multiplexing equipment provided shall be capable of meeting the required number of communications channels specified.3. Communication interfaces shall be capable of being made available by means of insertion of appropriate plug-in cards into the multiplexer rack. Each power supply unit shall have fuse protection and alarm reporting/indications as standard features. All equipment shall be wired for their maximum capacity. 3.6. bit rate and type interfaces available shall be stated by the Bidder.3. ring and speech facilities shall be provided with each SDH multiplexer. including redundancy requirements.5. Path protection on 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s shall be supported. d.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.703 to enable direct connection to the SDH optical multiplexing equipment. The number. 3. 4-wire E&M signalling.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment 3. All primary access multiplexing.3. The multiplexer shall provide means to drop and insert individual 64 kb/s signals and allocate them to determined time slots in the 2 Mbps streams. The digital interface of the multiplexing equipment shall be of a time division multiplex signal conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G. 2-wire with ring down suitable for a remote subscriber telephone connection.703. The types and quantities of the cards for the 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels shall be supplied so as to meet the requirements of the Contract. Power supply units located in the same shelf shall be capable of maintaining shelf power in the event of single power unit failure.5. The FOC system shall be capable of supporting the following user interfaces: a. 2-wire E&M signalling.3.111 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .7 Engineer Order Wire An engineer‘s order wire (EOW) system providing call.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.8 Service Data Interface Means shall be provided for accessing auxiliary channels using spare bytes in the SDH ‗overhead‘ bit stream to enable management signals from additional equipment such as primary access multiplexers to be transmitted over the fibre optic transmission system. 3.

g. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. d. Details of the channel cards to be supplied by the Contractor shall be included in the Bid. Failure of 64 kb/s interface. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency with FSK modem and channel fail detection. giving 256 quantisation levels. 2-wire loop disconnect signalling. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated. BER threshold high. 64 kb/s data channel according to ITU-T G. Jitter characteristics shall be equal to or better than ITU-T G.4 User Interfaces User interfaces shall be provided by the Contractor to accommodate various voice frequency (VF) and data channels requirements.703. The user interfaces shall allow direct connection to SCADA. A suitable rack mounted level meter shall be provided at each station with the necessary test leads and patching cords. c. details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic transmission network shall be included in his Bid. teleprotection and telecommunication equipment. 2 Mb/s data interface according to ITU-T G. Remote alarms. resulting in a 64 kb/s rate for each channel.6. i.703.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification f. b. Test points shall be provided on the channel cards for level measurement and adjustment. The multiplexing equipment shall have the following features: a. d. and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. It is preferable that a channel card should contain all the components necessary to enable the same card to cater for as many different types of operation as possible by means of software configuration both locally and from a remote site. c.771. All PCM multiplexing equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a. l.6. The 2 Mb/s interface shall be 2048 kb/s 50 parts per million with a HDB3 line code conforming to the ITU-T G. Power supply fail or out of limits. h. In addition.703. e. g.112 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 3. j. TCP/IP Ethernet communication. Data interface suitable for multirate synchronous/asynchronous data signalling. Multiplex input fail.3. Loss of clock signal. k. Alarm collection interface. f.703. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment.Section 6 .3 Alarm Indications The PCM multiplexing equipment shall have extensive alarm monitoring facilities.3. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively. 3. Sample rate for each channel shall be 8 kHz with maximum deviation of 50 parts per million. b. In the event of failure. Encoding law shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T G. with 8 coding bits per sample.

nx64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V.703 using 120 ohms balanced impedance. Interfaces shall comprise balanced circuits with E & M signalling and recall facilities and shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) signalling.6. barrier transformers shall be supplied for protection against induced overvoltages. Multirate 0 to 19.4.3.28. In the event of a fault being detected an alarm shall be raised and the protection command inhibited. Multirate 0.4. VF signal levels shall be adjustable within the range: Input: -16 to +1 dBm Output: -7 to +7 dBm E & M signalling interfaces shall be provided on each 4-wire VF channel. The interface shall be capable of operating from an external power supply with either positive or negative polarity grounding and a maximum potential of 100 V.2 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V. The following data interfaces shall be supported as a minimum: a.703. 2 Mb/s HDB3 coded signals on line interfaces conforming to ITU-T G.Section 6 . Telephone ringing supplies shall form part of the interface equipment. b. 3. 3. e. 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T G.21/V.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Any special interfaces which are considered necessary for the provision of a full and complete installation of the telecommunication system shall be included in the offer and full details shall be supplied with the Bid. The transmission of protection signalling commands shall preferably be utilising a complete 2 Mb/s channel according to ITU-T G.6. The Contractor shall ensure that the routing and rerouting of the SDH transmission network do not compromise the operating time of the protection signalling equipment.24/V. c.4. This signal transmission time shall exclude any delay times of the teleprotection equipment. The external connections of both VF and E & M circuits shall be isolated from the associated board circuits.113 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . d. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.1 Telephony Interface 4-wire voice frequency channel interfaces shall comprise 600 ohm balanced circuits with a bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz. 3.703. The protection channel interface units shall operate regular loop tests to ensure their readiness for operation. The E-lead shall be capable of switching currents up to 100 mA.2 Data Interface Data interfaces of the following types shall be capable of being made available by insertion of appropriate cards into the multiplexer rack for direct connection to computer systems. Where modems are connected to communication cables.3 Teleprotection Signalling Interface The FOC system shall be capable of facilitating the transmission of teleprotection signalling commands associated with the power transmission network.6 to 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T X. 2-wire analogue subscriber interfaces shall permit direct connection of subscriber sets to the PAX equipment. Sub-multiplexing up to 8 low speed (0 to 1 200 baud) asynchronous data inputs over a single 64 kb/s communication channel shall be possible. The maximum signal transmission time of the FOC system over any fibre optic links shall not exceed 2 milliseconds.35. Provision shall be made by the Contractor to enable direct connection to the teleprotection equipment for transmission of remote protection signalling/tripping commands. Signalling (E & M) channel interfaces shall be suitable for a maximum signalling rate of 300 baud. with co-directional interface synchronisation.6.3.11.

Each optical regenerative repeater shall be totally compatible with other optical repeaters and optical line system described in this Specification. shall be connected to the fibres of the optical cable at the repeater sites by means of detachable optical connectors. Optical regenerative repeaters. The Bidder shall state the cross connect capacity for high density application. electrically and optically interchangeable.3. The optical repeaters shall be housed in a weatherproof enclosure.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. and to accommodate duplex repeaters and all necessary ancillary equipment including storage for sufficient length of fibre for at least 10 future splices. where required. the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters and associated plant together with detailed calculations justifying the need to have intermediate repeaters The locations for repeaters shall be determined by the Contractor and details of equipment locations shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer.6. 3. The first type shall be suitable for mounting on overhead line towers. if the distance involved so requires. Each spare fibre shall be equipped with an optical connector. vandal resistant and equipped with all accessories necessary for securing to the tower and for grounding any metal parts. It shall cross-connect 64 kb/s as well as 2 M/s (ITU-T recommendations G.3.4. and with variation in power supply voltage and/or ambient temperature.8. BER threshold high (for both directions of transmission). If the enclosure is metal. The optical output level shall be maintained relatively constant with variation in the optical input level due to fibre length.3. The enclosure shall be weatherproof. each optical line repeater shall be mechanically.703 unframed and G.704 framed) and VC12. 3. Except for minor level adjustments. broadcast.Section 6 . cathodic protection shall be incorporated where corrosion would otherwise occur.2 Alarm indications The following alarms shall be provided on the optical regenerative repeater equipment: a. However. b.8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters 3. Proper operation of the repeaters shall be continuously monitored during service.8. Laser current high. The enclosure shall be one of two types: a. The repeater shall be equipped with facilities for sending alarm signals to the optical line system to indicate a fault condition. a regenerator circuit. Optical transmit power low. add/drop and loopback. The second type shall be suitable for use underground. 3.1 General It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. and an optical transmitter. c. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. non-blocking.4 Ethernet Interface The FOC system shall be capable of supporting a 10/100 Mb/s BaseT Ethernet interface complying with IEEE standard 802.114 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Cross connection functions available shall include pass through. d.3.3. Each two-way repeater shall comprise an optical receiver. Both types on enclosure shall be of sufficient size to meet minimum bending radius requirement of the fibre optic cable.7 Cross Connection Equipment Cross connection equipment shall be provided as necessary to enable interconnections between different channels and network components be made. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. The enclosure shall be weatherproof and suitable for installation in a manhole.

the repeater alarms shall be monitored and displayed on the alarm monitoring system. The optical fibre tail cables and connections shall be substantially protected from possibility of damage due to maintenance or installation activity. Fixed couplers shall be provided for each fibre comprising a link. d.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification e. The capacity of the fibre distribution frame shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity of the fibre optic communication system plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. Patching and test connections. complying with the requirements of IEC 60874. At the terminal ends. It shall be possible to connect each optical fibre to the appropriate point on any terminating equipment. Bridging measurements. f. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Fault in supervision channel. and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. go or return.Section 6 . 3. destination or source.9 Power Supplies Requirements The fibre optic transmission equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. g. testing and isolation of both the optical fibre cable and fibre optic terminal equipment. The optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be mounted at a maximum height of 1. Circuit disconnection. b.3.115 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All fibre distribution frames shall have a earth connection provided.10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels Optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be provided as necessary by the Contractor to facilitate the termination of fibres. Power supply fail or out of limits. Plug-in connection shall be used. and to provide interface and/or cross-connect facilities between the digital multiplex equipment.5m above ground level so to facilitate ease of maintenance. The alarms from the repeaters shall be transmitted to the terminal ends. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the fibre optic transmission equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract.3. The following basic functions of the fibre distribution frame are required: a. 3. Facilities shall be provided for termination of any metal cores within the fibre cables. Switch-over to standby transmitter. Optical receive level low. The alarm monitoring system of the repeaters shall also form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. c. Sufficient space shall be available on the frame to allow ease of access and minimise the possibility of interference or damage to fibres carrying traffic during maintenance testing on the back-up or spare fibres. at the optical fibre distribution frame and shall be properly labelled with fibre identity. h. and the transmit and received direction of the transmission shall be segregated. Optical fibres shall be terminated by detachable connectors. Circuit re-routing/jumpering. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the fibre optic transmission system shall be individually fused.

b. it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. handheld maintenance terminal units.4.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to allow integration with existing and new telecommunication equipment for alarm management via external voltage free contacts shall be provided under the Contract. However.4 3. b. e. c. SDH equipment. Reports management. The telecommunication management equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. Configuration management. 3.2 Functional requirements 3. PDH equipment.Section 6 .1 General A telecommunication management system shall be provided by the Contractor to monitor and supervise the telecommunication network. d. c.2. PAX equipment. The TMS shall be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. This Specification covers all design and engineering. Security management. The telecommunication management system shall provide equipment status and alarms. d. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. Fault management. e. The TMS shall also provide the necessary information to assist the Employer in the operations and maintenance of the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Teleprotection equipment. The TMS will be used for administering the management activities associated with the telecommunication system so as to maximise the benefits of the telecommunication network and to ensure that the telecommunication resources are utilised efficiently. interconnection cabling. 48 Vdc battery and battery charger system. configuration and resource management. central computer system including system and applications software and human machine interfaces.1 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a telecommunication management system (TMS) and associated works. Digital PLC equipment. as a minimum. The TMS shall have. and command controls.4. The TMS equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. equipment cubicles.116 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . g. power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. the following management capabilities: a. Performance management. f. interfacing equipment. A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. Technical descriptions detailing the TMS performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. system telemetry. Analogue PLC equipment.

The switching and channel re-allocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users. 3. such as Q3 interface based on ITU-T recommendations M.4. detection of degraded circuits and system performance. Real time status of every individual network component. k.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification telecommunication resources of the telecommunication system including planning. new installations.3010. the following functions: a. l. updated with real-time data. h. Remote control and reconfiguration of the network. On-line testing of any transmission network components.2.117 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . operations. which enables easy integration with other management systems. Automatic generation of network configuration data. via software configuration. administration of customers as well as business planning and forecasting. The up date time of a visual display unit (VDU) screen shall be measured from the final action of the operator to request the display. j.3 System Performance The response times required for the TMS are stated in Technical Schedules. maintenance and provisioning of telecommunication network and services. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. installation. the implementation of remedial actions and the allocation or reallocation of telecommunication resources. c. and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing. d. End to end circuit and allocation management capability. and vice versa. administration. for billing.4. Creation of end to end circuits and paths in the network.4. Hard key licence. i. Back up facility.4 Management Functions The TMS shall be capable of supporting a wide variety of management functions to cover planning. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations for speech.1 Configuration Management The configuration management shall include. The system design concept shall allow a user to set up. g. appearing in full on the operator workstation. to the time of the relevant page. as a minimum. the diagnosis of problems. 3. data and teleprotection communications shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route.4.2. a preferred routing to be used for normal operation for speech and data communications between the Control Centre and remote sites. f.3100 and G. Interfaces for proprietary network monitoring sub-management systems. The features to be provided by the telecommunication management system shall include at least the following: a.2. The TMS shall provide standard management interfaces. Ability to readily export/import files to Microsoft Windows based software packages such as Word or Excel for TMS report presentation.2 System Architecture and Design Concept The TMS functional and informational architecture and physical architecture shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendation M. On-line help facilities and easy to use graphical user interfaces.Section 6 . e. b. b. Computer based system with multi-user capability. Historical and statistical information on network alarms and signal quality.2. at a future date. 3. 3. System set up and configuration of the network elements. It shall be possible to upgrade the TMS to include accounting and business management functions.774.

Create or delete network components. Alarm delay time filtering. f. as a minimum.Section 6 .4. Clock synchronisation. Graphic display of alarms. Graphic display of network topology. Fault Management d. Performance Management The performance management shall include. Spontaneous printout of alarms. delete or modify network links between network components by end point selection. j. As a minimum requirement. Creating and editing of cross connections. Locating of faults. Ability to accept voltage free alarm contacts.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification c. c.3 Real time alarms acquisition and logging. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. g. Automatic or manual switching from preferred route to alternative routes in the event of failures. Archiving of event logs.826. n. Initialise/reset performance monitoring data. Display of historical alarm data. k. i. Trends display. Alarm reports.821 and G. m. Classification of alarms. i.2 The fault management shall report faults and system anomalies. b. Software upload/download of network component configuration to/from system database. o.2. the fault management shall include the following functions: a. Create. e. e. to alert the TMS operators. the following functions: a. Grouping of alarms. f. Diagnostic displays.4. l. p. h. Alarm inhibiting/blocking.118 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Configurable audible alarms.4. via the human-machine interface. 3.4. c.2. Alarm list presentation. j. 3. Performance monitoring in accordance recommendations G. Define data collection interval. g. Setting up and monitoring of loopbacks. d. with the requirements of ITU-T b. h.

g. The system shall be user friendly. Security Management The security management shall include. 3. d. The proposed configuration of equipment shall be described fully.2 Central Computer System The TMS central computer system shall be based on a distributed client/server computer architecture as far as possible complying with internationally accepted standards. c. modification and testing with the minimum of disruption. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Telecommunication Management System 3. The TMS central computer system shall comprise the following: a.3 Configuration management report.2.4.1 General The telecommunication management system shall be based on an open application environment and a standard user interface to ensure connectivity to different vendor‘s network components can be made easily. System design shall meet the following general requirements: a. as a minimum. d. Audit trail of user actions Reports Management The reports management shall include. Predicative capabilities.4 Setting and clearing of performance counter thresholds.2. Alarm management report.4.4. Performance management. e.Section 6 . b. Two operator workstations. which shall be mounted in accessible positions and clearly labelled. f. The hardware design shall allow expansion. the following functions: a. 3. emphasising the availability and security provided. secure plugs and sockets. e. Security management report.5 Users log on via passwords protection.3. Control of line signal and tributary signal performances. the following functions: a. The system shall be designed. Dual redundant application/communication servers.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d.4.119 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 3. b. User groups with several levels of privileges.3. Interconnecting cables shall be made via substantial.4. as a minimum.4. c. Assigning performance counter thresholds. Dual LAN. b. 3. delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for meeting the required performance. The system shall provide data retention feature to enable off-line analysis of configuration or of events and alarms. c. b. c. The system shall have a high degree of automation and easy to maintain.4.

2. Provision shall be provided to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages.1 Telecommunication Management System Workstations Two workstations shall be provided. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided. Database held on each server shall be updated simultaneously with the latest data from all telecommunication network elements. Pan. The transmission medium of the LAN shall be fibre optic.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d.4. database configuration and graphics. Each workstation shall be equipped with a high resolution flat screen LCD type colour VDU. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.120 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . operator workstations.4. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system and applications software. communication servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant local area network (LAN) complying with internationally accepted standards. 3.3.2. The design of the human-machine interface shall be based on latest de facto standard software packages. The level of control and monitoring authority for each user shall be configurable. Failure of one of the servers shall not cause maloperation and/or degradation of the performance of the telecommunication management system.3. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. Application/Communication Servers Two servers shall be provided and shall be of a well proven design suitable for ‗real-time‘ multi-tasking operation where reliability is a prime consideration.Section 6 .2 Local Area Network Interconnection between computers. The operation of this device shall not require the device be physically connected to each computer in turn. Archiving and retrieval of historical data shall preferably be via optical media such as CD or DVD. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. routers/gateways etc necessary for proper operation of the TMS system. g.4.2. The servers shall carry out the management functions as well as all acquisition and processing of network components alarms and data. One colour laser printer.3. The size of the VDU shall be at least 19 inch. 3.1 One black and white laser printer. The LAN shall be complete with all terminal/printer servers.2. e. zoom and windowing facilities shall be provided. an alphanumeric keyboard and a mouse. The maximum number of different level users supported shall be stated in the Bid. Applications software and operating system. 3. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software.3. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided. The HMI shall also support multiple user levels such as operator and system manager etc. The HMI shall be capable of supporting multi-layer graphics to provide both detailed and overview displays of the network topology and individual network components.3.3 Human-Machine Interface The human-machine interface (HMI) shall provide all the necessary facilities for the users to interact with the telecommunication management system.4. The level of authority for each user shall be set so that the user‘s area of responsibility is defined. bridges. 3. f. Interconnecting cables and interfacing equipment. Each server shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity. repeaters.

continuous correct operation of all system functions b. 3. The diagnostic software shall provide. 3.2.Section 6 . 3.3 Colour Laser Printer The colour printer shall produce clear prints on A4/A3 size paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system.4.3. program linkers etc shall be provided.4. The application software offered shall facilitate the secure execution of these functions. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. Data acquisition and control. Source codes for software programs specifically developed for use in this Contract shall be provided so to enable the Employer to make minor modifications if required.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. Telecommunication network information shall be presented to the operator via the human-machine interface.1 Operating System Software Operating system software based on standard software packages shall be provided to control the execution of system programs. by means of online and off-line test programs.3.3.3 Software Software program packages shall be developed in a high-level program language complying with industry recognised standards. All firmware and software delivered under the Contract shall be the latest field proven version available at the time of design approval. does not comply with the functional requirements detailed in the Specification. 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Workstations shall be fully interchangeable with areas of responsibility and functions allocated to any workstation. data acquisition and processing. program compilers or assemblers.3.2 Applications Software The TMS applications software shall include the following categories: a. Each category of computer shall have its own operating system and that this operating system shall be capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer. All software licences required for proper operation of the TMS shall be included in the offer.3. It shall also be possible to allocate all areas of responsibility to any one operator workstation.4.2 Black and White Laser Printer The laser printer shall produce clear copies on standard A4/A3 paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi (dots per inch).3.4. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 20 ppm (pages per minute) and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 12 ppm and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. All applications shall be supported by user accessible ‗help‘ commands to assist the user in performing the tasks.3. It is intended that standard software will be implemented wherever possible and to this end it must be stated. Data acquisition and control functions include management of database.2.4.121 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . storage and retrieval. c. User interface. where the standard software as offered. Software development tools such as editors. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm and a CD/DVD writer and reader device. 3. application programs etc and to allocate system resources. Support and diagnostic.

The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually or a TMS of alarms.4. Installing new or modified log formats. Alarms Facilities shall be provided for processing of alarms.4 System Functions System functions of the TMS shall include alarms handling. d.Section 6 . Alarm summary displays. 3. as a minimum. and status etc. the following user displays: a. Full details of display generation and data modification procedures shall be provided. graphic displays generation. 3. The real-time databases shall be continuously updated by the processed information from the network components and that entered by the operator(s). h.122 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Classification and grouping of alarms shall be possible. b.4.4. Network component overview displays. Tabular displays. Trend displays. Modification of existing databases and creation of new databases. The alarm list shall be displayed in chronological order with the latest alarm first. When an alarm occurs an audible alarm shall sound and the appropriate symbols shall flash in the alarm field. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. The support software shall include automated back-up/restore and archive facilities provided by menu driven utilities.2 Displays The TMS shall provide. Diagnostic displays. Event displays.4. and in particular this shall give details as to how extra data points and additional network components would be incorporated into the database. c.4.3. historical retrieval and storage. TMS hardware configuration. The database shall be open and the data dictionary published.1 Real-time Databases The system shall comprise a distributed real-time database resident on the application servers. the following: a. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm. remote commands. device or other identifier. g. c.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification even when essential system components fail.4. action. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence. d.3 Network overview displays. location. f. b.3. 3. e.3. Adding/deleting network components and data Installing new or modified VDU diagrams and lists. 3. reports generation. as a minimum. database management and administration. Dynamic data linkages shall be provided to access real-time and historical data by industry standard applications software such as Microsoft Excel etc. Facilities shall be provided to allow.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.5 Reports All report generation shall be generated and edited using report generation software delivered with the TMS. the design and finish of which shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.123 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 3.4.4.4. event or alarm. to be approved by the Employer.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.4. The design. appearance.4. User customised report generation shall be possible.4 Event and Alarm Logging The TMS system shall incorporate long-term logging facilities for all alarm events. Data shall be stored for up to three months on a suitable storage medium and be available for subsequent re-call at a later date. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling.4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture 3. durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them. and finish of the control desk shall be to the approval of the Employer.4. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a telephone handset. 3. and sufficient information to enable full identification of the outstation affected. 3. 3. The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use.3 Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands.4.4.4. Any data processed by the TMS shall be available for storage and subsequent re-call. Information on print-outs may be either in tabular form or in a preformatted report form and may be automatic at specific times or on request. The requested information may be presented on the operator‘s workstations either in tabular form or as selected variable on a trend display. operator commands and system generated actions.4. When the archive becomes full it shall automatically overwrite the oldest data on the archive without degradation of system performance. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches the capacity of the storage medium.2 Chairs Swivel chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each event. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desk shall be to the approval of the Employer. user identification. construction and finish. The operator shall have the facility to recall data held in the data logger memory or from archives over a specified period of time. together with a description of the operation. All data shall be capable of being archived and retained for future reference.4.1 Control Desk A control desk shall be provided for mounting the HMI equipment described in this Specification.Section 6 . The control desk shall be of robust. Alarms and events shall be logged on a designated printer as they are received at the central computer system with each item consisting of the date and time of occurrence.

The DPLC system shall use the latest signal processor technology to permit optimal operating behaviour under all operating conditions. Technical descriptions detailing the DPLC equipment design and performance including equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid.5. This Specification includes for all design and engineering. up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 bit/s Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. The power line carrier equipment shall be designed to work over the high voltage overhead power transmission lines. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment.1 General Digital PLC equipment shall comply with the recommendations of IEC 60495 and shall be fully compatible with existing analogue PLC system.5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.1.2 Functional Requirements 3. If any problems are foreseen by the Contractor he should draw attention to them at the time of preparing the site survey report. twin channel equipment. 3.2. The equipment shall operate satisfactorily under all power system switching and weather conditions likely to be encountered at any time.5. service telephone handsets.2. The Contractor shall put forward a solution for mitigating the problems for consideration by the Employer. suppressed carrier. interconnecting cables.2 Safety The DPLC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. All metal parts. The DPLC equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.1 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM General Requirements 3.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital power line carrier (DPLC) system and associated works. 3. Configuration of carrier frequency and setting up of transmission of speech.5.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation The DPLC equipment shall be capable of operating satisfactorily using the same frequency allocation previously assigned and with the same line traps. Details of the maximum transmission capacity of the DPLC and the signal to noise ratio required shall be included in the Bid.Section 6 .5. teleprotection signalling and voice frequency telegraph signals.1.5.1 General Transmission shall generally be carried out by single sideband. power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. handheld maintenance terminal unit. 3. equipment cubicles.5.3. DPLC terminals including user interfaces. The transmission capacity shall be at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9600 bit/s. The digital PLC equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of builtin alarms associated with vital operating parameters. amplitude modulated. telephone signalling. data and protection signals shall be software programmable. The nominal carrier frequency band shall be 40 – 500 kHz.3 Digital PLC Equipment 3. 3. The digital PLC shall be designed to transmit and receive speech. coupling capacitors and line matching units.124 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 3.

The Bidder shall state the type of modulation scheme and the minimum signal to noise ratio for guaranteed performance. e.500 kHz.3.5.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band. 0 .3. The digital PLC equipment shall be equipped with built in self diagnostics and status monitoring facilities including service telephone.125 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Details of modulation adopted for the digital PLC equipment shall be included in the Bid. 0 .3. k. l. Programming and system configurations shall preferably be carried out using a window based operation. Transmission capacity: Number of speech channels: Channel (including signalling): Number of data channels: Transmission rates per data channel: 32 kb/s (minimum).28). as required.Section 6 .24/V. and shall interface with the telecommunication management system for remote supervision and monitoring. The Bidder shall state in the Bid the maximum numbers of speech channels and data channels possible.3. g. Carrier oscillators shall be designed to operate with a high degree of stability and this shall be stated in Bid. 3. 9600 b/s. 1200/9600 b/s (ITU-T V. The demodulation of the signals shall be coherent.5. 3. h. 4-state quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) or OFDM (othogonal frequency division multiplexing) multi carrier etc and shall be compatible with the required transmission capacity and signal to noise levels. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 75  unbalanced. i. Any means adopted to achieve end-to-end frequency stability shall be clearly stated.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (ITU-T recommendations V. d. The DPLC equipment including transmit and receive filters shall be field programmable over the entire frequency range.4 Automatic Gain Control Automatic gain control shall be provided to prevent transmitter overload and proper operation of the receiver. 3. 8 kHz. j. The frequency difference between a transmitted voice frequency (VF) signal and the received signal shall be not more than the figure stated in the Technical Schedules. b. 40 .9.2 Design Characteristics The DPLC shall have the following characteristics: a. The modulation used shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as 4-state phase shift keying (PSK). 320  30 dB. c. The Bidder shall state the means of obtaining automatic gain control and the degree of regulation attained.5. f.24/V. Number of teleprotection channels: Carrier frequency range: Nominal bandwidth for duplex connection: Output power: Coax impedance: Line impedance: Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR): – 4 per circuit.3 Carrier Oscillators The carrier frequency oscillators shall be fully field programmable and capable of producing the entire range of frequencies from 40 to 500 kHz.

5.10 Power Supplies Requirements The DPLC equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply.8 Monitoring Provision shall be made for monitoring. Ethernet interface. IF oscillator levels. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. d. f. and must have associated dry relay contacts. Teleprotection commands.11 interface.3. Receive pilot level. Multi-rate synchronous data with ITU-T X.24/V. Engineering order wire maintenance telephone handsets shall be provided. the following functions: a.5. Test jacks and/or test points must be available for diagnosing problems. control elements and visual indicators shall be on the front of the modules or front panel. Low level receive carrier. c.6 Test Facilities Means shall be provided for testing the input and output levels at all stages throughout the equipment. 3. 3. b. Decadic signalling. c.3.28 interface. c. 3. e.9 Alarms Provision shall be made for the following alarms as a minimum: a. Low receive pilot level.126 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . with suitable LED‘s and alarm relays.3.5. g. 3.5 Service Telephone Provision shall be made on each carrier terminal for emergency and maintenance telephone communications together with audible and visible calling indicators.3. Receive carrier level. Low SNR (ie high noise level). b.7 User Interfaces The following user interfaces shall be provided as a minimum: a. Power supply voltage. Ringer facility.5. 3. d.Section 6 . f.3.5. e. Low power supply voltage.21/V. e. All alarms shall be shown on the front of the module or panel by suitable LEDs.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. Remote alarms shall provide dry relay contacts for forwarding alarms to the Control Centre via the SCADA system. Multi-rate asynchronous data with ITU-T V. Transmitter output level. Loop test facilities shall be provided in order that a PLC link can be fully tested from one end. Low level transmit carrier. 2 and 4 wire E & M signalling. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Important metering points.3. System operating correctly. d.5.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.127 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the DPLC equipment shall be individually fused.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the DPLC equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract.

3.6. g. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters and a loop test facility.2 Functional Requirements 3. The teleprotection signalling equipment and signal transmission shall not be affected by switching operations. in addition. permissive and direct tripping commands without any additional equipment. d. Technical descriptions detailing the teleprotection signalling equipment performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Direct integration to existing telecommunication systems. atmospheric conditions and other sources of interference. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall. Simple operation and fault diagnosis. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be suitable for transmission of teleprotection commands in the high voltage networks and shall be capable of being used for blocking. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed and manufactured in such a way that disturbances on the transmission path shall not lead to false operation or cause undue delay in the transmission of the tripping command. dependability and security to suit the different operating modes shall be possible by means of programming using either a plug-in handheld terminal or programming switches on the equipment. Integral monitoring facilities. Teleprotection signalling in point to point or T-networks shall be possible. security and dependability. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall employ state-of-the-art components together with the digital signal processing technique to provide programming facilities for flexible adaptation to various requirements of teleprotection signal transmission. Permanent self-supervision.128 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of digital teleprotection signalling system and associated works.2. be capable of direct transfer tripping. f. The teleprotection signalling equipment is required to operate over PLC and fibre optic links.6.Section 6 . The selection of transmission time.1 General The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have the following features: a. b. The type of teleprotection signalling equipment proposed shall be clearly stated in the Bid. Easy programming for optimum setting of signal processing time. e. The equipment should be able to select and disconnect the faulty part of the system in the event of faults in high voltage installations within the shortest possible time.6.6 3. including all interconnecting cables.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. High equipment reliability. and necessary installation materials to complete the system. It shall therefore be of a modular design so that it can be readily for direct connection to the PLC or SDH fibre optic equipment by insertion of a plug in interface module. Wide selection of user interfaces. c. Teleprotection signalling equipment that is an integral part of the PLC or SDH equipment without going via multiplexing equipment is preferred. special switching functions and digital current comparison protection. The protection signalling equipment shall be capable of providing reliable performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. This Specification includes for all design and engineering of the teleprotection signalling equipment. power supplies.

Automatic loop checking. 3. e. 3. Message – 8 (changeover) relay outputs.2. It shall also be possible to transmit alarms to the telecommunication management system. Alarms and monitoring indication shall be clearly displayed through coloured LEDs on the front panel of the module.6.6 Power Supplies Requirements The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the teleprotection signalling equipment shall be individually fused. NCC SCADA system and SAS via voltage free contacts with a maximum operation time of 1. c. c.6. b. The equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a. The LED alarm displays shall be capable of being reset from the equipment. f. appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated.6. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Error rate of guard or tripping signal codes too high.2. 3.2. The equipment shall have as a minimum the following relay interfaces: a.6. Loss of guard signal. In the event of failure.5 Alarms indications The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have extensive alarm and operational monitoring facilities. g. Response of an internal test routine.5 ms. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the teleprotection signalling equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract.4 Interfaces The teleprotection signalling equipment shall provide suitable interfaces for the direct connection to fibre optic transmission equipment.3 System Performance The protection signalling system performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60834 specification. Direct tripping – 4 binary inputs with 4 (NO) relay outputs. 3.2 System Capacity The protection signalling system shall be designed with a minimum of 4 diverse teleprotection command channels operating in full duplex mode. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules.6. h. b. Command transmission – 4 binary inputs with (NO) 4 relay outputs. Bit error rate above the set level. 3. Components failure.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification h.129 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Receive signal low level. Alarm indication signal response. Loss of synchronisation. d.2.Section 6 .2.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7 3.7.1

TELEPHONE SYSTEM Introduction

This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital telephone system and associated works. The private automatic exchange (PAX) shall be designed to fulfil the requirements for the Employer‘s private telecommunication networks and combine both power system operation and administration into one PAX. This Specification includes for all design and engineering, system software, telephony equipment including telephone operator‘s console and handsets, telephone socket outlets, interfacing modules, voice recording equipment, handheld maintenance terminal unit, equipment cubicles, main distribution frames, surge arrestors, isolation transformers, associated ancillary equipment, interconnecting cables and power supplies. The choice of system hardware and the associated software shall be restricted to the use of digital facilities, with the use of analogue techniques being used only at the interfaces to analogue power line carrier (PLC) equipment and telephone handsets. Technical descriptions detailing the PAX equipment performance and capacity, and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance continuously throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. 3.7.2 Functional Requirements

3.7.2.1 General The PAX equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be capable of being integrated into the existing telephone network. To ensure maximum compatibility with future systems, all equipment and systems provided by the Contractor shall conform to the latest ITU-T recommendations. The PAXs shall be interlinked by either digital or analogue trunk/tie lines to form an integrated telephone network for the purpose of providing operational and administrative telephone communications covering all power stations, transmission and primary substations and Control Centres. The telephone network shall be transparent to the users and all users shall have the same functions and features as if they were connected to one exchange. The PAX equipment shall have facilities to give priorities and restrictions according to the function and importance of users. System parameters and database shall be configurable by software both locally and from a remote site. The PAX software shall be designed for the full capacity that does not required to be modified or replaced by the extension of the PAX hardware. Operating system software shall preferably be stored in EEPROM or similar technology. 3.7.2.2 System Performance The PAX equipment shall be designed with a low probability of losing telephone calls and be capable of providing the following minimum traffic handling capabilities: a. b. 0.4 erlang per extension. 0.7 erlang per trunk.

The signalling and switching system shall be designed in such a way that the call setup time to any extension on the PAX network shall be less than 2 seconds. 3.7.2.3 Network Management Facilities The PAX equipment shall be provided with network management and supervision capability so as to facilitate continuous access to operation and maintenance information associated with the telephone network. The network management and supervision equipment shall enable a network operator to monitor several communications links from a centralised location, and where necessary remotely carry out diagnostics and modifications to equipment configuration.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 130 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

All items of equipment necessary for providing the network management and supervision facilities shall be supplied under the Contract. 3.7.2.4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces The exchange equipment shall require both analogue and digital interfaces. The analogue interfaces shall be two and four wire interfaces, with and without E & M signalling and busy/test signalling, to suit telephone, PLC and pilot cable equipment. 2 wire loop subscriber/tie lines shall be possible as an option. The digital interfaces shall be 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s with and without common channel signalling, to suit digital data links and inter-exchange trunks. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected; ie neither a short circuit nor open circuit on the line shall cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected so that the application of a 500V, 50 Hz signal to either or both legs of the line, shall not cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment, or cause malfunctioning of the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall have an insulation resistance of greater than 10 mega ohms when a 500 Vdc megger is applied between the line terminals and earth. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected from electrostatic discharges transmitted to, or occurring at the line interface unit. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be capable of withstanding longitudinal voltage impulses, with a peak voltage of 2 000 volts, a rise time of 10 microseconds and a decay time of 1 000 microseconds, without damage. 3.7.2.4.1 2 Wire Analogue Telephone Interface

The interface shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) signalling. The interfaces shall provide BORSCHT functions (ie Battery supply, Over-voltage protection, Ring current supply, Supervision, Code, Hybrid and Testing functions) for each line connection. The line feed shall be sufficient to ensure the satisfactory performance of two telephones in parallel on a balanced line of between 0 and 1 500 metres in length. The range of loop resistance over which the interface will operate will be 0 to 500 ohms, with a similar limit for the Transmission Equivalent Resistance (TER). The 2 wire port impedance shall be 600 ohms, nominal, balanced and suited to the telephone instruments during ringing, signalling and voice transmission conditions. 3.7.2.4.2 Analogue Power Line Carrier Interfaces

The interfaces shall operate as four wire plus E and M interconnections, with the facility for equipment busy signalling wire and test signalling wire, for use with existing transmission equipment interfaces such as PLC and pilot cable interfaces. The electrical interface requirements are as follows: Transmit and receive pairs: impedance 600 ohms balanced; better than 20 dB; levels - 3.5 dBm. 48-volt battery and relay coil. voltage free relay contact to earth. voltage free relay contact to earth. return loss

E wire: M wire: Test/busy wires: 3.7.2.4.3 PAX to PAX Interface

The interfaces shall operate as digital trunk/tie line interfaces to enable exchanges to be interconnected with digital PAX and multiplex equipment. 2 Mb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.732.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 131 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

64 kb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with requirements of ITU-T recommendation G.703, and shall be complete with channel associated signalling. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that these interfaces enable the full range of network facilities to be available for the PAX extensions. 3.7.2.4.4 Pilot Cable Interface

The interface shall provide facilities to interconnect telephone and other terminals to multiplex and between exchanges via pilot cable systems. These interfaces generally conform to those of the PLC system, and are suitable for extending 2 or 4 wire analogue telephone interfaces beyond the 500 ohm limit. All necessary isolating transformers shall be provided. 3.7.2.5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment Provisions shall be provided by the Contractor to enable: a. b. PAX equipment to interface with the telecommunication management system. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the voice recording equipment. PAX equipment to interface with the facsimile machines. SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment

c.

d. 3.7.3

3.7.3.1 General The PAX equipment shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) digital type exchange with non-blocking architecture, suitable for the transmission of 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital signals. It should be possible, if required at a later date, to interface with public switched telephone network (PSTN) and other public integrated services digital network (ISDN) exchanges. Details of how this can be achieved shall be included in the Bid. The PAX shall be capable of being connected via 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital trunk links as well as analogue PLC circuits utilising multi-frequency and E&M signalling to other existing PAXs installed in the telephone network. It shall also be possible to transfer 30 voice channels to a remote place or as a tie line to another PAX. The PAX equipment shall also be capable of fully automatic switching and use completely solid state time/space switching methods. All PAXs shall provide an orderly shut down during loss of power and automatic recovery after restoration of power. Furthermore the PAXs shall be capable of being configured by software to automatically search for alternative routes in the PAX telephone network should the first choice route be busy or faulty so to maximise the availability of the network. Only if all possible routes have been attempted and found unavailable will the ‗engaged‘ tone be returned to the caller. The equipment shall be expandable to at least the specified maximum switching capacity without impairment to reliability and performance, and without the need for replacement of installed major software or equipment items. Failure of any single component shall not go undetected or cause failure of critical function. The PAX equipment shall be capable of detecting faulty trunk lines and disconnect them as well as periodically test their status and re-connect the trunk line once it is operational. The PAX shall report to the telecommunication management system should one or more trunk lines are faulty. The PAX shall be capable of incorporating the facility for recording voice messages on a store and forward basis. Telephones connected to the network shall be able to send a voice message to the PAX, together with a called extension number. A message waiting indication shall be available to telephone stations to advise that a message has been stored when a code prefix is keyed. Messages are to be password (key pad code) protected.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 132 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7.3.2 Switching Facilities The switching equipment shall provide for the following facilities: a. b. The interconnection of calling and called extensions. The interconnection of the PAX exchanges for information, control and voice via multiplex circuits conforming to relevant ITU-T recommendations and PLC channels confirming to IEC 60495. Interconnection with central PAX telephone system manager console at the Control Centre. A traffic monitoring and reporting system.

c.

d.

3.7.3.3 System Facilities a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. Abbreviated dialling. Alarm signalling. Answering machine connection. Auto-attendant. Hot line dialling. Long line extension. Incoming/outgoing call barring. Automatic call distribution. Break-in/listening-in. Call identification. Central/distributed operator. Conference call. Day/night mode. Directory assistance/programming. Directory dialling. Emergency alarm. Message answering. Music on hold. Password protection.

3.7.3.4 Extension Facilities The PAX shall provide for the interconnection of any calling and called extension connected to the exchange, without the participation of a telephone operator, on the basis of keyed or dialled number information. The exchange equipment shall provide, as a minimum, the following facilities: a. b. Normal telephone-to-telephone communications. Limited access extensions and tie circuits for which special prefix calling codes shall be applicable and as a selectable option, that only specified calling extensions can access.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 133 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

c.

Priority access enabling selected extensions to interrupt busy extensions or trunks and either request or force the freeing of the busy extension or trunk. Both ‗request‘ and ‗forced‘ priority levels to be available. Automatic callback on ‗Busy‘ or ‗No Reply‘ in which the PAX will automatically initiate a retry of a called extension once the called extension becomes free. The calling extension will need to enter a prefix code for this facility to be operable. Conference call, both 3-way conference established by a normal extension, and a multiparty conference (up to 20 extensions) established through a multi-key hand set at each Control Room Operator position. Call transfer to enable a calling party to be transferred to another extension. Call transfer/follow-me to enable all incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension. Call transfer on no answer to enable incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension if not answered within a predetermined time (programmable time adjustment 5 to 30 seconds). Call pick up to enable a called extension to be answered at another extension by keying from that other extension using a prefix code. Last number redial to enable a call retry without re-keying the required extensions. Abbreviated dialling in which short key codes will enable access of previously stored longer numbers for extensions connected directly to the network. Call waiting indication, a busy extension shall receive a call waiting signal, once a calling extension keys a ‗camp-on‘ request suffix code. The exchange will automatically call the called extension when it becomes free, while the second caller is waiting. Extension group hunting, a number of extensions may be grouped on a common extension number and incoming calls shall be assigned in priority on cyclic order to the next free extension. Extensions directly connected to the network shall be able to press a hold button to hold an existing call while initiating a second call.

d.

e.

f. g.

h.

i.

j. k.

l.

m.

n.

The facilities shall be available on an assigned basis, whereby a central operator shall be able to allocate any or all facilities to any extension either directly connected, or remotely connected to the PAX on the network. The means of assignment shall be by the use of a simple task list, entered at the exchange administrative/supervisory terminal. The task list shall not involve complex codes and shall use a high level, easy to operate man-machine interface. All facilities shall be readily available without limitation, i.e. the use of any single facility or any combination of facilities shall not limit the use of other facilities on any extension. 3.7.3.5 Switching Capacity The exchange equipment shall have initial and final switching capacities as detailed in Technical Schedules. 3.7.3.6 Transmission Performance Transmission through the exchange will involve: a. b. c. 2-wire to 2-wire analogue working. 4-wire to 4-wire analogue and 64 kb/s digital working. 2-wire to 4-wire working, both analogue and 64 kb/s digital.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 134 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

d.

2 and 4-wire analogue and 2 and 4-wire 64 k/s digital to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working, and the reverse direction. 2 Mb/s to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working.

e.

The exchange transmission performance shall comply with the ITU-T recommendation G.712, for combined transit/local exchanges and related recommendations in regard to measurement techniques, interface characteristics, definitions and, in particular, in respect of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Relative level values and tolerance. Impedance, nominal values return loss, longitudinal balance. Terminal balance return loss. Nominal transmission loss and variations with time and input levels. Attenuation/frequency distortion. Group delay, absolute delay, absolute group delay and variation with frequency. Noise, weighted idle channel, cross talk, intermodulation, impulse noise, quantization distortion, spurious signals. Discrimination from out-of-band signals. Bit error rate performance.

h. i. 3.7.3.7 Software

The preferred software programming language is CHILL, as described in ITU-T recommendation Z.200. However, other high level programming languages may be offered if they can provide better reliability and maintainability required, and which conform to the basic structural requirements. Details of the programming language used and software licensing and upgrades arrangements shall be included in the Bid. The software shall be well tried and tested and shall be of modular construction, using a hierarchical set of function levels and modules. The modules shall be combined using structured programming techniques, in which each module is well defined and the communication between the modules also well defined. Security measures shall be provided to protect the system software from corruption. System parameters and database shall be user configurable by software. Password protection shall be used to allow only authorised users access to the modification of system parameters and database. It shall be possible to modify the database without disturbing operation of the exchange. All programming tools and man machine interfaces required for system modifications and re-configurations shall be provided under the Contract. 3.7.3.8 Maintenance The exchange shall provide automatic monitoring and reporting functions to verify the proper execution of call handling and exchange software or hardware malfunctions, and report on the condition of interfaces and exchange resource, eg memory occupation, call queue levels, CPU utilisation, traffic levels. The exchange shall be equipped with the following alarm facilities: a. Urgent alarms are those indicating the exchange has or is about to stop or that a major malfunction has occurred that can affect the operational service. Non-urgent alarms are resulting from transient conditions or self-clearing (automatic partial restart) conditions that do not affect the operational service.

b.

Classification and prioritisation of system alarms shall be configurable by the user. Local urgent and non-urgent alarm indicators shall be provided. Voltage free alarm contacts shall also be provided to enable integration into the telecommunication management system and SCADA system. Provision shall be provided to enable diagnostics and maintenance functions, telephone numbering changes and network management facilities be carried from a remote site.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 135 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7.3.9 Hardware To meet functional, reliability and performance requirements, the hardware for the exchange shall use: a. b. c. d. e. Distributed call handling multiprocessor architecture. Duplicated processors each equipped with its own memory and memory control. Duplicated buses for common data, memory and control. Duplicated power supply units. High speed RAM backed by non-volatile, eg EEPROM, memory and duplicated hard disk storage (storage to have 50 per cent spare capacity). Duplicated ringing/tone signalling. Bulk software loading facilities, preferably of the hard cassette disk or CDROM/DVD type. System control and display panel. All switching/exchange equipment shall operate from a 48 Vdc power supply system. Synchronisation

f. g.

h. i.

3.7.4

The telephone exchange shall be provided with facilities for linking to a master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. 3.7.5 Telephone Numbering Plan

The PAX shall be programmed according to the Employer‘s telephone numbering plan. The exchange shall have facilities to transpose telephone numbers for routing to and from extensions on remote exchanges. It shall be possible to alter the numbering plan at a later date should this be required. 3.7.6 Telephone Signalling

Line, information, tone and ring signalling shall be provided to suit analogue and digital telephone extension equipment. Analogue telephone extension signalling shall provide the line, information, tone and ringing facilities as follows: a. The extension line control signalling shall use line loop signalling to initiate and terminate extension calling and answer activities, in accordance with BORSCHT exchange and multiplex interface requirements. Information signalling will be DTMF in accordance with ITU-T recommendations Q.23 and Q.16, and other associated ITU-T recommendations. Tone signalling will conform to the supplier‘s standard equipment and appropriate ITU-T recommendations. Ringing current shall be to the manufacturer‘s standard.

b.

c.

d.

The network signalling protocols for the PAX network shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as analogue private networking signalling system (APNSS) and digital private networking signalling system (DPNSS). Details of the PAX network signalling protocols proposed shall be included in the Bid.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 136 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

b. Ability to collect data either directly or via a remote data collection device. Ability to produce traffic analysis and summaries by locations and called number plus exception reports. Details of features provided for each type of telephone handsets shall be included in the Bid. Longest waiting call. They shall be suitable for either desk top or wall mounted. d.7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities Printed and visual display reports of the status of the exchange shall be possible either as an integral part of the PAX equipment or via a personal computer (PC). 3. provisions shall be made to enable details of each incoming and outgoing call on the network be recorded. The data collection device shall be protected with 24 hours of battery back-up and equipped with floppy disk or tape back-up storage device. e. The operator‘s console shall be capable of displaying the following information as a minimum: a.8 A telephone system management console shall be provided for the PAX at the Control Centre. Record incoming and outgoing calls by destination and trunk groups. The reports shall be date and time stamped and identify exchange and software version codes. call transfers and fault reporting. Waiting time for unanswered incoming calls. 3. establishing multiparty conference calls. Priority override calls. 3. Hands free operation. stored and printed in a report form for administrative and operational purposes.7. patching and test connections for the telecommunication system.7. the console shall also control the normal monitoring and operation of the switching network. d.10 Main Distribution Frame Main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided to facilitate cable terminations.9 Telephone Handsets The handsets shall be of modern design and equipped with push buttons for call selection. Capacity to store at least 50 000 call records with expansion capability to 100 000 records. The following facilities shall be provided as a minimum: a. In addition. Called/calling parties identity on the other terminal. including enquiries on system operation and extension numbers. In addition. c. and be ergonomically designed for "stress free" operation.7. circuit re-routing. Line engaged. The final design and colour of the telephone handsets shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. The facilities available on the console shall include at least the following: a. circuit disconnection. c. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Telephone System Management Console b.Section 6 . c. headset and exchange function controls. Built-in speaker shall be provided to enable hand free operation. Centralised voice recording for operational telephone communications. Ability to produce management and equipment status reports.137 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . keyboard. e. Ability to initiate multi party conference call.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. b. The final design of the console shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. handset. The operator‘s console shall be equipped with interactive VDU.7.

7. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Sufficient verticals and termination blocks shall be provided to accommodate the anticipated ultimate number of exchange and extension lines and cabling requirements for other systems. Voice playback facility. Fuses. 3. All main distribution frames shall have an earth connection provided. All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s). and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours. Sufficiently built in redundancy to avoid single point of failure. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. surge protectors and barrier transformers etc shall be provided under the Contract. d. e. c. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc).138 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. The capacity of the main distribution frames shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity required for the telecommunication and SCADA data channels plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable.Section 6 . Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. Archiving on optical media such as CD or DVD for long term storage. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date. b. The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s).11 Voice Recording Equipment A computer based voice recording equipment shall be provided at the Control Centre to automatically log all telephone conversations between operators in the Control Centre and other personnel. h. User friendly. f. g. Cross connection by means of jumpering facilities shall also be provided. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Main distribution frames shall preferably be single-sided and suitable for wall mounting.

OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS 4. the Bidder is not restricted to offering individual transducers and may offer combined transducers or other signal conversion techniques suitable and proven in HV substation environments and providing they comply with the relevant IEC standards. The general requirements of the various elements of the substation works including Outstations. relays and sundry other miscellaneous equipment are specified in the General Technical Specifications and Technical Schedules.3 OUTSTATIONS Outstations supplied under the contract shall be entirely suited for operation in HV substations both in terms of functionality and suitability for the climatic and EMC environments.1 and 4.3 lists the locations where there are existing Outstations that the Contractor shall integrate into the new SCADA/EMS. cables.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 4. repairs and replacements can be carried without endangering or disruption to other parts of the works.2 DESIGN OBJECTIVES The principle objectives of the design of the substation works shall be to provide high reliability & availability.Section 6 . 4. 4.3. The Bidder shall provide a reference list detailing where the proposed equipment has been supplied for comparable applications. Substation Automation Systems.1 INTRODUCTION This section describes the project specific requirements for the Outstation and Substation Adaptation works in terms of overall design. It is expected that where new or replacement outstation equipment is required that each substation will be equipped with: a) Remote Terminal Units (conventional or distributed) b) SCADA Interface Panel(s) – SIP c) Bay Control Units (for distributed solutions) d) Plant interfaces (existing and new devices where required) e) Plant to SIP cabling f) SIP to RTU cabling g) 48Vdc positive earth power supply with battery and charger h) Communication interface All components shall be wholly suitable for operation in the hazardous environment of substations. SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles. 4. These tables identify the number of each type of signal required at each location. functionality and performance. However. Table 4. The installation shall ensure that exposure to hazards is minimised and where possible protected from common mode failures or damage caused by other failures. The Outstations proposed for this contract should have a proven track record of satisfactory operation in similar environments.139 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 Initial Equipping of Outstations The Outstations supplied under this contract shall be equipped for monitoring and control as defined in Tables 4. provide:   Protocol Adaptation Signal data definition Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. subject to the results of the site surveys. At these locations the Contractor shall. and Distributed RTUs.2. This table indicates the activities and devices that are required to complete the integration task at each location. For the purpose of this document Outstations includes Remote Terminal Units (RTU). The Contract also requires that all existing Outstations are connected to the new NSCC Master Station and where necessary that additional signals are incorporated. They also identify the number of transducers and interposing relays required. ease of maintenance and to meet the system performance requirements. The components/modules shall be designed to have inherently high reliability. Equipment construction and installation shall allow easy access so that tests.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .140 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification     Point to Point Verification New/Additional Communication Gateway Port New/Additional Communication PDH Port New GPS And any other items to complete and set to work.

No. No.Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment Unit Lot Lot Lot No.Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA – Water Level Transducers 4-20mA – Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA – Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. No.Battery Transducers .Current Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply .MVAr Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4. No. No.1 Materials and Works for New Outstations Stations Embilipitiya SS Sapugaskanda GSS Bowatenna PS Anuradhapura New Valachchenai Nuwara Eliya Trincomalee Hambantota Seethawaka Veyangoda Canyon PS NSCC RTU Ratmalana Panadura Kosgama Kelaniya Ampara Matara Total Outstations without existing RTUs Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles Complete with all necessary terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply . No.Voltage Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.Frequency Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No.Temperature Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.141 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . No. No.MW Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. m m Lot Lot Lot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 83 331 36 18 0 0 0 0 468 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1 1 1 110 373 41 12 0 2 0 0 538 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 3 1 1 1 1 5 57 16 6 3 2 0 2 91 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 4 1 1 1 1 2 74 24 12 6 4 0 4 126 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 5 1 1 1 1 79 343 42 12 0 0 0 0 476 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 6 1 1 1 1 63 235 24 18 0 0 0 0 340 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 7 1 1 1 1 111 364 43 12 0 0 0 0 530 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 8 1 1 1 1 63 252 26 12 0 0 0 0 353 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 9 1 1 1 1 83 337 36 18 0 0 0 0 474 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 10 1 1 1 1 70 287 29 18 0 0 0 0 404 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 11 1 1 1 1 63 291 31 18 0 0 0 0 403 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 12 1 1 1 1 83 310 31 18 0 0 0 0 442 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 13 1 1 1 1 93 423 47 18 0 0 0 0 581 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 14 1 1 1 1 70 276 29 18 0 0 0 0 393 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 15 1 1 1 1 45 200 26 12 3 2 0 2 290 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 16 1 1 1 1 67 263 28 12 0 0 0 0 370 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 1 1 1 1 54 205 19 18 0 0 0 0 296 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 1 1 1 16 64 16 16 16 16 16 16 176 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 18 18 18 1160 4685 544 268 28 26 16 24 6751 18 18 18 18 18 18 17 9 0 6 9 10 0 9 2 12 12 4 0 1 1 3 83 349 32 1 1 2 110 387 30 4 1 3 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 65 2 6 1 5 5 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 90 0 11 1 10 10 8 0 6 0 5 5 6 0 14 0 12 12 3 0 6 0 5 5 8 0 8 0 7 7 12 0 6 0 5 5 11 0 6 0 5 5 13 0 8 0 6 6 9 0 12 0 11 11 11 0 5 0 5 5 12 0 1 1 2 79 355 28 1 1 3 63 253 20 1 1 2 111 376 30 1 1 2 63 264 20 1 1 3 83 355 26 1 1 3 70 305 22 1 1 3 63 309 20 1 1 3 83 328 26 1 1 3 93 441 32 1 1 3 70 294 18 8 0 6 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 214 16 6 0 5 7 8 0 3 0 3 3 8 0 8 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 2 67 275 24 1 1 3 54 223 14 16 16 1 8 64 1 135 6 112 117 135 1 2 3 3 32 32 41 1152 4947 361 0 1800 52000 18 18 17 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 1000 1 1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No.Section 6 . No. No. No. No.

2 Materials and Works for INDACTIC 33 Replacement RTUs Stations Kiribathkumbura Randenigala PS Samanalawewa PS Kotudoga . No.Frequency Transducers 4-20mA .Current Transducers 4-20mA – Water Level Transducers 4-20mA – Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA – Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA .Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment Unit Lot Lot Lot No. No. No. No. No. No.Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply . No.Section 6 . No. No. No. No. No.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4. No.Temperature Transducers 4-20mA .MVAr Transducers 4-20mA .4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. m m Lot Lot Lot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 120 375 40 18 0 0 0 0 553 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1 1 1 115 430 49 18 0 0 0 0 612 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 3 1 1 1 1 212 661 84 18 0 0 0 0 975 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 4 1 1 1 1 90 391 44 18 0 0 0 0 543 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 5 1 1 1 1 16 276 52 12 18 12 0 12 398 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 6 1 1 1 1 91 379 45 18 0 0 0 0 533 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 7 1 1 1 1 115 519 64 18 9 6 0 6 737 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 8 1 1 1 1 96 302 35 24 0 0 0 0 457 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 9 1 1 1 1 73 346 33 18 0 0 0 0 470 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 10 1 1 1 1 85 307 55 6 15 10 0 10 488 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 11 1 1 1 1 114 340 39 18 0 0 0 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 12 1 1 1 1 79 308 45 0 6 4 0 4 446 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 13 1 1 1 1 12 104 27 0 6 4 0 4 157 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 14 1 1 1 1 88 401 54 36 6 4 0 4 593 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 15 1 1 1 1 37 178 27 12 0 4 0 4 262 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 16 1 1 1 1 37 316 50 24 0 24 0 0 451 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 1 1 1 1 9 56 17 0 6 4 0 4 96 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 1 1 1 1 2 184 41 18 9 6 0 6 266 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 18 18 18 1391 5872 801 276 75 78 0 54 8547 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 187 30 203 219 70 6 8 21 21 17 17 44 1391 6227 442 0 1800 54000 18 18 18 9 0 9 13 7 0 12 2 11 11 11 0 21 4 23 26 8 0 10 0 9 11 12 0 14 0 14 14 8 0 10 0 9 13 11 0 1 1 6 120 393 38 1 1 3 115 448 32 1 1 3 212 679 76 1 1 3 90 409 34 0 0 0 16 300 2 1 1 3 91 397 36 15 2 19 19 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 115 543 38 10 4 8 11 0 0 6 0 5 7 13 0 1 1 4 96 326 34 1 1 3 73 364 26 10 2 14 14 0 2 1 5 5 1 1 1 85 323 18 11 2 12 12 0 0 1 1 0 114 358 32 12 2 12 12 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 79 312 22 7 1 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 12 108 4 13 3 14 13 0 4 1 2 2 1 1 6 88 441 28 6 2 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 37 194 10 6 2 20 20 0 0 1 1 4 37 364 10 4 2 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 9 60 2 11 2 10 9 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 2 208 0 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No. No.Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA .MW Transducers 4-20mA . No.Battery Transducers .142 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . No. No. No. No.Voltage Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.Old Sapugaskanda PS Kelanitissa PS Anuradhapura Old Rantambe PS Laxapana PS (old) Kothmale PS Polpitiya PS Ukuwela PS Kurunegala Pannipitiya 132/33kV Victoria PS Balangoda Outstations RTUs with INDACTIC 33 RTUs Biyagama Habarana Total Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles with all terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply . No. No. No. No. No. No. No.

101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 IEC 870 .3 Existing and Proposed SCADA Facilities and Protocols Item 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 V1 V2 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Station Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (SUB A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (SUB 1) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Kukule PS Matugama GSS Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Baddegama Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala GSS Existing/Planned Outstation Type Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 561 .5 .101 IEC 60870 . Computer Under station project Under station project Interface to ABB Gateway Computer Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .Section 6 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .143 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Existing Protocol IEC 60870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 . Computer Interface to VATech Stat.5 .101 IEC 60870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SYS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to VATech Stat.5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 60870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4.101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

Item SP20

Station Weligama GSS 4.3.2

Existing/Planned Outstation Type Under station project 2012 - 2016

Existing Protocol IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104

Expansion and Upgrade Capability

The expansion capability of the SCADA system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. All delivered Outstations shall be dimensioned according to the following criteria: a. b. c. d. All delivered Outstations shall be equipped to accommodate a 20% increase in I/O as defined in the I/O schedules Where spare capacity would mean that I/O cards with no signals are required then only the wired rack space shall be provided This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules For stations where supervisory control is not yet required, the Outstations shall have the functionality to execute controls and sufficient rack space, processing power and power supply capacity to accommodate control output modules for the number of circuit breakers and switches being monitored. This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules. The provision shall also take into account the requirement for a 20% increase in controls outputs. The SCADA Interface Panels (facilities) shall be equipped with sufficient spare terminals to accommodate the expansion requirements set out in ―a‖ to ―d‖.

e.

Cabling for these expansion requirements shall be installed between the Outstation and the SCADA Interface Panels. Cabling from the plant to the SCADA Interface Panels shall contain a minimum of 10% spare pairs for each signal type or a minimum of one spare pair for each signal type associated with the Outstation. 4.3.3 Functional requirements

4.3.3.1 General The standard Outstation software shall be capable of supporting, but not be limited to, the following basic functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. Data acquisition and processing, data preparation for transmission, data transmission, and performing control functions commanded by the Master station. Alarm/Event prioritisation for the interrogation of changes of status. Sequence of Events recording with a storage capacity for 24 hours alarm, event and measurement data. Synchronising of internal time clocks with a high resolution GPS signal or synchronising messages from the Master Station. Secure telecommand using the select/check/execute mechanism with OPEN and CLOSE command outputs. Initiate Load Shedding of pre-definable sizes of load following specific and/or broadcast instruction from the NSCC (the load shall be monitored on each MV feeder and based on a predefined priority the required circuit breakers corresponding to the predefined load shed value shall be tripped/opened). The predefinitions shall be readily set up and amended by the Operators in the NSCC. Programming to carry out specific user defined functions

g.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 144 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

The alarms shall be assigned with priority levels at the Outstation and transmitted according to priority or alternatively as soon as the alarms are received, whichever method is standard. The standard method employed shall be fully described. The occurrence of an alarm or an event shall be arranged for transmission to the Master station at the earliest opportunity. Alarms or events occurring during a transmission of measurements shall be arranged for insertion at the next convenient point in the message cycle. Details shall be provided in the Bid describing the message cycles employed for methods where priority assignments are implemented at the Outstation (e.g. arranging multiple alarms with different priorities). Each Outstation shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialisation following restoration of power after an outage without need of Master Station intervention. 4.3.3.2 Time Synchronisation Outstations shall have the capability to time tag events and alarms to a resolution of 1 ms or better with respect to other time tagged signals in the same Outstation. To complement this feature, the Outstation clocks shall be synchronised to enable system wide comparisons to be made on the alarms and events recorded by different Outstations. The synchronisation shall be achieved by providing periodic time signals from GPS clocks and from synchronising messages from the Master Station. The resolution of time tags between Outstations shall be better than 5ms. In the event of a failure of the external synchronising time signal, the Outstation shall continue to perform time tagging from its internal clock until the synchronisation signal is restored and the clock is corrected to compensate for any time drift. 4.3.3.3 Communication Protocols 4.3.3.3.1 Master Station

The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following master station communication protocol: a) IEC 60870-5 101 b) IEC 60870-5 104 4.3.3.3.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)

The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following communication protocol for communicating with intelligent electronic devices: a) IEC 62056-21 b) IEC 60870-102 c) IEC 60870-103 d) MBUS e) Modbus RTU f) 4.3.3.3.3 JBUS Satellite RTUs

Where an Outstation is used to collect data from a remote location using a Satellite RTU a standard protocol shall be used to suit the communication medium available. 4.3.4 Control Security

Operation of control outputs shall use a true select/-/check/-/before/-/execute command sequence between the Outstation and the master station. The sequence shall include, as a minimum, the following functional capabilities: a. The master station shall transmit a control selection message addressing the required Outstation and control point within the Outstation, and indicate the control action desired.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 145 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

b.

The Outstation shall initialise its control logic, reassemble the control selection message received in (a) above, and transmit the reassembled message to the master station. The information in the message sent to the master station shall be generated by the Outstation‘s point-selection logic indicating the point and control function selected. It shall not be a simple repeat of the master station‘s message transmission. The master station will verify the returned message with the message sent in (a) and, if valid, shall issue an execute control message to the Outstation. The Outstation shall only operate the control point selected after the check - before - execute sequence above has been performed without error or interruption by any other messages. The Outstation shall reset its control logic upon any error in the sequence or if the execute message is not received within a set time (user adjustable) after the command message is received at the Outstation. Hardware Requirements

c. d.

4.3.5

4.3.5.1 General Each Outstation shall comprise microprocessor based equipment with its software (firmware) resident in non-volatile memory. It shall be readily possible to update the software (e.g. by PROM replacement) to alter or extend the Outstation‘s functionality. The Outstation shall be linked to the plant by means of a number of I/O modules with a main processing module processing the signals. The standard I/O shall include single, double point and multi-point teleindication input signals, analogue telemetering input signals, pulse counting and double point telecommand and teleswitching output signals. Communications to the SCADA master station shall be by communications modules via modems connected to the bearer circuits. The I/O modules shall include all interface and protection circuits. The design of all Outstation equipment shall be such, as to ensure satisfactory operation in an electrically hostile environment typical of high voltage electrical installations. In order to prevent incorrect functioning or damage to the equipment when subjected to interference arising from power system switching, fault currents and lightning, all Outstation input and output circuits, and power supply circuits shall be provided with isolation and/or immunity to electrical interference. Where the inherent withstand capability of Outstation I/O modules does not meet the test requirements specified in IEC 870-3 Class III then interposing equipment with the required withstand characteristics shall be provided. 4.3.5.2 Digital Inputs The digital inputs shall comprise ‗volt free‘ contacts. Changes of state in the digital inputs shall be reported to the main processing module for further processing. The inputs shall be configurable from a down-loadable database. Status changes shall be time tagged to a resolution selectable from 20 ms, 10 ms, 5 ms, 2 ms and 1 ms, with or without debounce filtering. Digital inputs may be single point, double point or multi-point. The interpretation of states for single or double point inputs shall be configurable. A single point indication shall be represented by a binary digit. Double points shall be represented by a pair of binary digits. 4.3.5.3 Analogue Inputs The analogue input module shall be capable of processing standard voltage and current inputs continuously. Input voltage and current range, and variable scan rate shall all be configurable. The inputs shall be multiplexed and digitised by the use of an analogue multiplexer and an analogue-todigital converter (ADC). A fast sampling, self calibrating ADC technique shall be utilised to measure the input signal. The ADC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits plus 1 sign bit ADC specification over a wide temperature range. Additional software filtering facilities shall be provided for minimising sampling errors. Each analogue input shall be monitored, by the Outstation, against two upper and two lower limit values, with an alarm time delay. An alarm shall be generated only if the limit has been exceeded for longer

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 146 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

than the programmed time delay. This shall be operator adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds or by a variable number of scan cycle periods (1 to 100). Each analogue input shall be terminated with transient voltage protection components. In case of overload, the input circuit shall not sustain any deterioration of its characteristics. Furthermore, an overload present on one of the circuits shall not induce telemetering errors on the other circuits. 4.3.5.4 Pulse Counting The Outstations shall be capable of counting and storing the number of pulses generated by MWh or MVArh metering equipment external to the Outstation. The metering equipment will provide an isolated normally open contact. The pulse counter shall be incremented one count for each cycle of the input (pulse). The pulse counter shall be capable of accepting pulses at a rate of ten counts per second. The count shall be ―frozen‖ (transferred to a buffer register) when commanded by the master station or when commanded by locally generated contact inputs. The Contractor shall describe his method for ensuring the value recorded at the master station(s) corresponds precisely with the value indicated by the pulsing instrument. 4.3.5.5 Command Outputs Command outputs shall enable the Outstation to telecommand power devices by operating external interposing relays. Galvanic isolation shall be achieved by relays on the modules. Facilities shall be provided for pulse controls with programmable duration from 0 to 60 seconds. The module shall provide dual pole control outputs configured as high security select/actuate with check-back. The module shall operate by means of internal ―select‖ relays following a command from the master station. Each ―select‖ relay shall have a pair of isolated contacts which shall be used to select a power device. Once a particular power device has been selected, a second command shall be required from the master station to energise one of two ―actuate‖ relays. These relays shall each have a pair of contacts which shall be configured to complete the circuit to energise the selected power device using the substation/plant supply. The duration for which the external device is energised shall be determined by a programmable interval timer whose value shall be set either locally or remotely. The design of the command circuit shall ensure that no single hardware failure on the module can cause incorrect operation of the command outputs. Also an on-board watch-dog circuit shall be provided to monitor correct software operation. Should time out occur then all outputs shall be inhibited. 4.3.5.6 Digital Outputs The digital output module shall provide non-isolated digital outputs suitable for driving local display lamps or external interface relays. Each digital output shall be configurable between continuous and pulse modes. In continuous mode the digital output shall be set to a particular state and remain there until set to the opposite state. In pulse mode the digital output is set to the energised state for a predefined time. The time shall be user configurable for each pulse mode output. The mode and time information shall be down-loadable from the master station. 4.3.5.7 Analogue Outputs The analogue output module shall provide dc voltage or current outputs. The analogue output module shall convert data from digital form to analogue form utilising a digital to analogue converter (DAC). The DAC shall be cyclically tested for correct operation. The DAC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits + 1 sign bit on unipolar, bipolar and offset outputs. 4.3.6 External Communications Interfaces

4.3.6.1 Master Stations Outstations shall have capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple independent master stations. Each Outstation shall be equipped with a communication port for communication with the SCADA Master Station. The Outstations shall be capable of expansion to support an additional port for communications with another Master Station. The communications interfaces provided shall depend on the type of communication channel available at the location:

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 147 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

 

SDH Node o The interfaces shall support 64kbps digital channels and TCP/IP Ethernet channels

DPLC Channel o The interfaces shall conform to CCITT Recommendations V.24 and V.28. The baud rate of each communication port shall be configurable over the range 50 to 9600 baud for connection to modems.

4.3.6.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) Each Outstation shall be capable of being equipped with up to 4 communications ports for communication with intelligent electronic devices (IEDs). The communications interfaces provided shall conform to EIA RS 485. communication port shall be configurable over the range 300 to 38400 baud. 4.3.6.3 Configuration and Maintenance Each Outstation shall be equipped with an external communications ports for connection to a portable configuration and maintenance PC. 4.3.7 Power supplies The baud rate of each

At each location the Outstations and ancillary equipment will be supplied from a battery backed dc power supply. Where a new power supply is required it shall be a duplicated system that meets the requirements for 48 Vdc Power Supplies specified in this document. The battery charger units shall each be capable of supplying 100% of the load for the fully expanded Outstations and following loss of primary supply to maintain supply for a period of at least 8 hours. This power supply is subject to voltage fluctuations and the Outstation shall therefore be capable of operating with supply variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage. Power input fuses and LEDs for monitoring shall be provided on the front of the unit. All power supply failures shall be reported to the master station. The power supply units shall incorporate surge suppression and isolation circuits to protect the Outstation modules from external electrical disturbances. Overvoltage and undervoltage protection shall be provided within the power supply to prevent the Outstation internal logic from being damaged as a result of a component failure in the power supply and to prevent the Outstation internal logic from becoming unstable and causing misoperations as a result of voltage fluctuations. 4.3.8 Configuration and Maintenance

4.3.8.1 Configuration Tools A portable PC based configuration and maintenance facility shall be provided along with all software and hardware necessary to interface to the Outstation. All database and software interfaces (Outstation diagnostics, database compiler, software listings, Outstation configuration listings, etc.) required for the maintenance and configuration of the Outstation shall be provided. The Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall have diagnostics for the Outstation‘s processor(s), memory, I/O ports, and any other functional areas of the Outstation. The portable Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall also be used to monitor and test the Outstation‘s operation and communication interfaces. The configuration and maintenance PC shall be capable of emulating both the master station and the Outstation. The Outstation shall have the capability to have I/O cards and distributed modules changed without powering down the equipment. 4.3.8.2 Database Management System Each Outstation shall be provided with a database management system. The database management system shall present the information via a user interface such that any individual database is transparent to the user.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 148 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

The database management and configuration software shall not impose a limit on the sizing of the Outstation It shall be possible to expand the Outstation up to it maximum physical limit without the need to reconfigure, or purchase additional software licence The database management system shall provide a means of verifying the database in order to check consistency and completeness of the database. The database modifications shall all be documented. The contents of a database shall not be lost if the power supply fails. Outstation shall start and load its database automatically. After a power failure, the

It shall be possible for the current database to be printed out on-line at any time on a printer connected to the Outstation. 4.3.8.3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities The Outstation shall perform continuous self diagnostics to monitor its own operational capability. Any detected fault or abnormality which could affect the Outstations performance or operational capability shall be indicated to the master station and locally at the Outstation. The Outstation design shall facilitate first line fault location and maintenance to be readily performed on site. Maintenance equipment shall include an engineer's portable test unit. The test unit shall enable all the Outstation functions to be tested on site, with the Outstation in both off-line and on-line states. It shall provide an indication of the presence and location of any detected Outstation fault. Safeguards shall prevent the activation of Outstation control outputs with the test unit connected and the Outstation in the on-line state. The design of the O Outstation shall allow the replacement of I/O cards and distributed modules without powering down the Outstation. 4.4 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL

SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles shall be provided to marshal all wiring related to supervisory measurement, indication and control functions from the local control panels, remote control panels, relay panels, transformer tap changers and other panels, as necessary. In addition to the standard requirements for equipment construction specified elsewhere in this Specification, each SIP shall incorporate terminal blocks and, where required, SCADA transducers. Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled with the name of the circuit and its alphanumeric identity. With the exception of terminals for connections in current transformer (CT) circuits, all terminals shall be provided with an isolating link that may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring. Terminals used in CT circuits shall provide a means of maintaining continuity of the CT circuit external to the SIP, without disturbing the connected wiring, so that SIP equipment (such as transducers) may be safely disconnected from those terminals without disrupting the CT circuit. Terminals for the connection of transducer wiring shall be arranged to enable any one transducer to be disconnected and replaced without disrupting the connections or operation of any other transducer, particularly where more than one transducer is connected to the same CT or VT input signals. The field wiring side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits and bays. The Outstation side terminal blocks shall also be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications and Controls. All looping between terminals and cross connections between the field wiring side and Outstation side terminal blocks shall be supplied and installed under this Contract. Each SIP shall be fitted with a Dummy Circuit Breaker to simulate the open and close operations of a circuit breaker to enable the command outputs of the associated Outstation to be tested. This shall comprise a latching relay with the dummy breaker relay ‗open‘ and ‗close‘ coils connected to a double point command output on the Outstation. Contacts on the relay shall be connected to a double point digital input on the Outstation to provide indication of the dummy breaker state, i.e. open and closed. 4.5 4.5.1 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS General

All power system measurement transducers for the measurement of MW, MVAr, voltage, current and frequency shall be plug-in type and individual transducers shall be enclosed and mounted in sheet steel cubicles. The location of these cubicles will be subject to the site survey but there is a preference for a

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 149 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

centralised arrangement. Transducers shall provide continuous dc analogue output signals from continuous ac analogue inputs. Transducers shall include all necessary circuits for signal amplification and for scaling. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurements shall correctly compound the voltage and current inputs to provide bi-directional output related to active and reactive power flow. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurement shall be suitable for three phase unbalanced load. Power system measurement transducers shall provide galvanic separation between the primary current, voltage transformers and the Outstations. Measurement transducers and interposing transformers connected to any main instrument transformer of one main circuit shall be kept fully segregated from those associated with any other main circuit. Test terminal blocks shall be provided with all transducers to permit injection testing of individual transducers, without interference to the continuous operation of other apparatus connected to the same current and voltage transformers. Isolation links shall be provided for current transformer circuits which automatically short circuit the current transformer output. 4.5.2 Overloads

Each current input shall be capable of carrying 200 per cent rated current continuously and withstanding ten times the rated current for 5 seconds. Each voltage input shall be capable of carrying 120 per cent rated voltage continuously and withstanding twice the rated voltage for 10 seconds. The output shall be limited so as not to exceed 1.6 times nominal full range output current. The open circuit output voltage shall not exceed 25 volts dc. Transducers shall be protected against overcurrent and overvoltage. 4.5.3 Burden

The burden imposed on the primary current transformer, at full rated input shall not exceed 1 VA per transducer. The burden imposed on the primary voltage transformers at full rated input shall not exceed 3 VA per transducer. Preference shall be given to transducers which offer burdens significantly lower than the values specified in this document. 4.5.4 Output

The output shall be linear in respect to the measured value with a range of 4 to 20 mA. Transducers shall be designed to operate into any load impedance between 20 and 1000 ohms, maintaining measuring accuracy to IEC 688 (Class 1.0). 4.5.5 Response time

The response to achieve a final steady value for any step change of 90 per cent of input range shall not exceed 1 second. 4.5.6 Power supply

Preference will be given to transducers which derive auxiliary power from the measured voltage input. An auxiliary dc supply will be available from the Outstation dc power supply system. Attention is drawn to the fluctuating nature of the dc voltage. Variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage shall not cause any detectable inaccuracies. 4.6 4.6.1 RELAYS General

Electrical equipment, materials and components shall comply with the requirements of IEC 150, IEC 439 and IEC 445 in so far as they are applicable to equipment of this type. All relays shall be hermetically sealed with transparent covers. All dc operated relays are to be equipped with flywheel diodes.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 150 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

The control signal will be in the form of a pulse of short duration but to ensure high reliability.6. One contact per pole is the nominal requirement but series or parallel arrangements of contacts for each pole will be considered. Contacts shall be designed to conduct load currents of less than 5 mA and also be suitable for infrequent operation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Plug in types complete with socket bases and retaining clips. The relays shall provide double pole switching. transformer tap changers.151 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . (d) Generally comply with the foregoing requirements for Outstations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Where plug-in type relays are approved each relay type shall have a unique plug to socket colour. 4. The Bidder shall clearly state the lowest operating current for the proposed relays. shall be acceptable subject to the approval of the Employer.2 Control interposing relays The control interposing relays shall provide a means of operating the electrical control circuits of switchgear (circuit breakers and disconnectors).6. 4. Interposing relays shall be capable of performing at least 25 000 operations at the rated duty. The relays shall have a high degree of reliability.7 SAS GATEWAYS The SCADA system shall be capable of communication with SAS Gateways that operate with IEC 80670-5-101/104 protocols.3 Status indication repeat relays The status repeat relays shall each be provided with a minimum of three sets of contacts. without failure. The rating of repeat relay coils shall not exceed 2 Watts. Where SAS systems are provided under this contract the following features shall be provided: (a) A full graphic HMI from which local control and monitoring can be carried out (b) Capable of supporting communication with more than one Control Centre using protocols as stated above (c) High reliability with duplicated LAN for acquisition and control within the substation. Where such devices exist or are to be installed under other projects the Contractor will be provided with the operating schedules following contract commencement.Section 6 . etc by means of light current signals from the Outstations. each set arranged to close while the relay coil is energised. 4. all control interposing relay coils and contacts shall be continuously rated. suitable for the loads to be switched.

Components shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and dynamic stresses resulting from internal and external short circuits and circuit switching operations. the SCADA Master Station. The functional requirements for these power supplies are detailed in the following sections. For ease of maintenance. Similar parts shall be interchangeable. The UPS system shall have the following features: a. The Control Centre location shall be equipped with battery backed 415/230Vac Uninterruptible Power Supplies and diesel generator capable of supplying the complete building load. 5. High operational security and reliability b. selected lighting circuits in the Control Room to allow for continued work and sufficient air conditioning to allow for the temperature and humidity in equipment room(s) to be maintained within operating limits. POWER SUPPLIES 5. These shall be located conveniently for the connection of the power supply equipment. The Substations and other sites shall be equipped with 48Vdc battery backed power supplies. Integrated monitoring facilities c. The manufacturer shall specify the size of conductor required for the battery cables.1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5. repeater sites or other buildings) where power supplies will be required. including those to the battery. Communication equipment located in substations. b.2 5. Simple operation and fault diagnosis When required by the Employer.1.Section 6 . The Bidder shall advise of any locations outside of the Control Centre or Substations (e. and Communication equipment. The Contractor shall provide the cables interconnecting the UPS unit with external equipment.2. 2 x 100% chargers and 2 x 50% batteries. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.2 UPS Configuration The UPS configuration shall be ―parallel redundant hot standby‖ with 2 x 100% inverters. 5. generating stations and other locations where equipment may be installed as part of the overall communication system.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Functional Requirements 5. etc.2. telecommunication equipment not supplied by the 48Vdc system. it shall be possible to isolate inverters and static switches from the load by means of a manually operated make-before-break switch. In this case the batteries shall be located in a battery room and connected to the rectifier/inverter units located in an adjacent room via fuse switches located in the battery room. Damage arising from component failure should be confined to the component concerned. The power supplies are required for: a.1 GENERAL Secure power supplies are required at all locations where equipment is supplied under this contract. The Employer shall provide primary supplies at each location. The Outstations and associated telemetry equipment in substations and generating stations.g. Contractor shall demonstrate this ability e. A static voltage stabiliser shall be provided in the mains by-pass circuit to maintain ±2% static voltage tolerance when the by-pass is in use. The NSCC – Control Room equipment.152 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the d. The manufacturer shall provide a suitable fused load-switch or moulded-case circuit breaker with the UPS unit to facilitate on-load isolation of the battery for the purpose of performing battery maintenance.1 General The UPS shall be rated to supply the complete Master Station system. c.

In the event of automatic transfer of the load to the bypass circuit and subsequent restoration of the inverter output quantities to within the permissible tolerances. if these take place within the specified period. Upon restoration of the AC mains voltage.Section 6 . The output of the inverter shall be maintained within the voltage and frequency tolerances of the load at all times.153 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . via the inverter. If both inverters develop a fault.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Moulded-case circuit breakers shall be category P-2. The UPS shall be capable of energising the load within the permissible tolerances and of achieving the uninterrupted load transfer requirements via the static switch. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. within the specified time. If the mains bypass supply voltage exceeds these tolerances. external overload/short circuit condition or switching-off of the inverter. The UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply when the voltage and frequency of the latter are within the specified tolerances. while simultaneously recharging the battery. the UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply and shall initiate uninterrupted retransfer of the load to the UPS inverter. the static switch shall initiate uninterrupted transfer of the load to the mains bypass supply in the event of deviation in the output quantities of the UPS unit resulting from a UPS component failure (including inverter static switch element. The rectifier shall re-start automatically upon restoration of the mains power supply following a main supply interruption.2 Modes of Operation The operation of the UPS shall comply with the following basic operating principles. without the battery connected. 5.2. provided the latter is within the tolerances specified for the load transfer conditions. The output voltage of the inverter shall also be controlled to maintain synchronism and phase with the mains bypass supply voltage. if applicable). 5. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following a number of automatic transfers of the load to the bypass. and from the mains bypass to the inverter.2. then the UPS shall revert to unsynchronised operation at its own internally set frequency. in accordance with IEC 947-2.4 Static Bypass Facilities shall be provided to enable manual initiation of uninterrupted transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass. or outside the battery room. The rectifier shall incorporate a ―soft-start‖ feature to gradually accept load on initial energising.2.3. the rectifier shall supply the power requirements of the load. to a capacity that will enable it to again fulfil the discharge performance requirements.1 Rectifier The rectifier shall be of constant voltage.2.2. 5. for not less than 3 hours based on the full load plus the 50% spare capacity. The switching device shall be installed adjacent to the battery.3 Overload When a disturbance/fault occurs in any of the inverters the faulty unit shall be automatically disconnected and the entire load supplied from the remaining inverter. via the inverters.2 Main Supply Failure In the event of an interruption or depression in the AC main supply voltage to the rectifiers. current limiting output type designed for float charge operation. 5. while simultaneously maintaining the battery charge in the float charge mode. Under synchronous operating conditions.2. 5. The two inverters shall be operating in parallel and sharing the load equally.2.3 Performance 5. the load shall be transferred to the bypass supply through the static switch.2.2. if applicable. via the inverter. The rate of recharging the battery shall be such as to restore it. 5. the batteries shall supply the power requirements of the load.2.1 Normal The output of the rectifier shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load.2. Normally both inverters shall be synchronised with each other and with the main supply.

iv. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The output current shall be smoothed by means of series reactance or equal. Battery rapid-charge operation shall be automatically controlled according to a constant current/constant voltage characteristic. Facilities shall be provided to initiate battery rapid-charge operation by manual and automatic means. Ripple in the rectifier output voltage shall not exceed 2 percent of nominal voltage for all values of load within charger rating. whilst simultaneously supplying the full load plus 30 percent spare capacity. and recharge them to their full capacity within a period of eight hours. Switched diodes or supplementary battery cells as a means of limiting DC voltage variations are not acceptable:    System frequency between ±10 percent Output between 5 and 100 percent of rated output Output power shall be controlled via a full wave half controlled thyristor/diode bridge with free wheeling current facility. ii.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The DC output of the rectifier unit shall remain within the limits of ±2 percent under any of the following conditions. which may be the result of motor starting activities. shall not result in a trip of the rectifier or the initiation of battery discharge. iii. iii. It shall be capable of being connected to the fully discharged batteries. Each rectifier shall be capable of fully charging the two batteries upon initial installation. Short-time mains supply voltage depressions of not more than 20 percent. The DC output current of the rectifier. Each charger shall be sized to supply full load plus boost charging the two batteries simultaneously. without overloading.Section 6 . Battery rapid-charge operation i.  The rectifiers shall be capable of limiting the output current to 110 percent of rectifier rating and be capable of operating continuously at that current. The range of adjustment shall include allowance which may be necessary to compensate for the ageing of the rectifiers.154 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . ii. On-line adjustment of the set value of float-charge voltage shall be possible by means of a potentiometer on the relevant control circuit card. Automatic initiation of battery rapid-charge operation shall occur following any period of battery discharge exceeding ten seconds. and during steady-state input voltage and frequency variations referred to above. The rectifier steady-state DC output voltage variations shall be controlled to within plus one percent and minus one percent of the set value (corresponding to the battery float-charge voltage) during load variations between zero and the rated output of the rectifier. Battery float-charge operation i. when operating under constant currentlimiting conditions. shall be controlled to within plus two percent and minus two percent of the set value.

3 Inverter Static inverters shall be of an approved type. v. The inverter shall be capable of delivering sufficient short circuit current to cause the output fuses rated nearest to 10 percent of the UPS rated output current to interrupt the short circuit current within 3 ms when the UPS is not synchronised to the bypass power supply. The waveform shall be such that there is no measurable difference between positive and negative half cycles. The float voltage of the batteries shall be the optimum required to ensure the maximum possible period between topping up with electrolyte. without the need for supplementary charging to restore the battery to its fully charged condition. The output voltage shall be restored to within the steady state limits within 0. 5. the UPS shall be maintained in continuous operation at full load (including spare capacity) within its stated voltage limits for a period of three hours. During variations greater than ±2 percent in the power supply frequency the inverter shall revert to internal frequency control.1 s. 50 Hz supply at the appropriate voltage. A facility shall be provided for adjusting the synchronising frequency from one percent to two percent. The output voltage static regulation shall be maintained within plus one percent and minus one percent of rated output voltage.Section 6 .3. for the specified input power supply conditions. The equipment shall be capable of providing an output voltage which has a waveform approximating to a sinusoidal shape under all steady load conditions from zero to rated load. designed to maintain a single phase. adjustment shall be possible ―on-line‖. The inverter shall maintain output frequency such that synchronism with the bypass voltage is maintained. A suitable earth fault detection scheme shall be provided. When rated load is suddenly applied or removed.2.3.1 seconds. It shall be possible to vary the output voltage within ±5% of the specified output voltage. The inverter shall be capable of the necessary output to satisfy capacity of the computer system and the essential services load. The equipment shall be so designed and constructed that it is capable of operating reliably for long periods of time with minimum maintenance. A suitable filter shall be included in the dc input circuit of all inverters to prevent noise from the inverter being fed into the dc supply system.8 lagging continuously when operated from the battery and charger system and alternatively from battery only. the momentary voltage change shall not cause damage to any connected equipment and shall be capable of restoring it to nominal value in a period not exceeding 0. This Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The main output circuit fuse links shall be of the slow-acting type g1.7 lagging to unity. The battery discharge capacity shall be such that with the charger disconnected. The total rms harmonic content of the output waveform shall not exceed five percent of the fundamental value and shall not contain harmonics higher than the 15th. The power supplies system will operate with battery terminals free of earth. float charging system and be capable of providing the guaranteed output throughout the range of ambient conditions specified. plus 50 percent at a power factor of 0.2.2 Battery and DC Circuit The batteries shall operate in conjunction with a constant voltage. in accordance with IEC 269. 5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification iv. The output voltage shall be regulated to ±1 percent of rated output voltage with load power factor over the range 0. The dynamic output voltage variations shall not exceed plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of rated output voltage in the event of instantaneous load change of 100 percent rated output.155 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . from no-load to full-load. at the worst environmental conditions obtainable. At the end of the rated discharge period the voltage available at the output terminals of the UPS shall not be less than the minimum operating voltage of any load normally connected to the UPS including the spare capacity.

or The inverter output voltage exceeds 105% of the nominal output voltage. The combined detection and switching time required to transfer load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit shall not exceed 0. and The mains bypass frequency is within the tolerances specified. retransfer of the load from mains bypass to the inverter shall be initiated automatically following automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass.3.5 Noise limits The sound pressure level measured at one metre distance from the UPS unit. The criteria for load transfer shall be as follows:  Transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains by-pass load transfer shall only be possible when:  The mains bypass voltage is within ±15% of rated UPS output voltage. Retransfer of the load from the mains bypass to the inverter Load retransfer shall only be possible when: The inverter output voltage is within ±10% of the nominal output voltage for more than 5 seconds. Mains input voltage and current b.2. f. or The inverter output current limit is exceeded. 70 dB(A). i. Inverter output voltage and current Battery voltage Rectifier alarms Inverter alarms Load alarms Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. over voltages and any main or control circuit malfunctions. 5.e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The UPS shall be suitable for both floating output or with one leg of the AC output earthed. and to safeguard the unit and its components from the consequences of internal and external short circuits. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 115% of the nominal value. The UPS shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. shall not exceed 75 dB(A) at any load between zero and the rated output of the unit. d. if these take place within an interval of 5 minutes.2. howsoever caused.5 ms. the noise limit shall be 5 dB(A) less.4 Controls and Instrumentation The UPS unit shall incorporate all the necessary equipment to enable operation.Section 6 . It shall be capable of conducting a current of ten times the rated output for not less than two seconds. c.3. The principle indications and alarms shall be: a. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 85% of the nominal value.  Subject to fulfilling the above criteria.156 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . If tonal components are present. e. at any position. 5. and The inverter output and mains bypass voltages are synchronised. Facilities shall be provided to manually and automatically initiate transfer of the load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit and from the by-pass to the inverter.2. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following four automatic transfers of the load to the bypass. and The inverter output and mains bypass voltage are synchronised Automatic transfer of the load shall be initiated when: The inverter output voltage drops below 95% of the nominal output voltage.4 Static by-pass switch The by-pass circuit shall have a continuous current rating equivalent to the rated output of the UPS unit. 5. protection and control of the UPS in accordance with this specification.

Nickel-cadmium battery cells shall be of the pocket plate.1. Nickel cadmium batteries having steel cell containers shall be supplied in wood crates.2. They shall be capable of withstanding the ‗let through‘ energy of the fuse controlling the AC supply to the transformer.2.5.5. 5.2.5. rated in accordance with the requirements of the Data Sheets and comply with IEC 742 as appropriate. Steel racks shall have a plastic or epoxy coating to provide suitable protection against the effects of electrolyte spillage. sintered plate or fibre plate types. Each enclosure shall comply with the relevant requirements of the General Technical Requirements.1. Contactors shall comply with IEC 158-1 and be rated for uninterrupted duty and intermittent duty of at least class 0. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. recombination battery cells shall be of the flat plate construction incorporating electrolyte absorbed in the plate separators.5 Construction Requirements 5. Separate. They shall comply with utilisation category AC23 and DC23 for AC and DC switches respectively. but where an earthed screen is inserted between the windings this may be reduced to a level of 1500 volts. Rectifier stacks shall comply with the requirements of IEC 119 and IEC 146 as appropriate. components. 5. The lowest rack for accommodating battery cells shall be a minimum of 30 cm above ground level. 5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Remote indication of the ―general alarm‖ status of the UPS system shall be made available. Sealed. A summary alarm shall be wired directly into the Control Room from the UPS indication panel and the individual signals shall be input to the Local RTU. Support racks for the latter shall be solid wood. free-standing support racks for batteries having plastic cell containers may be steel or solid wood. Battery enclosures shall be naturally ventilated to disperse gaseous products.2 Converter components Main circuit switches (mechanical) shall comply with IEC 947-3 and be of the independent manually operated air-break type for continuous duty. The insulation level between transformer primary and secondary windings shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2000 volts rms AC applied for one minute.1 Electronic Equipment Enclosures Each unit consisting of a rectifier. inverter and static switch shall be housed separately in one or more free-standing.2.2 Battery Enclosures The battery may be installed in a separate cabinet adjoining that of the rectifier/inverter or on separate.5. 5. in general. Transformers and reactors shall be of the air-cooled type and comply with the relevant parts of IEC 146. Wiring and terminations shall.2. Battery cell cover shall be sealed against creepage of electrolyte and shall be fitted with spray proof vent plugs.Section 6 . The utilisation category for DC contactors shall be not less than DC-4 and for AC contactors not less than AC-3.1 Enclosures 5. unenclosed. free-standing support racks in a separate room. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. Terminal pillar seals shall be of a design that prevents the initiation of pillar corrosion. comply with all the requirement details in the General Technical Specification. All wood should be treated to render it non-hygroscopic and acid resistant.3 Battery cells and containers The battery cells shall be of the nickel-cadmium type and shall comply with and selected in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184. The battery shall be positioned such that possible leakage of electrolyte or emission of gaseous products shall not cause damage to other equipment.1. Rectifier transformers shall be of the air-cooled type.157 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . self-supporting steel cabinet forming an enclosure. or adjacent cells.2.

A daily service fuel tank shall be provided and this shall have sufficient capacity to supply fuel for 8 hours continuous running of the generator at full load. subject to the material being non-flame propagating and mechanically shock resistant. bolts and associated hardware shall be of electrolyte-resisting material. Plastic containers of vented. flooded cells shall permit the electrolyte level to be viewed through the container material.4 Distribution Board The UPS shall be equipped with a distribution board that permits segregation of duplicated devices.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Cell containers of plastic material. The diesel generator shall be wholly suitable for supplying UPS. and also without affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform. The Generator may be a packaged unit or housed in a purpose built structure which is separate from the new control room building. 110% of distilled water. insulation terminal covers etc. or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part. Batteries shall be supplied complete with all necessary interconnecting links. small power and lighting. No welding. bolts. Steel cell containers are preferred in applications requiring large capacity batteries. required for the batteries. rectifier and computer loads. 5. are preferred. In any case the location shall be above potential flood water levels. Each outgoing circuit from the distribution board shall be controlled and protected by fuses and links or miniature circuit breakers. plus 50% spare capacity. The Generator shall be located within the Control Centre site boundary in suitable accommodation which is also to be provided by the Contractor. 5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.2 Design Requirements The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other Contracts. Electrolyte level lines shall be marked on the front side of each container. flooded cells shall be fitted with flame arresting vent plugs. at 415/240 volts (3-phase.5. Batteries shall be supplied filled with dry electrolyte. including HVAC. The generator shall be rated for continuous output and capable of supplying the total load of the new control centre building (including the UPS and battery charging demand concurrent with supplying the load) and all electrical loads to be supplied under the Contract. Cell terminal posts. shall be supplied in separate containers. All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without distortion.158 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . in a clean condition when bolted and protected against corrosion. A bulk fuel tank of sufficient capacity to store fuel for 7 days continuous running of the generator at full load shall be supplied and installed within the complex. 4-wire). filling or plugging of defective parts will be permitted without the approval in writing of the Engineer. 5. The Contractor shall provide suitable foundations and a bund wall as part of the civil works to be provided under the Contract. Vented.1 DIESEL GENERATOR General Requirements A standby diesel generator and all its associated ancillary systems shall be supplied. Inter-cell connectors and terminals shall be insulated or otherwise provided with protective covering to prevent inadvertent short circuiting.3. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 25 percent of the number required for the master station equipment. 50 Hz. installed and commissioned by the Contractor.Section 6 . inter-cell connections shall be of low resistance. The Contractor shall provide and install cables from the generator to the main switchboards in the new control centre building.3. if parallel operation of battery cells is thereby avoided.3 5. their short circuit rating being adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit.

The set shall operate at a maximum speed of 1500 rev/min. No bolt or stud shall project through its nut by more than approximately 10mm or four threads whichever is the less. irrespective of engine rating. phosphor bronze or high tensile brass. be constructed of stainless steel. a detailed explanation of the de-rating shall accompany the Bid. cutting.3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions The engine may be naturally aspirated or turbocharged and charge air-cooled and shall be capable of giving continuously at site not less than the specified output and an overload of 10% in excess of this output for one hour in any period of 12 hours of consecutive running.3. bending and removal of burrs shall be completed before galvanising. Bolts and studs for electrical connections shall preferably be of brass M6 size. mechanisms and moving parts. Gasket material shall be of the minimum thickness necessary and of approved composition. except for terminals and relay stems.6 kg/m2 of zinc for all surfaces. All connections and contacts shall be of ample section and surface for carrying continuously the specified currents without undue heating. or other devices if approved.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Corresponding parts liable to renewal shall be interchangeable. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The average thickness of the zinc coating shall be equivalent to not less than 0. A sound attenuation to 55 dB(A) (or lower) at 10 metres from the set shall be achieved. The site rating of the generator. Bolts. 5. the Contractor shall demonstrate this capability. All apparatus shall operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. fitted with locking devices of approved type and material. so that an efficient joint can be made without the use of jointing compound. All mechanisms shall. unless finished with an oil resisting varnish. punching. Lock washers shall not be used above M24 size except when a spring type is specially approved. when necessary. and shall be secured by bolts or set screw of ample size. but these must be of stainless steel.159 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All apparatus. brass or gunmetal to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. Surfaces in contact with oil shall neither be galvanised nor cadmium plated. If the continuous site rating is less than the stated catalogue rating. The preparation for galvanising and the galvanising process shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the material being coated. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil-filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment which is in tension or subject to impact stresses except where it can be shown that service experience has been satisfactory with the grade of cast iron and the duty proposed. The continuous site rating shall be based on the specified site operating conditions. Alternatively. shall also be stated and the rating of the set will be based on the lower of the two. nuts and washers on outdoor equipment shall be of non-corroding material where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and elsewhere if specially required. Galvanising shall be applied by the hot dip process. size M5 may be used. Nuts and pins shall be locked in position with lock nuts or lock washers. All rubbing or wearing surfaces shall be machine surfaced. All taper pins used in any mechanisms shall be of the split type. When requested by the Employer. Suitable special spanners shall be provided for bolts and nuts which are not properly accessible by means of an ordinary spanner. Accessible means shall be provided for the easy lubrication of all bearings. The underside of all tanks shall be ventilated in an approved manner to prevent corrosion. Pre-site drilling.Section 6 . connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimise the risk of fire and any damage which might be caused in the event of fire. Joints employing a gasket material shall be so constructed that the packing is maintained under sufficient compression in all parts.

There shall be an indication. The pump motor starter control panel shall contain a selector so that the pump may be either started and stopped by hand or automatically on receipt of signals from the level switches in the service tank.10 Engine Lubrication Lubrication of the engine shall be by means of an engine driven integral pump. 5. shall be designed too minimise the risk of fire and explosion. overflow.3. including the associated earthing arrangements.5 Bulk Fuel Storage The bulk fuel oil tank shall be of horizontal cylindrical type. level indication and access for inspection and maintenance.3. fill pipe and cap. The tank shall be provided with all necessary fittings including fill.4 Fuel The engine shall be supplied with and operate on diesel fuel.3.7 High level alarm Low level start of transfer pump High level stop of transfer pump Fuel transfer Pump An electric motor-driven transfer pump shall be provided to enable the service tank to be filled from the bulk storage tank.3.Section 6 . The pump shall be directly driven by the engine. 5.160 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The capacity of the pump shall be such that the service tank can be completely filled in not more than 2 hours.8 Fuel boost Pump If required by the engine manufacturer. access ladder.3. The pipe layout shall be such that it does not pass close to hot surfaces. fabricated from steel plate and supplied complete with mounting saddles. For emergency use. level indicator.3. a semi-rotary hand pump shall be supplied and connected in parallel with the motor driven pump. A suitable strainer shall be supplied and fitted at the transfer pump suction line. All necessary valves and fittings shall be provided including sufficient isolating valves to enable items in the system to be serviced without draining down the whole system. at the filling point. The pump shall have on the suction side a course strainer and on the delivery side a duplex 'full flow' fine filter complete with Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. delivery. and in no circumstances shall it be permitted to pass over exhaust pipes.3. 5. drain and overflow lines. 5. Level switches shall be provided for the following services: (a) Low level alarm (b) (c) (d) 5. of tank level together with an alarm from a separate initiating device for tank full.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Attention is drawn to the requirement that the engine may stand for a considerable period yet must be immediately available for full load and any special lubrication or heating arrangements necessary to meet this condition shall be provided. vent and drain pipes. inspection manhole. The fuel oil storage and delivery system. 5.6 Daily Service Tank The daily service tank shall be totally enclosed and of welded steel construction with suitable supports and shall be installed in a position where any fuel leakage cannot impinge on exhaust pipes or other hot engine surfaces. It shall be of sufficient capacity to enable the service tank to be fitted in not more than 4 hours. 5.9 Fuel Oil Piping The Contractor shall provide and install all required piping to carry the fuel from the bulk storage to the service tank and the engine. vent. a fuel boost pump shall be provided between the service tank and the engine.

the set shall preferably be mounted on a welded steel common bedplate.3. With the exception of the overspeed condition. air. the first operating an alarm indicator and the second operating the emergency shut-down relay. The Contractor shall ensure that the lubricating oil system capacity shall be sufficient to enable the engine to run continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment.13 Governor The governor shall preferably be of the hydraulic type and shall be equipped with an adjustable droop mechanism. In the case of air cooled engines. and all set-mounted ancillary apparatus.3.Section 6 .3. if required. Flexible connections shall be provided to the exhaust. 5. 5. Suitable anti-vibration mountings shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit.15 Starting System Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that the engine will start automatically on failure of the normal electricity supply.161 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . If a flange mounted generator is not employed. Visual indication of the cause of an alarm signal or shut-down shall be given on the local control panel. The overspeed condition shall operate both an alarm indicator and the emergency shut-down relay simultaneously.14 Engine Protection The following protection devices shall be provided with the engine and the Contractor shall provide and install all the necessary alarm initiating devices: (a) High Lubricating Oil Temperature (b) (c) (d) Low Lubricating Oil Pressure High Engine Jacket Cooling Water Temperature Engine Overspeed. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any inductive circuit.3. The engine shall also be capable of being started by "push Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.11 Set Mountings To achieve simplicity in foundation work. the bedplate shall be stress relieved before machining. the Contractor shall submit his calculations to the Engineer for examination. The device shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip and lock-out the generator circuit-breaker in the event of the automatic device operating. 5. the Contractor shall propose an alternative to item (c). The Contractor shall supply all lubricants necessary to commission the generator and it shall be fully lubricated at Handover. fuel and water piping to avoid fracture due to vibration and to minimise conduction of noise.3. the protection shall be in two stages.12 Crankshaft The design shall avoid undesirable torsional oscillation at or near the designed running speed and. The alarm initiating devices shall be of high quality and of robust construction to withstand operation in high temperature and vibration conditions entailed with the diesel engine. 5. It shall control the speed within the limits specified and be capable of adjusting the engine speed to a minimum of 5% above and below the rated speed. 5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification changeover cock incorporating pressure by-passes to facilitate oil flow to the engine should the filter become blocked. Item (a) may be omitted if lubricating oil cooling is carried out by the jacket water. The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. An inhibit system to cater for normal shut-down and initial start-up shall be provided.

The complete system including brackets shall be supplied galvanised and shall be insulated within the building. front access. The silencers and exhaust pipes shall be provided with 25mm stools.3. within 30 minutes. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing the fittings and wall plates necessary to carry the tail pipe through the generator room wall. mechanical or electrical damage. Due allowance for expansion of the exhaust system shall be made by the inclusion of expansion bellows if necessary. free standing cubicle shall be provided as the engine/generator control panel. each starting period and the period between such consecutive attempts being automatically time controlled by the equipment. Upon restoring power supply to the charger immediately thereafter.17 Safety Guards All moving parts shall be adequately guarded. 5. in order to prevent danger to personnel. Each silencer shall be supplied complete with a drain off point. A centrifugal pump shall be supplied to circulate the coolant. the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes.3. The radiator may be mounted on or remote from the engine.20 Engine/Generator Control Panel A rigid. alarm and control equipment shall be contained within the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The insulation shall be 75mm thick preformed rigid insulation wired on and then covered with hammered aluminium sheet. The battery charger will be supplied from the mains and an engine driven dynamo is not required. The radiator must be generously sized to permit operation at full load and overload in the specified ambient conditions.18 Silencers The engine shall be efficiently silenced with primary and terminal silencers complete with interconnecting exhaust pipe and fittings. The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery charge fail alarm. It shall be protected against accidental. At the failure of the second attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual resetting. to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed. Supports for the complete system shall be of the anti-vibration type and shall be so arranged that no weight is carried by the engine set. Without power supply to the charger. capable of being locked in both the open and closed positions. 5.Section 6 . lubricating oil and charge air (if appropriate). The necessary cowling shall be supplied and installed by the diesel plant manufacturer. control switches.3. instruments.162 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .16 Cooling System The engine shall be provided with a two or three section oil and water tropical radiator capable of dissipating the heat from the jacket water. 5. Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that: (a) At engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to complete the starting circuit (b) Not more than two consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period of 1 minute.3. welded on.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification button" from the local control panel specified. the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery. A suitable battery isolating switch. to the satisfaction of the Engineer. shall be provided on the engine to prevent starting while the engine is under maintenance.3. The battery shall be adequately rated for any standing load and its specified starting duty. Provision shall also be made for local manual starting of the set.19 Air Filters Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise occasionally. 5. 5. The equipment shall include an adequately rated lead/acid starter battery and battery charger which generally comply with the requirements of IEC 60623 except that discharge time indication is not required. to accept extruded mesh to provide a 25mm air gap between the hot surface and insulation to be applied. All indicators.

163 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .20. the relay shall automatically: (a) break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker (b) (c) (d) 5. Alarms shall be inhibited from operating during transient conditions.20. 5. accept.Section 6 . All alarm circuits shall derive their power supply from the starting battery. e. The alarms shall also be connected to the Auxiliary Plant Annunciator. temporary overload and mains disturbances. The control panel shall incorporate the following equipment. When the MANUAL/AUTO control selector switch is in the AUTO position.g.3.3. master shut-down relay shall be provided in the control panel. the audible alarm shall be inoperative. A muting facility shall be provided for the audible device.2 Low lubricating oil pressure High lubricating oil temperature High jacket water/cooling air temperature (as appropriate) Engine on overload Overspeed Emergency shut-down Starter battery low-voltage Daily Service Tank high level Daily Service Tank low level Emergency Shut-down Relay A manually reset.20.3. so arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification cubicle and indicators. instruments and control switches shall be visible from the front of the cubicle with the door closed. reset and lamp test facilities. The following alarms shall be annunciated: (a) Failed to start (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5. Summary alarms shall be connected into the Master Station Computer System via the local RTU in order to generate System alarms.1 Alarms Annunciator A local alarm annunciator panel shall be provided equipped with audible and flashing visual annunciators. Alarms shall latch until accepted.3 make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker stop the engine close a set of voltage free contacts to operate an alarm annunciator Engine/Generator Controls The following controls for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Automatic/manual selector switch for set starting (b) (c) Start pushbutton Stop pushbutton Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

20. It shall be screen protected and drip proof with a large terminal box for outgoing connections.21 Generator The generator shall be a brushless.Section 6 . tightly clamped and securely located within the machine casing.3. low loss steel stampings. salient pole. 5. and an efficient cooling system using a centrifugal fan. All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient conditions. The machine shall have an ac exciter and liberally rated silicone diode assembly with a self contained excitation system with transistor automatic voltage regulator (AVR). salient pole construction with heavy damper windings.22 Stator The stator core shall consist of high permeability. revolving field self regulating alternator of fabricated steel construction throughout. The generator shall be capable of maintaining continuous maximum rated output when operating within + 5% of rated voltage and at rated power factor. The generator shall be star connected. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.3. a dynamically balanced rotating field.4 The following instrumentation for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Engine Speed (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Lubricating oil pressure Lubricating oil temperature jacket water or cooling water temperature Engine hours run meter Generator frequency Generator voltage (with phase selector switch) Individual phase currents (3 instruments) Watt meter Kilowatt hour meter All transducers and connections necessary for the functioning of the above instrumentation shall be provided. The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value. It shall have ball and roller bearings.164 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (d) Emergency stop pushbutton (the emergency stop pushbutton only shall be operable without opening the control cubicle door) Speed adjustment Alternator voltage adjustment Stop/manual/auto selector switch for fuel transfer pump On/off switches for heaters in alternator stator and engine jacket (if required) Logic equipment for start sequence of set including lock-out after two attempts to start Automatic voltage regulator Engine/Generator Instrumentation (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5. 5.

whichever is the greater. indicating instruments. including their associated primary connections and secondary circuit terminal blocks. 5. together with the generator neutral earthing connection shall be supplied and accommodated within a substantial dustproof sheet steel enclosure mounted at the generator neutral terminal position. They shall be fully insulated at all positions of support and shall be securely located against movement due to thermal and rotational cycling and the force arising during overspeed testing. The windings shall be effectively braced to withstand the maximum forces arising from any short circuit that may occur at the stator winding terminals. The rotor poles shall be constructed of steel laminations. The characteristics of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in matching the required loading conditions. Where a separate exciter is provided.165 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5. 5.23 Rotor The rotor shaft and hub shall be of forged steel. The minimum factor of safety of the rotating system shall be not less than 1. packing or wedging. required for any instruments and/or protection relays specified or for excitation circuit compounding or compensation. When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected.24 Exciters The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel stampings tightly clamped and secured to minimise magnetic noise. transient overspeeds in service and normal operation. the phases and terminal box being arranged for 3-phase and neutral connection.3. The ventilating circuit shall be designed to avoid hot-spots and to permit adequate cleaning by a portable centrifugal blower. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Preference will be given to equipment based wholly or mainly on static state devices. the exciter rotor shall be mounted on the extended main shaft at the free end of the generator. preferably in one piece. Both ends of each stator winding shall be brought out to terminal positions on the stator casing. quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. Any material that is liable to shrink in service shall not be used for bracing. The field winding shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with class 'F' materials. based upon the yield point of the part most highly stressed at the stated overspeed or during a stator 3-phase terminal short circuit at normal voltage.25 Ventilation The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to provide the machine cooling effect necessary to comply with the temperature requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions. keyed and securely fixed to the rotor hub and fitted with interconnected damper windings to absorb the cyclic irregularity of the engine. 5.3. Tubular low-temperature heaters of sufficient rating to maintain the windings in dry conditions during long periods of standstill shall be fitted in the stator casing and wired out to a terminal box on the bedplate. All current transformers. resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant. rectifiers.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The windings shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with Class 'B' materials.26 Voltage Regulation Continuously active. A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1% between the limits of 95% and 105% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of the machine shall be mounted on the control panel. 5. They shall be suitable for operation from the local single phase ac supply. The equipment shall include all selector switches. the regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over-voltage to a value not exceeding 120% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 2% of the nominal preset value within three seconds.3.3.Section 6 .

31.1 Drawings The Contractor shall provide the following drawings prior to delivery of the generating set: (a) A general arrangement of the complete generating set showing details of terminal points for cabling. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . 5. the voltage setting range being 105% to 125% in steps of 5%. generator and ancillary plant shall be included in the offer. A separate price should be given for any alternative offers and full technical details must be included.3. 5.3.30 Tools and Spare Parts A complete set of tools required to carry out all maintenance and normal overhaul work on the engine. polarity. The Bidder may additionally offer alternative arrangements to those specified in the foregoing clauses. following the end of the Defects Liability Period.29 Parallel Running It is not required to run the generator in parallel with any other generator set or in synchronism with the mains. pipe work.000 hours. and phase rotation.32 Inspection and Testing Inspection and testing of the engine/generator set shall be performed as provided for under Section 8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Over-voltage protection shall be provided. wiring. Instruction Manuals (d) (e) 5.28 Alternative Generators The Bid shall be based on the requirements of the Specification. maintenance and major overhaul of all parts of the complete plant supplied (b) A comprehensive spare parts list for the complete plant. 5.3. shall be listed and priced as an option. capable of lifting the largest item that has to be removed from the plant for routine maintenance and overhaul. the time setting range being adjustable within the range 1 second to 5 seconds in steps of 1 second. The manuals shall contain: (a) Fully detailed instructions for operation. (b) (c) A general arrangement of the diesel engine. The principal dimensions and weights of the set and major components shall also be shown.27 Pulley Block A hand-operated lifting block and chain shall be provided for the set. or a detailed wiring diagram of the control cubicle.3.3.3. 5. A general arrangement of the control cubicle showing cable entry and control wiring termination points.6. and all associated trenches or ducts required for the proper installation of the set. 5.166 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . A general arrangement of the alternator and exciter showing terminal markings. An electrical schematic diagram of the control cubicle. giving description and parts identification numbers.2 Operating and maintenance instruction manuals and spare parts lists shall be supplied generally as specified in Section 11.3. Spare parts necessary to keep the set in a state of operation for a period of 4 years or 12. 5.31.31 Documentation Documentation for the generator set shall be provided as specified in Section 11 and shall include the following: 5.3.

(f) DC supply fail. 10 hours autonomy. (b) Battery voltage high. The output of the battery and charger system shall be 48 volts (positive earth) and shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load. (d) Charger fail indication. At CEB HQ 10 hours autonomy.4. Variation shall not exceed 0.3 Alarm Indications The battery and charger systems shall be provided with efficient built-in self-monitoring and alarm facilities. 10 hours autonomy. At Control Centre: c. b. (g) Output dc MCB trip (Common for all MCBs).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5. The batteries shall normally be kept charged by a dual battery charger unit. for loads between 0 per cent and 100 per cent. When the battery is connected to the charger. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. as a minimum.4. The boost charger shall be rated to restore the fully discharged battery to the fully charged condition within 12 hours. At substation: b. Voltage free contacts wired to cabling terminals shall also be provided to enable remote indication of each alarm.5 V from 20 per cent to 100 per cent full load current. Ripple voltage shall not exceed 0.2 System Capacity and Performance The ampere capacity of the batteries shall be adequate when fully charged to maintain the stated load in normal operation within its stated voltage limits for a period of at least: a. 5. whilst maintaining the battery in a fully charged condition. High operational security and reliability. An alarm shall be activated when a fault is detected.1. c. each charger comprising a float charger with manual boost charge facilities.1.4 5. (e) Battery earth fault. Simple operation and fault diagnosis. the following features: a.1 General The 48 Vdc battery and charger systems shall consist of 1 x 100% nickel cadmium (NiCad) storage batteries and 2 x 100% float/boost chargers and a distribution switchboard. Automatic control of the output dc voltage is required.167 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . There shall be no power interruption to the load during mains power failure or when the mains power is restored. The systems shall have. Alarm conditions shall be displayed locally. Alarm monitoring facilities. without interrupting supplies to the equipment.Section 6 . (c) Battery voltage low.1 per cent of the working voltage without battery. 5. At the NSCC the following signals shall be provided and wired up to the telecommunication network management system and SCADA system Local RTU: (a) AC supply fail. The rating of each charger shall be sufficient to carry the specified maximum load including the spare capacity.4. the psophometric noise level at the output.4.1. shall not exceed the equivalent of 2 mV at a frequency of 800 Hz after weighting as specified by ITU-T recommendations for any operational condition.1 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS Functional Requirements 5.

each battery charger shall support half the load. Manual change-over of chargers shall also be possible.2 Battery Chargers The batteries shall normally be kept fully charged by a dual battery charger unit. The positive and negative fuses shall be arranged in pairs and shall be fully segregated from each other by an insulating barrier. A fuse box shall be provided for the battery.Section 6 . Each cell shall be provided with a vent cap/electrolyte filler plug and a pressure operated gas release valve designed for intermittent operation. The 50% spare capacity. or semi sealed type. Sufficient alarm initiation outputs shall be provided to allow each alarm of the 48 Vdc power supply system to be displayed at up to three remote locations. 5. in robust containers. In a battery room on heavy-duty epoxy coated metal racks suitably protected against corrosion and attack by the battery electrolyte. The battery unit shall be connected to the distribution board and battery charger by PVC insulated copper cables. c. Stainless steel containers shall be insulated one from the other. open. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. Nickel-cadmium batteries are required and shall be of the pocket plate.2 Battery and Charger Equipment 5. Each battery charger shall be capable of simultaneously supply the full load and charging discharged batteries at the optimum rate. The fuses shall be of the high breaking capacity type in accordance with IEC 60269. The positive and negative terminals of each complete battery shall be indicated by red and black markings respectively in an approved form. taking into consideration the following: a. The battery design shall be in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In substations and generating stations a summary alarm shall be input to the respective Outstations. housed in totally enclosed translucent plastic or stainless steel containers. The batteries shall operate in floating service. Inside a suitably designed battery cubicle. In the event of a failure of one of the battery chargers. the healthy charger shall automatically take-over the full load current without supply interruption.4. Each cell container shall be equipped with an electrolyte level indicator and the electrolyte capacity shall be sufficient to ensure long intervals between topping-up.2. The standby time required to supply the entire dc power demand.4. d. Cells shall be formed into a sub-assembly by mounting in groups. Cells utilizing plastic containers shall be constructed so that the plates are rigidly held so as to avoid the possibility of distortion and short-circuiting of the plates. b. The use of a Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The batteries shall be housed in one of two ways: a.e. Under normal condition. The service voltage required shall not drop below recommended figures (permitted voltage tolerances of the individual loads). The voltage fluctuations caused by power consumption of various loads shall be kept within permitted limits.168 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The battery shall be spaced so as to permit easy access to all individual cells to allow replacement of cells and/or checking cell voltages and connections.2. b. The final choice of battery installation method shall be agreed with the Employer. The Contractor shall select the Ah capacity according to the actual equipment consumption. The positive and negative terminals of each cell shall be clearly marked and permanently indicated. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of battery capacity. Each cell shall be identified by a number formed in a non-corrodible material and fixed to the cells to be visible when installed on the racks. they shall be continuously connected to load and to the charging rectifiers. 5. i.4.1 Batteries The batteries shall provide power supply for the telecommunication equipment demand and be designed to give at least 15 years life from the date of installation.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification modular type of chargers that have N+1 modules which capable of supplying the load such that the maximum load is divided upon N modules with one module acting as spare is also acceptable as an alternative solution to the traditional dual redundant battery charger configuration. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No break in voltage shall occur during such switchover. The mains supply voltages available to the chargers will be 415 Vac. The battery charger shall be installed in the telecommunication room. The rated output and current of rectifier shall correspond to the requirements of system load and battery charging. The rectifiers shall be fed from the LVAC main switchgear. and shall be suitable for automatic and manual control. feeders. protective devices. switches. etc. All fuses shall be equipped with a flag. batteries.Section 6 . When an ac supply failure occurs which lasts for more than five minutes. the battery condition shall be monitored and on achieving a fully charged condition. 50 Hz single phase. Each of the two rectifier cubicles shall contain at least the following indications/meters: a.169 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . lamps. The operation of the rectifier shall be fully automatic. The output voltage shall be maintained constant and just sufficiently above the open circuit voltage of battery to keep the battery in a fully charged condition. Should modular type of battery chargers are offered.4. The charging rectifier shall normally operate in the float charge mode.3 Control and Instrumentation The battery and charger system shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. 5. It shall be possible to select the charger to ‗Boost charge‘ mode. The charging rectifiers shall be of approved construction and shall be equipped with all necessary fuses. Rectifier ratings in all modes of operation shall be adequately adjustable to deliver the optimum charging rate recommended by the battery manufacturer while also supplying the normal steady state loads. In addition to ‗Boost‘ and ‗Float Charge‘ modes. the charger shall also be equipped with manual equalizing mode for initial conditioning and periodical maintenance of batteries. Internal cooling of the charger shall be by natural ventilation.2. Current limitation shall be 100% of rated output current. Each rectifier shall be designed to carry 110% of rated output current for an indefinite time. 50 Hz three phase and a 240 Vac. full details shall be included in the Bid. DC output voltmeter. Irrespective of the mode of operation the load voltage will be maintained to nominal level by the automatic introduction of suitable dropping diodes. The final location shall be agreed with the Employer. The battery charger shall be of the solid state static thyristor or switch-mode rectifier type suitable for dc power supply and charging of the associated storage battery. enabling an easily visible detection of any blown fuse. Battery fuse shall be equipped with signalling contact. The output dc voltage control range shall be adjustable and the range of voltage shall be stated in the Bid. indicating instruments. A mimic diagram shall be mounted on the front panel and shall clearly display the main circuit in relation to the various switching equipment. etc. The rectifiers shall be equipped with automatic current limiting devices to make them short-circuit proof. the rectifier shall automatically regulate the charging current and change over to the ‗Float charge mode‘. independent of load variations or variations of ac input voltage within the specified limits. and to move the setting point within a range of 10%. All voltmeter instruments shall be connected via fuses to the busbars. If forced ventilation is unavoidable then 100 per cent redundant fans shall be provided. Double wound transformers shall be provided at the input side of rectifier to prevent galvanic connection between the dc and ac system. Provisions shall be made to adjust the charging voltage for a fully charged battery with an accuracy of at least 1%. Each mode shall be signalled on the front of the rectifier cubicle. the rectifier shall automatically select the ‗Boost charge‘ mode immediately on restoration of the ac supply. Manual or automatic switchover from one mode to the other shall be possible. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of rectifier load. When selected to ‗Boost charge‘ mode.

Current limit. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits.4 Construction The cubicles shall be completely self supporting. The cubicles shall be free standing. Float mode. socket-outlet of the same type as other outlets in the installation. The short circuit rating shall be adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. dust-proof rigid unit. The above-mentioned protective devices shall withstand the specified short currents. The miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with an adjustable.2. LED indications for:        5. secured with integral handles provided with locks and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket made of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. Time delayed releases shall be used wherever necessary in order to provide proper selectivity between circuit breakers of a circuit. The busbar shall be supervised by an under voltage relay to be set at 80% of rated voltage with time delay between 0-5 seconds. The main switchgear and distribution board shall be provided with a copper earth bus of the size not less 2 than 100 mm and in cases where two or more cubicles are installed adjacent to each other this earth bar shall be continuous. manually operated miniature circuit breakers. Adequate working clearance shall be maintained inside the cubicles. A light suitably positioned to ensure even illumination of the entire panel shall be provided inside each cubicle as well as 1-phase. Charger on. The board shall be composed of standard cubicle of approved construction. prefabricated. Hinged doors shall be provided to provide easy access to equipment contained within the cubicle. The distribution board shall be mounted in the telecommunication room. The hinged doors shall be of the lift-off type. Switching of the outgoing feeders shall be effected by two pole. Ammeters for charger current output &battery current. degree of protection IP51. Boost mode. 5. Resetting shall also be provided.4. made of a required number of standardized. Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 100 per cent of the number required for the specified loads. equipped with bottom frames suitable for bolting to the floor.2. Under voltage. To ensure maximum safety to personnel. sufficient creepage distance and shall be able to withstand all short-circuit conditions without damage. The busbars shall be made of copper painted with suitable paint while all connection points shall be tinplated.Section 6 . 13A. Sheet steel thickness shall not be less than 2 mm. The cubicle shall be designed for cable entry from the bottom rear and equipped with glands suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification b. The switchboard and charger cubicles shall be vermin and termite proof. temperature compensated thermal overload and an adjustable magnetic instantaneous over current release for automatic tripping. feeders to the Employer for approval. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. Over voltage. The busbars shall be supported by insulators having high mechanical and electrical strength.170 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . vertical sections bolted together to form indoor metal clad. the busbars shall be completely insulated at the front.5 48V DC Distribution Board The 48 Vdc distribution boards shall supply power to telecommunications equipment. Charger fail.4. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of selectivity between all protective devices in a circuit for all 48 Vdc.

CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS 6. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: 1. colour schemes and layout of the furniture and equipment. Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements 4. The model shall be in sufficient detail to demonstrate. materials. HVAC. Installation. access. drainage 7. and supervision to execute the works 6.171 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and general appearance. Complete fitting out 8. Provision of all necessary equipment. There should be provision within the control centre complex to accommodate all of the System Control Centre's operational and support staff. the layout of the control and equipment rooms including the service rooms (UPS. supplies. modification and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS system is performed A separate room for training and location of the Despatcher Training Simulator (e) (f) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor shall also provide a physical model of the building and its interior to a scale of 1:100. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances 3. Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. ground works. The requirements for rooms are detailed in the following sections. etc). It shall also show access to the building for mains cables and communication cables via segregated and protected routes. Conceptual Design 2. access. ambience and appearance of the structure. Construction including piling. During the initial design phase the Contractor shall provide a computer simulation of the building interior and exterior construction in sufficient detail to demonstrate the layout. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided to the bidders.2 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS The new NSCC building shall provide for the following accommodation: (a) Control room (b) (c) (d) Main equipment room for the NSCC Master Station and Communication equipment Office accommodation for Operational Support Staff Office accommodation for Commercial support (Future requirement for trading/energy purchase) A separate area/room in which management. Detailed Design 5. layout. Three dimensional drawings of the Control Room interior shall be provided showing the perspective. labour.Section 6 . testing and Commissioning of all building services 9. superstructure.1 INTRODUCTION A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6. The Bidder shall provide the conceptual design with his offer that presents the proposed design in sufficient detail to demonstrate the general appearance of the external and internal structure and finishes. 6. rooms and furniture.

that environment shall be designed to eliminate as many sources of distraction as possible. It accommodates the operators.3 CONTROL ROOM The control room is the heart of the control centre. and through restricting the general access of nonoperational staff or visitors to the control room. Since operators spend long periods of time within the confines of the control room. and other ancillary equipment.Section 6 . It is envisaged that all power system supervisory activities will be based in a single control centre that has been sized to accommodate the anticipated expansion in the number of operator positions and facilities for the next 10 to 15 years. Workstation & Screens & the Rear Projection Wallboard). Operator Desks.4 EQUIPMENT ROOM The Equipment Room is expected to house the following: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Access Control System The requirements for these are detailed in turn in the following sections. Lockers for up to 20 persons shall be provided. As the task of system control requires sustained vigilance and periods when high concentration is needed on the part of the operators. The duty operators must be readily available at all times in order to respond to any situation as it arises. Therefore. the user interfaces (UI) they use to interact with the SCADA/EMS system. 6. printing and plotting facilities and a rear projection display wall.g. such as the selection of decor and furnishings.172 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Domestic facilities for the offices in general The services shall include: (a) Secure power supplies derived from different sources and a standby diesel generator and the associated distribution system (b) (c) Fire detection and fighting equipment. TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001/002/003 and 004 illustrate layouts indicative of the required space for the respective functions and staffing. The Control Room shall be adequately sound proofed against noise from adjacent rooms. predominantly sitting in front of video monitors. All the other control centre facilities referred to above are required to support the control room activities. The colours and design shall blend aesthetically with the Control Equipment (e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) Workshop and office facilities for communications and outstation maintenance groups. There shall also be a fitted kitchen and a rest/dining room suitable for 6 persons for operators to use while on break or meal times. Area/room for spare parts and equipment storage A reception area A visitors viewing area Documentation library Conference and meeting rooms Domestic facilities for the Control Room staff. For this reason. The control room decor shall incorporate relaxing colour schemes that are light. The control room shall provide a work environment that assists the operators to effectively perform their duties. the control room shall be segregated from the rest of the control centre both visually and acoustically. Such facilities shall include male and female toilets/washrooms and showers. take ergonomics and comfort into account. The UI principally comprises of SCADA/EMS workstations and communications facilities (telephone and radio based) scanning. Drawing Nos. 6. it is necessary to provide separate domestic facilities for them that are in close proximity and with ready access to the control room. it is essential that aspects of control room design.

6. but the need to avoid glare and reflections on screens still arises. Air conditioning must be highly reliable and maintain conditions typically around 21 +.Section 6 . Equipment Room shall be designed with spare space for additional or replacement equipment in the future.5 6. o o o CE Communication Telecommunication Engineers SCADA Engineers individual office 1 person 2 persons Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    The SCADA/EMS Master Station equipment The Communication terminal equipment (e.173 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Higher levels of illumination are normally used in equipment rooms compared to control rooms.2C a relative humidity around 50% +. SDH multiplexer. o o o o o  System Administrator Software and Database Production Applications Network Applications SCADA/EMS Hardware individual office 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons individual office individual office individual office individual office individual office Communication System Support. optical terminal box) PAX The Equipment Room shall be partitioned by a fire wall and fire door such that the redundant or duplicated devices of which the SCADA/EMS and Communication systems comprise can be installed in separated areas to avoid common mode damage by fire or fumes or fire fighting substances/actions.5.1 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF General In addition to the Control Room shift staff that will normally use the Control Room as their normal place of work. Decor and wall coverings should be light but not bright and distracting and lighting is an important feature. This ensures that noise from equipment cooling fans and banks of disk drives and the conversation of those using the associated maintenance terminals does not intrude on control room activities. The equipment room(s) will need to be sized to house the system proposed along with its various peripherals and data storage devices. provision of offices shall be made for day staff comprising:       DGM System Control – CE System Operation – CE System Operational Planning – CE Performance Monitoring (Audit)– Training Engineer – SCADA/EMS System support.g. The Equipment Rooms shall be adequately sound proofed to prevent disturbance to people working in adjacent rooms.10%.

8 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM The Development System and Operator Training Simulator shall be collocated in one room for the purpose of database maintenance and Operator Training.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    Electrical Superintendents Secretarial and Clerical support Commercial and Trading support - 7 persons 7 persons 2 persons (future) The foregoing staff will require frequent access to the control room or equipment rooms albeit restricted by ‗Access‘ rights. Additionally. The Bidder may propose a number of offices to accommodate these members of staff and the respective functions taking into account the functional differences. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and operation and maintenance documentation will be required for the new systems. the design and location shall be such that reflections do not interfere with the operators‘ view or ability to read Operator screens or the Wallboard. 6. This workshop shall be provided with suitable access to both the control and equipment rooms.174 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Space for a SCADA/EMS 2 screen workstation with desk shall also be provided.7 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY A significant amount of hardware. along with suitable reading area and copying facilities.10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA The control room will become the focal point for visitors and the Contractor shall provide an area from which visitors can view and observe the control room activities without the need to enter the control room.6 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES Storage facilities shall be provided to accommodate all of the spares and test equipment delivered under the Main Contract. Provision shall also be made for Drivers (6). A reception area with facilities for a receptionist shall be provided.9 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM A separate room shall be provided for the monitoring of the telecommunication system. 6. This would serve the dual function of receiving visitors to the centre and to act as the first line access control to the control room. and to the exterior of the building. Their offices shall therefore be conveniently located to allow this access.Section 6 . This ensures the viewing area is positioned out of the operators' line of sight. However. Security (3) & Janitor (3) staff. This is to ensure that such work does not cause distraction to normal control room activities or jeopardise the operation of other equipment. to facilitate the easy manoeuvring of equipment in and out of the workshop. This room shall have sufficient space to house a 2 screen SCADA/EMS workstation and 2 persons for the Development System and for the Operator Training Simulator a 3 screen SCADA/EMS Operator Workstation and a single screen Trainer Workstation. software. Workshop facilities shall be provided that are suitable for carrying out maintenance to the control centre equipment away from the control and equipment rooms. The workshop facilities will also be used for the maintenance of outstation and communications equipment. but from where the operator VDU screens and the Wallboard can be viewed. The accommodation of this documentation. There shall however be at least 3 individual offices and distinct open plan areas or 4 person offices to accommodate the others. 6. will require a room within the control centre with sufficient size to house items in a logical and easily accessible manner. This may be through a double or triple glazed window (for sound proofing) behind or to the rear or side of the operators. 6. The space and storage facilities shall allow easy access and identification of all items. 6. a number of technical references and technical papers should be available to the system control centre staff. The room shall house 2 workstations for the Telecommunication Management System and 2 persons.

dual redundant with static bypass. the Contractor shall provide the following. 6. Furthermore. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 Control Centre LV In-feeds The LV in-feeds to the control centre shall be provided from two independent LV (415V AC 3-phase) infeeds.g. 6. the routes taken by these in-feeds and distribution cables shall each be securely protected against external hazards.12 MEETING ROOM A meeting room shall be provided close to the office of the DGM System Control for general meetings and for convening emergency response teams/meetings. it is also essential that the cables carrying those supplies to the control centre's main distribution board and subsequently to the equipment distribution boards are physically segregated as far as possible to avoid points of common failure or simultaneous exposure to hazards. The standby generator should also be connected to the main distribution board to provide supply to the control centre in the event of both LV in-feeds being lost. A similar split distribution board should be provided to distribute the supplies from the UPS. 6. This shall comprise two bedrooms. The main distribution boards shall be arranged as two interconnected boards. However the two LV in-feeds are derived. whether wide spread or to the control complex alone. lighting.175 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the UPS full rated load plus the load associated with recharging the UPS battery. The design of this room shall facilitate presentation and training and be equipped with overhead projector. In any case.14 POWER SUPPLIES 6.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6.13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS Domestic quarters shall be provided for 24hour on call staff. each supplying half of the total control centre load. The dual LV supplies shall be derived from different HV sources to minimise the possibility of simultaneous loss of supply from both in-feeds.e. A fault tolerant form of UPS. e.3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure The diesel generator must be located in a position that is that is above the worst case possible flood water levels.Section 6 . 6. The detailed technical requirements are specified elsewhere. Each infeed shall be fully rated to supply the entire control centre load and should be derived from separate diverse HV sources. training and meetings. electronic white board and sound system .14. a purpose built construction is necessary to ensure low noise outputs and minimal transmission of vibration and the ready removal of exhaust without disruption or discomfort of persons in the area. shall be provide for the supplies to the master station and communications equipment and the control room workstations. With this arrangement either half of the board may be taken out of service for maintenance without total disruption to the control centre's power supply. This shall be provided such that conditioning of the mains in-feeds and consequent protection from noise and perturbations occurring on the mains supply is assured and to permit continuity of operation should the mains in-feeds fail completely. i.1 General Requirements A secure power supply is essential for the control centre in order that the continuity of control activities is not affected by losses of power. lounge area. general services and the UPS system.14.11 CONFERENCE ROOM This room shall house a conference table for up to 15 persons for the use of visitors. The diesel generator should be rated to supply the complete control centre load including air conditioning. In order to ensure high availability of supply.14. 6. the purpose here is to define the equipment that space shall be provided for and details particular requirements related to location and segregation: (a) A dual LV (415V) infeed to the control centre complex (b) (c) An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with 3 hour standby battery capacity A standby diesel generator. cooking facilities and sanitary services.

To achieve secure operation of the air conditioning system.18 HVAC Air conditioning systems shall be provided for the building in general to normal office standards. Control Room lobby and other doors with access to the control room. drainage facilities.14.16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM A fire detection system shall be provided that enables smoke or fire to be detected in zones of the building. In other words each of the systems shall be able to satisfy 100% of the air conditioning requirements allowing one to be out of service for maintenance. This shall be in the form of multiple fans (e. lifts. The system shall provide access control points from the reception area and car parks for external access and internal control points for access to the Control Room and Equipment Rooms. This is separate to LAN equipment that is to be provided as part of the SCADA/EMS system. 3 with 2 capable of providing adequate ventilation). car parks. 6.176 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. otherwise the UPS shall be segregated by a fire wall. CCTV shall be provided to give views of the outside grounds.7 DC Supplies Separate duplicated battery backed 48V dc supplies shall be provided and these may be housed with the 415Vac UPS system and its batteries providing that he same design criteria and constraints are applied. it should either comprise of duplicated units or incorporate standby units. basins.5 LV Distribution Panels Separate LV distribution panels shall be provided for the Main Equipment Room and Control Rooms as well for all equipment forming part of the SCADA/EMS or Telecommunication systems and the equipment assigned to supply redundant or duplicated devices from different boards.g. Provision shall be made for fire fighting equipment in electrically hazardous areas and for sensitive computer and communication equipment.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies A single room may be used to house the UPS system's rectifier/chargers and inverters provided that there are arrangements to by pass the UPS room. 6. 6. 6. 6. For the control and equipment rooms duplicated systems shall be provided with 2 x 100% cooling systems and fans. The control room and equipment rooms shall be air-conditioned to provide both a comfortable working atmosphere for the operators and the correct operating environment for the equipment. under floor or ceiling cavities shall be independently fitted with detection devices. 6. 6. UPS area and the diesel generator. flameproof electrical fittings. It is expected that forced ventilation will be required to cool the UPS equipment room. Fire fighting facilities shall be provided in accordance with local regulations. Cable routing shall ensure protection from hazards and segregation to prevent common exposure to hazards.14.14.Section 6 . To ensure faults are revealed in good time each 100% system shall automatically switch over operation to the second system on a daily basis.17 LAN The offices shall be fully wired for an office LAN to normal office standards. eye baths etc Air cooling for this room shall be provided to ensure they operate at a temperature that does not cause deterioration and reduction in service life.14. Unmanned areas such as LV intake rooms.15 ACCESS CONTROL An access control system is required that restricts access to persons into the building and to certain parts of the building. The CCTV viewing console shall be located in the Control Room. reception. Separate access control points shall be provided to the LV intake.6 UPS Battery Room Where Nickel Cadmium or Lead Acid batteries are used the rooms shall meet the requirements for ventilation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6. The general services LV distribution shall be separate from these.

It is important that the design of the building and its services supports principles that are conducive to rapid repair times with minimum disturbance to other control centre functions. ventilation and dehumidification to be run from the UPS backed power supply. cabling and connections so that they can be easily repaired in situ. The design of the control centre. 6. removed for repair elsewhere. floors. 6. The design shall provide for sufficient air cooling. particularly the control and equipment rooms.20 MATERIALS Generally materials used for the construction and fitting out of the building shall be of high quality and to the required national or international standards. 6.Section 6 . This may be achieved by providing ample free space around items of equipment and by the use of a raised 'computer floor' or channelling to accommodate cables. For the Control Room controls shall be provided to enable the lights to be dimmed to set a comfortable working environment where viewing of screen based data is not impaired. In addition to any statutory emergency lighting a set of luminaries shall be provided in the Control Room that have sufficient luminosity to allow Operators to continue work at their control room desks in the event of supply failure. It shall include the provision of ready access to all items of equipment.19 LIGHTING Lighting shall be designed to be glare free. and wall coverings should be selected to prevent the generation of static electricity and should be non-dust producing.177 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . These luminaries shall be feed from the UPS system. avoid reflections on VDU screens and the rear projection screens. Equipment rooms shall be illuminated to normal standards for working with machinery. In support of preventative maintenance all surface materials within the control centre including ceilings.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In the event of a power failure where the only supply is from the batteries of the UPS system (i. the diesel has failed to start) some form of emergency cooling may be required to ensure the SCADA/EMS Master Station continues to function. The luminosity levels shall be to normal office standards for the offices. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.21 MAINTAINABILITY It is vital that the control centre facilities have an inherently high level of availability. or replaced.e. needs to be undertaken with this requirement in mind.

including the compilation of historical data records Supervisory controls EMS applications b) One less than the normal complement of User Interfaces in control rooms c) One less than the normal complement of hardcopy peripherals provided for real time output in the control rooms d) Mains supply from the UPS system e) Adequate environmental control (e. The basic equipment life expectancy shall be at least fifteen years provided that normal routine maintenance is carried out.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS It is a fundamental requirement that the System (and individual items of equipment within it) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the System shall have been proven in service. the System shall automatically carry out sufficient self-checks to ensure that the overall availability of the System is not impaired due to the occurrence of unrevealed faults. The replacement parts necessary to achieve this reliability shall be defined in the Bid.2    AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS For the SCADA/EMS Master Station . Error detection. 7. The Bidder shall describe the self-checks carried out by the System offered and provide an estimate of the proportion of possible faults revealed by such checks.1 SCADA/EMS Availability The System availability shall be at least: The following SCADA/EMS facilities are the minimum that shall be available with a probability of 99.99. Communication with at least 98% of in service Outstations Data acquisition. random errors and burst data errors. ii. iii. assuming a 4 hour Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) For Outstations supplied under this contract – 99. In this context.g. without loss of any SCADA/EMS functionality and without degradation of System performance. The equipment shall be designed to operate safely.98%: a) All real time functions for which the System is designed.178 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In operation. the System includes mains power supplies and the communication links that are used by the SCADA/EMS Master Station for communications with subsystems (principally Outstations) located remotely from the NSCC. the System must always be able to determine if data has not been received successfully). RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 7.Section 6 .99% and a MTTR of 12 hours.2.995 and a MTTR of 12 hours 7. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The System shall incorporate facilities to automatically recover lost data.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 7. For example. correction and message retry mechanisms shall be provided to overcome soft errors. air conditioning) to ensure continuous operation. including: i. standby equipment and standby database information shall be automatically checked to ensure that successful changeover can take place when required. For communication channels to each Outstation – 99. It shall not be possible for the System to enter a state whereby loss of data is not deterministic (i.98%. The System's response to all corrupted message types shall be defined. following the failure of single items of media or subsystems. Calculations shall be presented to show the probability of single and multiple bit errors in messages escaping detection and possibly causing an incorrect response. The overall System design shall incorporate redundancy to enable the System to continue to operate. reliably and efficiently over this period. iv.e.

environmentally induced.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 7. together with information on the source of any theoretical or practical data used. In addition to the overall System reliability block diagram. The overall assessment of System reliability shall be provided in the form of an overall System block diagram with each main item shown.2. Calculations for the availability of the System shall be included in the Bidder's offer.4 VERIFICATION The verification of reliability and availability of the system shall be realised by maintaining a register of all failures and restoration times which will be compared with the guaranteed characteristics for MTBF/MTTR and the specified criteria. The Contractor shall update availability calculations. The method to be applied for defined system availability shall include: a) Comparison of the availability of the system (as defined above) with the specified requirements – all failures that cause the loss of the defined essential functions will be considered as failures regardless of their nature (e. The Bidder shall describe in detail the failure modes of the entire System.Section 6 . The calculation of overall reliability shall be provided with this diagram.2. e. This shall include: a) All assumptions made b) Assumed failure distribution. 7.g. The reliability calculation for constituent printed circuit boards shall be based on ML-HDBK-217 or other comparable standard.g. 7. complete with its reliability data. systematic software. clearly stating the effects of any subsystem or media failure on the availability and response of the essential SCADA/EMS functions. the reliability in terms of MTBF shall be shown for other specific failure modes detailed by the Bidder. normal. random hardware. 7. Reliability figures of existing equipment shall be supported by evidence from operational experience at similar types of installation.2 Communication System Availability A communication channel is considered unavailable when no routing to an Outstation is available or end to end service is not available.179 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . unidentified causes) b) Faults shall be categorised according to their nature c) Unrevealed faults causing loss of essential functions (once identified) shall be considered a serious non compliance Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. These shall be based upon the Mean Time Between Failure of items of equipment and a Mean Time To Repair stated above. reflecting the increasing depth of design detail.3 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS Theoretical and practical figures shall be given in the Bid Schedules for the reliability of each individual unit of the System in terms of Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). as the design phase of the project proceeds. The Bidder shall state the methodology of the analysis and the source of the reliability figures. exponential. etc.3 Outstation Availability An Outstation is considered unavailable when: a) Software malfunction affecting normal operation b) Any function is lost for all points of a single type c) More than one input card or output card of the same type fails d) One input card or output card of each type fails e) Communication with the Master is not possible because of Outstation failure f) 48Vdc power supply failure.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d) The calculation of availability of the essential functions shall be the sum of the unavailable times for one or more of these functions divided by the total time expressed as a percentage. During this period the Contractor shall also keep a register and provide written reports of all identified faults (whether they cause loss of essential functions or not). action taken and any implications for the future operation of the system.180 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . that explain their causes.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. This method shall be adopted to monitor the reliability and availability during the Site Acceptance procedures and until the end of the Defects Liability Period.

namely:    Type testing Subsystem testing System testing.1 8.2 Responsibilities The Contractor's responsibilities shall include but not be limited to requirements to:   Produce written Test Plans.Section 6 . This Specification covers the higher levels of complexity. Operator consoles.1. Telecommunication Equipment and Power Supplies shall ensure that the equipment functionality is thoroughly exercised and validated at the Contractor's premises before delivery and commissioning. The test methodology shall complement the design methodology and the two shall be developed in parallel. conducting and recording tests shall be with the Contractor. for all tests All test documentation associated with a subsystem or system test shall be submitted for approval by the Employer at least 12 weeks prior to the commencement of the associated test Ensure that all test documentation associated with any testing has achieved Category I approval (See Clause 11. etc. at stages throughout the work. location and purpose of each stage. Communication System and network media (OPGW. The responsibility for specifying. Type testing is required to verify that the equipment meets with the specified environmental conditions. if necessary) in collaboration with the Employer and related contractor(s). The 'System' is defined as the interconnection of all Subsystems and any other equipment which will eventually comprise all of the equipment supplied under this contract (with the exception of spares). method statements. rather it sets out the stages at which tests are required and the subjects. Schedules.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. In the context of interfacing. test record sheets and procedures for fault reporting.181 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . testing and setting to work the ‗System‘ includes the existing Outstations. test equipment.7 ) from the Employer prior to the commencement of the corresponding testing Provide the equipment. INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY 8. formal tests shall be performed and recorded against written test specifications.1. Inspection of incoming goods and components. The degree to which the Employer intervenes in the process will depend upon the level of confidence built up during the project. The principle of testing shall be that. UPS System. This document does not constitute a Test Specification or Test Procedure for any part of the system. PLC etc) and their interfaces as well as new Outstations that are put into service under other projects during the currency of this contract. Procedures. to provide a high level of confidence to the Contractor and the Employer (or the Employer‘s designated and authorised representative) that subsequent stages can proceed. personnel and facilities to conduct the test (described further in the next Clause) Successfully carry out all tests according to the approved test procedures and correct any errors prior to the witnessed acceptance tests    Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. test software.1 GENERAL Approach to Testing The testing for the SCADA/EMS System. shall be undertaken by the Contractor in accordance with the procedures set out in the Contractor's own Quality Plan and are not described here. The Contractor under this Contract shall undertake to coordinate the System testing (and Subsystem testing. 8. All Test Documentation for all tests shall be written by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer for approval at least 12 weeks before they are first used. but all aspects must be to the satisfaction of the Employer. and subassembly testing. Outstations. Workstations. 'Subsystems' are defined as single items or small groups of closely related equipment (including software) such as Printers.

8. if required by the Employer.1. but approval by the Employer shall not imply any diminution of the Contractor's responsibilities. and subassembly tests.4 Testing Stages Inspection of incoming goods and components. subsystems.Section 6 . to permit full testing of System functions and performance Other items of the System. including. 8. shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by an approved standards laboratory. even if not part of the Subsystem under test Consumables. simulators and test software. shall be performed in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Plan. but not limited to:     Laboratory test instruments Special test equipment.1.3 Test Equipment and Facilities The Contractor shall provide all equipment and services required for testing. specified elsewhere as being part of the Contractor's supply.182 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . The stages of testing to be performed at higher levels shall be based on the following: a) Type Testing  To prove that the equipment supplied meets with the specified environmental conditions b) Subsystem Factory  To prove the design of a Subsystem prior to the Subsystem being used in the System FAT c) System FAT  To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements d) Site Installation Tests  To check the operation of equipment. It is expressly the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself that items 'supplied by others' are in a satisfactory condition for the Contractor's tests to be conducted. systems following installation e) Site Update Period   To update and verify the SCADA/EMS database Point to Point testing of each outstation signal f) System SAT Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    Provide facilities for the Employer to witness any Factory tests Produce permanent records of all test progress and results in a formal systematic manner Carry out all remedial work and re-testing necessary for the equipment to pass the tests Each of the above responsibilities shall be discharged to the satisfaction of the Employer. All test instruments shall be subject to routine inspection. All test instruments shall be subject to approval by the Employer and. emulators. All test software shall be subject to formal quality assurance requirements stipulated elsewhere in the Specification. Software production and integration testing shall be performed in accordance with the Software Requirements of this specification and the Contractor's Quality Plan. testing and calibration by the Contractor.

whether witnessed or not. stability and robustness of the SCADA/EMS System 8. Test result sheets will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. Test results from the prior tests shall be made available to the Employer on request. (c).7 Contractor's Prior Tests The Contractor shall successfully complete a prior run of all tests. (b).6.1. Separate test procedures and result sheets shall be provided for factory and site acceptance tests. The Employer shall have the right to witness any tests whether conducted at the Contractor's premises or elsewhere. at least 10 working days before the commencement. before the commencement of the formal tests.1. when any changes are known. and shall arrange for the test to be repeated.1. or The result of the test is in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure. He shall also prepare a cross reference listing to show that all of the requirements of the Functional Design Specification have been included in the tests.1. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor shall advise the Employer in writing of the actual date of commencement of every test in Clause 8.4(a). to indicate the readiness of the equipment for tests to commence. using the test procedures and result sheets described in Clause 8.5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests The Contractor shall provide. (f)and (g).6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets The Contractor shall prepare test procedures and result sheets for all tests.1. a master plan showing the scheduled dates of testing and shall provide updates to this plan. and shall enter the results in the result sheets. Any revisions to the test documents found necessary as a result of the prior tests shall be made before the commencement of formal tests.9 Failures The Contractor shall correct all faults found during testing.1. In general. (e). Records of every test. but some other unexpected or unexplained event occurred which the Employer considers to be a fault Full use shall be made during the tests of operator manuals and other documentation provided by the Contractor. (d).Section 6 . 8. 8.8 Conduct of the Tests The Contractor shall conduct the tests in accordance with the approved test procedures.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification  To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements and interacts correctly with equipment supplied by others and interfacing to the Works g) Tests on Completion   500 Hour Trial Period 'Hands on' test period (following System SAT) to demonstrate the reliability. 8.183 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . shall be taken by the Contractor and copies sent to the Employer within three weeks of completion of the tests. to provide a series of tests of their accuracy. at least six weeks in advance of the tests.1. the test will be considered to have failed if either:   The result of the test is not in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure. as part of the Programme of Work documentation. The test shall only be repeated when the fault has been remedied and the equipment demonstrated to function correctly. For each test. 8. All test procedures and result sheets will be subject to review and approval by the Employer. the Employer will determine whether the test has passed or failed.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where remedial measures involve significant modifications that might. The report shall clearly show:    The observed symptoms The likely cause The fault category (from Table 1) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. once the software has been approved for inclusion into the system and is subject to configuration control. All other costs incurred by the Employer as a result of such re-tests.11 of this Section. the Contractor shall investigate the failure and prepare a report on its cause(s) and design implications.14 Software Failure Reports For each software failure that occurs. Test categories shall be as defined in Table 7. together with the actions taken to clear and re-test the fault. which shall determine the future conduct of test. 8.Section 6 . Time spent by the Employer and his representatives witnessing re-tests. the suspension shall remain in effect until reporting has been brought up to date to the satisfaction of the Employer.10 Fault Categories The Employer will allocate a category to each fault. will be charged to the Contractor at cost.1. or waiting at the Contractor's premises or the test site while corrections are made prior to re-test.13 Hardware Failure Reports For each hardware failure that occurs at any stage of testing. In this event. The Employer shall also have the right to suspend any test in the event of a fault being detected by the Contractor but not reported to the Employer within 24 hours.1. The report shall clearly show:      The most likely cause of the failure An analysis of any stress that may have been caused to other components of the equipment being tested as a result of the failure Whether the failure is a result of any component operating outside its design range Whether any design changes should be made to avoid further failures All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. The fault log will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. 8. subsistence and travel charges. will be charged to the Contractor.1. affect the validity of earlier tests then the Contractor shall repeat the earlier tests and obtain satisfactory results before repeating the test in which the fault was first identified. 8. the Contractor shall generate a software failure report.1.12 Fault Log The Contractor shall maintain a fault log throughout each series of tests. The Employer shall have the right to order the repeat or abandonment of any test in the event that results demonstrate that the equipment is significantly non-compliant with the Contract requirements. 8.11 Repeat Tests The Contractor shall correct and re-test every fault detected during the tests.1.184 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Employer shall have the right to suspend any test in the event that errors or failures have become unacceptable.1. shall be charged to the Contractor at the standard hourly rate for the personnel concerned. in the Employer‘s opinion. and all charges incurred by them in so doing. including accommodation. If the Employer is required to return to the Contractor's premises or the test site to witness such re-tests then time spent by the personnel concerned in travelling to the site of and witnessing such re-tests. 8.1. without in any way prejudicing his rights under Clause 8. Every fault detected during the tests will be entered in the log.

If the submitted type test results are satisfactory then the type tests specified may. The action taken will depend on the severity of the fault. The fault must be rectified before retest of the affected test sessions or sessions. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.185 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . at the discretion of Employer. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8. mechanical (transport vibration.2 TYPE TESTS Full details of type tests performed on equipment identical to that being offered shall be submitted with the offer. Testing may continue. Major fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. in some cases. be waived. In general. Repeatable fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. the type tests should also demonstrate that the equipment does not exceed accepted standards in terms of its impact on its environment (noise. accompanied by a proposed schedule of tests to be performed for each item of equipment. handling knocks. The documentation shall be corrected before the tests are considered complete. Other fault not covered above. All software modules affected.1: FAULT CATEGORIES Category 0 Definition An item recorded as a fault during testing. correction. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate course of action. Testing may continue at the discretion of the Engineer. rain etc. but requiring explanation and. wind. and subsequently considered to be a normal acceptable occurrence. mains harmonics etc. electromagnetic (radiated and conducted). Where appropriate. type test results shall show that the equipment being proposed for this Contract will perform in accordance with its design specification in the environments to which it will be subject in its application on this Contract. Documentation error or deficiency.). Non-repeatable fault affecting functionality being tested in the session. Repeatable fault not affecting the functionality being tested in the session. The corrective action taken. testing may continue. The error will usually be amended during the test and the test will continue. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate action.Section 6 . Testing may proceed on other sessions if permitted by the Engineer. All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the SCADA/EMS system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The report shall also clearly show the following information that shall be entered when the failure has been investigated:    The actual cause of the failure. The environmental factors include climatic (temperature humidity. Minor fault. The fault must be rectified before recommencing testing. TABLE 8.). An event not affecting the functionality being tested in that session. earthquake stresses) and chemical (salt laden atmosphere). Deficiency in the ability of the test or test equipment to demonstrate the function being tested in the session.

3. the System will be ready for delivery to site.3 8. The Contractor shall have completed his own internal system integration tests prior to commencement of the System FAT. Tests shall be conducted to prove the integrated functioning of the system as a whole and shall include (but not be limited to) the following: 1. All corresponding inspection. disks. Partial shipment may take place. 8. of equipment that has been successfully factory tested (and the corresponding test records have been reviewed by the Employer) and is not required to form part of the System FAT. by agreement with the Employer.2 System FAT The System FAT shall combine all Subsystems and shall include other equipment that shall represent.186 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . but not be limited to.1 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS Subsystem FAT A Subsystem Factory Acceptance Test shall include the inspection. Test Specifications. equipment and software configuration 4.3 General FAT Requirements It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer. The test shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises.3. Test Procedures and Test Record Sheets have achieved Category I approval. The test shall prove that the Subsystem meets its particular physical. hardware test and software test of any clearly identifiable Subsystem.3. The System equipment will not be allowed on site until the FAT has been successfully completed and the Employer has reviewed the corresponding test records. It is required that the results of the test shall demonstrate System reliability and availability consistent with the values specified and those guaranteed by the Contractor. 8. The FAT shall not commence until all documentation associated with the FAT including Test Plan. performance. Hardware inspection 2. I/O interfaces etc. prior to use as a component in a System test. The System shall then be tested as a whole to prove that it meets the Specification in all aspects of function. capacity. maintainability and operability. The System FAT shall commence only if all associated subsystems have successfully completed their individual FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer. emulate or simulate those parts of the ‗System‘ to be eventually provided. and component and subassembly test documentation shall be complete and available for inspection prior to the commencement of a subsystem FAT. functional and performance specification. Hardware functionality including firmware and operating system level software tests on CPU. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . stability and robustness (b) Inspection. (The extent of this testing will be dependent on the extent and nature of the subsystem tests) 3. the following: (a) Order of Tests. Coverage shall include. System performance in the face of various contingencies 6. System performance tests to demonstrate that the integrated system can achieve the guaranteed levels of response and to determine the limits of the response envelope 5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. Upon satisfactory completion of the test. The tests shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. Soak test to give an indication of system reliability. Integrated system tests to prove the functionality of all applications software in the context of the complete integrated system. The System shall be inspected to ensure that all interfaces mate correctly and that the System is complete.

187 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Prior to commencement of the tests. The printing and recording equipment needed for conducting the test shall be run throughout the test. All necessary maintenance and adjustments shall be carried out before commencement of the test so that the tests can continue uninterrupted by routine operations. 8. All subsystem components shall have been successfully inspected and tested. cabling. Sufficient hardware (e. 5. Each subsystem and/or each module shall be tested cyclically at least once per hour whilst all other parts are functioning normally. 6.Section 6 . The test shall run for at least 200 hours continuously. quantities of items etc (c) Test Conditions. 7. The Contractor shall provide all the software necessary to carry out the tests. CPU tests 2. All modules must remain powered up for the duration of the test 9. remote terminals) and/or simulation devices shall be provided by the Contractor to ensure that the Design System Loading conditions can be achieved and System performance demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer 10. Correct standards of workmanship and quality 2. Where there is redundancy in the equipment the test period shall be divided equally between the redundant parts. The conditions of the tests shall be no less rigorous than: 1. Disc write/read tests 4. Compliance with the Specification and reviewed drawings (including compliance with fire safety and materials requirements) 5. Automatic changeover is not permissible. 2. The equipment shall be complete at the start of the tests and no interchange of modules or equipment shall be allowed. 3. It need not be permanently manned throughout this period provided that a comprehensive log of operations tested and faults occurring is printed. All parts subject to wear. tagging. may be omitted from the tests if agreed by the Engineer. the equipment shall be inspected to ensure: 1. as necessary. Data highway loading tests Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Verification of model numbers. such as electromechanical peripherals.g. Adequate accessibility 4. housing and mounting etc 3. and all corresponding documentation shall be complete and available for inspection. No repairs or adjustments shall be carried out during the test period unless agreed by both parties. Correct identification labels. Online loading and all functions shall be tested under these worst case conditions. RAM write/read tests 3. Tests shall include: 1. The tests shall be carried out at the prevailing ambient conditions of temperature and humidity. 4. no special conditioning is required (d) Computer Equipment. Test equipment and test software shall be provided to load the equipment to a greater extent than the worst case predicted for the complete system.

all software for which source code is supplied under the Contract shall be reassembled and/or recompiled from source. (g) Soak Test Each subsystem soak test shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment comprising the subsystem. screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. All errors or problems shall be printed out. The tests shall use a simulated network. (f) Power Supplies (i) Tests shall include: 1. Availability and functionality of alarm and indication facilities Tests shall use simulated loads that present similar characteristics to those in the finally integrated system. assemblers. Loading 2. The initial System soak test shall have a minimum duration of 100 hours. Before commencement of the functional tests. all configurable databases. where practical. Switching and automatic switchover sequences 4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. a real network. linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. Workstation equipment test Tests shall exercise communication ports and shall overload ports so that queuing of messages occurs. Peripheral tests 6. every function specified for the system in the Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design.g. Data integrity in the presence of noise 2. Demonstrate that communication systems do not interfere with each other (e. where appropriate: 1. control and configuration of the network. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation. Both positive and negative tests shall be carried out. (h) Functional Tests During the functional tests. or where practical. The tests shall use a simulated network or. Similarly. cross-talk) or with other systems 4. The time shall be calculated as the number of hours continuously connected and running. Supply Quality 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5. a real network. Programming. Demonstration of network management functions 5. All of these activities shall use compilers. (e) Communication (i) Tests shall include. Efficiency 5. Loss of Link procedures 3.188 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . The resulting object code shall be re-linked and used for the tests.

As a minimum the following shall be tested:                8. All simulations must be substantiated to show that they provide a realistic simulation of the associated Outstations and the Master Station / Outstation communication process and data acquisition processing.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (i) Performance Tests The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements.4. Simulation shall be used to represent the remaining Outstations. each Master Station to be supplied. tabular displays. system loading tests.4 Specific Test Requirements 8. in particular.3. (k) Outstations For the purposes of FAT and. during which the Employer shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system.189 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The master station SCADA database shall be configured and populated with all system specific data. As a minimum the following shall be tested: Data acquisition and processing Alarm and Event Processing Measured and Metered Value Processing Calculated values Operator Interaction Authority Control and Processing Graphics Displays Tagging and hand dressing Reporting and Archiving Performance . Suitable simulation shall be provided for Outstation types that are existing and that will be interfaced with.3. all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing.data handling capacity and response times Data and graphic display management Multi-processor management including power fail/auto start-up Hardware and software diagnostics ICCP functionality Other data exchange facilities Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the Contractor shall include at least one Outstation of each type to be supplied. 8.Section 6 .1 Master Stations For this Factory Acceptance Test.4. log reports etc shall be constructed for the test. All system graphic displays. as part of this Contract shall communicate with Outstations and/or equipment that can simulate their functionality and performance. (j) Unstructured Tests In addition to the structured tests described above.2 Outstations For this Factory Acceptance Test each type of Outstation to be supplied as part of this Contract shall communicate with a master station or a master station simulator that can simulate the functionality and performance of a master station.3. for the fully extended system.

The routing of all circuits. Where appropriate the automatic re-routing of circuits shall be demonstrated and the levels of disturbance to the directly affected services and services on the alternate route assessed. shall be verified.Section 6 . The performance is in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. the peripheral network. The units operate correctly when connected as a system in its operational configuration. The test set up shall include a test SCADA Master Station and a number of Outstations. and alarm and event handling and archiving. time tagging.3. For this test the complete telecommunication network equipment shall be staged at the supplier's premises including the core system.4 Telecommunication The telecommunication network shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. de-bounce filtering and time synchronisation Communications processing including multi-porting functions Data management Hardware and software diagnostics Compliance with communications protocols IEC 60870-5-101 and 104 8. As the system will be integrated with the existing SDH and PLC equipment these shall be suitably simulated or emulated in order that the interface and interaction with these may be proven.3.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification         Analogue and digital inputs and outputs Command outputs Pulse inputs Scanning. As a minimum the following shall be tested:        All Network Analysis Applications All Forecasting and Scheduling Applications All AGC functions All Hydro Chain Control functions All Study Mode Network Analysis Applications Operator Training Simulator All Network Management Applications 8. All functions of the test equipment offered shall be tested fully. the Contractor shall demonstrate that: a.190 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Energy Management Software The EMS network model shall be configured and parameterised and the database populated with all system specific data. The equipment meet the following EMC requirements with respect to: o Radiated immunity to a 5 W hand held VHF transceiver operating at distance of 0. Prior to the tests the EMS network model shall be validated using the results of a 'bench marked' off-line load flow program. and the network management system. anticipated in the field.4. b. The functionality of the Telecommunication Management System (TMS) shall be thoroughly tested including the circuit and hardware configuration. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4. The FATs shall be arranged to represent working conditions as closely as possible. Links shall be set up with the maximum design optical budget loss and tests carried out to show that minimum levels of service quality are maintained. Tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the telecommunication network is entirely compatible with the Master Station and the Outstations and that it provides the required level of service. c. During the FATs.

Data channel measurement. In addition to the structured tests described above. c.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification o Radiated immunity to a GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) phone operating at distance of 0. Channel capacity. d. d. class IV). ANSI C37. h. VF channel measurement.1 SDH communication system. b. The power supply limits and tolerances are complied with. Laser diode bias current measurement. during which the Employer and/or its representatives shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system. class III.2) Rapid transients (IEC 60801-4. The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements. Analogue and digital service channels. c.4.90. k.3. f. FATs shall include the following telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components: a. every function specified for the system in the Contractor‘s Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. e.4. Digital power line carrier system. electrical and optical interfaces. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone PAX equipment. o o o o o During the functional tests. High frequency test (VDE 0435/T303. screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source.191 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . User interfaces. All of these activities shall use compilers. e. assemblers. include: a. class III). j. Similarly. Optical output power measurement. Voice recording equipment.Section 6 . i. Nominal operating wavelength.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place. all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing. Telecommunication management system. Digital. as a minimum. g. 8. l. Receiver sensitivity. class III). Electrostatic discharge (IEC 60801-2. Transmission rate. Bit error rate measurements with optical attenuation representative of the link design budgets and also at the equipment design limits. all configurable databases. f. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. SDH Communication System The tests on the SDH communication system shall. Electromagnetic fields (IEC 60801-3. b.

4. Teleprotection Signalling Equipment The tests on the protection signalling equipment shall. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b. Engineer‘s order wire equipment operation. h. Channel capacity. q. Transmitter output level.3 Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities.3. i.3. Transmission time. include: a. Alarm functions. Power supply limits. n.192 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . as a minimum. p.4 Transmission rate. Alarm and network management functions. Different failure modes such as main and standby changeover. 8. 8. Power supply limits. g.4. r. End to end circuit management. 8. c. System redundancy and programming. Transmitter output level. e. Integration interfaces with existing network. b. Alarm and network management functions. i. System programming. f. User interfaces. Interfaces with other telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification m. f. include: a.4.4. g. d. Alarm facilities. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. h. b. e. System configuration and channel assignment. d.4. as a minimum.3. Power supply limits. Bit error rate measurements. include: a.2 Engineer‘s order wire equipment operation. d. Reports and system archiving. Receiver dynamic range. Digital Power Line Carrier System The tests on the power line carrier system shall. c. e. as a minimum. Telecommunication Management System The tests on the telecommunication management system shall. c. o.4. Signal boost facility. Failure modes and recovery.

e. as a minimum. Interfaces with PAX equipment. Extension facilities. b. Redundant processors functions. 8. Transmission performance. VF and E&M signalling levels. h. Voice Recording Equipment The tests on the voice recording equipment shall. Switching facilities. f.6 Traffic handling capacity. k.4. 8. d.4 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING Site Acceptance Testing shall comprise the following stages: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. include: a. c. include: a.5 In service loop test. Equivalent loads shall be used for the tests.4. e. Power supply limits. e. Full rang of loading tests with efficiency and supply quality measured Response to step load changes Switchover sequences Failure modes and configuration tests Tests for charging batteries It will not be necessary to test the batteries to be delivered under this contract although inspection may be carried out at the option of the Employer.3. Tie line interface. i. The tests shall comprise: a.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification f. m. 8. g. Alarm functions.193 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 8. Search and play back functions. g. b. l.3. c. as a minimum.3. b. Batteries used duting the FAT shall be those provided by the manufacturer at their test facilities. Telephone PAX Equipment The tests on the administrative telephone PAX equipment shall.5 Power Supplies The UPS System and Diesel Generator shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. Telephone network signalling system. Power supply limits. Operator console functions.4. These tests may be carried out in the respective manufacturer‘s works. Analogue and digital interfaces. j. d. c.Section 6 . Automatic call logging functions. d.4.4. System configuration functions. Alarm and network management functions. Power supply variations.

4. All errors or problems shall be printed out. It shall conform to the relevant requirements for test documentation set out in Section 11. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .3. and carried out jointly by Employer and the Contractor and third parties responsible for the Telecommunications and Outstation Works. and the Employer will carry out all operational switching in accordance with a programme that will be prepared and agreed in advance between the Employer and the Contractor.3(General FAT Requirements) of this Section of the Specification. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design. in this volume of the Bid Documents.194 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the Contractor shall prepare an overall test plan that covers all testing to be carried out on Site. In support of the Site testing activities. The general requirements for testing and factory testing set out in preceding clauses of this Section are applicable to Site testing. to fully commission the System in such a manner as to enable trained operators to use the System. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation. independent of any factory tests. b) Duration and Downtime Each stage of the testing shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment. within the scope of definite work. 8. the Contractor shall carry out to the satisfaction of Employer such tests as may be required to prove compliance with the Specification. to waive some tests and require additional tests to be carried out if findings on Site indicate additional or alternative tests are required to properly demonstrate that the works comply with the requirements of the Contract.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification      Site Installation Tests Site Update Period System Integrated Tests System Performance Tests Tests on Completion After equipment has been erected and connected up on site. The Employer shall have the right. the following requirements shall be met: a) Commissioning It shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The test plan will be subject to the approval of the Employer and should be closely coordinated with the Employer in terms of the availability of plant for testing and the timely provision of the associated permits to work. They shall meet the appropriate requirements for the Factory Acceptance Test specified in Clause 8. Documentation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the SATs to the satisfaction of the Employer. The test plan shall indicate test precedence and dependencies and should be co-ordinated with the Contractor‘s general programme of work. In addition. c) Testing to Plant Initial setting to work and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by Employer. Tests shall be subject to the Employer‘s standard safety procedures.1 General SAT Requirements It must be emphasised that all testing that requires an interface to operational equipment must only be carried out after prior agreement with the Employer and adequate advance notice shall be given to the Employer by the Contractor of their intent to conduct testing involving operational equipment.

Setting up of Load Forecast application with live data/inputs. Therefore.4.4. the Contractor shall establish. If test results are invalidated by subsequent actions then re-testing will be necessary.4. Telecommunication management system.Section 6 . quality procedures that ensure the validity of the results of previous testing are systematically reviewed following subsequent changes in the database. UPS System The purpose of these tests is to prove that the equipment or subsystems have not been damaged during packaging. Setting up of reports with live data/inputs. 8.195 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The activities shall include but not be limited to:     Completion and verification of network modelling fixed and variable data. The scheduling of Site Installation Tests shall be subject to coordination with the installation and testing schedules of equipment of other suppliers. Coarse tuning of EMS applications. it shall be tested without connection to plant or to the Master Station. Test procedures for point to point testing shall be agreed in detail with the Employer and must include a plan for the phased change over from any existing remote control and monitoring systems to the new system with the minimum of interruption to the Employer‘s operational capability.3. the equipment or subsystem shall be considered ready for the next stage of testing.3. The process of testing this mapping may take up to 6 months to complete for existing stations and will be an ongoing task as new Outstations under other projects are ready for service. Once an Outstation installation is complete and has been configured. On completion of the tests. displays and or the system code. 8. Digital power line carrier equipment. They will typically include the following steps: a) Local Tests for new Outstations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 8. DCC. to which the Subsystem is designed to interface.1 SCADA/EMS Database The Contractor shall work in coordination with the Employer‘s staff to complete and verify the SCADA/EMS database. These procedures should identify when previous test results may no longer be valid due to subsequent changes on the system. Fibre optic communication system. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. The scope of the re-testing shall be agreed with the Employer on a case-by-case basis. CEB HQ and each substation and generating station location.2 Point To Point Testing Site acceptance test procedures for the new SCADA equipment shall ensure that the SCADA database and displays are correctly mapped onto the Outstation input output connections to the plant.2          Site Installation Tests A site installation test shall be conducted on each part of the system comprising: SCADA/EMS Master Station. to prove that the equipment or subsystem is operating correctly and interfaces correctly to equipment and services on that site. to the satisfaction of the Employer.3 Site Update Period During this period the SCADA/EMS database will be brought up to date and the correct connectivity from the Master Station to plant shall be verified. Telephone system.4. The communication installed at the NSCC. delivery and installation on site.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b) ‗Safe Plant‘ Tests Data communication to the master station shall be established for an Outstation following satisfactory completion of local testing. The Contractor's test plan shall take due account of the requirement to coordinate testing with third parties responsible for equipment to which the SCADA Master Station is designed to interface. c) Stability Tests Each Outstation should operate for at least two weeks monitoring only mode.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification On completion of plant adaptation works in a substation or generating station the correctness of the works shall be tested by activating each connection on the plant and checking the correct signal is received at the cross connection terminals in the Marshalling Cubicles. using the actual communications network and including equipment supplied by others. Testing to / from the Outstation shall be carried out using a local GUI or Laptop test device that emulates the master station. Once robust and stable communications have been established and proven between an RTU and the master stations the plant should then be placed in a ―safe‖ situation for personnel and for the power network according to the Employer‘s safety rules.196 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .EMS Site acceptance test procedures for the EMS applications software shall include tests to demonstrate the functionality and performance of all EMS applications. Once this testing is complete and all problems remedied and retested. Where necessary to complete the work the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating point-topoint testing activities with third parties responsible for the supply of existing Outstations and new ones provided under concurrent projects. To ensure prompt remedial action to be instigated the Contractor shall report any deficiencies in such equipment to the Employer fully in writing on their discovery.4. With the agreement of the Employer the System SAT may commence once a predefined number of Outstations have had their point to point testing completed.4. provided that the deficiencies have not resulted from inadequate definition and specification of requirements on the part of the Contractor. The System SAT shall be conducted after all the various elements of the System have been installed in the field and have all successfully completed their individual Site Installation Tests and the Site Update activities are complete. the links in all input circuits may be left closed but output circuits shall be opened. If the Outstation and Master Station are stable and operate correctly during this period then with the agreement of all parties those Outstations for which full point to point testing is complete can be transferred to full SCADA monitoring and control. This test shall demonstrate that the overall design of the System meets the functional and performance requirements of the Specification in the field. output signals from the Outstation should be simulated at the cross-connection terminals and correct receipt by the plant confirmed.SCADA The System Site Acceptance (System SAT) Tests for the main SCADA system shall be conducted on all the interconnected equipment forming the Contractor's scope of supply. The Contractor shall satisfy himself by testing and other necessary means that the physical communication links between locations supplied by others meets the Contractor's requirements. Direct ―end to end‖ or ―point to point‖ testing shall then be carried out to demonstrate the correctness of the mapping between the Master Station database and displays and the connections to the plant. to which the System is designed to interface.Section 6 . Those outstations involving substation automation or DCS schemes will also require slightly different approach although the overall objective will be the same. together with equipment of other suppliers to which the System is designed to interface. This will allow all RTU input and output connections to be closed at the cross connections in the Marshalling Cubicles.4 System Site Acceptance Tests . 8. The correction of deficiencies in such equipment shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor. Conditions and constraints on site may require a different approach to the regime outlined above and a detailed procedure will have to be agreed with the Employer prior to the testing being undertaken.5 Site Acceptance Tests . 8. Similarly. These tests shall be undertaken once the SCADA system is fully tested and operating in a stable and reliable manner.

Communication end to end circuit testing. in working order and available for use The initial issue of technical documentation and copies of marked as built drawings have been provided Training has been completed as required by the Contract The arrangements for support during the warranty period have been agreed b. The tests on completion comprise a 500 hours trial period during which the System shall perform to the requirements of the Employer and in accordance with the specification. The correct routing. The system is complete and configured according to the design. e. g. c. System performance tests to demonstrate that the new telecommunication system will give satisfactory service under normal working conditions. System functional and performance tests under abnormal conditions such as disturbances. If any fault or unexpected event occurs during the 500 hours trial period. b. the Contractor may not work or make changes to any part of the system without first obtaining permission from the Employer. f.4.5 TESTS ON COMPLETION Once the Employer has approved the SAT test results and the requirements of the previous Clause have been fulfilled the Contractor may proceed to apply to start the tests on completion. the correct automatic re-routing of all circuits.4. All test documentation and records are complete in order and signed off by the Contractor‘s test engineers The spare parts and test equipment are complete.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The order of testing shall be as follows: a) First all Network Analysis Applications including Study Mode b) Then all Power Applications c) And finally all Forecasting and Scheduling Applications 8. The Contractor shall have a minimum of one suitably qualified engineer in attendance during the trial period.197 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Telecommunications The Contractor shall test the telecommunication system as a standalone system prior to connection to the Master station and the RTUs. 8. If the Employer determines that a major fault has occurred then the Contractor shall rectify the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer and the 500 hours trial shall restart from the beginning. 8. e. c. The tests shall include but not be limited to proving: a.7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion The Contractor may apply to commence the Tests On Completion when the Employer is satisfied that the Site Acceptance Testing and commissioning has shown that the works as a whole comply with the specification and that: a. d.6 Acceptance Tests .Section 6 . Functionality testing of the telecommunication system. Once the system is put into trial operation and availability testing. the Employer shall determine whether it constitutes a minor or a major fault. System trial operation and availability test over a period of 1 month. The trial period is the 'hands on' part of the Site Acceptance Testing and is to confirm the reliability. and where appropriate. The costs of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. stability and robustness of the SCADA/DMS System. d.

8.5.6 NON-CONFORMANCE In the event that the equipment fails during testing. the Contractor shall be responsible for taking steps to rectify the situation in an agreed timescale. Any proposed modifications to previously approved designs shall be approved in accordance with relevant provisions in the Contract documents before implementation.5. but the fault is still judged by the Employer to be minor.2 Partial & Operational Acceptance Depending on the scope and outcome of the Tests on Completion Partial and or Operational Acceptance Certificates shall be issued in accordance with the stipulations of the General Conditions of Contract. problems and reservations noted during the tests have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Employer b. If either of these conditions has not been complied with. the trial period shall recommence from the point at which it was interrupted.1 System Acceptance The System will be accepted by the Employer in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract and if both: a. the Contractor shall provide full details to the Employer of the reasons for the failure and the proposals for overcoming the failure. If such a failure occurs as a result of any deficiency on the part of the Contractor. The re-testing shall take account of all aspects of the System performance and functionality that might be affected by the remedial work. 8.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification any such re-testing shall be borne entirely by the Contractor. Minor faults that do not stop the system as a whole from functioning in accordance with the requirements of the Specification shall be remedied in a manner and to a timetable agreed with the Employer. 8. If the System as a whole is not available for normal operation due to a fault. The System and all items of equipment have successfully completed all the specified tests All failures. as soon as the Contractor has cleared the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer.198 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . then the necessary corrective action shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Employer. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All costs associated with non-conformances and re-tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

subassemblies or complete items of equipment from other parties.2 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY It is the intention of the Employer to ultimately undertake ‗first line‘ maintenance with assistance from the Contractor being provided through suitable maintenance contracts for problems that cannot be resolved by the Employer's maintenance technicians. or returned to the Contractor for repair. Down-time must be reduced to a minimum. 9. Where the Contractor purchases modules. the System design shall be such as to minimise equipment failures and optimise fault-finding and maintenance. The requirements for spares and maintenance contracts to meet these objectives are detailed in the following Clauses. LED Video Wall board lamps and ancillary items 4. complies with the requirements detailed in this Clause or take such other steps as may be necessary to ensure that the objectives of this Clause are achieved.4 SPARE PARTS The maintenance philosophy that will be adopted will generally be for fault finding to card level and module replacement.Section 6 . as relevant to his Contract. with the faulty modules being either scrapped. as an option. PAX modules. These spares shall include but not be limited to: 1. discs. VDU screens. including turn around times. Power Supplies. required to enable first line maintenance to be carried out by the Employer. any special equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 9. shall be provided by the Contractor. Diagnostic and test facilities shall be provided. Processors. Teleprotection signalling units and interfaces Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. if damaged beyond repair.1 GENERAL The System purchased will be required to function for a minimum of fifteen years. Processors. the Contractor shall obtain statements from those parties confirming that their policy with respect to support of their product(s). charger components. In addition. One complete 48Vdc charger unit. interfaces and ancillary items 7. including tools and instruments. UPS modules etc 5. battery cells. 9. It is therefore of prime importance that the Contractor shall guarantee the availability of spare parts to facilitate the continued availability and performance of the System for that period of time.199 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . details of which shall be provided with the Bid. The Contractor shall supply as part of the Contract a set of spares that comprises 5% of the total number of each type of installed replaceable units/modules (with a minimum of one unit of each type) to be supplied. communication interfaces and ancillary items 2. The Bidder shall specify. for the main equipment and all peripheral items. main memory. Comprehensive provision of self diagnostic facilities is an essential part of this scope of supply. Comprehensive maintenance documentation. as appropriate. SDH equipment and interfaces 6. 9. including fault-tracing and clearance procedures. The Contractor shall operate a module repair and replacement scheme. as part of the Works.3 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE As the System is required to operate continuously. RTU I/O modules. SPARES AND MAINTENANCE 9. This objective will be achieved by a combination of a maintenance agreement covering Master Station hardware and software. power supplies and ancillary items 3. Peripheral equipment shall be easily removable from service and either replaced by standby equipment or spare equipment without the loss of System operation. the provision of maintenance courses for the Employer's technicians and by the purchase of suitable spares holdings. equipment shall be designed to facilitate maintenance.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

In order to assist in the ordering of additional spare parts, the Bidder is required to recommend a spares holding to cover the first four years, following the end of the Defects Liability Period, and to provide a cost breakdown. The Contractor shall not have access to spares held by the Employer during the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall base the list of recommended spare parts on the above maintenance philosophy. This list shall be submitted as an optional price and shall include a cost breakdown. Prices for the supply of spares shall include all associated charges and shall remain valid for orders placed within the term of the Defects Liability Period. The Employer shall be at liberty to order quantities of spare parts at variance with those listed by the Bidder. The prices shall remain valid for any such variation of quantities, unless stated otherwise in the Bid. The cost of spare parts shall not be used to calculate the cost of any variations to the Contract. The spare parts recommended shall be identical functionally, electrically and mechanically, to the corresponding parts in the equipment supplied under the Contract and shall be suitably packed and clearly marked, ready for reception at the Employer's stores. Any special handling instructions shall be clearly marked on the packages. The Contractor shall supply equipment lists of the recommended spare parts which include the names and addresses of the individual manufacturers of the listed items. The recommended spares holding shall be quoted on a unit basis, as an option, for selection by the Employer at any time up until the end of the Defects Liability Period. The availability of spare parts to the Employer, at a reasonable cost, shall be guaranteed by the Contractor as follows: a) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate stock of spare parts for a minimum period of ten years (or until the end of the equipment's specified life) after the product has been removed from quantity production, declared obsolete or officially removed from sale b) Where a component, which is not under the Contractor's control, has become unavailable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to offer a compatible alternative at reasonable cost c) Design improvements or changes made to a product during its production run shall be carefully assessed such that component interchangeability shall not be affected. This requirement shall apply to equipment manufactured by the Contractor and also to equipment purchased from other suppliers. 9.5 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

A maintenance agreement shall be offered to cover Master Station hardware, system software and all application software maintenance and support. The maintenance agreements shall provide the requirements detailed in the following Clauses. The Bid shall provide the costs of providing such agreements as Optional Works considering mandatory spares offered. The prices shall incorporate escalation formulae to provide a means of adjustment during their period of validity (5 years from the end of the Defects Liability Period). Prices quoted shall include the costs for providing guaranteed attendance within 24 hours of callout. Costs for providing a quicker response shall also be stated. 9.5.1 Scope of Agreements

The Contractor shall fully support all Master Station hardware and software supplied under the Contract for the life of the System or until such support is no longer required by the Employer. The level of support provided shall be defined in the maintenance agreement. The Bidder shall provide details of the maintenance agreement including elements supported by suppliers of proprietary equipment. The details shall show a breakdown of each type of service for each part of the overall Master Station system 9.5.2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement

The maintenance agreement shall come into effect on the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. It shall be extended each year on the anniversary of that date for a further period of 12 months unless and until the Employer terminates the Agreement.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 200 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

9.5.3

Charges for the Maintenance Agreement

During the Defects Liability Period, all the conditions of the maintenance agreement shall apply without additional cost to the Employer. The charge for provision of services under the maintenance agreement shall be calculated from a formula to be stated in the maintenance agreement. This formula shall remain in force for a period of five years commencing from the day after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The terms of the formula may include local labour and materials indices and currency exchange rates but the formula itself shall not be changed during the five year period. Two months before the expiry date of the current annual maintenance period, the Contractor shall calculate the maintenance charge that will apply for the following year, using labour and materials indices and exchange rates that are current at that time, and may submit an Application for Payment of that amount. The Employer will check the amount claimed and, if satisfied with its correctness, will pay the Contractor the amount due within 28 days of the date of the Application for Payment. The terms of the maintenance agreement may be renegotiated at the expiry of the five year period. 9.5.4 Maintenance Services

The maintenance agreement shall include provision of the services defined below. The charge for these services shall be stated in the maintenance agreement. Where indicated below, the provision of services shall be included within the annual charge, such that no additional maintenance charge shall be incurred by the Employer when they use these services. Costs of any routine maintenance shall be included within the annual charge. 9.5.4.1 Telephone Support The Contractor shall provide verbal telephone support to the Employer personnel during normal the Employer office hours to provide advice on the use of system facilities and to assist with any problems that may arise. This service shall not be subject to a use charge. 9.5.4.2 Remote Access Support The Contractor shall offer, as an option, to provide facilities for remote support and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS System via a dial-in modem link (or equivalent) back to the original supplier of the System or other appropriate organisation. The amount by which the annual maintenance charge would vary for inclusion of this option in the agreement shall be clearly identified in the Schedule of Prices. This facility shall incorporate appropriate measures, to the satisfaction of the Employer, to ensure the System is secure against any unauthorised use of the link. The facility shall also prohibit the initiation of commands via the link port that may interfere with the Employer operations, e.g. prevent the issue of SCADA control commands. It shall be possible to configure which of the System's facilities are prohibited to be used via remote access. 9.5.4.3 Fault Rectification The Contractor shall rectify all faults identified by the Employer. When a fault occurs, the Employer will advise the Contractor of the nature of the fault and confirm the date and time of reporting it. The Contractor shall provide a suitably qualified and experienced maintenance engineer on site within the guaranteed response time stated in the maintenance agreement. The Contractor shall ensure maintenance personnel are available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week for repair of high priority faults. Lower priority faults may be repaired during normal working hours. 9.5.4.4 New Software Releases New software releases may take place during the life of the System to provide solutions to identified problems, or enhancements to System functionality and or performance. The Contractor shall notify the Employer of all such releases of software. The maintenance agreement shall include the issue, installation and testing of new software releases, as necessary, to resolve identified problems and to ensure continued software support by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer (all costs shall be covered by the annual charge).

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 201 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

New software releases that are not essential to resolve identified faults and are not necessary in order for the Contractor to maintain software support may also be available. The Employer shall be entitled to purchase these optional updates at their discretion. The costs of any such upgrades are to be separately negotiated between the Employer and the Contractor. A decision by the Employer not to purchase such upgrades shall not effect the obligation of the Contractor to continue to provide System support under the maintenance agreement. After any new software has been installed on the Purchase equipment, the Contractor's maintenance personnel shall test the software at least as thoroughly as it was tested during Factory Acceptance Testing. 9.5.5 Termination of the Agreement

The Purchase may terminate the maintenance agreement at any time. Such termination must be in writing and will take effect from the expiry date of the current maintenance year. 9.6 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS

Changes in the design of items of equipment may make items supplied for this contract obsolete and may therefore affect the future spare parts availability. The Contractor is therefore required to have a company commitment to product enhancements in order to avoid obsolescence, while taking advantages of new technology in an evolutionary manner. Design changes and product enhancements should therefore be made such that they are directly compatible with the present items. The Contractor is therefore required to: a) Fully document and forward to the Employer details of product improvements that are made during the marketing period of the equipment, as soon as it is incorporated on the product line. This documentation shall clearly identify changes to be made and reasons for the change. This requirement shall also apply to the Contractor‘s sub-suppliers. b) Notify the Employer 12 months prior to ceasing production of replacement parts (for spares inventory purposes). c) Notify the Employer within 2 months after a design change has been implemented (after expiry of the Defects Liability Period) on equipment supplied for this Contract. 9.7 CONSUMABLES

All consumables such as printer paper, printer toners and cartridges, cartridge tapes, discs, etc., sufficient for one year of normal operation of the System shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Scope of Work. These items shall be delivered in accordance with an agreed programme, but the initial consignment shall be available to the Employer at the start of the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a proposed list of consumable items suitable for two years operation of the system. The list shall include itemised prices, valid for purchase in quantities at the discretion of the Employer at any time up to the end of the Defects Liability period. 9.8 COMMISSIONING PERIODS

The Contractor shall be required to provide all necessary spare parts and consumable items up to the time of Handover, including those required for the site commissioning period and for the Reliability Test Period. The Contractor shall note that spares and consumables purchased by the Employer will not be available for use by the Contractor during site acceptance testing and commissioning, or during the trial period. 9.9 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS

Specialised tools and test apparatus listed below, that is required for maintenance and fault finding including that used for setting, measuring and maintaining performance levels shall be supplied as part of the scope of works for each of the equipment types or subsystems supplied under the Contract. The types of tools and apparatus shall be defined in the Price Schedules and the Bidder shall state the recommended numbers of each device. 9.9.1 SDH/PDH tester

The SDH/PDH tester shall have the following minimum features:

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 202 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

                   

Transmission test functions such as optical power measurements at 1310nm and 1550nm wavelengths, BER testing, end-to-end error performance etc Already built-in interfaces such as E1 balanced, E1 unbalanced, STM-1/4/16 etc Full PDH support from 1.5Mbps to 140 Mbps including nx64kbps User configurable setup and automated functions Anomaly generation and analysis Line bit rates up to 2.5Gbps Overhead byte capture capability Intrusive, non intrusive and monitor modes capability Automatic protection switching with resolution of 1ms Round trip delay measurements Service disruption measurements Alarm and error resolution better than 100ms Rugged and light weight Touch screen display User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.2 Datacom tester

The datacom tester shall have the following minimum features:           Support V.24/V.28, X21/V.11, V.35/V.36 and 10/100Mbps Ethernet interfaces DTE/DCE emulation and bidirectional monitoring capability Support data rate up to 10Mbps Self loop testing capability User configurable setup and automated functions Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.3         Digital multimeter

The digital multimeter shall have the following minimum features: Voltage (ac & dc), current, resistance continuity with beeper, frequency, diode test USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Minimum 0.03% dc accuracy Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.4          Signal generator

The signal generator shall have the following minimum features: Flexible signal generator capable of analogue, digital and mixed signals Real-time sequencing capability for infinite waveform loops and pattern length generation Minimum of 4 channels Minimum of 14 bit resolution Minimum of 1.2 GS/s sampling rate User friendly Rugged and light weight Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 203 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

  

Data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.5 Maintenance laptop computer

The laptop computer shall have the following minimum features:        Minimum dual core Pentium processor Minimum 4Gb RAM Minimum 250 Gb HDD Built-in USB, RS232, ethernet & wireless LAN interfaces Qwerty keyboard and optical mouse Complete with necessary operating and applications software Complete with protective bag and accessories 9.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

9.10.1 General There shall be a Defects Liability Period that shall apply to the entire Works provided under the contract. The Defects Liability Period for each part of the Works shall commence on the date that the associated Operational Acceptance Certificate is issued and will cover the Works or portion thereof covered by the Certificate. The Contractor shall provide Spares and Maintenance support during this period including the provision of Master Station hardware and software support specified for the Maintenance Agreement. Where any item of equipment has an original supplier‘s warranty that extends beyond the Defects Liability Period then that warranty shall be effective up to its expiry date. 9.10.2 Attendance During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to and clear all defects within a reasonable time of being notified of the defect in writing. All critical faults that have an operational or security impact upon the System shall be attended to within 2 hours of notifying the Contractor of the fault. Less critical faults shall be attended to within 24 hours. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary field staff to enable these targets to be met. If the Contractor does not attend to the defect within the stipulated period (from notification) and thereafter remedy the defect within an agreed period, the conditions of contract shall apply in respect to the 'failure to remedy defects'. 9.10.3 Quality Control The Contractor's actions during the Defects Liability Period shall be subject to quality assurance and the Contractor's Quality Plan and Procedures shall reflect this requirement. The quality control shall ensure full documentation of the following: a) Record of dates of defect notification and attendance b) Full report on the nature of the defect c) Reasons for the defect d) Recommended remedial actions e) Agreement with the Employer on recommended actions, testing by the Contractor to prove efficacy of remedial actions and timetable for implementation f) Results of corrective actions and any associated tests. 9.10.4 Access The Contractor shall comply with and make due allowance for the Employer‘s access control and Permit to Work system when attending to defects.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 204 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

9.10.5 Replacement Parts Where the agreed remedial action is replacement of defective parts, then these shall be replaced within 48 hours of the requirement being identified. The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Scope of Work, a spare parts holding sufficient to ensure that equipment repair times are consistent with the specified, or otherwise approved, availability target figures, for the duration of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall supplement the initial spares holding, if omissions or inadequacies become apparent during the Defects Liability Period. The Employer will hold the spare parts for use by the Contractor. All surplus spare parts remaining at the end of the Defects Liability Period shall be retained by the Employer.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 205 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

10. TRAINING 10.1 GENERAL

The Employer considers that a programme of training for all staff expected to be involved with various aspects of the Project is particularly important if the SCADA/EMS System is to be effectively utilised. The Contractor shall run a programme of courses to cover all the Works to be supplied under the Contract, the various grades of personnel involved and at times to suit phases of implementation of the Project. The programming shall ensure that the Employer‘s personnel are fully trained in operational, maintenance and system engineering aspects prior to initial commissioning. The programme shall also be arranged to minimise the time between completion of training and commencement of system commissioning. Training shall include but not be limited to the following areas: a) SCADA/EMS System                SCADA/EMS System Overview Operations Database and Display Maintenance SCADA Applications EMS Applications Other Applications Administration

b) Outstations Outstations Plant Modifications and Interfaces

c) Telecommunication System Telecommunication System Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Digital power line carrier equipment Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system

d) UPS and Battery Charger Systems e) Building Services and Diesel Generator The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Employer, a synopsis of all training courses offered at least eight months prior to initial commissioning. Generally courses should be scheduled to take place on Site. However, courses necessary for personnel involved with data base building may take place at the Contractor‘s works. Additionally, where specialised equipment is only available at the supplier‘s works courses may be held at these works. The Employer wishes to introduce a number of their engineers into the project at an early stage. There shall therefore be provision for incorporating the Employer‘s engineers into the SCADA/EMS System integration, database population and display building, and pre-acceptance testing activities at the Contractor‘s works. It is anticipated that this work would involve up to four engineers from the Employer, for training in system administration, SCADA database and display maintenance, EMS database maintenance and EMS applications tuning. The Contractor shall arrange for all travel and accommodation as well as travel visas for the Employer‘s engineers when attending this training at the Contractor‘s works. The Contractor shall provide in his offer for the air fares, hotels, subsistence and local travel for the Employer‘s staff while they are attending this training at the Contractor‘s works, relevant training materials and training notes and training facilities including the use of any test instruments and equipment during the training period.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 206 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Pre-recorded video presentations shall not be used as the primary means of training. 10. The Contractor is therefore requested to provide a number of different courses to accommodate the requirements of the different skills each group of personnel will need to acquire in the context of the Employer's actual operating environment.3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES 10. but not be limited to. As a minimum the course shall include: a) Hardware and Software Architecture b) Operating Systems and Associated Utilities c) Applications Architecture and Deployment d) Database Systems. The training shall be to such a level that on completion of the courses. particularly for operators. the skills the course is intended to develop g) Aims. Deployment and Maintenance Utilities e) User Interface. All training courses.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 10. As a minimum.207 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . or equivalent topics. depending on the detailed design of the products supplied under the Contract. This shall include all ‗third party products‘ such as operating systems and their associated utilities and diagnostics. They shall also be able to maintain and trouble shoot the equipment up to the point where. the specific topics listed in the following sub-clauses. notes and documentation shall be in the English language. the Employer‘s staff shall be able to operate and maintain the all equipment provided under the respective sections of work and in the case of the SCADA/EMS System to supervise (control and monitor) the operation of the electrical system in all operating modes using all facilities.3.Section 6 . All courses shall consist of a series of lectures. discussions and demonstrations and.1 Overview Course The SCADA/EMS Overview course shall include an overview of the functions and facilities of the system and an appreciation of the operational and maintenance aspects of the system. engineers and maintenance staff. the Contractor recommends calling out specialist service agencies. ‗hands-on‘ experience of the equipment involved.e. i. The scope and content of courses should ensure a systematic and comprehensive coverage of all the operational functionality and maintenance requirements identified in both the design and the operations and maintenance documentation for the Works delivered under the Contract. how the skills developed can be used h) Description of course activities i) Description of course documentation.e. due to the nature of the fault. i. the courses shall include.2 CONTENT The syllabus of each course shall contain the following types of information: a) Course name b) Duration c) Locations for the training d) Types of staff who would benefit from the course e) Pre-requisite skills of course attendees f) Objectives. All relevant equipment documentation shall be available during the training courses. Access Control and Security f) Data Acquisition g) Alarm and Event Handling h) Supervisory Control i) Historical Data Recording and Reporting Facilities Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

208 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . these courses shall include: a) Workstation Access and Security b) Navigation of the User Interface c) Network and S/S User Displays d) Network Colouring and Tracing e) Display Data Presentation Conventions f) Real Time and Study Mode Views g) Alarm and Event Presentation. Searching.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification j) Printing k) EMS Applications l) Common Applications m) System Status and Management 10.3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses Database and display maintenance engineers will require a detailed appreciation of the tools for populating and editing the databases and building and amending user graphical displays. As a minimum the database courses shall include: a) SCADA Database Architecture b) Database Rules and Naming Conventions c) Data Categories and Attributes d) Data Entry and Modification e) Mapping Data points to Outstation Addresses f) Outstation Data point Addressing Conventions g) Switching Between Databases h) Historical Database Architecture i) j) Historical Database Management Historical Data Archiving and Retrieval k) EMS Database Architecture Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 System Operation Courses The SCADA/EMS operations courses shall equip Operations staff with a detailed knowledge of the system operational functionality and how it may be applied in the day to day operation and management of the network. Sorting and Filtering h) Supervisory Control i) j) Manual Entry/Hand Dressing EMS Applications k) Common Applications l) Job Management m) Switching Schedules n) Safety Documentation Facilities o) Tagging p) Trending q) Printing and Printer Management r) Historical Data Access and Report Generation s) Log books and Scratch Pads 10.3. As a minimum.3.Section 6 .

3. The system administration courses shall provide an introduction to the task of managing the system hardware. b.209 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . operating system.3.4 LAN management and TCP/IP addressing Operating system administration TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES Training courses to be provided include: a. Digital power line carrier equipment. these courses shall cover.4 EMS Applications Courses Power systems analysis engineers will require a thorough understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of the EMS applications and how to configure. As a minimum. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. local area network and the SCADA/EMS applications software. they shall cover: a) Managing the SCADA/EMS applications software b) Building the operational system from source code c) Running diagnostic routines d) Managing user accounts e) System Backup management f) Rebooting servers and workstations g) Managing trace files and crash dumps h) Adding/Changing hardware i) j) 10. a) Basic functionality of each application b) The displays associated with each application c) Use of tuning parameters d) Power system model parameters e) Verifying and Interpreting Results 10. run.Section 6 . d. As a minimum. Fibre optic communication system. tune them and verify the results.5 System Administration Courses The system administrator is the key to the secure and efficient operation of the Master Station. c. Teleprotection signalling equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification l) EMS Database Data Entry and Modification m) Data Consistency and Integrity n) Database Verification o) Database Update And. Telecommunication management system. as a minimum the display courses shall cover: a) Display Construction Conventions b) Defining Layers and Levels of Detail c) Using and Amending Graphics Libraries d) Drawing and Editing e) Linking to Dynamic Data f) Defining Display Navigation g) Updating and Distributing Displays 10.

b. offline diagnostic software Preventive maintenance Calibration of equipment Fault finding exercises d.210 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . c.6 COURSE ATTENDEES The Bidder shall provide prices for each of the above courses.g. Installation. 10. b. d. Telephone system. Fault finding and trouble shooting. Interfaces and standards supported. e. testing and commissioning techniques. System operation and configuration. j. Cabling requirements. System design/budget calculations. e. h. As a minimum the contents shall cover: a. f. Repair and routine maintenance. together with the cost per additional attendee for larger numbers. System expansion and upgrade capability. c. There shall also be maintenance courses for all auxiliary systems and subsystems supplied under the Contract. i. 10. data communications and Outstation equipment Test gear Fault diagnosis to module level including the use of online and.Section 6 . if applicable. System hardware and software. g. The Employer‘s staff will be present during the installation/commissioning period and it is essential that they are fully involved in any on-site corrections/modifications to hardware.5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES Personnel who will be responsible for maintaining equipment will require a significantly different type of training to enable them to undertake fault finding to ‗lowest replaceable unit‘ level. Maintenance courses of appropriate content and duration shall be provided for the Employer personnel that cover: a. The telecommunication training courses carried out at manufacturers‘ works shall be conducted in two sessions at different time so to enable the Employer to plan his staffing resources accordingly. Computer. It is anticipated that these courses will be conducted on the Contractor's premises or at the locations of the subject equipment's manufacture prior to the equipment's delivery. System overview and architecture. e. f. the UPS System. SCADA/EMS Courses No of Trainees Duration (days) Location Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification e. The courses shall provide the attendees with a sufficient understanding of the functionality of each part of the system and its operation and maintenance requirements. based on the following numbers of personnel per course.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification SCADA/EMS Courses System Overview Course System Operation Courses – Senior Engineers. The times at which the various training courses will take place shall be stated. The prices for the complete courses quoted in the Bid shall cover all the Works delivered under the Contract.211 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . 2 sessions for 5 persons System Operation Courses – 3 sessions for 5 persons Database & Display Maintenance Courses EMS Application Courses System Administration Courses System Maintenance Courses Telecommunication Courses System Overview Course Fibre optic communication system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Telecommunication Management System – 2 sessions for 4 persons Digital PLC equipment system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Teleprotection signalling equipment system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Telephone system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Outstation Courses Outstation Functionality Outstation Architecture Outstation Hardware Outstation Software Maintenance and fault finding Expansion procedures Power Supply Systems Other Equipment NSCC UPS System Building Services Equipment No of Trainees 20 10 15 6 6 4 6 Duration (days) 1 10 5 10 10 10 10 Location Sri Lanka Works Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works 20 8 8 8 8 8 1 10 5 5 3 10 Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works Works 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 Works Works Works Works Works Works Works 2 2 5 5 Works Sri Lanka Attendees of all courses shall be provided with sets of relevant course materials. The Bidder may be required by the Employer to make a video recording of any of the formal Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and fully documented notes shall be available to the Employer no later than 2 months before the commencement of the course.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Additional training on specific topics shall be provided if the required take up of knowledge and skills has not been sufficient to meet the goal of the course.Section 6 . Each course shall be reviewed on completion to determine if the trainees have achieved an acceptable level of ‗take up‘.212 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 10. It is expected that a period of three months at the Contractor‘s works will be necessary for a trainee to gain maximum benefit from this type of training.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification training courses run by the Contractor to be used in the future for ‗in-house‘ refresher training and training additional the Employer personnel.6. The prices of the training courses shall be detailed in full such that additions/deletions to personnel/courses can be calculated by the Employer without recourse to the Contractor. The Bidder shall include in their offer an outline proposal in terms of content and duration for the formal part and for the ‗on the job‘ training at the SCADA/EMS supplier‘s premises.1 Course Duration The courses shall be of sufficient length and pace and include sufficient practice exercises to ensure that the subject matter is covered thoroughly and the trainees are able to demonstrate their understanding of what they have been taught.

All information shall be presented in a format that enables the Bid to be assessed and compared with other Bids. 11. etc. all interfaces to other systems and how all items of equipment are interconnected (e. All drawings.5 3. One copy of the Bidder's current QA Manuals and an appropriate sample of a Project Quality Plan shall be supplied with the Bid. where this is requested.4. The Bidder shall provide clear distinction in their Bid between the main offer and any alternative offer(s) or options that are not included in the Bid Price for the main offer.g. along with an issue or revision number and a record of modification. Any additional features offered that have not been requested in this Specification shall be clearly identified in the offer. information relating to variants not supplied under this Contract and options that are not potential future extensions to the supplied System.g. the connections to the Master Station. workstations. manuals.3. printers. All Schedules shall be fully completed in all respects and a copy provided in electronic form. Drawings that illustrate the general appearance. specifications.. Documentation and drawings shall relate solely to the actual equipment supplied.6 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11.1 Items to be Provided with the Bidders Offer Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Deliverable Documents SCADA/EMS System Overview SCADA/EMS Master Station Equipment and Applications Telecommunication Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Power line carrier Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system Optical budget calculations Specification Reference 2 2 3. They should not include any irrelevant or superfluous information. e.213 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 GENERAL The following details the document requirements for the Works covered by the Specification Document.Section 6 . Outstations. PLC links. the Network Management System and the PAX. An overview drawing of the Telecommunication System shall be provided that clearly shows the topology of the SDH system. Outstations. An overview drawing shall be provided that clearly shows the architecture of the SCADA/EMS Master Station. These may be submitted electronically in CDROM. shall have a unique document identification number that conforms to an approved numbering scheme. size and layout of the NSCC building shall be provided with sufficient detail to enable the proposal to be evaluated and compared to other offers. etc.7 3.5 3. System documentation shall comply with the relevant sections of ISO 6592 (or an equivalent national or international standard).4 3.2 3.2.2 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.). This may be submitted electronically in CDROM. DOCUMENTATION 11.2. component lists. One sample copy of a set of operating manuals supplied for a similar contract shall be provided with the Bid.2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID The Bidder shall provide sufficient information to fully describe their Bid in all aspects and to clearly demonstrate the compliance of their offer with this Specification. The following specific items of documentation shall be included in the Bid: Table 11.2.

A further traceability assessment shall also be provided that cross references the clauses.2 below shall be supplied after Award of the Contract.3 2.3 Outstation equipment Deliverable Documents Specification Reference 4 5 6 6 2. upon written request. During the design phase.2.3. installation. including the Functional Design Specification.4 2. Table 11. Detailed Project Implementation Programme Hydro optimization algorithm DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT 11. as part of the Functional Design Specification (FDS). This information shall be provided via the regular meetings and reports. The submissions shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the design to be assessed for compliance with the Specification with respect to design. but not limited to.4 Vol. paragraphs or sections within the FDS prepared by the Contractor that uniquely address each specified requirement.1 General The documents and drawings to be supplied after the award of Contract are specified below.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Item 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 11.12 7 17 17. A column shall be included to indicate how closely the proposed design meets the specified requirements.Section 6 . The Employer shall make available to the Contractor.1 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems & 48Vdc systems Proposed control room design NSCC Building Conceptual design System sizing calculation System Performance calculation System Availability calculation QA Manuals Sample Quality Plan and Procedures Project references where offered system(s) are in service. shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Employer by the dates and in the numbers and types specified.7. The documentation listed in. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. a traceability assessment that shall provide cross references between each Clause within this Specification (and other pertinent documents) and the clauses.3. Before proceeding with the manufacture of equipment.214 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . manufacture. design documentation and drawings. information in the form of drawings and documents relating to the existing operational transmission SCADA system. operation and maintenance. The Contractor shall also provide. The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting information in a timely manner to meet their programme requirements.4. 1 PART I Section 3 11. the electrical network and associated plant including substation plans. paragraphs or sections within the FDS to the relevant tests within the factory and site test procedures to verify that all aspects of the supplied System are tested against the approved design. the Contractor shall provide sufficient information to enable the Employer to be assured that the design is proceeding satisfactorily.

5.3.2 3 months after the Effective Date of Award Not less than 8 weeks before tests are scheduled to be conducted.5.3 2.4.1 11.6 11.2 12 13 14 15 16 11. 2 Quality Plan and Procedures Schedule of Contractor‘s Documents and Drawings Specification of Configuration Data 3 4 5 Civil Works Requirements 6 Power Supply Requirements 2 months after the Effective Date of Award 7 Specification of Communication Requirements 8 9 10 Weights.3. Detail for equipment to be supplied.1& 11. Detail any requirements for interfacing to equipment outside of contract supply.2 11. Operation & Maintenance Manuals Detailed Installation Programme Test Plan. Latest Date for Submission 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item 1 Deliverable Documents Programme of Work Reference 11.3. 17 18 Synopsis of all Training Courses All ‗As Built‘ Documentation 10.8 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . 4 weeks from effective Contract start date. Chapter 4 Section 6 Part C 11.5. Schedule and Procedures for Tests on Completion Test Reports 11 11.5 11.1 Detail any information or actions required for Contractor‘s work to proceed Detail power supply requirements at sites where equipment is to be installed.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 11. 11. Dimensions & Environmental Requirements for all Equipment All Functional Design Specification Documents Control Centre Designs.Control and Equipment Room layouts Test Plan. 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.3.4 General Requirements Vol. Schedule and Procedures for Factory Acceptance Testing Details of Delivery Arrangements Draft Design.5.215 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4 11.8.3 4 weeks before delivery of system to site Not more than 12 weeks after test(s) performed 1 months prior to commencement of training 3 months after hand over.

climate control-air conditioning) m) Detailed lighting design calculations and layout drawings n) Detailed plumbing design drawings o) Detailed lightning and earthing protection design.2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building The Contractor shall provide the detailed drawings. specifications of materials and equipment. The design documentation shall consist of the following as a minimum: a) Architectural Drawings b) Foundation Plans with location of piles and columns c) Slab thickness with steel reinforcement d) Slab control joints e) Elevation view of wall sections f) Roof plan and roof framing system g) Concrete masonry details h) Concrete masonry wall expansion joints i) j) Details of foundation connections Beam to beam.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item Deliverable Documents Reference Latest Date for Submission Each Month commencing end of first complete month following contract start date. The Contractor shall correct and resubmit drawings and documents that are rejected or returned with comments or corrections.3. it is inevitable that amendments will occur which will impact upon previously submitted and reviewed documents. showing the scheduled date of first submission and expected date of final issue.5 11.216 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 19 Monthly Progress Reports 11. 11. As the design process proceeds.Section 6 . Documents and drawings shall be subject to review and approval by the Employer. The sequence of submission of the drawings and documents shall be such that all relevant information and data is available to the Employer for examining each document on the date it is received. fire detection and protection system. It is an essential part of the design phase of the project and the approval procedure that documents and drawings should be updated periodically to reflect those amendments and the increasing depth of detail available. beam to girder and beam to column connections k) Detailed electrical drawings that include load design l) Detailed drawings and specifications of each of the services provided (Access control. The Contractor's Document Schedule shall Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 11. design calculations and a design analysis for the project for item 5 in Table 11.3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings A Document Schedule shall be submitted to the Employer for approval that lists all the documents and drawings to be submitted by the Contractor.3.3.2.

revision number and issue record and a graphic scale. the commencement and completion dates for the principal activities and the critical path for the whole of the Works.3. together with the anticipated dates. The Contractor shall include the Employer's drawing number on all drawings. 11. All documents and drawings shall have a title. The detailed programme shall be in the form of a PERT or other approved type of chart and shall indicate for each Section and Sub-section of the Works. When folded. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size. coding and testing activities for each software module design. The dependencies between tasks and the critical path for software production shall also be identified.Section 6 .4 Programme of Work The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works soon after Award of Contract. The following activities shall be identified: a) Design activities b) Provision of information by the Employer c) Data engineering d) Submission of design documents and drawings for review e) Receipt of final design documents and drawings f) Placing of purchase orders g) Receipt of materials h) Fabrication and manufacture i) j) Submission of test documents for review Testing at manufacturers' premises k) Delivery l) Installation m) Commissioning n) Site testing o) Training p) Delivery of final documentation For software production. the design. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. on the PERT chart. modified and updated as required to correspond to actual Contract start date and any agreed amendments.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification indicate those drawings and documents due for periodic update and resubmission. Finally. The title block and system of serial numbering shall be approved by the Employer. the Programme of Work shall show clearly. A detailed Programme of Work shall be submitted following the site surveys and as part of the Functional Design Specification documentation. the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. where appropriate. This shall be the programme submitted with the Bid. the PERT shall identify the latest dates for supply to the Contractor of data and interface details. Blocks of drawing The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer.217 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . document/drawing number. numbers will be issued to the Contractor for this purpose.

The FDS shall specifically demonstrate how the requirements of this Specification are realised within the Contractor‘s design. particularly in relation to the completion of any dependent works. showing deviations with respect to previous programmes and the logical sequence of works. placing into service. testing. training of the Employer personnel.4. The FDS shall include. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. their impact on the works and programme are identified and the actions taken by the Contract to correct the problems are stated. and interfaces to other works.Outstations Software Functional Design Specification (SFDS) Communications Functional Design Specification (CFDS) The design shall be fully described at a functional level. It shall also cover the design of features that are being delivered as part of the Contractor‘s standard product that have not been requested in the Specification.1 Functional Design Specification The Functional Design Specification (FDS) shall detail the design for the full scope of Work being performed under this Contract. it is preferred that the FDS be partitioned as follows:     Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) – Master Stations Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) . 11. expressed as a percentage.218 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . any change that could adversely affect the Installation Programme shall be advised immediately to the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The programme PERT chart shall be updated monthly to reflect any significant changes that may have occurred during the previous month and to indicate progress to date.5 Monthly Progress Report The Contractor shall monitor the Programme of Work on a continuous basis and shall submit a monthly report to the Employer giving the latest status of progress. The report shall also include a narrative section in which any problems encountered during the month are described. 11. Notwithstanding this requirement. The Installation Programme shall show all site activities. installation. based on their range of standard products.4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION 11. inter-relationships with other contractors. The first report shall be due one month after the Effective Date and monthly thereafter throughout the period of the Contract. The Contractor shall produce a detailed Installation Programme for each part of the Works. but not be limited to: a) Description of the design in sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the Specification. The Monthly Progress Report shall include the latest issue of the Programme of Work PERT chart (or equivalent) and a Monthly Progress Schedule that shall indicate progress made the preceding month. indicating where development work is required that is specific to this Contract b) A reliability and availability study (this shall include Failure Modes and Effects Analysis) c) Documentation for existing standard elements/modules within the overall design d) A traceability reference between this Specification and the Functional Design Specification e) A traceability reference between the Functional Design Specification and the Test Procedure documents For ease of handling and review. of all items shown in the Schedule of Work. etc.3. including delivery of equipment to site.Section 6 . showing cumulative progress towards scheduled completion. A functional overview of the complete System shall be provided that shows (preferably in diagrammatic form) each functional element in the System and all the interfaces of those elements with each other and with the external environment.

e.g. number of I/O ports. scan rates. e. The design capacity (e. as applicable. In the HFDS. etc. For the SFDS. loose-leaf file holders. The protocols employed by each communication link or network shall be included in the CFDS. availability and reliability shall be clearly described.g. Master Station LANs. data rates. The Employer shall have the right to make available to third parties documentation supplied as part of this Contract.g. The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system. should also be in a form that will permit maintenance staff and programmers to readily obtain an overall appreciation of the operation of the System and individual programs. 11. where applicable.1 Standard Operating Software The standard operating software documentation will normally consist of the manuals and handbooks supplied by the software producer/publisher or a computer manufacturer. etc. links to other systems. and for the System as a whole. display call up time. 11. The design description must address all the requirements of this Specification and provide adequate qualitative and quantitative information to support the design.4. both ‗as installed‘ and expansion limits. Design measures incorporated to improve System integrity.g.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification A complete description shall be provided for each functional element that includes its function. both ‗as installed‘ and ultimate system expansion. whilst being fully detailed.2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation Where communications equipment and systems are included in the scope of work then the following specific requirements shall apply to the corresponding documentation. functional elements will generally equate to items of equipment with their associated signal and power supply interfaces. and performance criteria (e. Copies of these shall be supplied in a durable hard copy format.Section 6 .g.4.             Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms 11. This right would be exercised for the purpose of obtaining software development/amendment services from Contractors other than the supplier. its interfaces to other functional elements and its user interfaces.3.).4. operators. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.). functional elements will generally be individual programmes and databases with their associated data exchange interface specifications. shall be provided for each functional element.3 Software Design Documentation The documentation. e. database size. The functional elements of the CFDS will include the communication equipment provided under this Contract and its interfaces with other communications systems. links to the Outstations and SAS gateways. RAM.219 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

namely. It shall clearly define the breakdown of the System into separately testable sub-systems. of each level from the top down to individual module d) Program listings of all program code. showing revised dates as appropriate and the status of each test. The Test Plan shall also show any proposed parallel testing activities. It shall also describe the overall sequence of tests. flow and database organisation f) A complete description of all standard software not covered by the above but necessary to gain a full understanding of the system. the planned configuration for each test. including suppliers' standard programs.4.2   Applications Software Description of the Contractors standard (existing) software (including software from third party suppliers) Listings and diagrams for all bespoke software (which includes new and customised software specifically for this project) This design document shall comprise two parts. Each procedure or subprogram shall be preceded by a block of comments which describe the operation of that subprogram. It shall describe the approach the Contractor plans to take with regard to factory and site acceptance testing. on a Gantt or other approved type of chart. These shall have clear and unambiguous descriptive comments. thereby providing the means for uniform continuity in the System design and design changes.Section 6 . 11. dictionary.1 Test Plan and Schedule The Contractor shall submit a Test Plan and Schedule for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date for the first Factory Acceptance Test (FAT). The current Test Schedule shall be submitted each month with the Contractor's Monthly Report while testing activities are in progress.220 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the estimated start and completion dates for each test. databases and test data to be used. written in the English language. The Test Schedule shall show. expected duration. 11. such that they can readily be understood. etc. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. The Contractor shall keep the Test Schedule up to date.3.5. This document shall also include the software procedures followed during the design and testing phase. or alternatively a flow chart.2 Test Procedures A detailed Test Procedure for each system or sub-system test shall be forwarded for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date of each test. then comments shall be included at logical points within the code. facilities for simulating external plant. Copies of each shall be supplied bound in durable folders and shall include the following information: a) Overall System description b) Memory allocation and utilisation maps c) Detailed program descriptions of all programs including executive and standard programs with a Pseudo-code (Structured English) listing.5. The purpose of the Test Plan is to provide an overview of all testing to be carried out on the System.4 Design Control Document The design control document shall include the change control status of each software package (down to individual modules). If any programs are written in low level language. The purpose of this document is to provide the history of each software module and the final version number in the delivered software such that the Employer can include additional notes as they makes further changes to the design.5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS 11. 11. e) Data specification including definitions.

11. final versions of drawings etc. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the facilities and methods of configuring them from the System Engineer‘s viewpoint. i. The aim of this document is to provide a first line introduction and summary description of the System and to provide references to more detailed description of the operation and maintenance of the System contained in the other manuals.5. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the actual utilisation of the System facilities from the Operator‘s viewpoint.1 System Manual A System Manual shall describe the System configuration. interconnection.6. location and details of all standard hardware.3 System Engineer's Manual The System Engineers' Manual shall describe the configurable elements of the System.6.6. 11. so that they cover the various portions of the equipment supplied.2 Operators' Manual The Operators' Manual shall describe the Operator facilities and use of the System.3 Test Reports Following the completion of the hardware and software acceptance tests (factory and site). The design principles. hardware and software that will be required to run the test c) Test sequence d) Duration of test e) Step by step instructions f) Expected results including the interpretation of test data for tests to be performed g) Acceptance criteria based upon conformance to the Specification h) Standard forms to record test results for evaluation 11.6. The Maintenance Manual shall provide all the information required for a competent technician to diagnose faults and carry out repairs down to a lowest replaceable unit level.4 Hardware Manual The Hardware Manual shall describe the construction. fault-finding and repair. lists of any reservations noted during the tests and the manner in which they were corrected. 11. facilities and any specific maintenance requirements.5 Maintenance Manual The Maintenance Manual shall describe routine maintenance requirements. function.221 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . but not be limited to. as follows. Each Test Procedure shall include. The manuals shall be subject to amendment as required by the Employer.6. 11.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Test Procedure shall clearly indicate how each System element. down to an agreed level. instruction manuals. 11. the Contractor shall submit a test report that shall be a complete record of the actual tests carried out. This shall include all handbooks.e. and they shall be indexed and cross-referenced. These manuals shall include complete instructions for operation and maintenance of all hardware and software supplied under this Contract. All manuals shall be supplied in durable binders and shall be identified with the title of the Project. the following: a) Test objectives b) Test conditions and test configuration including support facilities. 11.Section 6 . will be tested and the criteria that will be used to assess the success or failure of the test will be determined. circuit Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the results obtained.. The manuals shall be subdivided.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall submit the draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M manuals) for approval before plant erection commences. of equipment either manufactured or purchased by the Contractor.

Section 6 . modify and/or reprogram the System and reline and compile the programs. Simple first line fault diagnosis and module replacement procedures based on flow charts shall be included. shall be shown on the circuit diagram enclosed in dotted lines and appropriately identified.             Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6. Equipment drawings shall show the layout of equipment in racks or cubicles and the essential mechanical features of all racks. manufacturer and the Contractor's circuit reference number. units and sub-units. rating. 11. but essential to its operation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification operation. test point values/waveforms and interconnections. Equipment instruction manuals shall include circuit diagrams for each unit.6. All component symbols shall be marked with their circuit references and the nominal value of components shall be marked on the circuit diagram.8 Communication Documentation The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system.222 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . test procedures and fault analysis shall be included. 11.6 Equipment Manual A log book shall be supplied with each set of equipment giving the manufacturing and testing history of the equipment. The function of all controls. readily related to other diagrams and shall include such information as supply voltage values. type number. sub-unit and plug-in board used in the complete equipment. are to be supplied. 11.6. Components external to a unit or sub-unit. with component layout details and normal signal levels superimposed. cubicles. The programmer's manual shall also describe the testing and debugging processes. The manual shall provide the user with the necessary instructions to load the System software. tolerance. as applicable. Complete circuit diagrams. self-explanatory. switches and indicating devices shall be indicated in accordance with the inscriptions on the equipment. Component lists shall state the value. Spare contacts fitted to relays and switches shall be shown on the diagram.7 Programmer's Manual The programmer's manual is primarily intended to describe software development/amendment. The circuit diagram for any one unit shall be completely self-contained. complete with any safety or other restrictions that are placed on these procedures.

7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL Five (5) copies of each drawing and document shall be submitted for approval after review by the Employer. Documents in this category may be equipment wiring diagrams. The Contractor may not proceed with the relevant part of the Works.Design drawings not forming part of the final design. When folded. revised or deleted. Copies of revised pages of the list shall be distributed to the Employer whenever a drawing or document is included. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works subject to the modification noted by the Employer.Approved except as noted.returned for modification.8 ‘AS BUILT’ DOCUMENTATION All design documents. Drawings and documents in Category II or III shall be revised and re-submitted to the Employer for his approval within 14 working days calculated from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the Employer's comments. manufacture data sheets etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract document and drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer. Category IV . Category III shall mean that the Contractor must revise the drawing or document and re-submit it to the Employer to reach Category I. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. drawings and manuals shall be revised. the Contractor will be informed of the category into which each drawing or document is to be placed.Section 6 .223 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. All ‗online‘ help files shall also be updated to the ‗As Built‘ condition before issue of the Operational Acceptance Certificate.Not approved . Category I shall mean that the Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works in accordance with respective document. Category II . The list shall be included in the monthly report prepared by the Contractor. to reflect the ‗As Built‘ condition of the Works and submitted to the Employer in three copies. Once a drawing or document has been approved. 11. the Contractor shall not make further alterations without the agreement of the Employer. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works. as necessary.Information noted. Category II shall mean that the drawing or document shall be modified to the extent noted by the Employer and re-submitted to the Employer to reach Category I.Approved. These categories are as follows: Category I . Additional copies of particular drawings or documents shall be supplied by the Contractor in response to specific requests by the Employer. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size. All revisions to drawings and documents by the Contractor shall be plainly marked together with the date when the changes were made. that are related to the Contractor‘s detailed design. Category III .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. Category V shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document. Category V . Category IV shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document and that it is a detail not required to be classified into Category I.

Mahaweli NSCC SCADA System Architecture Overview of the New Telecommunication Network-2012 Available Fibre Optic Links Proposed SDH Network Topology Proposed Telephone Network Existing Telecommunication System Existing Telephone Network Site Plan . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.224 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Laxapana CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex . 0 Rev. DRAWINGS The drawings referred to in the Specification are listed below in Table 12. 0 Rev.2016 Sri Lanka map showing Location of sites CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.Section 6 . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.1 and contained in Section C of the Bid Documents. Longitudinal and Cross Section Indicative Control Centre Finishes Schedule Engineering Survey Plan for Proposed Control Centre Sectional Drawings for Proposed Control Centre Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Title 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram . 0 Rev. Table 12-1 List of Drawings Associated with the Specifications Drawing Number TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/ NSCC-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-007 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-009 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-010 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-011 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-012 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-013 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-014 Revision Rev.NSCC at Sri Jayewardenepura Indicative Ground Floor Plan st Indicative Control Centre 1 Floor Plan nd Indicative Control Centre 2 Floor Plan Indicative Control Centre Front Elevation Indicative Control Centre Section Indicative Control Centre Power Supply System Gabion Wall Chain Link Gate Chain Link Fence Layout Plan. 0 Rev 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.2012 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram . 0 Rev.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 12. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.

The Bidder shall complete the schedule of unit rates for additional transducers. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed survey report describing the work and materials required to complete the installation and put the equipment into operation. moisture etc. identify those signals that must be provided and those that.225 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The final cost for the outstation works will be against a measured amount of installed material.4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM For existing analogue PLC links which are to be upgraded to digital PLC links. compatible with the new digital PLC equipment and that the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Limitations for connection to existing equipment Available space. the Contractor shall detail this in the survey report. The report shall identify where existing equipment is unsuitable or requires modification The environmental conditions and condition of any environmental control (e. The survey report shall detail the work required depending on the age and original specification of each switchboard. interposing relays.) and any remedial action required.1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS The Contractor shall conduct comprehensive surveys at each site where work under this Contract is to be carried out. coupling capacitors. line matching units including coaxial cables to be retained are in satisfactory condition. could be omitted. transformer etc. cleanliness and exposure to dust. 13.g. repeat relays. These surveys are intended as a guide and as a set of preliminary information. It shall be the Contractor‘s responsibility to verify any information that is used in the design and implementation of the works. due to the anticipated problems and difficulties of providing them. In practice this may vary because of the particular plant in question and the survey shall identify such variances. Air Conditioning. 13. However. The findings of the survey shall be used by the Contractor in his detailed design and implementation plan. For bidding purposes the Bidder shall assume that unless stated otherwise that interposing equipment is required at a substation for all I/O listed in the Schedules.Section 6 . 13. the survey shall establish whether the existing line traps. SITE SURVEYS 13.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS A single line diagram of the existing and a signal list for the planned configuration at 2012 has been provided in Part D Appendix 2 for each of the locations.2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS Preliminary surveys of a selection of sites have been carried out by the Employer and the details are provided in Part D Appendix 1. access and routing Location of new equipment Planned routing of cables Implementation plan Final list of signals and corresponding transducers and interposing devices to be implemented 4 5 6 7 8 9 The survey report shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 13. equipment and devices and calculated in accordance with the unit rates defined in the schedule of rates. The approach when defining these signal lists was to identify a standard set of signals applicable to all plant at each voltage level. The Contractor shall be responsible for the plant interface design and the undertaking of any modifications to existing equipment necessary for establishing the plant interfaces for the signals included in the lists. Lighting. etc. Ventilation. this shall not extend to replacement or retrofitting of auxiliary contacts on switchgear and Current or Voltage Transformers (CTs & VTs). The survey report shall include but not be limited to: 1 2 3 Condition of existing equipment to which the Contract Works must interface or may affect. Where such work would be required to implement the signals or controls identified in the signal lists.

The report shall detail the survey finding and any anticipated duration of power outages required for the installation of the digital PLC equipment.Section 6 . termination and any other works necessary for completion and putting into service.5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED The site survey shall determine where each item of Telecommunication. 13. Outstation and Power Supply equipment is to be installed. All equipment that is to be removed including equipment that is already out of service and located in the communication rooms where new equipment is to be installed.226 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . routing. Where this equipment is still in service the report shall detail the implementation process that will ensure the continuity of service associated with that equipment during its replacement or the transfer of service.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification coupling bandwidth is correct for re-use. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. cabling requirements. In many cases the installation of new equipment will require that existing equipment be removed. shall be removed by the Contractor and delivered to the Employer‘s stores for subsequent disposal by the Employer.

1 ISO 9000.3 PROTECTION. The applicable standards include but are not limited to those listed below: 14. 1 BS 3643 BS 4190 BS 4872-1 BS EN 1435 BS 182 BS EN 12540 BS 1133 BS EN 837 BS 2765 ISO 1460 ISO 1461 ISO 1463 ISO 2178 Description Specification for high voltage busbars and busbar connections Environmental Management Systems Quality Management Systems ISO metric screw threads ISO metric black hexagon bolts. METERING AND CONTROL IEC BS/Other EATS50-18 Description Design and Application of Ancillary Electrical Equipment Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 GENERAL STANDARDS IEC BS/Other BS 159 ISO 14000. screws and nuts Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS 14.227 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . IEEE Standards. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer. Fusion welding of steels Non-destructive examination of welds Galvanised wire for telephone and telegraph purposes Chromium plating Packaging Code Bourden tube pressure and vacuum gauges Dimension of temperature detecting elements and corresponding pockets Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on ferrous metals – Determination of the mass per unit area – Gravimetric method Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated ferrous products – Requirements Metal and metal oxide coatings – Measurement of coating thickness – Microscopical method Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates – Measurement of coating thickness – Magnetic method Standard Voltage High voltage test technique Environmental Testing Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) Recommended graphical symbols Pollution classification 60038 60060 60068 60529 60617 60815 14.1 GENERAL All services and equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications. International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 14. ISO Standards.

228 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60051 60255 60297 60514 60521 60947 61000 60282 60289 60044 60076 60186 61010 61036 14.5. control and laboratory use Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active energy (Classes 1 and 2) SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60038 60050 60060 60068 60130 60255 60304 60326 60332 60353 60358 60481 60495 60529 60651 60664 60693 60708 Description IEC Standard voltages International Electro-technical Vocabulary High-voltage Test Techniques Environmental Testing Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz Measuring relays and protection equipment Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires Printed boards Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Line traps for ac power systems Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers Coupling devices for power line carrier systems Single sideband power line carrier terminals Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Sound level meters Insulation co-ordination for equipment within lowvoltage systems Dimensions of optical fibres Low-frequency cables with polyolefin insulation and moisture barrier polyolefin sheath Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 mm (19") Series Acceptance inspection of Class 2 alternating current watt hour meters Class 0. 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour meters Low voltage switchgear and control gear Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) High voltage fuses Reactors Instrument transformers Power Transformers Voltage transformers Safety requirements for equipment for measuring.4 BS/Other Description Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories Electrical relays Dimensions of Mechanical Structures of the 482.Section 6 .

TASE 2 Services and protocol Connectors for optical fibre and cables Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents.229 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Telecontrol Protocols compatible with ISO standards and ITU recommendations.Measurement methods and test procedures Optical fibre cables Safety of laser products Teleprotection equipment of power systems RTU centralised and distributed solutions Tele-control equipment and systems – Part 5: Transmission protocols – Section 101: Companion standards for basic tele-control tasks Tele-control equipment and systems – Part 5: Transmission protocols – Section 102: Companion standard for the transmission of integrated totals in electric power systems Tele-control equipment and systems .Part 5-104: Transmission protocols – Companion standard for basic tele-control tasks Telecontrol equipment and systems .Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60793 60794 60825 60834 60870 60870-5-101 Description Optical fibres . tariff and load control –Direct local data exchange Programmable controllers Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures Optical Amplifier test methods Optical Amplifier IEC 60870-5-102 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-6-503 IEC IEC 60874 60949 IEC IEC IEC IEC 60950 61000 61010 61037 IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61107 61131 61280 61290 61291 IEC IEC IEC IEC 61300 61334 61753 61850 Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components Distribution automation using distribution line carrier systems Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components performance standard Communication networks and systems in substations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Part 5-103: Transmission protocols – Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment Tele-control equipment and systems . taking into account non-adiabatic heating effects Safety of Information technology equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Safety standards Electricity metering – Tariff and load control – Particular requirements for electronic ripple control receivers Data Exchange for meter reading.

NERC CIP 9075-1/10/13/14 62005 62051 62056 62148 62149 62367 CISPR 11 Description Application Interfaces Application Software Information security Information security Reliability of fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive optical components Electricity metering .731 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.652 G.Section 6 . scientific and medical radio-frequency equipment – Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre cable Characteristics of a dispersion-shifted singlemode optical fibre cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical amplifier devices and subsystems Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544.Glossary of Terms Electricity metering – Data exchange for meter reading.711 G.712 G.230 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard IEC IEEE ISO/IEC ISO/IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61970 Parts 1/2/3/4/5 1003.704 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (merged version of G707. tariff and load control Fibre optic active components and devices Fibre optic active components and devices Safety aspects for xDSL signal on circuits connected to telecommunication networks Industrial.661 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G. G708 & G709).708 G. 2048.706 ITU-T G. 6312. Primary PCM multiplex equipment for voice frequencies.704 ITU-T G. 8448 and 44736 kb/s hierarchical levels Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.702 G. ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.1-2008 X Windows 27001/1/2/5/11.707 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.709 G. Sub STM-0 network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies.703 G.653 G.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T ITU-T G.781 G.823 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.784 G.813 G.736 G.737 ITU-T ITU-T G. The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy ITU-T ITU-T G.231 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .772 G. Second order PCM multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive/zero/negative justification Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission systems Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchical (SDH) management information model for the network element. General considerations on second order multiplex equipments Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive justification.744 G.812 ITU-T G.741 G. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management. Characteristics of asynchronous digital multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s. Synchronization layer functions Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks.735 Description Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s.774 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G. Characteristics of a flexible multiplex in a plesiochronous digital hierarchy environment Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) Timing requirements at the outputs of slave clocks suitable for plesiochronous operation of International links Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network.745 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.773 G.783 G.803 G.797 G.821 ITU-T G.732 G. Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s. Characteristics of an external access equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s.Section 6 .742 ITU-T ITU-T G.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T G. constant bit-rate digital paths and connections Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Interworking of SDH network protection architectures Management aspects of the optical transport network element Digital sections based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fibre cables Digital transmission system on metallic local lines for ISDN basic rate access Connection characteristics Low frequency interference due to unbalance about earth of telecommunication equipment Principles of protection against overvoltages and overcurrents Induced voltages in cables with plastic-insulated conductors Provision of a metallic screen in plastic-sheathed cables Performance limits and objectives for bringinginto-service and maintenance of international SDH paths and multiplex sections Bringing-into-service international multi-operator paths.11 K.826 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.3000 M.2130 M.957 G.1430 K.3013 M.961 G.874 G.958 G.921 G.3010 M.2110 M.831 G.3100 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.13 K. sections and transmission systems International multi-operator paths.3020 M.232 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10 K.2101 ITU-T ITU-T M.2120 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M.842 G.Section 6 .841 G.825 Description The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) End-to-end error performance parameters and objectives for international.3016 M. sections and transmission systems fault detection and localization procedures Operational procedures for the maintenance of the transport network Overview of TMN recommendations Principles for a telecommunication management network Considerations for a telecommunication management network TMN security overview TMN interface specification methodology Generic network information model ITU-T G.14 M.

150 Description CORBA generic network and network element level information model TMN management services and telecommunication managed areas: overview TMN management functions Maximum permissible value for the absolute power level of a signalling pulse Technical features of push-button telephone sets Principles of maintenance testing for public data networks using Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) test loops Outstation data networks Standard for local and metropolitan area networks Private Branch Exchange (PBX) switching Equipment for Voice Applications.3200 M.Section 6 . 61850 802 RS.16 Q.C.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M.V.23 X.5 50081-2 50082-2 142 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES IEC BS/Other BS 2484 BS EN 50262 VDE 0278 ESI-09/13 60060 60183 60227 60228 60230 60270 60287 60304 60332 Description Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers Metric cable glands For Thermal Short-circuit.464 568 89/336 55022 EN EN BS 14.233 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . LAN Cables EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment Emissivity (Industry) Immunity (Industry) Electrical Protection Relays IEEE IEEE EIA EIA EEC EN 1613.3120 M. Humidity Test on Terminations a Dynamic Short-circuit Performance of Heat Shrink Joints and Termination Kits components shall conform to High Voltage Test Techniques Guide to the selection of HV cables Specification for PVC insulated cables (non armoured) for electric power and lighting Conductors of insulated cables Impulse Tests on cables and their accessories Partial Discharge Measurements Electric cables . insulation for low frequency cables and wires Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Calculation of current rating Standard colours for P.3400 Q.

systems (applicable to outdoor termination only) Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages above 30 kV up to 150 kV Electrical test methods for electric cables LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS IEC BS/Other BS 381 C 60269 60439 60898 60947 61008 Description Specification for colours for identification.C.234 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS IEC 60146 60269 60439 60623 60947 IEEE 1184-2006 BS/Other Description Battery chargers Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Batteries Low voltage switchgear and control gear 14.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60502 60507 60840 60885 14.6 BS/Other Description Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be used on A.8 EARTHING SYSTEMS IEC BS/Other BS 7450 IEEE 80 IEEE 32 Description Code of practice for earthing Guide for safety in substation grounding Neutral grounding devices 14.Section 6 .10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BS/Other Description General requirement machines for rotating electrical IEC 60034 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. coding and special purposes Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Circuit Breakers for household and similar installations Low voltage switchgear and control gear Residual current circuit breakers 14.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING IEC 60068 BS/Other Description Environmental testing 14.

Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60072 60085 60947 BS/Other Description Rotating electrical machines – Dimensions and Output Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation Low voltage contractors switchgear and control gear: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.235 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

The indoor equipment to be provided under this Contract shall be suitably protected from these elevated levels of temperature and humidity. performance and reliability of the equipment to be supplied. of days per year of thunder storms 30 500 mm 50 mm 65 mm 150 mm 92% 12% 38% 145 km/h +22C for approximately 6 hours per day +35C +35C +8C +21C Value(s) Up to 2500 meters above sea-level Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 15. However. Site Operating Condition Altitude Ambient temperature: Maximum outdoor – shade Maximum outdoor daily average Maximum outdoor yearly average Minimum outdoor yearly average Maximum ground at depth 1 m Relative Humidity: Maximum Minimum Yearly average Maximum wind velocity: Rainfall per year: Maximum Minimum Maximum in one day Yearly average Atmosphere: Average no. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 15.2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS Site outdoor operating conditions are as tabled below. 15.Section 6 . the temperature and humidity may rise significantly in the absence or failure of air-conditioning or ventilation (see Climate Conditions). unless otherwise stated in the Specific Technical requirements in the contract document.236 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS It is expected that the SCADA/EMS system(s). Outstations and Telecommunication equipment will be located in suitably air-conditioned buildings/rooms. The Contractor shall fully detail the environmental suitability.

16. The Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any special precautions to be taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are under maintenance. The Works shall conform with the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the above listed phenomena. 16.Section 6 . Directive 89/336/EEC amended by Directive 91/263/EEC.237 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 16.4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the following types and levels of conducted electromagnetic interference: a) Impulse Voltage Withstand b) High Frequency c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 50 Hz d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shall be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz 16. standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with such standards exists b) Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EEC directive on EMC. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 16. Directive 92/31/EEC and Directive 93/68/EEC.1 GENERAL The electromagnetic environment comprises: a) Conducted emissions and susceptibility b) Radiated emissions and susceptibility c) Conditions leading to electrostatic discharge.6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE During normal operation. 16.25 m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and covers in place) b) cell phones when operated in the 900 MHz frequency band (or future frequency bands utilised by Third Generation mobile phones) within the same rooms as the equipment (0. the Works shall be immune from the levels and types of electrostatic discharge (ESD) which can be found in a typical office environment.7 EMC STANDARDS The Bidder shall indicate: a) With which. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. if any. i.2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY The Works shall be immune from the effects of: a) 5 W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU equipment (0.25 m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers in place) c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals d) An electromagnetic field with a field strength of 10 V/m measured by the method specified in IEC/BS EN 61000-4-3.e. 16.5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE The Works shall not introduce conducted interference that disturbs its own internal operation or generates interference on the incoming power supply that causes maloperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others.3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and no interference to the operation of similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent rooms.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 16.

Personnel shall not mobilise to Site prior to approval being given. and testing. However. and in particular shall have management systems which conform to the requirements of the ISO 9000 family of standards for Quality Management and the ISO 14000 family of standards for Environmental Management. they will be applied. this control shall encompass hardware and software design activities and. The Plan shall also identify the Employer's approval activities and make due allowance for the time involved in these activities.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 17. inspections and witness tests on equipment or software. These visits may be in addition to those necessary to undertake product audits. This activity shall be documented in a manner that provides a high degree of assurance that the required level of product quality has been achieved. Subcontractors shall not be used except by prior written approval of the Employer. The Quality Plan shall cover all test and deliverable equipment and software. The Contractor shall provide for approval full details.Section 6 . The Contractor shall submit the Quality Plan revised to include a complete list of all site personnel detailing names. at mutually agreed times. If the Subcontractor has a suitable Quality Assurance Scheme complying with the ISO 9000 series of standards. The Contractor shall ensure that all the requirements detailed hereunder are applied to his Subcontractors such that the Employer and/or his representative can perform the same level of surveillance stated hereunder at the Subcontractors works. In addition. positions and responsibilities complete with an organisation chart. All corrective actions and remedial work shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost. manufacture progress. 17. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with sound quality and environmental management principles.3 SUB-CONTRACTORS Where proprietary items are purchased from a Subcontractor. the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the items upon receipt and ensuring their fitness for purpose. unless named and proposed in the Bid. where applicable. to agreed time scales. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT 17. in order that the Employer can gain objective evidence that the level of quality control is adequate to meet the Contract requirements. In addition to covering the manufacture of all equipment. then inspection of records will normally be sufficient to establish compliance. Flow charts.238 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4 QUALITY PLAN A final Quality Plan shall be submitted for the Employer's approval within two months of Contract Award. supplemented with brief explanatory text are the preferred method of presenting information that identifies the various stages of control. the Contractor shall demonstrate that he has a functional and adequately documented Quality Management System formulated to satisfy the requirements of the ISO 9000 series of standards. technical and other key staff to be employed at site.2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE The Employer and/or the Employer's Representative reserve the right to visit both the Contractor's and any of their Subcontractors' premises. of all engineering. the Contractor shall supplement his Quality Management System with the requirements detailed hereunder where they do not already form part of his standard Quality activities. 17. In addition. as necessary. and when and by which organisation. Otherwise. the Contractor shall take responsibility for such items. For the required level of quality assurance to be achieved.1 GENERAL The Contractor is required to control the quality of all equipment within his scope of supply. including curriculum vitae. the Plan shall make provision for the Employer to witness test and final inspection stages at the appropriate Manufacturer's works. all design activities undertaken by Subcontractors will be subject to all the requirements stated within this Section. installation and commissioning activities. site installation and commissioning. 17.

17. there shall be one Record Sheet for each piece of equipment (Line Replaceable Unit) or software module. The procedures shall include:      Descriptions of the objectives of each review Identification of key milestones in the software life cycle for reviews Methods for specifying non-scheduled reviews Identification of the function of the personnel involved Provision for the recording of analyses and recommendations for reviews Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The SQP shall state the software practices and procedures to ensure conformance with all software requirements of the Contract. at no extra cost to the Employer. reporting. installation and commissioning associated with each element of the Works.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 17. Normally. Software Quality 17. evaluation and rectification of quality related problems during all phases of the contract. It will be necessary for all major hardware items and assemblies to have unique serial numbers and for all software modules to have version numbers. then due notice will be given to the Contractor that urgent remedial or corrective action is required.9 REVIEWS The Contractor shall reference or document the procedures to be used for reviews to ensure that the software meets the contract requirements. responsibilities. Should major deficiencies be found in either the product or in the methods for the control of quality.6 QUALITY RECORDS In order to maintain control over the quality of all Works during design and manufacture.8 PLANNING The Contractor shall prepare a Software Quality Plan (SQP) that meets all quality requirements. Records generated to substantiate the attainment of performance and design standards must be retained. for at least 5 years following completion of commissioning of the Works and shall be filed in such a manner that retrospective review by the Employer can readily be effected.Section 6 . However.7 ORGANIZATION Software quality management shall be clearly described by the Contractor.239 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . a System of Quality Record sheets. 17. There shall be particular emphasis on the allocation of authorities and responsibilities in respect of the detection. shall be put in place by the Contractor. All quality records must refer to these numbers. These reviews shall be carried out independently of the designer of the particular part under review. etc. Inspection and Test plans shall be generated for both equipment and software production. coding and testing. by the Contractor. the documents shall be delivered to the Employer. skills. These audits will review quality records and associated documentation relating to each element of the Works in order to gain assurance that work is being carried out to the required level of quality. The SQP shall also identify and make timely provisions for special needs (controls.) required for its execution. detailing results of inspections and delivered tests. analysis. The quality records and associated documentation shall ultimately cover all stages of design. facilities. and correction of software problems and deficiencies. batch-produced items may be covered by a Batch Certificate. The SQP shall also identify the methods to be used for detection. This shall be carried out by the Contractor to agreed time scales. manufacture. testing. 17. providing all serial numbers of equipment are shown and an appendix to the certificate details the acceptance parameter bands within which the controlled parameters have been found to conform. At the end of this 5year period. and authorities for its execution and all key functions as described in succeeding paragraphs. The SQP shall identify and describe the organisation. The frequency and depth of ongoing surveillance activities by the Employer and/or the Employer's Representative will be dependent upon the results of initial audits. The latter shall permit inspection of module definition. The Design shall be subject to review prior to release for coding.5 AUDITS Correct functioning of the Contractor's Quality System will be verified by the application of an internal audit programme at various critical stages in the progress of the Works. Each item of equipment must have a unique Certificate of Inspection and Testing. tools. as applicable. at the Contractor's own cost.

calibrated. The measures shall include:   Software Checks to determine if the software requirements and design have been analysed for testability Review of test documentation to ensure it has been produced in accordance with the requirements of the associated quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract. control and maintain all software design changes. Specifically. and only. validation and certification have been carried out in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract Identification and review of any software. test data.240 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Review of corrective measures to determine their effectiveness. Provision for defining all necessary re-testing to validate modifications to any item of software. authorised changes have been incorporated in the design Verification that tests have been carried out in accordance with the requirements of the quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract with particular emphasis on the identification of software tested Review of test records to ensure all witnessing results. This shall require the Employer's approval. Provision for ensuring that timely corrective action is taken by reviewing deficiencies and tracking their clearance. approval by the Employer of the content of test plans. These measures shall ensure that an adequate range of procedures are in place and that they are rigorously enforced. The procedures shall include a method for: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.11 The Contractor shall reference and document Software Quality procedures that shall include: 17. Provision for controlling and accepting non-conforming software. CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT      17. The Contractor shall identify the CM procedures to be applied to software development. the Contractor shall ensure that procedures exist to identify. tested in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and requirements of the Contract Maintenance of test-related documentation to allow test repeatability Where appropriate. The validation and verification modules and sub-modules shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the relevant quality procedures.10 The Contractor shall identify all Software Quality measures related to software integration and testing.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification  Methods to ensure that the recommendations arising from reviews are monitored to ensure that timely corrective action is taken TESTING 17. verified. with particular emphasis on ensuring that all. Analysis of data and examination of problem and deficiency reports to determine the causes and to propose corrective measures.12 A Software Configuration Management (CM) Plan shall be produced defining the manner in which the changes to software are controlled and logged during the lifecycle of the project. test files and hardware used as a tool for software testing to ensure it has been documented. specifications and records shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Inspection and Test requirements.Section 6 . document. The results of such validation and verification exercises shall be fully documented. CORRECTIVE ACTION        Adoption of a System to report problems and deficiencies to the appropriate management level. Analysis of deficiency trends to prevent the development of non-conforming software.

The Contractor's personnel shall be made available for operation of such support tools as required. Ensuring that modifications are properly integrated.241 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The QAR shall have the right of access to any area of the Contractor's or their Subcontractor's premises where any part of the Work is being performed. The Contractor shall make his support tools available for reasonable use by the QAR for verification purposes. Keeping secure masters at separate locations. If the Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Employer that the required level of software quality is being achieved during the course of the Contract then this Clause would not normally be invoked. The provision of validated copies. Ensuring that non-conforming software is identified and segregated.13 Program and/or module version identification. Obtaining approval to implement a modification. The control of the identification inspection status. The control of support software. The proper marking. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor shall provide the QAR with the accommodation and facilities required for the proper accomplishment of his work. Producing build documents at baseline. storage and handling of software media. and shall provide any assistance required by the QAR for assessing the state of the quality control aspects of the Contract material. ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE The Employer shall have the right to appoint a Quality Assurance Representative (QAR) to monitor the Contractor's software quality as applied to this project. The QAR shall be afforded unrestricted opportunity to verify conformance of the software with Contract quality requirements.Section 6 . registration and updating.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification           17.

STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY The works shall be designed to facilitate inspection. Where it is necessary to take specific measures on site in order to achieve the desired degree of immunity (e. Continuity of supply is of prime concern. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation in all atmospheric conditions prevailing at the sites and during such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. Printed circuit cards shall be clearly labelled and the associated sockets shall be coded in an approved manner to prevent incorrect assembly. and the particular equipment or system specification. provided that this design is in accordance with this Specification and particular equipment or system specification. nuts and screws shall comply with the appropriate international standards for metric threads. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment that is in tension or subject to impact stresses. The material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the highest quality and selected particularly to meet the duties required of them.g. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. including those due to faulty synchronising and short circuit. Equipment manufacturers/suppliers shall take all reasonable precautions to minimise the susceptibility of their equipment to electromagnetic interference produced by other equipment and plant. equipment or system design is to conform to the best current engineering practise. rodents or micro-organisms. birds. All bolts. special earthing or screening arrangements). The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the works.242 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . cleaning. both with respect to arrangement and detail. 18. Electro-mechanical armature type relays shall not be employed in any sequencing or timing functions. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at the site and under such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. pressure. adjustment or anticipated replacement shall be readily accessible.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. full details of these measures shall be submitted for approval. The equipment shall be of the manufacturer‘s standard design. insects.3 DESIGN. The design shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of those concerned in the operation and maintenance of electronic equipment and systems.1 GENERAL In complying with the requirements of this Specification. etc. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 18. The equipment offered in this Contract shall have been proven by satisfactory operating experience.2 SYSTEM OF UNITS Technical Data dimensions. throughout this Contract shall be in the SI-system of units (International System of Units). All outdoor apparatus and fittings shall be designed so that water cannot collect at any point. and of associated equipment. reptiles. All equipment shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals. The equipment shall be designed to operate satisfactorily under all variations of load. Particular attention shall be given to ease of maintenance and fault finding.Section 6 . repairs and maintenance. mites. All equipment shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live parts. 18. Test points and components requiring testing. All equipment shall be designed to operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. and temperature that may be met in normal usage under the variation in climatic conditions given in the Specifications. All equipment shall be designed to minimise the risk of fire and any damage that may be caused in the event of fire. The design shall include all necessary interlocks for the operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with the Employer‘s safety rules and system operation/maintenance practices of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other contracts. maintenance and repair. Equipment shall be designed to facilitate inspection. quantities.

18. cubicles and similar enclosed compartments shall be equipped with anti condensation heaters actuated by hygrostat and thermostat to restrict condensation. rodents or micro-organisms. workmanship. etc. but no particular method of demonstrating it is called for. the Contractor shall show that the equipment he is offering meets the requirement in one or more of the following ways: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and finishes shall conform to the best modern shop practices in the manufacture of finished products of a nature similar to those covered by the Specification. birds. composition. To enable maintenance to take place during the working life of the equipment. 18. If the Contractor desires to use stock material or components not manufactured especially for works under this contract. design and tests. All equipment shall conform to the applicable standards as to material. mites. Corresponding parts throughout shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP Materials used in the manufacture of the specified equipment shall be of first class quality and of the kind. treatments. paints. frequency of operation. designed for frequent operation.243 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . taking into account functions such as duty cycle. Where life expectancy is limited by the availability of replacement components. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in their respective trades. losses and technical performance of the equipment in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and particularly with the provisions of the Scope of Works and Specifications.5 EQUIPMENT LIFE Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment or system specification. that such material or components comply with the requirements stated in the Specifications and to an approved standard and that the quality of such material is adequate for the intended use. he shall submit evidence by presentation of respective certificates. equipment shall be designed for a minimum working life of 15 years in the specified environment and application. the Contractor shall state the period for which production of the equipment is likely to continue and give guarantees regarding the time period for which he will hold spares. Material specifications. The Contractor shall guarantee for the quality of all materials. the Bidder shall state the expected frequency of such replacement or adjustment and the life expectancy.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Kiosks. The Contractor shall indicate in the respective Technical Schedules the proposed materials and their applicable standards for all major items of the supply. component ratings and all other factors determining equipment life shall take this into account. including grade of class. 18. All equipment shall be of rugged & durable construction. Higher grade material shall be used in every case where ordinary material may be insufficient.Section 6 .6 RELIABILITY Where a quantitative requirement for reliability is specified in a particular specification. and physical properties best adapted to their various purposes in accordance with the best engineering practice. Components. The materials used for the construction of the plant shall be selected carefully for the purpose intended and with due consideration of site conditions and tropical environment. All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals. as well as for the efficiency. shall be shown on the appropriate detail drawings submitted to the Employer for approval. it may be acceptable to meet the design life by the use of a replacement sub-unit using different components but having the same or better (but fully compatible) overall performance. All contactors or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. All equipment performing similar duties shall be of the same type and manufacture in order to limit the stock of spare parts required and maintain uniformity of plant and equipment to be installed. Tolerances. to the Employer's satisfaction. Normal routine and breakdown maintenance shall be assumed and it is accepted that certain consumable components and modules may need periodic replacement or adjustment. fits. All works shall be performed and completed in a thorough workmanlike manner and shall follow the best modern practice in the manufacture of high grade equipment. However. insects.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 1. 110 volts dc for facia type. then ―inservice‖ failure rates shall be given as above. Where the equipment offered is an updated version of equipment already in use. but in addition. 110 volts dc for power operated isolators and earthing switches. assemblies and units which. on failure.7. alarms and HV circuit breakers closing and tripping supplies. and shall verify this calculated reliability against the actual performance in the field over a given trial period.7. For multi-phase supplies. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. For multi-phase supplies. 3. or bought-in items of equipment. the Contractor shall calculate a reliability assessment based on the reliability figures of the individual components. for example transformers. each phase shall be switched simultaneously. Full details of how the ―inservice‖ data was collected and processed should be given. 18. All mains circuits shall be protected only in the phase-lines by fuses of suitable rating or by other suitably approved protective devices. Such information must be accompanied by details of the environment in which the equipment is used and total operating hours accumulated. 18. wires external to the equipment shall be colour coded in accordance with the current IEC Recommendations.Section 6 .244 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 48 volts dc for supply of communication and telecontrol equipment Unless otherwise specified or a wider operating range is specified in relevant international standards. Where the equipment offered is identical to that already in use.2 Direct Current (dc) If electronic equipment or system require the use of local internal batteries approval must be obtained. Where approval is given. 4. 2. The neutral shall be connected by a removable link located near the protective devices. the Contractor shall state ―inservice‖ failure rates. All mains transformers shall have an electrostatic screen which shall be earthed. the Contractor shall supply details of design changes and show how these could affect reliability. such as power supply units (PSUs). Where ―in-service‖ data is not available for the equipment offered. The electricity supplies for auxiliary supply are as follows:       415 volts 3-phase 50 Hz 4-wire 240 volts single phase 50 Hz 110 volts dc for essential indications. batteries used inside equipment shall be of the totally sealed. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. each phase shall be switched simultaneously. multi-window alarm schemes.1 Alternating Current (ac) All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. Where the Contractor includes within his equipment or system specially designed components. the plant provided under this Contract shall operate reliably between eighty percent (80%) of the nominal voltage and 110% of the maximum of the nominal and float voltages. he will be required to state the methods he adopts to achieve a reliability consistent with the specified overall reliability of the equipment or system. 18. could cause loss of a function or malfunction of a particular system. Except where prior approval is obtained. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. The Contractor shall undertake to provide upon request failure distribution data for all components. leak-proof type.

shall be designed and tested in accordance with IEC 947 and supplementary requirements of this specification. They shall be suitably rated for both the continuous and short circuit loadings of the circuits they are protecting under all service and atmospheric conditions stated in the specification and ensure that correct discrimination is maintained between main and sub-circuits. The general design of racks and cubicles shall be subject to approval.7. exceed 2300 mm in height. of adequate length. Where circuit breakers are used in circuits containing inductive loads. Where fuses are used the Contractor shall ensure that proper discrimination between main and sub-circuits is maintained. the incoming (supply) circuit shall be connected to the bottom terminals. All incoming circuits in which the voltage exceeds 110 V shall be fed through isolation fuses or circuit breakers and/or links. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 General All the apparatus of solid state type shall be mounted on plug-in cards in cubicles. Circuit breakers shall be mounted in such a manner so as to give easily visible indication of breaker position and shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate identification and easy replacement. PSUs shall incorporate over-voltage protection devices to protect the components that comprise the output load.7. Where fuse carriers are mounted vertically. fabricated steel construction. adequately protected and run for a distance along the hinge length of the swing frame to allow the wires to be twisted rather than bent when the gate is swung. racks and control panels shall all conform to applicable IEC 297 Standards. 18.4. it is essential that they are suitable for satisfactory operation in the circuit in which they are used. The cubicles shall be equipped with lighting fittings of an approved type. Main supply fuse links shall. All moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with an auxiliary contact(s) for remote indication of circuit breaker operation and interlocking purposes.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Miniature or moulded case circuit breakers. 18.4 Protection 18.8 CUBICLES. cabinets. Swing frame gates for mounting equipment shall be avoided as far as possible but where essential the wiring to the mounted equipment shall be flexible. All cubicles shall be fabricated with metal pockets to hold the equipment drawings and termination diagrams. be employed for all apparatus. hereafter called circuit breakers. CABINETS. Cubicles. Means shall be provided to prevent the circuit breakers being inadvertently switched to the ‗OFF‘ position.7.e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. unless otherwise specified. e.245 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and provided with shelves. RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS 18. 18. Protection circuits incorporated into PSUs shall be such that any overload of the output or short circuit current does not damage any components within the PSU. unless otherwise approved. They shall be of the free standing type.Section 6 . be of the high rupturing capacity cartridge type. Similar racks or cubicles shall.1 Fuses and Links Carriers and bases for fuses and links shall be in accordance with IEC 269 standard and colour coded to permit identification of the circuit rating. operating coils. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is withdrawn. Neither racks nor cubicles shall.8. i.4.7. as far as possible.3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) PSUs shall be of approved design and such that they do not impose parasitic or harmonic voltages on the station battery system or electronic equipment.g. account is taken of the circuit time constant.

The cubicle doors shall be of the lift-off type. secured with integral handles provided with locks and duplicate keys to an approved system. to be isolated from the bus wires. etc being plugged into such supply. Fans shall comply with the noise limitations imposed by the international standards. etc shall be such that cable terminations are arranged suitably for top or bottom cable entry for all cables. All filters shall be accessible and easy to clean. Circuits working at different voltages shall be adequately segregated and labelled. wiring. washers or tags. Air filters shall be renewable and arranged for ease of replacement. In each marshalling cubicle circuits shall be grouped and labelled according to function (i. the cubicles shall be equipped with the proper and approved cooling and ventilation system. All marshalling cubicles shall accept a common key for locking. These items shall be located in an approved. The equipment installed in the cubicle/panels shall be easily accessible. etc) with the labels attached to the fixed portion of the terminal boards. It shall be possible to work on small wiring for maintenance or test purposes without making the cubicle dead. alarm and tripping circuits. Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately from one another along the top or bottom of the cubicle. cubicles. labels and door locks. easily accessible. position and so arranged that the terminals face the access direction for convenience during maintenance. The cooling air for the cubicles and cabinets must be cleaned and free from dust. or other apparatus for which regulated supplies are required. The lowest mounting point. wiring ferrules. and earth bar with earthing connection.Section 6 . Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. 18. 18. Power supply busbars in cubicles shall be carefully routed and each busbar shall be shrouded. Marshalling cubicles shall be complete with all necessary terminal blocks. terminal blocks. hand lamps. cable glands and gland plates for small wiring and multi-core cables. plug-in group or terminal block shall be not less than 400 mm above floor level. Wires shall not be joined or teed between terminal points. Racks and cubicles shall be complete with all necessary tag blocks. Within the cubicles and racks. junction boxes. The gland plates shall be removable and in the case of floor mounted bottom entry cubicles.2 Cubicle Wiring Cubicle wiring shall be insulated with polyvinylchloride to IEC 228 standard. terminals shall be provided for connecting the screens of screened twisted pair cables. galvanised and painted.8. shall be not less than 200 mm above the base of the cubicle to allow access for applying the cable gland. system control. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. If the equipment in the cubicles/panels is of the nature to dissipate heat. telephone circuits. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all circuits in a cubicle. Cubicle doors shall be provided and arranged to lie flat back when open and not restrict access to the apparatus contained within the cubicle. Forced ventilation shall not be used without approval.3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels Marshalling cubicles shall be of fabricated steel construction of minimum thickness 2 mm.e. The design and construction of all racks. fans shall be duplicated to provide 100 per cent standby capacity and shall initiate remote alarms in the event of failure. The Bidder shall state the time for which the equipment can remain operational after failure of the forced ventilation system. Where forced ventilation is approved.246 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . precautions shall be taken to exclude dust from individual groups of equipment. except a lighting or heating circuit. and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. special sockets shall be provided on the panel to prevent portable tools. Where appropriate. All cubicles shall be adequately ventilated to restrict condensation and where necessary shall incorporate anti condensation heaters. It shall not be possible to inadvertently short busbars either between themselves or to earth. vermin proof and so designed that condensation shall not affect the insulation of the terminal blocks or cables.8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where regulated supplies are made available on panels for operating test instruments. dustproof.

etc. components and terminal fields shall have suitable identification labels affixed. Where the use of snap on connectors is agreed. Sufficient terminal blocks shall be provided to allow individual cores to be connected to separate terminals together with a further 20 per cent spare terminals. Components and Terminal Identification All equipment. All cubicles shall have an identification label affixed externally.247 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. Not more than one wire may be terminated at each insertion type terminal.8. Suitable warning labels shall be provided. Where connections are to be made between multi-core cables and multi-pair telephone type cables.2 Connectors Multi-pole connectors shall be provided with means whereby each free plug or socket can be locked in the match positions. shall be to specific approval. IDC headers should employ ejector latches. 18. Links shall be provided to isolate individual circuits or groups of apparatus for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally.g. Identification labels shall not be affixed to wiring trunk covers nor shall they be affixed to removable or interchangeable covers. Covers of transparent insulating material shall be provided on terminal blocks on which connections for circuits at 110 V or higher are terminated. control panels mimic diagrams. They shall also incorporate means for clamping the incoming cable so that the conductors are relieved of any stress. Sinhalese and Tamil on the door of the cubicle.Section 6 . Terminals for stranded wire conductors shall normally be of the insertion clamp type incorporating captive pressure screws which do not bear directly on the wire but on a serrated clamping plate. terminal blocks shall be provided with links to isolate individual circuits for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. they shall be of a type that provides gripping and support for the insulation as well as the conductor.8. Terminals other than those described above may be permitted but the type and arrangement of termination shall be to approval. PCB connectors shall incorporate reliable means (e. 18.1 Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be of non-flammable insulating material with a comparative tracking index of not less than 500 in accordance with IEC 112 standard. The use of terminal blocks as junction points for wires that are not required in the associated cubicle shall be avoided. wire-clamp connectors. For telephone type multi-pair cables.4 Equipment. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All terminals shall be numbered. polarising slots) to prevent incorrect mating.8. Each item shall have a unique reference for identification and this shall be consistent on local labels. These terminals shall also be provided with facilities for the insertion of test probes on both sides of the link. the terminal blocks shall comprise an insertion type terminal for the multi-core cable and insulation displacement for the telephone cable joined by withdrawable or ‗U‘ links to facilitate isolation. The design of clamps shall be such that the cable is not compressed sufficiently to cause creep in the insulation. terminal blocks shall be of the insulation displacement type. etc. or a board being inserted into the wrong socket. Cubicles containing a working voltage in excess of 110 V shall carry a prominent electrical shock symbol and a ―DANGER‖ label in English. The type of insulation displacement connector (IDC) chosen shall be one that grips the insulation or employs a strain relief clamp. Internal component label lettering shall be not less than 4 mm high and any supplementary detail on the same label shall be differentiated by employing a lettering size of at least 1 mm less than that used for primary information. They should be mounted vertically and set not less than 100 mm apart with a minimum distance of 200 mm between the top or bottom and the gland plates.3. Where possible. The design and arrangement of connectors shall be such that incorrect mating cannot occur. drawings.3. fibre optic connectors. For multi-core cables. Other methods of connection such as taper pin connectors. boards being inserted upside down.

centre zero instruments or displaced zero instruments shall be employed as approved.2 Indicating Instruments All analogue indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 51 standard industrial grade.8. with a dead beat mechanism. Where light emitting diodes (LEDs) are used. To reduce heating and fouling of the control boards. All instruments shall be back-connected and their cases shall be earthed. For indoor applications where the equipment is housed in the same building as that enclosing water and steam operated equipment. For indoor applications where purpose built accommodation is provided. colour and shape of keys and push buttons shall be to approval. Approved means shall be provided for zero adjustment without dismantling the instrument or removing the instrument from the panel. switch.1 Keys and Push Buttons The type. (e. Identification labels shall be securely fixed to steel work and wiring and other items shall not obscure the label. marshalling boxes. All non-locking keys and push-buttons shall be spring loaded and so designed as to avoid inadvertent operation. wide angle type.6 Painting and Finishing All cubicles. equipment. 18. shall not be damaged or have their accuracy impaired by the passage of fault currents. A schedule of proposed labels and safety signs detailing size.9. Digital indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 485. Paint colours shall be to the approval of the Employer. 18. ergonomically suitable for the function that they have to perform.9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES 18. Digital indicators shall be to approval. the degree of protection shall be to IP 44. Where the equipment can also be adversely affected by dust within the enclosure. For outdoor applications the degrees of protection shall be to Ingress Protection (IP) 65 or higher. adhesive fixing shall not be used.3 Indicating Lamps Indicating lamps and lamp-holders shall be of approved types. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned using dry blast cleaning and a suitable anti-rust treatment applied prior to the application of the final protective finish.5 seconds through the primary of their corresponding instrument transformers.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All labels and safety signs shall be affixed using screws or bolts with captive nuts. this equipment should be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 52. erection and commissioning. deterioration etc. fixing arrangement. paintwork. lamps shall have the minimum power consumption. Where dust can adversely affect equipment within the enclosure. position. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.9. and shall be of an approved type and size. mechanical damage. this equipment shall be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 54. Analogue instruments shall be of an approved moving coil type. consistent with good visibility of indication in a well lit room. The Contractor shall make good using the same coating to the satisfaction of the Employer any deterioration of protective coatings. The display shall not ‗hunt‘ about an average value at a rate that renders it illegible. In two-directional circuits. equivalent to 20 times full load current for not more than 0. 18. colour and size of lettering shall be submitted for approval during the design phase. and arranged for ease of replacement and maintenance.Section 6 . 18.8.9. control and relay rooms in auxiliary plant buildings) the degrees of protection shall be to IP 42. 18. junction boxes and distribution boards shall be afforded adequate protection against corrosion.g. they shall preferably be high output.248 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc which may have occurred during transportation. but generally in compliance with the requirements of IEC 1020. The instruments with associated circuits.5 Degrees of Protection Equipment degree of protection shall be provided in accordance with IEC 529 standard. All paints shall be applied in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer‘s instructions.

1 General The cable installation to be provided shall include all cables required for the supply. In special cases for light current installations. junction boxes. steel wire armoured (aluminium in the case of single core cables) and sheathed with LSF. terminal diagrams. single strand annealed copper conductors with a cross sectional area of 1. steel wire armouring and PVC outer serving.10. Methods of mechanical protection. The minimum conductor size shall not be less than 2. LV power cables with compacted or compressed type stranded conductors will not be accepted. and shall submit for review the cable connection schematic diagrams. Any screening and cable segregation necessary to prevent spurious signals being induced between cables shall be shown on the block cable diagrams.5 mm2 may be used. single core or multicore XLPE insulated. They shall be clean and free from flux likely to cause particles to adhere to the board and cause short circuits. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to demonstrate that the maximum continuous current carrying capacity of any power cable will not be exceeded after taking installation dependant de-rating factors into account and short circuit currents. The cards shall be colour coded and also provided with an approved form of interlock to prevent them being inserted in an incorrect shelf position. All multicore control cables having more than 7 cores shall have approximately 20 per cent spare cores. shall be subject to approval. other than steel wire armour. thermoplastic insulation and thermoplastic inner sheath. 18.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The colour of lamps shall be to approval.5 mm2. brackets. The installation shall be complete with all cable terminations. All similar plug-in cards shall be interchangeable. Printed circuits shall be to approval. clips and all fixings. Printed circuit boards shall be tinned and varnished or otherwise protected against corrosion and all connectors (plug or edge type) shall be plated with gold.2 Cable Types LV power cables shall be 1000 V grade. All control and small power wiring and cabling (except fibre optic cables) supplied under this Contract shall have multi-stranded copper conductors complying with the requirements of IEC 60228 and IEC 60228A. cables shall have galvanized steel wire armour with a thermoplastic waterproof over sheath. Where routed outside buildings or enclosures and where no other overall mechanical protection is afforded.Section 6 . Illumination of fascias and legends and all indicating symbols shall be clear and distinct and shall be subject to approval. All special tools for withdrawing plug-in cards shall be provided. lugs.6 mm2 may be used. cable markers. Suitable extender cards shall be provided to enable plug-in cards to be tested in circuit. ferrules. Plug-in cards shall be spaced such that an electrical short circuit to adjacent cards cannot occur during insertion. The Contractor shall undertake all relevant design and engineering of the cable systems for equipment in its scope of supply. indication and monitoring of all plant provided under this Contract. fittings.249 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Cables shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC 60502 and IEC 60811. All ducts and covers shall be sealed after installation of cables. Insulation and protective levels for printed circuit modules shall as a minimum be in accordance with IEC 870-3 Class II. 18.10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES 18.9. but not less than two cores for future use. cleats. 18. cable lists. but generally in accordance with IEC 73 standard. glands. Also for telephone type cables conductors of cross sectional area of 0. cable ladder racks. numbered ferrules. Terminals shall be provided for all cores. The design and construction of plug-in cards shall be such that they shall not distort. All cables provided must comply with the latest applicable IEC standards.10. cable schedules and the cable route plans. control. piping and accessories. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The clarity of these fascias and legends shall not be impaired by the incident or transmitted light.4 Plug-in Cards The number of different types of plug-in cards shall be kept to a minimum. cable trays & covers.

All sheaths shall be free from defects and impervious to water. UV radiation. Cables shall be marked at each end of the run with a marker consisting of a label attached to the cable with two straps. the cables shall be segregated as fully as possible. 60754.250 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . These measures shall be subject to approval. Termination and Identification All cables shall be installed above ground level or in trenches. termites and also mechanical damage. in excess of those installed. quads and individually screened multi-pairs shall be colour coded. All cables shall be glanded at both ends with glands of type/material suitable for the application. straps or saddles. All cables shall be installed and terminated in accordance with the manufacturer‘s recommendations. Cables that are likely to be exposed to sunlight during operation and maintenance shall have ultra-violet safe insulation. Sufficient slack shall be provided near the ends of the cable runs to allow for disturbance during maintenance or repair. This sealing shall consist of one-hour fire resisting materials such that a maximum of 100°C is Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Cabling and wiring shall be designed and the installation arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage. supported on trays and racks. the cables shall be clamped together at intervals not exceeding 1 metre. 18. the cables shall be securely fastened at intervals of not more than 1 m with clips. number and configuration required for each tray plus additional cables. Glands appropriate for use with Steel Wire Armoured (SWA) type cables are to be provided and arrangements for multicore SWA type cables are to be taken into account in the switchboards. The labels shall be made of material which is resistant to the effects of corrosion. Each core of a multi-core cable shall be readily identified by a number impressed into the insulation every 100 mm. Wherever cables pass through floors. 61034 and be anti-vermin and anti-termite impregnated. All cabling and wiring shall be flame retardant Low Smoke & Fumes (LSF) type complying with IEC-332 Part 3 and during combustion shall emit no halogen gases and produce minimal smoke. vermin.10.3 Cable Laying.Section 6 . not less than 25% by weight and dimensions. the cores shall be uniformly twisted and the lays arranged such that cross talk is reduced to a minimum. Cables shall be neatly laid throughout and in such a manner as to avoid any undue sagging of cables. All cables shall be mechanically protected throughout the installed route. Where SWA cable is not used then provision must be made to protect the cable from damage due to physical abuse and attack from vermin. Where run on trays or racking. or in the case of telephone cables with cable ties. Cable cores shall be terminated without the addition of separate tails. twins. The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services. Running equipment cables along the same route as power cables shall be avoided. In order to maintain this formation. Cables running inside buildings or concrete trenches shall be laid on trays. Nonferrous glands shall be used for single-core cables. the routes used for normal running equipment. Where this is not possible. or segregated from. The screen single core cables shall be earthed at one end only. Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire-risk areas and to minimize the risk of damage from any source. walls or other partitions a suitable method of sealing shall be used. Cable cores. and the cable support system. where considered necessary shall also incorporate a sunshade to protect the installation from the damaging effects of UV radiation. moisture. Equipment that is required for emergency use shall be cabled using routes that are different to. Each cable shall be identified by means of indelibly marked identification labels fixed adjacent to the cable gland at each end of the cable. Individually screened pairs or overall screened multicore cables shall be provided where it is necessary to provide immunity from interference and reduce the effect of induced extraneous voltages. Precautions shall be taken to ensure physical contact does not take place anywhere throughout the run. The outer LSF sheaths of cables shall have reduced flame propagation characteristics in accordance with IEC 60331. The emergency equipment shall be connected with fire-resistant cables. Three single core cables forming one three-phase circuit shall be installed in trefoil formation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where twin or quad make-up is required in any cable. The trays shall be of adequate strength and size to carry in one layer. the weight.

or areas with water spray fire protection. Cable armouring shall not be used as a protective screen. racks. Protective screens around insulated cables shall be insulated from field instruments. Except where otherwise approved. 18. and be continuous up to the earthing point in the destination cubicle or desk. 18.251 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . personal safety shall always take precedence. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. flexible cable or braid shall be used for earthing these items. shall be waterproof. the door hinges will not be accepted as a means of earthing this part of the equipment. Connection of the instrument earth to the site earth shall be by separate conductor to the equipment safety earth. Where there is a conflict between these two. enclosures. All ‗clean‘ instrument earth bars shall be clearly labelled as such.3 Cable Screens and Armouring The design of equipment shall be such that cable screens and cable armouring are kept electrically separate throughout the equipment installation so as to avoid the introduction of earth loops and minimise interference pickup. 18.11. connected through any field junction boxes.11. The whole installation shall be arranged to prevent the spread of fire. shall be equipped with a ‗clean‘ instrument earth comprising an insulated copper earth bar for the connection of cable screens. Seals in damp areas. smoke and fumes through each partition. but shall be electrically isolated from the enclosure. When apparatus or instruments are accommodated on panel. equipment. desks etc. Equipment shall be designed so that the armouring of all incoming and outgoing cable and can be connected together externally. components. etc. All seals shall be vermin and termite proof. Cubicles.2 Safety Earthing All non-current carrying metallic parts of plant. The cable armour shall be connected to the site earth at a single point. a stud type terminal of diameter not less than 12 mm or a tapped boss of equivalent size shall be provided on the outside of each cabinet or structure for the purpose of making the connection to a convenient local earth point.11.11 EARTHING 18.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification maintained on the cold side of the seal with 1000°C applied to the hot side. cubicle doors or swinging frames. shall be earthed by connection to the earth bar in an approved manner and all earthing terminals and connections shall be of adequate dimensions.1 General Earthing of electronic equipment is required to reduce the effects of interference and for the safety of operation and maintenance staff.

19. such as operating systems. into a single integrated package that meets the requirements of this Specification.Section 6 . instrumentation or the process being monitored and/or controlled. including third party software items. includes operating systems. This waiver shall not apply to any third party software that has been modified in any way by the Contractor or his subcontractors. New Software ‗New Software‘ means any software that is developed or modified to provide facilities required for this project. It does not include any software that requires development or modification to meet the requirements of this Specification. as stated in this Specification: Words used in this Specification to describe categories of software shall have the meanings defined below. This. standard software for data acquisition. and embedded software on proprietary equipment such as network interface cards and printers.2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Standard third party software that was originally designed for purposes unrelated to this project. the Contractor shall warrant that such items are suitable for the purpose for which they are supplied. are not required to meet the design or coding requirements of this Specification. for example. Software For the purposes of this Specification. Such modification shall be subject to the design control and quality assurance provisions of this Specification. whether such facilities are explicitly specified or not. Configuration and Source Data ‗Configuration and Source Data‘ includes any software configuration tables or data entered to define the characteristics of plant.1      GENERAL Functionality Performance Reliability and availability Quality assurance standards SCADA/EMS applications shall comply to Common Information Model (CIM) and Generic Data Interface (GID) standards as defined by IEC 61970. However. ‗Software‘ shall mean all coded instructions and data that are processed by a computer or other processor controlled device. compilers. Existing Software ‗Existing Software‘ means any existing software forming part of the Contractor's standard product that has been proven in use at several sites over a period of at least one year. Entry of this data shall not require any alteration to program coding. and the Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all hardware and software supplied. All software provided shall meet the following requirements. programme development and management utilities. or to cause the software to function according to project requirements. display and control. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.252 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 19.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19.

3. The Bidder shall provide details of all programming languages used.1 Programming Languages The SCADA/EMS system and all new software shall be written in a standard high-level language that is suitable for implementation of real-time systems. for example.3. 19. there shall effectively be one master System Database in which each item of data is stored only once. 19.4. The System Database may comprise a number of databases.4.1 New Software All new software (if applicable) shall be produced in accordance with the software quality assurance procedures described in this Specification. 19. The mechanisms shall operate automatically and shall include periodic cyclic checks. Real-time and calculated data shall be held within the system database in a manner that makes them readily accessible to all programs that require this information. and it is not intended that quality assurance procedures should be applied retrospectively. 19.4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE This Section defines how the Contractor's quality assurance procedures shall apply to the different categories of software. 19. Verification and Testing The level of software validation. and to notify and correct errors. where possible. 19.3 Program and Data Security The software design shall ensure the integrity and safety of all code and data at all times so that. but such distribution of data storage shall be transparent to the user.2 Existing Software It is recognised that existing software may not have been developed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. plant records. 19.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19. verification and testing to be applied shall be clearly identified by the Contractor..253 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Database protection at both field and record levels shall be provided to prevent inadvertent corruption of the database.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4 Software Validation. for example containing the real-time data. the Bidder shall provide evidence of their experience with the software and its performance in similar applications. They shall make documentation for that software available for inspection during the Bid evaluation period.3 Configuration Data The Contractor shall establish quality control procedures to ensure that configuration data is in accordance with Clause 17 and any subsequent updates to such data are correctly entered into the SCADA/EMS system. The System Database shall be structured in such a way as to simplify maintenance of data and programs and it shall not be necessary for the user to enter the same data into the System more than once.3.4. Where the software is of a proprietary nature and not of the Bidder's design. Mechanisms shall be provided to ensure consistency between the master system database and any online or backup copies.2 Database Structure In order to ensure the integrity of all data held by the System. geographical data.3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS 19.4. etc. they cannot become corrupted due to interrupted transfers or inadvertently over-written. The Employer reserves the right to audit the quality control procedures used by the Contractor for the production of new software.

These procedures shall ensure that work is only carried out on the latest version of all software and documents.5. 19.2 Software Life Cycle Quality assurance controls and verification shall be applied to each phase of the software system life cycle.6 Detailed Design For each new software function defined in the FDS. as specified in Section 4 ‗Documentation‘. The FDS shall be produced in accordance with the approved system development methodology and shall be submitted for review. module interface definitions.5. They shall also implement procedures for controlling all changes to issued software and documents. The Contractor shall not purchase any specialised hardware for this Contract nor commence the production of any software until the FDS has been approved.1 General The following requirements shall apply to all. The Contractor shall provide a traceability reference with the FDS.3 System Development Methodology All software development shall be carried out in accordance with a recognised System Development Methodology (SDM).4 Documentation Documentation for each phase of software development shall be produced. The Employer will not be held liable for any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of changes to work carried out before approval of the FDS. reviewed and approved in accordance with the approved SDM. the Contractor shall prepare a formal written Functional Design Specification (FDS) fully describing:     The functionality that will be provided The methods and algorithms used to realise the functionality Details of the user interface Details of the data inputs and outputs of the function The FDS shall not include the coding for any function unless the inclusion of segments of code would be useful to describe the functionality of a particular function.5 Change and Issue Control The Contractor shall implement procedures for controlling the issue of all software and related documents.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19. structured English or pseudo code specification of module logic and such other documentation as is specified in the approved SDM. The Contractor shall keep backup copies of all issued software. 19.5. program structure charts.5 Functional Design Specification For each function to be realised using software. 19. The FDS shall state which functions will be implemented with existing software and which functions require the development of new software or modification of existing software. The detailed design shall include data flow diagrams.254 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE 19.5. which shall be subject to the Contractor's quality control procedures. Documentation shall be an integral part of each phase and not a separate activity. the Contractor shall prepare a detailed design document that shall describe how the function is to be implemented.Section 6 .5.4. 19. proprietary application software provided by the Contractor and their subcontractor that forms the complete SCADA/EMS System and its associated ancillary systems.5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 19. 19.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.6

OPERATING SYSTEMS

19.6.1 General Each computer system shall be provided with a real-time, multi-user, multitasking operating system that provides a suitable environment for executing the software intended to be utilised on each system, especially for real-time functions. UNIX or LINUX solutions are preferred rather than WINDOWS. If WINDOWS solutions are offered the Bidder shall describe in detail the specific means of mitigation of risks to reliability and security. It is preferred that each processing base unit, e.g. workstations, servers, front-end processors, shall use the same operating system and the same version/upgrade of that operating system. The number of different operating systems shall be kept to a minimum and, preferably only one operating system should be used for all computers. The Contractor or their subcontractors shall have made no customisation to the supplied operating system(s). A priority system of resource allocation shall allow both real-time and other tasks, such as system configuration and maintenance, to execute in the same environment while maintaining absolute priority for real-time tasks. A memory protection system shall prevent any task from writing into a memory partition that is allocated for the exclusive use of any other task. Facilities shall be provided to monitor the correct release of memory when tasks terminate and no longer require the memory allocated to them. The operating system shall fully support the hardware, both in its initial configuration and in any expanded configuration that the Employer may purchase from the Contractor, and shall provide software control of all functions of the hardware. 19.6.2 Security The Operating System shall support multiple users simultaneously exercising its resources and the resources of the computer system (e.g. disk drives, etc). Identification and password security shall be implemented for each user and a file protection scheme supported. Access by any user to any file, package or system facility shall not be granted unless the user is known to the system and has the required authorisation level for the operation they wishes to perform. The following access authorisation levels are required for files:     Execute only Read only Read/write/update Modify the file definition (e.g. name, password, etc).

19.6.3 System Utilities The operating system shall include the following utilities as a minimum:         An intelligent file backup utility that will only backup files that have been modified since the previous backup was made A copy utility to copy files from one medium to the same or a different medium A utility to dump an image of an entire hard disk, e.g. to another hard disk or tape, and to restore such images back to a hard disk A utility to undelete files that have been previously deleted A utility to check the integrity of a disk, to diagnose any problems and lock out any faulty areas of a disk A utility to de-fragment all the files on a disk A utility to view the contents of a file, either in ASCII text or hexadecimal format, without changing the contents of the file A directory sort utility, enabling the directory to be displayed with the listing sorted in ascending or descending order of file name, file size or file date

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 255 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

  

A sort/merge utility that can sort or merge a number of files of any size according to one or more sort keys Facilities to dump nominated areas of memory and the CPU registers to disk, particularly for investigation after a task crash All utilities shall include context sensitive help.

19.6.4 Text Editor At least one text editor shall be supplied with the operation system and the following facilities are required for all text editors provided: Windowed and full screen operation of the facilities defined below            The ability to edit files formatted for input to all language translators provided, files formatted for printing and free text Horizontal scrolling facilities to allow editing of files with line lengths that are longer than the screen width The ability to edit files that are larger than the amount of free memory available to the editor The ability to work on a copy of a file without affecting the original The ability to locate text containing a specified string of characters, and the next occurrence thereof, including the optional use of wildcards The ability to search for, insert or delete variable length strings of data The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to another part The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to a specified location in a different file The ability to merge text from several files The ability to display text either as ASCII characters or in hexadecimal representation, or in both formats on the same screen Context sensitive help

19.6.5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities Facilities shall also be provided for the maintenance of the System software, whether or not the source code is provided with System. 19.6.5.1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring

A complete package of diagnostic programs shall be provided with the System that will allow testing of all system devices, including inter processor links and communications with RTUs, to determine whether or not a problem exists and to isolate a problem to a certain area in the device. Both online (self diagnostic) and offline diagnostics shall be provided. Facilities shall be provided to run diagnostics on all relevant subsystems of the SCADA/EMS System. 19.6.5.2 Error Detection and Reporting

Malfunctions to be reported shall include excessive program execution time, communications errors and identification of faults in each hardware device provided. Any malfunction shall cause a message to be generated in clear English text and brought to the attention of the operator, so that remedial action can be taken. It is not acceptable to merely generate an error number that must be looked-up in a manual or elsewhere. Facilities shall be provided to display the status of all flags and devices on demand.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 256 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.6.5.3

Online Performance Measurement

An online performance measurement and analysis tool shall be provided to check system operation and to enable tuning and optimisation of the system as a whole. This tool shall measure overall CPU utilisation and identify the resources used by individual users and tasks. 19.6.5.4 Telemetry Communications Statistics

The system shall continuously calculate and update statistics on telemetry scans and errors, and provide facilities for this information to be displayed on request. The following information shall be provided for each outstation (RTU or SCS) and for the total of all outstations on each data line: a) b) No response Invalid response The number of times an outstation failed to respond to a request from the Master Station The number of invalid replies received from an outstation in response to a request from the Master Station, tabulated by error type (e.g. incorrect message length, CRC error, address error, etc.) Total number of scans (valid and invalid) carried out during the reference period

c)

Number of scans

The above information shall be accumulated as follows:       Current hour Previous hour Current day Previous day Current month Previous month

In each case, the 'current' figures shall be updated continuously. At the end of each hour, day and month period respectively, the 'current' figures shall be transferred to the 'previous' figures and the 'current' figures shall be reset to zero. An historical record of communications statistics shall be maintained by the system complete with a long term archiving facility. 19.6.5.5 Software Maintenance Facilities shall be provided for generating the System‘s executable code from source code. These facilities shall be the same as the facilities used at the Contractor‘s factory or completely compatible with them. It is anticipated that these facilities will be used by the Contractor onsite to build and integrate any software fixes or updates received from the factory, or prepared onsite, into the System. Any modifications prepared onsite shall be managed under the overall software quality procedures. It is not intended that these facilities be used routinely by the Employer but they are required in order to safe guard the Employer against the loss of software support, for any reason, from the Contractor. In that case these facilities would permit the Employer or others, to effect any necessary software maintenance, modification or addition. 19.6.5.5.1     Language Translators

The following facilities are required for all language translators (compilers and interpreters) provided: Separate compilation/assembly of subprograms Clear statements to be produced, in plain English, of error conditions that are encountered during the translation process and execution Optionally produced source listings Optionally produced cross reference listing, providing an alphabetical listing of all program variables showing where in the program each variable is defined and used

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 257 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

 

Optional trace and debug facilities in accordance with the requirements of Clause 19.7.9 Optional code optimisation to produce code for normal or fast execution. Source code processed and object code produced in each case shall be compatible, for example, a subprogram compiled for fast execution shall correctly link to a subprogram compiled for normal execution A ‗make‘ facility that shall check the date and time when each source code file for a specified program was last modified against the date and time when the associated object code file was created, and automatically recompile all source files that are more recent than the associated object file A ‗build‘ facility that shall recompile all source code files for a particular program regardless of the relative date/time of source and object files. Linker

19.6.5.5.2

The linker shall be able to accept one or more object modules produced by an assembler or compiler, resolve symbol and procedure references between them and produce an executable image. If more than one language translator is provided then the linker shall be capable of linking object modules produced by any or all language translators into a single executable program. The linker shall optionally be able to produce a storage map of all linked modules, including library modules, and a tree-structured map showing the calling structure. 19.6.5.5.3 Program Maintenance Libraries

Program maintenance library facilities shall be able to create and update program libraries of source and object programs and provide the following facilities:        Support for any number of source or object program libraries Facilities for the creation, deletion and copying of individual libraries Facilities to add source or object modules to a specified library Facilities to delete source or object modules from a specified library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library, modify it and re-insert it in the library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library and insert it in another library A facility to display a directory listing of individual libraries, showing the name and version number of each member and the date it was last modified Trace and Debug Facilities

19.6.5.5.4

Trace and debug facilities suitable for debugging programs written in any of the languages used on this project shall be provided with the System. Both source code and machine code debugging shall be supported as described below. Source Code Debugging Source code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the source code of any of the languages provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection:      Search for variable length text strings in the source code Display values of program variables, that are identified to the debugger by using their source code variable names, in decimal, binary or hexadecimal format Change the values identified as in (b) above Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 258 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

   

Run the program one source code line at a time Skip over lines of source code and whole subprograms without tracing through them Display the call stack, showing by name the hierarchy of subprogram calls that brought the program to the current instruction Context sensitive help

Machine Code Debugging Machine code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the machine code produced from any of the language translators provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection:               19.7 Search for variable length binary or hexadecimal strings in the object code Display the values of nominated memory locations in binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal or hexadecimal format Change the contents of a nominated memory location by entering a new value in binary, decimal or hexadecimal format Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger Display the contents of all registers and flags whenever a set breakpoint operates or the program is halted Run the program one machine code instruction at a time Display the call stack, showing the hierarchy of subprogram calls which brought the user to the current instruction Display and optionally change the contents of CPU registers Assemble instructions entered as assembler mnemonics at a specified location in memory Disassemble machine code at specified locations in memory Jump to a specified memory location and execute the code there, and run to the next breakpoint or program termination Convert numbers between binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal and hexadecimal formats Context sensitive help PATENT AND COPYRIGHT

19.7.1 Patent Rights The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims of infringement of any patent, registered design, copyright, trade mark or trade name or other intellectual property right provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied: The claim or proceedings arise out of the design, construction, manufacture or use of the Works or any Plant supplied by the Contractor The right was protected at the date of award of the Contract in the Contractor's country or the country in which the Plant is to be manufactured or erected The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by any use of the Works otherwise than for the purpose indicated by or reasonably to be inferred from the Specification The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by the use of any Plant in association or combination with any plant not supplied by the Contractor, unless such association or combination was disclosed to the Contractor prior to the date of the Bid

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 259 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.7.2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim under this Clause 19.7 made against the Employer. The Contractor may, at their own cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such claim and any litigation that may arise from that claim. The Employer shall not make any admission that might be prejudicial to the Contractor unless the Contractor has failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations or litigation within a reasonable time after having been so requested. The Contractor may not, however, conduct such negotiations or litigation before they have given the Employer such reasonable security as the Employer may require. The security shall be for an amount that is an assessment of the compensation, damages, expenses and costs for which the Employer may become liable and are the subject of the indemnity under Clause 19.7.1. The Employer shall, at the request of the Contractor, provide all available assistance for the purpose of contesting any such claim or action and shall be repaid all reasonable costs incurred in so doing. 19.7.3 Backup Copies of Software The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to make backup copies of all software and firmware supplied under the Contract for their own use without in any way relieving the Contractor of his obligations. 19.7.4 Right To Modify The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to modify any of the software supplied under the Contract without in any way relieving the Contractor of their obligations. 19.8 LICENCES

The bidder shall provide full details of the licence requirements for each item of software included in the system. The details shall include any restrictions in number of users or platforms on which the software is installed. In general licences are required for all users of the system when fully expanded and these shall be valid indefinitely. Users shall include all those with access via equipment provided under this contract including the office PCs.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 260 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

20. CIVIL WORKS 20.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20.1.1 Civil Engineering, Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice The works shall be executed in accordance with the latest version of the following standards and codes of practices commonly used in Sri Lanka. However, the Contractor may use equivalent standards and codes of practice subject to the approval of the Employer. : BS 308 BS 5950 BS 1192 BS 5628 BS 5720 BS 5588 BS 8300 & Part M NBS BS 5930 BS 5964 BS 6031 BS 6399 CP 3 CP 102 BS 5400 Part 5 BS 5390, 5618 part 3 CP 143 BS 8004 BS 8110 SLS 522 BS 1474 BS 476 Part 8 ISO 898-1 ISO 630 BS/DIN EN 10027-1 BS 4449 BS 4483 BS 4466 Engineering drawing practice The use of structural steel in building Construction drawing practice Code of Practice of the structural use of masonry Code or Practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings Code of Practice for fire precautions in the design of buildings Disabled access Code of practice for Site Investigations Methods for setting out and measurement of buildings: permissible measuring deviations Code of Practice of Earthworks Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads Code of basic data for the design of buildings Waterproofing of buildings. Composite construction in structural steel and Concrete Walling Sheet roof and wall coverings Foundations The structural use of concrete Water for Concreting Aluminium Sections Fire Resisting Doors Bolts & Nuts Hot rolled structural steel sections Designation system for steels Characterization of waste Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 261 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Design requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting-out.Section 6 . Code of practice for dead and imposed loads Specification for BUILDING WORKS (Volume I) 3rd Revision – July 2004 Specification for BUILDING WORKS – Volume 2. bridges and access roads to and over the site. Position and condition of any approaches.1 Site Survey After the award of the contract. (1) (2) (3) Location of datum of setting out and levelling. including highest recorded flood level (from local knowledge). Establishment of site boundaries and reduced site datum level. marking. Generalities and definitions Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas. irrespective of any checking by the Employer.2. SCA/4 – (Volume II) ICTAD Publication No. The Contractor shall keep duplicate copies of all his field books and survey calculations written in the English language for inspection by the Employer. The Contractor shall survey the site to obtain the following. SCA/4 – (Volume I) ICTAD Publication No. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.October 2001 Specification for WATER SUPPLY. Methods of testing hardened concrete for other than strength Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in construction. Method for preparation of test specimens BS 5481 BS 6651 BS 4660 BS EN 752 BS EN 124 BS 6297 BS 1722 BS 4102 BS 6399 ICTAD Publication No. The Contractor shall inform the Employer within 24 hours whenever a new setting-out peg is established or an existing one destroyed. quality control Code of practice for design and installation of small sewage treatment works and cesspools Specification for fences Specification for steel wire for fences Loading for buildings.262 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and shall regularly furnish the Employer with layout plans showing all current setting-out and survey stations. The tolerances shall be ruled BS 5606 and BS 5964. SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER DRAINAGE WORK PRELIMINARY WORKS 20. The Employer may at his discretion alter or specify new tolerances as necessary. type testing.2 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe and fittings for gravity sewers Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning Specification for unplasticized PVC underground drain pipe and fittings Drain and sewer systems outside buildings. SCA/3/2 Revised Edition 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification BS 1881 BS 6319 Testing concrete. the Contractor must make his own site surveys to collect all the information to prepare layout drawings.

But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damages to the other structures.2. 20.2. British Standard 1377. The Employer will issue a copy of a survey recently carried out to the Bidder for information. Removing.3. undergrowth.3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures Un wanted foundations shall be demolished or up-rooted. 20.2. Employer should provide 3 hard copies and a soft copy. No variation in contract price will be made due to any variation in the bearing capacity leading to modification of foundation design at the final design stage. All tests shall be in accordance with an approved standard. debris.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (4) (5) Existing site levels on a 5 meters grid. shall be removed from the employer‘s premises.263 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing road construction and to existing surfaces.3. trees and hedges which are not specifically noted on the drawings or in the contract for preservation shall be uprooted and burnt or otherwise disposed of.4. Drainage pattern of the area The Contractor shall survey the site of the Control Centre location to obtain details of the above items and shall prepare a site survey plan at a scale of 1: 500 showing the survey results and the proposed layout of the new works. dismantling steel structures Equipments and support steel structures.1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work. The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work.1 Cutting and filling earth Excavation 20. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will be permitted. and resultant contours at a meter vertical interval.2.4 Site formation and up keeping 20.2. After completion of the work contractor should do a complete detail survey of the including all the parts completed to the date of handing over. agreed. lengths and depths shown on the approved drawings and in accordance with BS CP-8004 and BS 6031.1 The whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths. If top layer of soil is not suitable for the construction it shall be removed or stabilised as recommended by the investigator.4.2. which are to be removed shall remove carefully and handed over to the Kotugoda stores. All unwanted materials. The plan shall be sent to the Employer for his approval. Special attention shall be paid to the Ground water table and chemical composition of the ground water and soil in the area. structural details etc. Appropriate laboratory tests shall be carried out on all soil and ground water samples to an extent approved by the Employer. Holes left by uprooting shall be promptly filled with suitable material and compacted.2 Soil Investigations A sub soil Investigation has been arranged by the Employer and a copy of the investigation report will be made available to the Bidder The safe bearing capacity of the sub-strata may be modified at his final design stage when the full site survey and investigation have been completed and the final layout.Section 6 .3 Site Clearance 20. debris. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify correctness by making his own site surveys prior to preparing layout drawings. 20. shall be removed from the employer‘s premises.3. 20. etc.1. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. dismantling. e. handling.g.2. etc.2. transporting and handing over shall be done by the contractor as instructed by the Employer Any damages or losses shall be rectify by the contractor at his own cost. All unwanted materials. Bushes. 20. buildings and other facilities in the area which do not need to be demolished.2 Removing existing equipment.

masonry. in order that work is not affected or interfered with by water entering the excavations. if approved by the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Contractor may excavate by any method considered suitable.10 µ % PASSING Filling for trenches. In foundation bottom 150mm layer of excavation in thickness shall be left undisturbed and subsequently removed only when the concrete is about to be placed in order that softening or deterioration of the surfaces of the bottom of the excavated area by exposure may be avoided as far as possible. They must ensure that the de-watering of excavations can continue during the placing of concrete or the execution of any other works.2. subject to the Employer‘s approval. which may be encountered. Adequate precautions must be taken against washing out of cement and concrete or to prevent the work being disturbed in any way. Arrangements made for dealing with water in excavations shall be approved by the Employer. so as not to inconvenience users of adjacent properties or sites. Materials from the excavation may. The Bidder is to allow in his Bid for the costs of pumping. 20. be used by the Contractor in the construction Works. including rock. No concrete.100 40-70 25-45 8 . The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials. 20.1. The bottom of all excavated areas shall be trimmed. brickwork or other materials shall be placed or built until the surfaces are properly drained.4.Section 6 . de-watering or other methods of dealing with the water during and after excavation. The Contractor shall allow for risk meeting while excavating through any sort of soil.2 De-watering All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean. each layer watered when necessary and well rammed or otherwise Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and shall allow for the use of types of plant most suited for excavation in any location and at any time.1.264 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . SIEVE SIZE 75mm 37.2. Other excavated material shall be back filled where required or deposited where directed anywhere on site. which could be affected by water in excavations.3 Filling and Reinstatement If it is required to fill the land to level the formation level contractor shall get approved the filling material and method of construction before the commencement of the work.4. Water from pumping or other dewatering methods shall be properly drained away from the site or disposed of by tankers. rubbish and offensive matter. levelled and well rammed. Concrete shall not be deposited thereon until the bottom has been inspected and approved by the Employer.22 0 . Material to be used as fill or backfill shall be well graded granular material and shall have a following grading curve. The Contractor is to provide all strutting and shoring necessary for the safe execution of the Works.5mm 10mm 5mm 600 µm 75 µm Note The material shall have a PI < 6 100 85. excavations and levelling of the site shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm un compacted thickness. Surplus materials shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.

and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from deterioration under adverse weather conditions. (3) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the manufacturers. The soil stability of such slops etc. Explosives shall be handled only by currently licensed shot fires. Any formation encountered in the excavations which. Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract. which formed either by cutting or filling. The Contractor shall make good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the end of the period of defects liability at his own expense. All equipment for determination of the density of filled areas shall be supplied by the Contractor. to divert and protect the site in both the short and long-term form flash floods. silt. The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer.5 g per litter when tested in accordance with BS 1377. vegetable or injurious matter and water soluble salts harmful to copper and other metals.. directed or permitted. Where excavations whether in rock or other material. banks or filling during the execution of the Works or during the period of maintenance form any cause whatsoever. and with such materials as approved by the Employer. shall be excavated to an adequate load bearing stratum and replaced with mass concrete.1.2. their use shall comply with the following: (1) All local by-laws and regulations. the Contractor shall execute the necessary remedial work in such manner. All top surfaces of earthwork shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings and embankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes. to prevent the dispersal or material. to a benched profile. Wherever applicable the recommendations contained in the following codes of practice shall be followed in calculations.2 Explosives Explosives may only be used when specified or approved by the Employer. The tendered price is deemed to include for this. detailing and performance of the earthworks and drainage: Earthworks . If approved. 20. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no unauthorised issue or improper use of explosives brought on the Site. (2) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with a separate compartment for detonators. clay. shall be ensured. Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously forming the founding surface.4. Unless otherwise described. (4) When blasting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure.4 Stability of Fill and Embankment The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of embankments.2. peat. on which the fill material will be placed.British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031. The Contractor shall construct where necessary open ditches.265 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . special precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete or cement bound materials to the approval of the Employer.Section 6 . Any fill material used within 500 mm of concrete structures cement bound materials shall have a soluble sulphate content not exceeding 2. in the opinion of the Employer is not sufficiently strong to carry the loads which will be imposed on it. imported filling shall consist of pervious naturally occurring material. culverts.4. Filling shall be imported only from approved areas. at the Contractor‘s expense. free from mud. by adherence to proper safety distances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary. The written approval of the Employer shall be obtained for each location or series of locations where the Contractor wishes to use more than 5 kg of explosives in one blast. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 20. are made to a greater depth than detailed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification compacted to within 95% of the maximum dry density obtained by the use of a Proctor Standard Compaction Test. If any slips occur in the excavations. the intervening space shall be brought up to the proper level in plain concrete at the Contractor‘s expense. etc. bunds. raked and stabilised as protection from erosion to the approval of the Employer.

using suitable materials.2. a cleaning rod shall be drawn through each duct and a No.5. All cable ducts shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients between cable pits. Cable ducts may be pitch fibber. In each case. The ends of the ducts shall be plugged with a wooden plug and the fishing-wires left in the ducts. 20.2.3 Cable Pits Cable pits shall be provided at interval not exceeding 100 meters and also at the bends of all cable ducts. 20.2. All ducts shall be kept clear from earth. Power cable which pass under roads.4. hard standing areas or where they would otherwise be at risk shall be laid in ducts. A 100% additional capacity shall be installed for future use and the whole surrounded in a minimum of 150 mm C15 concrete.5. Main cable trenches shall be rack types with sufficient working space. Cable entries into buildings shall be through ducts or in concrete cable trenches.2 Concrete Beds and Casings Concrete beds and casings to cable ducts and under roads. Trench covers outside buildings shall be of reinforced concrete designed for he maximum likely imposed loads appropriate to their location.. and treated with an approved total weed killer. debris and other obstructions during and after laying.4 Anti Termite soil treatment Anti termite treatment with more than 10 years guaranty shall be done for the control building area including 3m to either side of the building 20.1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts The Contractor is responsible for all civil works required for cable runs between switchgear and building in concrete cable trenches. as directed.2.4. to provide sufficient working space Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Elsewhere the ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material of 150mm minimum bed thickness and 300 mm minimum cover. Special care shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that individual explosions are reduced to such a size as to preclude damage to any buildings or structures.5 Cable Trenches & Ducts 20. Cable entries into buildings shall be sealed to prevent the entry of any water. floors and foundations shall be of lean concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness.2. The formation in areas where stone chipping are to be used shall be well compacted to the approval of the Employer. 20.266 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . buildings.4. Cable entry to the control building shall be provided for future requirements.2. Conduits provided shall be sized to suite the cables provided.5 Land escaping & tree planting Suitable trees shall be planted in available vacant areas where necessary grassing to be done to protect erosion.5. plastic or other material approved by the Employer and obtained from an approved manufacturer. PVC. 20.3 Earth retaining structures Retaining structures or turfing to be done to side slopes as specified in BS 6031.Section 6 . in-situ concrete or precast concrete chamber rings and cover slabs.2. All other main cable trenches shall have additional capacity of 30% future use.4. vermin. etc. Cable pits shall be sized according to their depth. Expansion joints shall be provided in suitable lengths. 8 gauge galvanised iron-fishing wire drawn in after the rod. Cable pits may be constructed of bricks. 20.6 Surface chipping Stone chipping used for surfacing are to be clean hard crushed stone graded from 16 . the material shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of this Specification. Concrete cable trenches shall be adequately sloped and adequate capacity of drainage system shall be provided to soak water. 20. Stone chipping shall be laid and lightly compacted to a minimum finished thickness of 100 mm.40 mm.2. concrete blocks. After the cable ducts have been completed. animals or property on or off the Site. used in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification that no damage is caused to persons. dust. car parking areas.

The expected compacting factor and slump.1 The Contractor shall submit not less than 3 weeks before the commencement of manufacture of preliminary trial design mixes the following information to the Employer in respect of each grade of concrete. When constructed of block work. Where precast concrete rings are used they shall be surrounded with concrete 150 mm thick. A clean dry mixer shall be used to make the trial mixes and the first batch shall be discarded. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Grade of concrete Title of particular trial mix. If the proposals not be approved by the Employer. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc.5 N/mm . they shall be rendered internally with sand/cement mortar finished with smooth vertical surfaces. transported and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. stored. The cubes shall be made. At least four weeks before commencing any Concreting in the Works.2. The grading of the aggregates. the Concreting plant and the means of transport to be employed in the Works shall be used to make the trial mixes and to transport them a representative distance. The results of the seven-day cube tests shall be used to given an indication for future use of the strengths likely to be achieved at 28 days.2.6 Concrete Work. The test shall be carried out in a laboratory shall be approved by the Employer. The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix should be determined. Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing. Full details of the proposed site quality control. 20.1 Concrete Work Concrete Trial Mixes: 20. the Contractor shall make trial mixes using samples of aggregates and cements typical of those to be used.6. For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and one tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of error in dispensing. The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete. If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of concrete a batch shall be made with a double dose of the additive. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven days and three at an age of 28 days. Power cables shall be laid on and surrounded with sand fill in unlined trenches. If possible. Pre-cast concrete marker posts shall be provided along cable runs at 5 meters centres and changes in direction.2. The Contractor shall also confirm his proposed testing regime and acceptance criteria for the Preliminary Trial Mixes. Pre-cast concrete cable protection covers & PVC marker tape shall be provided over the full width and length of cables in sand filled trenches. and then the Contractor shall comply with the paragraph on preliminary test cubes and the two following paragraphs. cured. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows: For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches. They shall not be used to satisfy the 28 days preliminary test cube strength requirements. The trial design mix proportions shall be approved if the average strength of a set of 9 cubes tested at 2 28 days exceeded the specified characteristic compressive strength by current margin less 3. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc.6.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification and access for maintenance.Section 6 .1. Galvanised malleable iron steps are to be provided in all cable pits over one meter deep and built in as work proceeds. it may be taken as having the smaller of the values given by (1) or (2). Foundations & Piling Work 20.267 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

64 time the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision. Total cement contents in the mix shall be limited to avoid excessive risk of thermal and shrinkage 3 cracking. When truck-mixed concrete is used. with their anticipated average strength. shall in general be used for all concrete work in foundations and plinths and in concrete structures covered by soil.75 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above.2. 10 or 15. Such approval shall be subject to the execution. a smaller 2 margin but not less than 7. Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above. The Contractor shall inform the Employer of his intention to carry out such tests and the time and place of the tests at least 24 hours before they take place. However. Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered without the prior approval of the Employer except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of the mix as required to take account of permitted variations in the materials.2 Materials Cements 20. or 7. which batched off the Site.6.1.Section 6 . the margin for the initial mix design should 2 be taken as two-thirds of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7. water shall be added under supervision. either at the Site or at the central batching plant. whereas Portland cement. (2) 1.2. when the required characteristic strength approaches the maximum possible strength of concrete made with a particular aggregate.6. Portland cement. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates. The Employer shall if he so desires be present at all preliminary tests.2 Ready-Mixed Concrete Ready-mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328. Type I.5 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. or 15 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. type 2. 20. The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously. Cement shall be of recent manufacture and shall be used within a period of 3 months from production.5 N/mm may have to be permitted for the initial mix design. but not less than 1/3 of the 2 characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7. unless a longer time is agreed by the Employer.268 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . to the Employer‘s satisfaction. may be used only with the agreement of the Employer and comply with all requirements of the Contract. 20 or 15. but not less than 1/6 of the characteristic strength for 2 concrete of grade 7.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under similar supervision.2. as agreed by the Employer but in no circumstances shall water be added in transit. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer. may be used at places not exposed to chemical aggressiveness. The proportioning of mixes for durability will be primarily controlled through the specified limits on free Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It shall always be in the range of 350 .400 kg/m unless otherwise approved by the Employer. 20. The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note together with the weight of the constituents of each mix. truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328 part 3. of trial mix procedures set out herein.1 The type of cement to be used shall depend on the constructional circumstances and on the prevailing local conditions.6. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient data are available to satisfy (1) or (2) above. may be used only after the Employer‘s explicit written approval to replace the type V cement. At each test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate minimum specified in the Contractor‘s designs. or truck mixers.2. Moderate sulphate resistant cement as per ASTM C 150. Type V. which must be based on the satisfactory results of these preliminary tests. or 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (1) 1. 10 or 15. Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval full details of the mixes he proposes to use.

The cement shall be tested to determine the total alkali content in accordance with ASTM C114-69 (Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement) or BS 4550: Part 2 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall be calculated from the formula given in BS 5328 part 4 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall not exceed 0. BS EN 196-6. under supervision. If delivered in bulk an approved type of cement silo shall be used. of which there shall be 20 to the ton. 20. The Contractor shall test such samples as specified in this document.6% of the weigh of cement.4 Aggregates Before the Employer can approve any aggregate source. Cement in bags shall be unloaded under cover and stored in a well-ventilated and weatherproof building used exclusively for this purpose.2m these proportions shall not exceed 10%. the manufacturer's statement of Specification and test certificate together with date of manufacture of any cement to be used. The Contractor shall.2. obtain for him the manufacturer‘s test certificate for any consignment as soon as possible after delivery. for items thicker than 1. The cement shall be delivered to site packed in sealed bags or proper containers. manufacture and source of the cement which he proposes to use in the Works and the method of delivery. BS 4450 and ASTMC 186. (1) Petrological group of rock Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the Employer reserves the right to take samples and order any additional / retests in accordance with BS EN 196-7 : 1992. The Bidder shall indicate on the schedule C the brand name.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification W/C ratio. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for deliveries to be made sufficiently frequently to ensure freshness and in sufficient quantities to ensure that there is no suspension or interruption of the concreting work at any time. the Contractor shall furnish the following data. The Contractor may use cement delivered in bulk.269 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . those of micro-silica shall not exceed 8%. For every 50 tones of cement delivered to site and whenever required by the Employer the Contractor shall take samples. All cement shall be obtained form the same source for any particular part of a structure. The above restriction shall be waived if the proposed aggregate is proved without doubt to be nonreactive. Storage shall be arranged so that the cement is used in order to delivery. The approximate weight of the cement shall be legibly marked on each bag. Each consignment shall be stacked separately so as to permit easy access for inspection and a record shall be kept so that each consignment may be identified.2. The W/C ratio shall always lie in the range of 0. In mix designs with an emphasis on durability.45. Proportions of slag shall normally not exceed 60%. ground granulated blast furnace slag as per BS 6699 or EN 197 or micro-silica may be incorporated in the mix. or delivered to the site. the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to CEB. The Contractor shall not use cement varying from that used in the preparation of trial mixes until any further trial mixes required by the Employer have been made and tested and shown to comply with the specification. when required by the Employer. Before supplying cement to Site or receiving ready-mixed concrete. bearing the name of the brand and manufacturer and the number of the consignment.6. Appropriate use shall be made of approved admixtures to simultaneously meet the requirements for W/C ratio and workability.6.3 Test Certificates and Samples All cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the requirements of the appropriate specification. The floor of the building shall be at least 150 mm off the ground and an air space shall be left between the floor and bottom layer of bags. from the cement stored on. The Contractor shall not place the order for cement before the Employer‘s approval is obtained.Section 6 .36-0. Each consignment of cement shall be brought to the site in sufficient time to allow any tests to be carried out before the cement is used. delivery arrangements shall be to the Employer‘s approval and each delivery must be accompanied by a manufacturer‘s test certificate. 20.

Physical Requirements for aggregates shall be as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) The weight of voided shells in fine aggregate shall not exceed 5%. Fine aggregate shall contain no more than 0. Heaps of fine aggregate shall be capable of draining freely. Should these figures be exceeded the aggregate may still be considered acceptable in this respect provided the total sodium chloride concentration is not greater than 0.1% by weight of chlorides (as NaCl) and coarse aggregate more than 0. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until. The sources for all aggregates shall be approved by the Employer. 200) shall not exceed 5% by weight of coarse aggregates or 10% by weight for fine aggregates.32% by weight of cement in the mix. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the rock shall be checked for surface alteration to hardpan. The apparent specific gravity of aggregates as determined by an approved test. Rigorous initial physical inspection is essential. and shall be tested in accordance with BS 812. Such rocks are also prone to other undesirable characteristics including pockets of clay. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed 5% as measured in accordance with BS 812 or similar standard. The aggregates shall be stored at mixer positions in such a manner that intermingling of different sizes and types of aggregates is prevented. chalk or other friable material. The weight of the clay and fine silt fraction (smaller than ASTM sieve No. irrespective of the origin of the chloride. (5) (6) Where quarries with aggregate from bedrock. This may affect the surface for well over a meter depth and result in salt concentrations near the surface. shall not be less than 2. in the opinion of the Employer. The stockpiles are to be protected from rubbish or windblown dust.03%. from which the loss over 5 cycles shall not exceed 10% for fine aggregates or 12% for coarse aggregates. it has drained sufficiently to ensure proper control of the water/cement ratio.5% by weight of acid soluble sulphates (as S03). salt. Los angles abrasion shall not exceed 37%. The Chemical Requirements for aggregates shall be: (1) (2) (3) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis. especially limestone of the Dolomite type. The soundness of all aggregates shall be proved by a sodium sulphate test in accordance with ASTM C88-73. Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0.Section 6 . such as in BS 812.270 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Rock type within the group Shape Surface texture Silt content Grading curves Specific gravity Impact value Water absorption Soundness Salt content Alkali reactivity The fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with BS 882.5.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . No concrete construction may be commenced until this data is approved by the Employer.5 Water The water used for making concrete.4.6. The plant shall be maintained regularly and stand by plant shall be available to avoid any delay in the progress of the works. Testing is to be carried out at an independent laboratory approved by the Employer or else on the site in the presence of the Employer‘s where approved by the. 20. The Contractor shall carry out frequent tests to the satisfaction of the Employer to check the relationship of the strength of concrete cured under site conditions to that cured under laboratory conditions. mortar and grout shall be clean. 20. good workability and high strength.7 Plant The concreting plant shall be suitably in type. The mix water shall be continually monitored for salt content and the concrete mix designed accordingly to limit total salt content. The water should comply with the requirements of SLS 522.2. Such testing shall include those tests form BS 812 as are considered useful by the Employer for comparison with the results of the initial set of tests but the Contractor shall allow for the full range to carried out.2.9 Mixing All concrete except where specifically permitted by the Employer in writing shall be mixed in weigh batch mixing machines.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. to draw samples of aggregates from stockpiles on the Site or any other location to be indicated by the Employer. The strength requirements for each grade of concrete proposed in the design shall be proven by means of preliminary trial tests as specified in BS 5328 and BS 1881.271 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS 812 or to American standards when no appropriate BS exist.2. At least 7 weeks before concrete construction is programmed to commence the Contractor shall submit for approval all the details of concrete mix designs for each proposed grade of concrete.6. The amount of water shall be sufficient to ensure through hydration.6. The minimum cement content and the maximum free water-cement ratio shall be in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 5328. 20. The performance of the plant and its disposition shall be to the satisfaction of the Employer. For each new source of aggregate and for each class of aggregate to be used sampling and testing shall be done at the rate of six samples and set of test for each new source and each new class. at any time.6.2. The machines shall have a large water storage tank with a gauge or that a predetermined quantity of water can be injected direct into the mixer drum. In computing the quantity of water to be added. The dry concrete ingredients shall be mixed until a uniform colour is obtained after the addition of the water the concrete shall be mixed for a further 4 minutes or until a uniform colour is achieved. vegetable or organic matter or any other dexterous substance in suspension or solution. capacity and design for its purpose.6. 20.8 Concrete Strength Requirements All concrete mixes shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5328 and BS 8110 as designated on drawings approved by the Employer.6. The total water in the mix shall not exceed the amount used in the trial mix.1 Sampling and testing The Employer shall have the right to request the Contractor.2. fresh and free from injurious amounts of soil. The Contractor shall allow for the whole range of tests to be carried out. For routine sampling and testing from an approved source the rate shall be sample per 50 cubic meter of aggregate to be used or sample per month whichever is greater. 20.6 Admixtures Admixtures shall not be used without the approval of the Employer.2. due account must be taken of the water contained in the aggregates. Before the use of any admixture can be approved the Contractor must prove by trial mix procedures that the concrete will in no way be adversely affected even when twice the recommended dose is batched. and permissible deviation proposed for each grade of concrete to be used. The Contractor‘s designs and drawings shall show clearly the characteristic strengths.

formwork or other embedded items. If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given. free from honeycombing.6. in the opinion of the Employer. in the Specification or as directed by the Employer. within one hour of mixing. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction joints.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The contractor shall take all precautions to the satisfaction of the Employer to protect the concrete from the injurious effects of the elements. or less as directed by the Employer Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Placing shall be continuous between specified or approved construction joints. (b) the workability (c) the aggregate size (d) type of cement and (e) time of batching of the concrete. be repeated with modified mixes until the appearance of the concrete after striking the mould is acceptable to the Employer. surface crazing or excessive dusting. This procedure shall.272 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . are inferior to the standards laid down in later clauses in this section. Concrete shall not be allowed to fall freely more than 1. All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from standing water.5 meters except with the approval of the Employer. if necessary. the cleanliness. approval shall again be obtained from the Employer. to prevent segregation damage and distortion of the reinforcement. The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on approved drawings. These tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation and suitable spouts or baffles should be provided to obviate segregation during discharge. and which shall not. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours. immediately before the placing of concrete. segregation or loss of ingredients. The samples to be tested shall be obtained from the batches used for the preliminary test cubes. or such other procedure as approved by the Employer. The mould shall be filled in the presence of the Employer with concrete of the same mix and batch from which the preliminary test cubes are made and shall be compacted in the same manner with the same equipment as are proposed for the Works. and ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing. alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces.2. In order to satisfy the Employer that adequate for the requirements of the Specification. other embedded items and formwork.6.11 Transportation The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the Works by means that shall be approved by the Employer and which shall prevent adulteration. 20. Where chutes are used to convey the concrete. caused by impact.Section 6 . When specific workability is called for a check it shall be maintained by measuring slump at the rate of one test for each 10 cubic meters of concrete or three tests for each day of concreting. In addition the Contractor shall supply for each of the grades of concrete a section of framework complete with reinforcement fixed in position and generally representative of the sections commonly to be employed in the Works. and the adequacy and condition of plant. the Contractor shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixes required elsewhere in this Section. All small concrete pours shall normally be carried out in the late afternoon unless otherwise permitted by Employer. The capacity of this trial section of formwork shall be at least half a batch of concrete but in any case not less than 1/4 cubic meter. Upon arrival at the place of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to the Employer a chit from the concrete batcher stating (a) the grade of concrete.2. The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position and in such a manner as to avoid segregation displacement of the reinforcement.10 Workability The concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles of the framework and around reinforcement without segregation of the materials or bleeding of free water at the surface. Except where otherwise directed. concrete shall not be placed unless the Employer is present or he has previously examined and approved the positioning. The formwork shall comply with the requirements of this Specification for formwork. Where pneumatic placers are used the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitable baffles or hoppers where necessary. 20. fixing and condition of the reinforcement and of any other items to be embedded. after which it shall be used as the standard for that grade. On striking the framework it shall present a face. The Employer shall be given 24 hours notice in order that he may check the work. which is uniform.

it shall be compacted with the assistance of vibrators. The joints shall in every way satisfy the requirement of the Employer. Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. shall be avoided. without displacing them. Vibrators shall not keep damage to formwork or other parts of the structure. when deposited. the whole surface shall be thoroughly roughened. When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation. Vibrators shall penetrate the fully depth of the layer and where concrete is placed over previously placed concrete not more than 4 hours old the vibrators shall enter and revibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers are well knitted together. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer when the time shall be within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 20 minutes of discharge from the agitator. against the joint. so far as is practicable. Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 1 and 10 hours after compaction. 20. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer. It shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and laitance and washed with Water immediately before placing the fresh concrete. Except where otherwise agreed by the Employer. this discontinuity shall form a construction joint.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification depending upon the mix.000 cycles per minute and external vibrators not less than 3. type of cement and weather conditions. When not indicated on the drawings the following generally rule shall apply: Joints in columns are to be made at the underside of floor members and at floor levels. shall have a temperature of not less than 5 C and not more than 32 C. They shall be inserted at such distances apart or applied in such a manner as will ensure that the concrete being placed. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Successive layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly worked together.6.000 cycles per minute. 20. Horizontal joints above sprays or openings. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable conditions shall be on site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns. the position and arrangement of which shall be indicated on the drawings and approved by the Employer. Haunches and column capital are to be considered as part of and continuous with the floor or roof.Section 6 .2. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10. All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. Concrete. surface laitance or leakage through formwork. except where otherwise instructed. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used. Care shall be taken to prevent offsetting of the joint and to ensure water-tightness. and be fully detailed on drawings prior to submission for approval. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer. It shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork and around reinforcement and other embedded items. or displace the reinforcement or other embedded items.2. contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided. which has set. Whenever the placing of the concrete is discontinued other than at the exposed faces. approved power driven vibrators of the immersion type shall be used. Construction joints are to be made only along a horizontal or vertical plane except that in the case of inclined or curved members they shall be at right angles to the principal axis.6.13 Construction Joints Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints. Floors joints in the floor system are to be located at or near the quarter points of the span in slabs and beams. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. which shall be well compacted.12 Compaction 0 0 The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer. Over-vibration. Walls Vertical joints away from corners. no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours.273 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . When work is resumed adjacent to a surface. causing segregation. concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compact depth not exceeding 450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 300 mm in all other cases.

the curing membrane shall be applied immediately after removing the formwork. they shall be held securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during Concreting. prior to the commencement of Concreting.6.6.2. Expansion joints shall be filled with bitumen impregnated fibber board to full depth and width. slabs in excess of 6 meters in length and/or width and wall exceeding 6 meters in length shall not be poured in one operation and subsequent adjacent bays shall not be concreted within 7 days.1 meter in width may be left at 6 meters intervals. The protection shall be applied as soon as practicable after completion of placing by a method to be approved by the Employer. upon the sequence of placing concrete and the positions of vertical and horizontal joints. cleaned and bent to its correct shape. drying winds.Section 6 .14 Construction Bays The Contractor shall agree with the Employer. cold. compressible material. Where necessary the reinforcement in existing concrete shall be exposed. Immediately before new concrete is poured. They shall be straight and coated with approved bond breaking compound.15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing Existing concrete shall be broken out as described or directed and scrabbled to form a suitable key for the new concrete. 20.2. The temperature of curing water shall 0 be same as the concrete + 5 C. the shrinkage gaps shall not be concreted until concrete on all sides is at least 7 days old.2.6. Dowel bars shall be plain mild steel bars conforming to BS 4449.17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather In hot weather the Contractor shall present for the Employer‘s approval his proposals for dealing with the following problems: (1) (2) (3) (4) Reduced workability Excessive Plastic shrinkage Rapid strength gain but possible low final strength Rapid drying-out of concrete Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All dimensions must be shown on Drawings prior to submission for approval. when cold.6. or other approved compound. The infilling will be permitted to use as permanent formwork only for second casting. On vertical surfaces. 20. In the light of experience the Employer may consider the above pour size limits to be excessive and will have the authority to reduce them. shrinkage gaps of up to 0. which shall consist essentially of 66% of 200 penetrating bitumen blended hot with 14% light creosote oil and. The 2 maximum area of any pour shall be 100 m .274 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . rain or running water. In general. The packing used within the cap shall be an inert. brought to the consistency of paint by the addition of 20% solvent naphtha. filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulphide polymer sealant to the manufacturers instructions. General concrete shall be wet-cured for at least 7 days with a further 4 days of dry protection.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. No concrete shall be allowed to become alternately wet and dry.16 Curing Concrete shall be protected during the first stages of hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine. Where dowel bars are indicated on the Drawings forming part of a joint. before any Concreting work commences. 20. a cement wash shall be applied to the existing concrete faces.2. The Contractor shall put forward his proposals for curing concrete to the Employer for approval. As an alternative to alternate bay construction. Plastic caps used in expansion joints shall be rigid and securely fixed to the dowel to prevent the ingress of concrete during casting of the slab. New reinforcement shall be securely wired to the existing. whether shown or not on the drawings. Expansion joints shall be fully detailed on construction drawings before submission for approval. Where the fibber board is exposed it shall be cutback for a depth of at least 2 cm from the chambered edge.

For the first 10 days that a particular grade of concrete is produced. The number of slump tests shall initially be twice that normally required. In hot weather concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm and internal mechanical vibrators shall be used. Air shall not be permitted to circulate between concrete and curing materials. and water tanks and pipes shall be insulated to ensure that the temperature of concrete when deposited 0 shall not exceed 32 C.2. shall be shielded from the rays of the absorption by the surfaces of water from the fresh concrete.6.275 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Concrete transporters shall be kept as cool as practicable.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with facilities for materials testing on Site.6. three samples shall be taken Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. With the approval of the Employer admixtures may be employed to retard setting time or enhance workability. 20. 20. test and give his opinion on such materials. Half of them shall be cured under site conditions in order to ascertain the relationship between site-cured samples and lab-cured samples.3 Curing All concrete shall be covered for at least 14 days after placing and kept continuously wet for the initial 7 0 days. and whenever deemed necessary by the Employer. If after this. and the temperature of every batch of concrete shall be recorded as it is deposited at the work place.6. Air temperature shall be measured every two hours.2. the materials which rejected by the Employer shall be immediately removed from the Site by the Contractor.6. the Contractor shall double the number of test cubes made.4 Testing Initially. or where there is a lapse of two weeks or more between successive pours of the same grade of concrete.17.17. the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. The Contractor shall have the right to sample. etc. If the proposals are not approved by the Employer.1 Mixing Aggregate stockpiles shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun or cooled by spraying with water. The temperature of curing water shall be within 5 C of that of the concrete. shall follow closely behind final tamping. The facilities may be those normally used by the Contractor.17. No concrete shall be batched until formwork is ready and all reinforcement fixed in place approved by the Employer.Section 6 . do not meet with his approval shall not be used in the work. including reinforcement. Due to rapid stiffening in hot weather all clean-up operations such as application of resin cure membranes and dust reducers.17.6. All testing facilities on site shall be calibrated at regular intervals in the presence of the Employer.2. the aggregates and 80% of the required water may be batched off-site with the cement and remaining water being added on site not more than 15 minutes before the pour commences. Concrete batched off-site shall be transported to site by truck mixer. Alternatively.2 Placing Placing shall not commence until sufficient standby pumps and vibrators are on site to cope with breakdowns. The Employer shall have the right to order that any materials which.2. Testing methods are to be in accordance with the relevant BS or ASTM standard except as approved or requested by the Employer. The mixer rotating only after it arrives on site.17. 20. or induce early bleeding etc. against which the concrete is to be placed. Where necessary the surfaces.2. and surface finishing. The area of each concrete pour frontage shall be kept to a minimum and suitable means shall be provided to avid premature stiffening of concrete placed in contact with hot dry surfaces.5 Works Test Cubes Before commencing any Concreting work the Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed testing regime for the Works concrete. 20.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification on each day and three cubes shall be made from each sample. After the initial 10 days. of their grade and of all tests cubes.    Slump tests are to be executed for every truck load supplied during concreting and as per the Employer's instructions.2.the last two cubes of each set may be tested in case of failure of a cube.17. 20. for water penetration testing (to DIN 1048) 4 Nos.6 Compliance of Works Test Cubes with Specification When submitting proposed testing regimes the Contractor shall also detail his proposed acceptance criteria for the Employer‘s approval.The calibration test reports of testing machines and details of the qualifications of all laboratory staff shall be submit for approval if requested by the Employer. which . Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Employer at weekly intervals or upon request by the Employer. Cores.e. cured. Bimonthly or for every 750 m of concrete cast. Reports of all tests made shall be supplied direct from the laboratory to the Employer within 24 hours of the cubes being tested. 150 mm.) characteristic strength = 20 N/mm ). Up-to-date records shall be kept by the Contractor at the Works of positions in the Works of all batches of concrete. shall be taken for water absorption testing (to BS 1881) 3 Nos. Two shall be tested at 7 days and the other at 28 days. 200x200x120mm thick. stored and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. The compression strength tests shall be carried out after seven (7) days for the first two cubes of each set. The laboratory must provide evidence that its equipment and procedures comply with BS EN 10002 and BS 1881. 75mm diameter and 75 mm long. 3 3 - The cubes shall be made. blocks.Section 6 . the Bidder/Contractor shall prepare the following for durability testing. The tests shall be carried out in a testing laboratory approved by the Employer.276 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . with the provision that at least one sample shall be taken on each day that concrete of that grade is used. and after 28 days for the second two cubes of the set. Compliance with the characteristic strength shall be assumed if the conditions given in both (1) and (2) are met: (1) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above (i.) characteristic strength = 15 N/mm ). Concrete temperature is to be recorded at the arrival of concrete at Site. one being tested at 7 days and the remaining two at 28 days.may be carried out through the concrete supplier: Rapid test for chlorides Rapid test for sulphates A Trial panel. 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above 2 2 2 2 2 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Testing of concrete delivered to or mixed at site shall include:  One set of at least six (6) test cubes for every 20 m or every daily pour of concrete or as directed by the Employer. 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below (i.after approval of the Employer . provided concreting is proceeding. samples of designed mixed shall be taken at the reduced rate given in Table bellow. Three cubes shall be made from each sample. cores and other specimens taken from them. When this is not forthcoming the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. The rules of compliance for Works cubes are different to those for Trial Mixes.e. for rapid chloride permeability testing (to AASHTO T-277) /curing of samples shall be as close to the current Site practice as possible. The Employer on site shall have the authority to stop all further concrete work until acceptable test results are forthcoming.6. (2) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic strength minus. from which at 28 days 3 Nos. and – if requested . cubes.

in the opinion of the Employer. Such action is subject to the Employer‘s satisfaction and approval. The Employer may request the Contractor to provide sample panels of formwork for approval. When a test result fails to comply with [2). Prior to the preparation for testing. cylindrical core specimens shall be cut from the hardened concrete in the Works for the purpose of examination and testing. The Employer shall approve the cutting equipment and the method of doing the work. the cement content shall not be less than 95% of the specified minimum or more than 105% of the specified maximum. Before proceeding with similar work the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval details of action proposed to ensure future concrete to be placed in the Works would comply with the Specification. the concrete fails to meet the specified requirements in other respects.6. The use of mould oil or other material to facilitate this shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. The forms shall conform accurately to the required shape. If no satisfactory remedial measures are proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer then the Employer shall order the removal of all work not complying with the Specification at the Contractor‘s expense. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the concrete in that part of the Works of which. Compliance criteria remain the same irrespective of varying rates of sampling of the same grade concrete in different structures. If the specified requirements have not been met the Contractor shall propose such remedial action as may be required. If the strength of the specimen is less than the appropriate specified minimum crushing strength or if. position and level. 2 The quantity of concrete represented by any group of four consecutive test results shall include the batches from which the first and last samples were taken together with all intervening batches. subject to the tolerance specified and to the standards of finish of hardened concrete as specified later this Section.2. The materials and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be approved by the Employer. ducts and holding down boltholes must be so constructed that it can be easily collapsed to facilitate withdrawal after the initial set of the concrete. the cement content shall not be less than 90% of the specified minimum or more than 110% of the specified maximum. The whole or part of the ties shall be capable of being removed so that no part remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer the surface of the concrete than the specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. etc. the specimens shall be made available for examination of the Employer. The top of the shuttering shall be suitably covered to prevent entry of excess grout. The Employer also makes recourse to such non-destructive means of testing as ultrasonic pulsing and Schmidt rebound hammers.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below.277 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . materials used for curing. 20.18 Formwork Forms shall be so designed and constructed that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly compacted. Any holes left after the removal of ties shall be filled unless otherwise directed by the Employer with concrete or mortar of approved composition. When concrete is to be vibrated. All forms shall be removed without damage to the concrete. Testing of the core shall be in accordance with approved standards. it is a sample will be considered not to comply with the specified requirements. only the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk. Where a minimum or maximum cement content of a designed mix is specified and compliance is assessed by observation of the bathing or from auto graphic record. As and where directed by the Employer. Where compliance of cement content is assessed from the results of analysis tests on fresh concrete. at the Contractor‘s expense.Section 6 . special care shall be taken to maintain the stability of the formwork and the tightness of the joints during vibrating operations. The Contractor‘s proposed method for the construction and fixing of the formwork for bolthole pockets shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before construction. All formwork for pits.

plywood or metal panels may be used if they are free from defects likely to detract from the general appearance of the finished surface. The Employer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to strike any formwork.4 This finish is identical to Type F. polystyrene or other method approved by the Employer. sills. They shall be fixed to the structure by approved means and the joints between them shall be made tight with mortar or other means of preventing leakage.2 finish shall be faced with wrought and thickened board with square edges arranged in a uniform pattern. Whenever possible joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide with architectural feature. All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed.1 Formed Finishes for Concrete This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be placed. The formwork may be struck when the concrete has in the opinion of the Employer attained a compressive strength of not less 2 than 10 N/mm or twice the stress to which it will then be subjected whichever is the greater. To achieve this finish.2 This finish is for surfaces.1 (1) Type F. Any defective concrete finish will be rejected. The time at which the formwork is struck shall be Contractor‘s responsibility. which are permanently exposed to view but where the highest standard of finish is not required. (2) Type F. Joints between the board and panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise directed. as a means of making good will not be permitted. Such slabs or blocks shall have an exposed surface of the quality shown on the Drawing sand as specified.3 except that internal metal ties are permitted. which will prevent the loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated. Forms to provide a Type F.6 of BS 8110.278 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . (3) Type F.3 This finish is for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good appearance and alignment are of special importance. expanded metal. the formwork shall be face with plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. surface discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied by methods approved by the Employer. natural stone. Alternatively. Suitable joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the plane of the sheets. Plastering of defective concrete. Permanent forms shall be constructed of slabs or blocks of precast concrete. This finish shall be such as to require no general filling of surface pitting.6.Section 6 . which shall be free of board marks.3 finish. This treatment shall be made immediately after removing the formwork. The sheets shall be arranged in an approved uniform pattern. but fines. except that in the case of minor porosity in the surface the Employer may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and sand mortar of the same richness as in the concrete.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Solid timber must not be used for forming holding down boltholes. The Contractor shall state precisely on his plans which of the type of finished described hereunder he intends to use in the various locations. window heads or drainage in direction of the surface. brickwork or other approved material as directed. The use of internal metal ties shall not be allowed.2. 20. Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit forms and if props are to be left in place when the soffit forms are removed these props shall not be disturbed during the striking. (4) Type F. Bolthole former may be made of plywood. Formwork shall consist of sawn boards. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.18. sheet metal or any other suitable material. using the proposed bolthole former. In the absence of cube test results the minimum periods before striking form work for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement shall be according to the table 6. who may require the Contractor to carry out a test pour. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels will not be permitted for Type F. The Employer may at his discretion order the defects to be cut out and made good. The joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no blemish or mark is imparted to the finished surface.

It is also the first stage for finished Type U. Mild steel and high tensile steel are to be stored separately. topping or cement mortar beds to receive paving and on exposed surfaces or paving where superior finish is not required. The surface shall be troweled under firm pressure and left free from trowel marks. mortar earth.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.2. The Contractor shall provide any chairs or other subsidiary reinforcement necessary to keep the reinforcement in its correct position.6. Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free from pitting. or alternatively off the site. loose rust.3. (3) Type U. The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked upon during the placing of the concrete or other operation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. High tensile steel shall only be heated or welded when the manufacturer given written guarantees as to its subsequent performance. or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. The shapes of the bends and lengths must comply as specified on the Drawings and Bending Schedules as approved by the Employer. 0 0 Mild steel shall be bent at temperatures in the range 5 C to 100 C. by an approved method.Section 6 .1 Uniformed Finishes to Concrete This is a screeded finish for surfaces of roads or of foundations. surface bed and slabs to receive thin flexible sheet and tile paving bedded in adhesive and seatings for bearing plates and the like where the metal is in direct contact with the concrete. topes of walls.2. paint or any material which may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement.2 and U. 20. surplus concrete being struck off by straight edge immediately after compaction. Reinforcement shall be stored clear of the ground on sufficient supports to prevent distortion of 0the bars.19 Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be one of the following: (1) (2) (3) (4) High Yield steel bars complying with BS 4449 (or 4482) or Hot rolled or cold deformed bars complying with BS 4449. Bars greater than 32 mm diameter will not generally be used. subsequent stages of construction. Reinforcement may be bent on site. The concrete cover over such subsidiary reinforcement shall not be less than that over the reinforcement generally. or approved by the Employer. Care shall be taken that the concrete is worked no more than is necessary to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks. Troweling shall not commence until the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess laitance from being worked to the surface.2 This is a floated finish for surfaces of beds and slabs to received mastic paving or block or tile paving where a hard smooth steel-trowel led surface is not required. The Contractor shall arrange for bending equipment suitable for bending both mild steel and intermediate grade bars. oil. bonded concrete.18. Floating shall be done by hand or machine. slabs and structural members to be covered by backfill. grease.3 This is a hard smooth steel-trowel led finish for surfaces of concrete paving. mill scale. One tension test and one bond test shall be made for each lot of 50 tones of less supplied for the permanent Works. Welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved.6. (2) Type U.18.2. exposed surfaces of engine and plant foundations and in the vicinity of holding down bolt chases. copings and other members exposed to weathering. 20.6.279 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Surface Treatments Where concrete is to be treated with sodium silicate or a similar dust preventive coating this must be carried out within 14 days of the Concreting of the foundation and be applied in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions. The finishing operations shall consist of levelling and screeding the concrete to produce a uniform plane or ridged surface. beds. The Contractor shall supply the Employer with a certificate for each consignment from the steel manufacturers showing that the steel meets the requirements of the Specification.2 (1) Type U.

Bending of reinforcement shall be carried out round a former having a diameter of at least four times the diameter of the bar.6. Fabric reinforcement shall be delivered to site only in flat sheets. The Employer shall have the right to select at any time samples of steel reinforcement for testing in accordance with the relevant approved standard. cranks and other shapes of reinforcement shall be to the dimensions specified.6. 20. Concrete cover to all reinforcement (including stirrups) shall be as specified in BS 8110 and BS 8004. The Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned bending Schedules giving the location and bending of every bar shown on the drawings. flats.6. If such conditions are evident. an increase in volume due to oxidation) shall not be allowed. inert and capable of supporting the reinforcement in its correct position with the required cover without deforming. only an additive approved by the Employer is to be incorporated in the concrete mix in the proportions according to the manufacturer‘s recommendations. The bending dimensions shall comply with BS 4466 unless otherwise specified on the bending schedules. 20. the Contractor shall submit full details to the Employer for his approval. Reinforcing bars shall be tied together at every intersection using 16 SWG soft pliable annealed steel wires. Drawing showing the foundation bolt arrangement shall be approved by the Employer and sent to site with the foundation bolt assemblies and template in good time for being built into the foundations. Unless otherwise stated on the Bending Schedules all bars shown will be dimensioned in accordance with the national or international standard to be approved by the Employer. In addition.2. Bends.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Mesh reinforcement shall be fixed flat in the works over the whole of the areas indicated on the approved drawings. and that no special resin additives or similar are necessary. the cover should never be less than the diameter of the main bar or nominal maximum size of the aggregate. They shall be rigid. Areas of fabric reinforcement shall be net with no allowance included for laps or waste.22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant No grouting shall commence without the written approval of the Employer. washer plates. otherwise all bars shall be truly straight. anchor angle. 20. Minimum compressive and flexural strengths of the non-shrink grouts shall be as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. may be used.2. which will have a deleterious effect on reinforced concrete. At least 12 weeks before and grouting is due to commence. which shall be either cementitious or epoxy grouts. Loose small pieces of fabric shall only be used where they are essential for fitting into small confined parts of the Works.21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground The Contractor is to ascertain whether or not the sub-strata contain any corrosive qualities. Grouts deriving their non-shrink properties from metal oxidising (i. e.6. British Standard 4466. Steel templates shall be used to position the anchor bolts.2.20 Foundation Bolts The foundations bolts shall be mild steel or High strength steel of an approved manufacture and shall be fitted with tubes.280 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. Before plant grouting commences the Contractor shall check that the proposed methods and materials are acceptable.Section 6 .23 Grout under Base Plates Only non-shrink. non-gaseous grouts. Cover blocks used for the correct positioning of reinforcement shall be of a type approved by the Employer. Adjoining sheets of mesh shall overlap by at least 300 mm. They shall not impair the finish on the concrete no cause the formwork to deform locally. Immediately prior to Concreting all reinforcement shall be wire brushed to remove all wind-blown contaminates such as salt.g. 20.e. double nuts etc.

Part 116 and BS 6319. On the site from which the grout is to be poured forms shall be at least 150 mm high in order to provide a head to placing.281 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Cement to be used for concrete piles shall be selected according to the recommendations of the soil investigations report.6.2. All cements are to be in accordance with either DIN 1164.2 Materials All materials to be used for the piling works shall meet the requirements as specified below. or BS 8004. The exposed edge of the grout or concrete shall be chamfered or bull nosed with a steel trowel where so indicated on the drawings. 20. 'Moderately Sulphate Resistant Cement' (MSRC-type II to ASTM-C150) based on the recommendations of the Geotechnical authority and approved by the Employer. 4014 and 4026. Grout or concrete shall be cured by covering with moist hessian for a period of five days. 1055. or under certain conditions. Part 3 (epoxies).Section 6 . Any grouting that in the opinion of the Employer is defective shall be cut out and replaced at the Contractor‘s expense. DIN 1045. compression and horizontal loads) in line with the approved foundation design. On receiving confirmation from the Employer that the final alignment check has been completed. 123. Wijerama Mawatha.) This Article applies to the foundation design/static analysis in view of necessary piling works. the cubes size shall be 100 mm. the Contractor shall complete the grouting under the steelwork and/or plant base plates. ( This publication can be purchased at the Institute located at ―Sawsiripaya‖. Colombo-07. The hessian shall be wetted at least twice in each 24 hours.6. shall be used. published by the Institution of Construction Training and Development (ICTAD) Sri Lanka. BS or the American Standards ACI. 1054.2.24 Foundations and Piling Work 20. Piling works shall be based on the findings of the soil investigations and/or information given in writing by the Employer.1 General Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to― Specifications for Bored and Cast in Situ Reinforced Concrete Piles ―. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Edge formwork shall be fixed around each base plate generally to the level of the top of the plate unless specified to the contrary by the Employer.24. and normally this will to be given within 24 hours of grouting. ASTM C150.24. The static analysis/pile design shall normally be in accordance with DIN EN 1536.6. DIN EN 196. Design work shall be certified by a qualified person(s) and information and calculations relevant shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer Earthwork as well as all concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be as specified under the relevant items. Sulphate resistant Type Cement (SRC).first Edition April 1977 ( ICTAD Publication No. The clearance space between the formwork and the base plate shall normally be 75 mm but exact clearance shall be decided on the site for each operation.2. Exposed surfaces of grout and concrete beneath items of plant shall be prepared and given two coats of oil and alkali resistant coating. Piles shall be designed for the required design loading (uplift. and the flexural strength shall be tested in accordance with BS 4551.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Type of grout Consistency Compressive strength N/mm 7 days 28 days 65 >80 2 Flexural strength N/mm 7 days 8 25 2 28 days 10 >25 Cementitious Epoxy Flowable High flow 45 80 Compressive strength shall be in accordance with BS 1881. Grout or concrete shall not be placed when the air temperature or the 0 temperature of the concrete is lower than 5 C. BS 8110 and other applicable DIN or British Standard. The formwork shall to be struck without the approval of the Employer.ICTAD/DEV/16 ). 20. ensuring that the grout completely fills the space and that it is thoroughly compacted and free from air pockets.

0 m above the ground water table when filled boring tools are extracted. Pouring concrete into the pile shall be carried out using the tremie pipe method as well as the concrete pump. length. as well as references concerning previously completed piling work. Piles shall be installed accurately in their required locations.3 Reinforcement Only deformed high tensile steel shall be applied.Section 6 . diameter. In plan. Each pile shall be installed to the correct lengths as shown on the drawings or when the pile reaches the socket in the recommended bearing strata. penetration into bearing strata. Pouring concrete into pile shall only be stopped once complete removal of slush and other foreign matter has been ensured. length of temporary casing. where casing removal by vibrator will affect the existing services/buildings.24. Concreting of each pile shall be a continuous operation and no (cold) joints shall be permitted. The description shall include equipment specifications.24. Each cast-in-situ pile shall be filled with quality concrete up to at least 60 cm above the cut-off level of the pile to allow for complete removal of slush and other foreign matters etc. BS 2004 and BS 8004 will be permitted for execution. cut off level. except in some cases/piles. Immediately after drilling. piling platform level related to zero level. including catalogue data manufacturer's published specifications.6. All installation procedures shall be subject to the Employer 's approval. and the concrete in the head of the pile shall be carefully broken away from the reinforcement which shall then be cleaned Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the reinforcement has to be placed.2. date driven. materials and procedures that will be used for the piling work. from the main pile and thus obtain sound and uniform concrete. Casing pipes shall not be deepened by means of jetting.6. pile shall not deviate more than 75mm in any direction at piling platform level. providing a concrete cover of 75 mm. 20. In such cases. The Bidder/Contractor shall submit to the Employer before start of piling works. top concrete level. Other methods of casing removal shall not be permitted. The hydrostatic head pressure shall be at least 1. Daily records of each pile shall be produced by the Bidder/Contractor. protective devices. DIN 1054. date of casting volume of concrete consumed. etc. likewise during drilling above the ground-water table. loading capacities. In vertical direction. the reinforcement has to be placed. a detailed description of the equipment. Records shall be submitted in duplicate to the Employer every following working day by 09 00 HRS. and test apparatus. Immediately after the drilling. depth from piling plat form level to toe.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.5 Drilling Operation Where required. detailed installation procedures test procedures. cast-in-situ (bored) piles with temporary casing method as per DIN EN 1536. DIN 4014. Casing shall extend to a sufficient depth below the stiff/solid strata to adequately seal off the unstable soil material. or as directed by the Employer. Other materials shall only be used upon explicit approval of the Employer. additional water has to be filled up during the drilling.282 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. Spacers to be used shall be of the concrete type only. and the pile has to be cast. Temporary casing shall be removed by vibration method. and the pile has to be cast. Installation procedures shall be such that adjacent piles shall not heave or move laterally. Concreting is to be done through tremie-pipes or equivalent devices to prevent segregation. In the vicinity of underground water.2.6. 20. the Employer may approve the rotation method for casing removal. ensuring a minimum concrete cover of 75 mm. temporary casing pipes shall penetrate ahead of the removal of soil. length of permanent casing and details of any obstructions encountered.4 Execution of Work Generally.24. The records shall give detailed information on the type. location. Permanently installed shells shall be cut off at the pile cut-off level. The heads of concrete piles shall be incorporated with in-situ concrete pile caps. The continuous flow of concrete shall be ensured by using pumps or other suitable means to be approved by the Employer. piles shall not vary more than one (1) percent from the perpendicular.

For areas affected by tidal effects.6. Loads shall be applied in the direction of the resultant force acting on the pile.after off-loading . The results of the tests shall be submitted in a format for approval by the Employer.2. whereby following load steps/cycles shall normally be applied: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.diagrams do not indicate movements beyond permissible limits as per Bidding Documents or the relevant Standards. The loading tests of piles shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in DIN 1054.6. The pile shall be cut off at the specified level and the concrete surface must be horizontal. which he intends to use for execution of all the piles.0 m below finished ground surface. or to the ultimate bearing load. static loading. Should the ground water table be at 2.7 Basics for Test Piles The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected. 20. The piles shall be considered as acceptable in case the obtained load-settlement/heave. and the second .283 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .6.6.8.to 250% of the design load. plane and free from all loose aggregate.24. Load steps shall normally not exceed 25% of the design load. the first reaching from 0% to 100%.0 m below ground surface. b) Piling Foundation Routine Test (Working Pile Test) The Bidder/Contractor shall perform routine tests on at least 2% of the working piles. with a minimum of 2 tests for each pile type. Type test piles shall not be utilised within the works and shall be treated in such a way that they do not obstruct the further works.Section 6 . 20. casing will be extended to become 3.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification and straighten as shown on the Drawings or as directed.24. Type tests (preliminary pile tests) are to be loaded to either 250% of the anticipated design load.24.6 Permanent Casings For soils in areas classified as category 5 according to BRE Digest 363.2. casings shall project 0. For routine tests (working pile tests) a loading to 150% of the design load is required. The test piles should be of the same length and same type as the piles proposed for the project. At least two load cycles have to be carried out. Load steps shall be worked out in line with the latest guide lines of the ICTAD.5 m below ground level. The permanent casing length shall be 2. polythene sheet wrapping or equivalent means to prevent damages to the epoxy coating of the reinforcement when trimming the pile heads. The top portion of the pile reinforcement shall be protected with PVC pipes. The following types of tests are to be considered: a) Piling Type Tests (Preliminary Pile Test) Prior to piling commencement the Bidder/Contractor shall install two test piles of each type of pile proposed. 20.24. the first reaching from 0% to 100% and the second .1 Loading Details for Pile Tests The Bidder/Contractor shall execute the test piles using the same equipment.8 20. permanent casings shall be provided. Part 1.2. At least two load cycles have to be made during type testing. This procedure shall be applicable for areas not affected by tidal effects.5 m below the lowest water level anticipated. DIN 4014 and DIN 4026 as well as ISSMFE recommendation on "Axial pile loading tests". Other (working) piles shall not be installed until the load tests have been conducted and the results evaluated.after off-loading to 150% of the design load.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table of Test Conditions OAD (%) 0 25 50 75 100 50 0 0 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 200 150 100 50 0 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 15 min 15 min 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 24 hr 15 min 15 min 15 min 15 min 1 hr S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0.2 Test Reports Reports on pile testing shall be submitted to the Employer and shall contain.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING TIME SETTLEMENT CONDITION Vertical movements have to be measured by means of at least three dial gauges.8. 4'. 8'.25 S ≤ 0. load cell and dial gauge readings against date and time throughout the test.25 S ≤ 0. whichever occurs first.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING S ≤ 0. Movement of the pile head shall be less than 0.25 S ≤ 0.2. with a precision of 1/100 mm.25 S ≤ 0. On every increment. 1h. 30'.284 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . or until 2 hours have elapsed. before the application of the new load increment.25 S ≤ 0. horizontal movements have to be measured by two dial gauges only.25 S ≤ 0. 2'. the following information:       Layout of test equipment and description Pile identification.Section 6 . among others. diameter and length Sketch of soil conditions and ground water location Complete records of level.25 mm within that hour.24. preferably in tabulation Graphs of load and settlement/heave versus time Graphs of settlement/heave versus load Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 15'. settlements shall be recorded after 30".25 S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0.6.25 S ≤ 0. 20.

After driving. and a signed copy submitted to the Employer daily. location. the additional tests also do not show satisfactory results. Pile driving will not be allowed before the Employer receives from the Bidder/Contractor the following reports and calculations for approval: • • • Calculation of refusal Proposal for the minimum penetrated depth of the piles through the ground Complete information about the driving and the hammers to be used. Care must be taken in breaking out concrete that no damage is done to the lower section Driven Cast-In-Situ Piles Driven Cast-In -Situ Piles are created by driving a temporary tubular steel casing. Alternatively. The records shall show the pile type. the pile shows higher settlement. the Bidder/Contractor may scale down the safe design load.24. two more piles shall be selected and tested near the failed location. pile layout of the concerned area/ building shall be revised.9. to the required depth into the ground. as well as sample graphs indicating defects or doubts on the integrity of the pile. In case. and the main reinforcement bent to form an anchorage into the concrete of the pile cap. the binders removed. Piles shall not be driven until the excavation has been completed to the grade required for footings or pile caps. Driving of each pile shall be continuous without intermission until the pile has been driven to refusal or to total penetration for the last ten blows not exceeding the design penetration unless otherwise approved by the Employer.6. the Bidder/Contractor must investigate the matter and accordingly. Driving tolerances shall not be more than one per cent out of plump and not more than 5 cm out of place. In case. the raised pile shall be re-driven to its original penetration and resistance. the Bidder/Contractor must revise the pile layout at that location and in addition. Any piles that are split.Section 6 .2. damaged or imperfect in any way shall be removed and discarded. the concrete heads of the piles are to be stripped off. A record of the driving of all piles shall be kept by the Bidder/Contractor. Piles shall be driven in the exact locations shown on the drawings to be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by the Employer or as may be directed by the Employer. closed by a removable steel shoe at its bottom end.285 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .6. to the elevation required. The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of location of each pile and the grade of the off-cut. penetration for driving stages and the results of any tests. length.2. 20. safe design load shall be scaled down and accordingly. In case. The soil is thus both displaced and compacted and the void for the pile created. If any driven pile shall have been raised by the subsequent driving of any adjacent pile or by any cause. Debris from pile cut-offs and damaged piles shall not be buried in required fill under slabs at grade or in required embankments. but shall be disposed by the Bidder/Contractor off the Site of the work. pile must be redesigned. which will hold the pile firmly in position and in axial alignment with the hammer. buckled.1 Driving of Piles Pre-Cast Driven Piles Driven piles shall be executed as per DIN 4026. The refusal shall be with HILEY formula or any other dynamic formula subject to the approval of the Employer. warped. Driving shall be done with fixed leads.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification   Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during the loading of the pile Test reports on integrity testing of piles shall include clear sample diagrams of acceptable signals for comparison purpose. The settlement of Working Pile shall satisfy the following two conditions: • • Total settlement shall not exceed 12mm. and Residual settlement shall not exceed 6mm after final test load had been applied. Reinforcing and concreting for the pile shall be done in line with the guidelines for cast in situ bored piles and the casing shall eventually be withdrawn. th Evaluation/Conclusion The settlement of preliminary piles shall not exceed 1/10 of the pile diameter after final test load is applied. the pile shows higher settlement. and the pile layout shall be revised with the modified pile capacity.9 20.24. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

factor of safety soil condition and driving equipment. Sufficient information shall be provided on the efficiency and energy of the driving equipment.9. helmet. exposed parts of the casing shall not be damaged or deformed and the dolly.9. the achieved penetration during driving and the temporary compression after completion of driving shall be measured and recorded for each pile.. Shoes to be used (and later remaining in the ground) shall be made from sufficiently strong and durable material. If the design capacity cannot be reached. Concrete shall be topped up as necessary while the casing is extracted until the required head of concrete to complete the pile in a sound and proper manner has been provided. the Bidder/Contractor shall propose remedial actions or design adjustments accordingly.2. etc.9. When the casing is being extracted.e. Regular measurements (at least in weekly intervals) shall ensure that no adjacent piles have been effected detrimentally during piling work. Dynamic evaluation and analysis shall be provided where requested by the Employer. Vibrating casing extractors must only be used if their application has been accepted in the method statement. Weight and fall of the hammer/ram and the number of blows for each 25 mm of penetration shall be recorded.24.6.6 Extraction of casing Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.9. it has to be ensured that the casing is finally driven to the specified design depth and driving resistance. After unavoidable interruptions during driving. not interrupted operation. load tests have to prove the design capacity of such piles. as well as the "Set". Concrete quality and consistency shall be provided in line with guidelines for cast in situ piles. 20. 20.6.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. During measurement of the "set". Reinforcement details shall be as for bored cast in situ piles.24.2. 20.24. The permissible uplift of any pile due to the driving of other piles shall be limited to 3 mm. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 Driving sequence and risen piles The sequence of pile driving shall minimise any possible detrimental effect on other piles in the vicinity. Once the casing has been driven to the design depth. i. as per the approved method statement. Set.24. shall be in good condition.2. which have recently been cast and thus still contain un-set concrete.6. the reinforcement cage shall be installed.6. flexible hose. The set shall be recorded either as the number of blows resulting in a penetration of 25 mm or the penetration in millimetres achieved by imposing 10 blows. The shoe shall provide a watertight joint with the casing during driving. Hammer blows shall only be applied along the line of the pile axis and the impact surface shall be perpendicular to the pile axis.6.2 Material Details Casings shall be free from distortion and shall be strong enough to be driven without damage. Concreting shall be facilitated by pump.2. tremie-pipe or by bucket.2. a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.9.4 Set Set limits shall be defined based on the working load. 20. If any pile has been displaced or indicates a higher than permissible uplift. No concrete is to be placed once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete. The length of driven piles shall be at least as per the design schedule.3 Driving of Casings Casings shall be driven at adequate spacing to prevent damages to piles. Driving of each casing shall be a continuous. Any change in pile lengths shall immediately be brought to the Employer attention.286 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 .24.

An air termination network shall be installed on the surfaces of the roofs.2mm thick as protection Tinned copper weld or stainless steel 3000x30mm diameter Potential equalizing bars: tinned copper 500x50x5mm All support and connections shall be made of best suitable materials. The screens shall be of stranded hard drawn copper wires of not less than 35sq. Air terminations: Earth terminations: against corrosion Ground rods: Tinned copper 8mm diameter Copper 8mm diameter with lead coating minimum 1. one ring of ground conductors shall be installed and interconnected. 20. 20. be provided with test joints in such positions that periodic testing is easily possible.1 Lightning Protection for Buildings A complete lightning protection system for the buildings shall be constructed in compliance with BS 6651.1 Copper Copper and copper alloys shall comply with the British Standards and approved standard relevant to the form and use for which the material is intended.3.mm total cross section. if required. Connections shall be made of copper strip of 30mm x 5mm cross-section between the overhead earthed screen wire and the main earthling system at each support. at least.2 Materials. Each down conductor shall.Section 6 . Salient points of the structure such as air conditioning installations. equipment‘s to be protected lie within areas 0 bounded by lines drawn from the earth wire at 30 to the vertical in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the earth wire. pin type joints between clamps and supports. screwed or welded) to suit the local climatic conditions. The results of the tests shall be submitted for approval by the Employer.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Approved earthed screens.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. 20. fittings and anchors shall be provided under this Contract including.2.287 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . For every building. In addition. Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free.3.) over roadways for breaker or transformer removal. The layout of the earth wires shall be such that generally. shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning strikes.5mm cross section and connected to provide low impedance paths to earth. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The necessary stays. Copper components shall be placed so that neither in no case shall they come in direct contact with aluminium nor shall it be possible for water or consideration to pass off copper on to aluminium.24. the integrity of all driven piles (100%) is to be checked successfully by means of sonic pile testing equipment. and after installation of the working piles.7 Basics for Pile Testing after Driving The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected as detailed for bored piles above. or stranded galvanised steel wires of not less than 7/3. Connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines including bimetal connectors where necessary. vent pipes railings.2. and steel constructions etc. All connections and joints shall be installed mechanically and electrically effective (clamped. No part of the roofs shall be further away than 10m from the nearest horizontal protective conductor. gutters. shall be connected to the network. flying stays and additional masts to ensure clearance of not less than 9144 mm (30 ft.3. Down conductors shall be distributed around the outside walls of the building with a maximum distance of 20m and all main metal parts near the down conductors shall be connected there to.9. 20.6.

which shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. Fittings shall be securely fixed in an approved manner. A. which. basin etc.4. Water Supply and drainage system and the distribution network shall be designed by a qualified person and relevant drawings shall be submitted to the approval of the Employer The Contractor shall provide public water service An underground tank (2 m ) with proper insect tight venting & automatically controlled pump main stopcock shall be constructed to raise the water to a shaded roof tank Every tank or cistern shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fitting. Pipe to header tank shall not be less than 25 mm bore and pipes to wash basins and WCs shall be not less than 15 more bore. 20. Every cistern. All fittings shall be individually isolated with a stopcock in the water supply pipe. all sanitary fittings shall be left in a clean and proper condition. An overhead tank with a capacity of 2. Any defects revealed shall be made good at the Contractor‘s expense. Overflow pipes from WC cisterns shall be 20 mm bore. Plastic piping and fittings shall be permitted where adequately protected or where risk of impact is small.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. Glazed ware shall be of best quality type and manufacturer shall be approved by the Employer. On completion of the works. PVC pipes provided should be black unplasticised PVC complying with BS 4660 or 5481. drains shall be subjected to an air test.4. Concrete beds and casings to drain pipes under roads shall be of week concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness. 20.Section 6 . After completion. They shall be provided with 35mm bottle traps with brass cleaning eye and lining soldered on. Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to the relevant ICTAD specification. Pipes to wash hand basins and WC cisterns shall be 15 mm bore and supply pipes to header tanks 25 mm bore.2 Water Pipes PVC pipes shall generally be used throughout of an approved type.4. Elsewhere the pipes and ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material. 20. Cistern supporting brackets shall be screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards.4. shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. or alternatively. Overflow pipes shall be taken from the tops of cisterns and set to discharge in a prominent position. or equivalent standard.0 cubic meters.4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM 20. They shall be secured to the structure.4 Waste Water Sewerage System 20.4.. space and ladder shall be provided for maintenance of overhead tank. Each basin and sink is to be provided with water. All drainage design.4. similar PVC fittings.1 Water supply system The Contractor will be responsible for the provision and installation of a water supply serving the buildings. Taps and all visible metal fittings shall be chromium plated. sink. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 Drain Pipes 3 Drainpipes shall be PVC pipes and fittings of approved manufacture and shall be jointed with sleeves or sockets. heavy-duty quality. Drinking fountain outlets shall be clearly labelled. shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fittings.288 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Sanitary Fittings Wash hand basins shall be supported on cantilever brackets cut and pinned to the walls or screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards. in which a pressure equal to 150 mm of water is to be applied for a period of five minutes without dropping below 125mm head. materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with approved standards and Codes of Practice. shaded from direct sunlight shall be provided.

The proposed system should be able to operate on both automatic & manual modes. either evapour-transpiration beds or uniflow filters shall be provided. where main drainage is not available. Effluent from the treatment plant shall be discharged to the nearby Ela with the limits to comply with accepted standards. with access through a manhole cover.4. (a) At boundary of the land during the construction stage – at or below 60 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 50dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs).4. depending on the type of subsoil.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. 20. A grease trap will be provided (by others) for the kitchen waste before discharging in to the collection system. to a soak away pit or either through evapour-transpiration beds or up flow filter. superfluous cement and other obstructions during and after lying and shall be provided with eyes. (i) Design. shall be constructed in an agreed position.2 Manholes Manholes shall be generally in accordance with BS EN 752. where a soak away will not function efficiently. (v) (vi) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4. The effluent from the tank shall discharge. All drains shall be kept clear from earth. (ii) (iii) (iv) Running cost.4 20. Galvanised malleable cast iron step irons are to be provided and built in as work proceeds.Section 6 . All drains shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients as described.4. The tank shall have separate fresh air inlet and outlet pipes and be provided with access openings.289 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 Sewerage Treatment Plant General It is required to treat the Black & Grey water from toilets and waste water from NSCC building to CEA Standards. Manhole covers shall comply with BS EN 124 and in roadways or heavily loaded areas shall be heavy duty. maintenance cost and volume of sludge produced by the plant should be as low as possible. inspection covers. In impermeable type soil. The design shall be to recognised standards such as BS 6297 and approved by the Employer. etc.4.4.3 Septic Tank & soakage pit The septic tank. The system shall be properly ventilated by continuing the soil pipe above the highest branch upwards above roof level. maximum BOD & COD.4. Maximum limits of standard of effluent discharge shall be complied with the standards specified by the ―National Environmental Protection Act of 1985 as amended by Act of 1988‖. Treatment Plant shall be designed to suit the average. debris. for effluent disposal from the tank. to ensure that every length can be rodded effectively in the event of a blockage. The system should be such that the number of electrical pumps and other electrical equipment used should be a minimum to reduce power cost. Great care shall be exercised in setting out and determining the level of the drains.4. area with non-vehicular access to be medium duty. The noise levels are required to be maintained as follows during the construction stage and operational stage. Supply and Install a suitable compact treatment plant for the treatment of the above Influent. a soak away pit shall be covered by a concrete slab. 20.4.

labour cost of removal and disposal of sludge outside the premises at suitable location and any other incidental expenses. breadth and height.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (b) At boundary of the Premises during the operational stage – at or below 55 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 45dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs).Section 6 . In order to overcome an accidental failures additional equipment necessary for the continuously operation of the treatment plant should be kept as spare. The bidder shall also furnish with the bid any other terms and condition applicable for the operation and maintenance of the plant for 5 years which shall be compatible with the requirement given above. Attach relevant catalogues. detention time. If aerators are used. (b) (c) (d) (e) (g) (h) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. repairs and spare parts. The Bidder shall indicate the modes of failure which are likely to take place under the environment in which the proposed works will perform including the performance under extreme events and how they have been taken into consideration in the design. (vii) An Environmental Protection Licence shall require to be obtained for the proposed system to carry out operation in accordance with section 23(A) of the National Environmental Act No. Attached relevant catalogues. the oxygenation capacity of the aerators and how they were selected should be indicated. and water and provide accommodation to the Contractor‘s operator. The details of previous experience of similar nature and testimonials from the respective Employers regarding their current performances. The Employer shall bear the cost of electricity. Give length. (f) Method of Sludge disposal and this process shall require to be looked after by the people who will undertake the maintenance & operation. velocity etc. The yearly cost shall include the cost of chemicals. for each tank. 47 of 1980 and its amendments. The bidder shall furnish the yearly cost of operation and maintenance of the plant and monitoring of plant performance for a period of 05 years after the free operation and maintenance period of one year. The application for such Licence shall required to be submitted to the relevant Authority one month prior to commencement of the operation of the industry. (viii) The following details should be submitted along with the proposal (a) Design Assumptions and sufficient hydraulic calculations to demonstrate how the tank sizing was done. Sizing of pumps with their characteristic curves indicating how the pumps were selected.290 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Annual estimated running cost including the breakdown of such cost.

4.2 Gradient Drains shall have the following minimum gradient.5 20. Open ditch for storm water 1/200 Other drainage systems 1/400 The minimum velocity shall exceed 0. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 Surface water drainage system General Embankments and cuttings shall have drainage facilities at their top or bottom. 20.4. The details and grading of the aggregate and the binder contents shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.4. The formation level shall be formed with uniform cross-falls of about 1 in 300 in the same direction as the natural drainage path of the surrounding Area Provision shall be made for the disposal of surface water from roads. Broken stones and aggregates shall consist of hard crushed natural stone or gravel of approved sizes.4. spares and other materials and equipment. normally provided for this nature of work. Sealing grit will be applied as required. Surface water from roofs of buildings shall be drained to down pipes connected with the site drainage system.4. properly compacted with appropriate rollers. The number of runs and out falls and pipe sizing must be sufficient to cope with the severest precipitation.4.2.4. 20.291 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5.1 General The Contractor shall ensure that the roads are levelled graded. 20.4 Tests on Completion The selected Contractor shall carryout all the required tests as directed by the Employer to obtain the approval of the relevant authorities before handing over of the plant to the client.2 The bidder shall give due consideration in pricing that the Client may at his discretion delete the scope of work for 5 years operation and maintenance work before or after the award of the Contract. and surfaced with Macadam or concrete to ensure that the finished road is suitable for the maximum foreseeable imposed loads expected from vehicles transporting the various items of plant and electrical equipment. rubbish. special attention must be given to the travelling of vehicles delivering plant.Section 6 . with a factor of safety of 1. vegetable or other injurious matter.75 m/sec. A surface water drainage system covering the switchyard shall be installed. The system may be discharged to natural watercourses or to soak ways as approved. Manholes shall be provided at each place where changes in direction take place and at not greater than 80 m canters.5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.5. 20.4. The sectional shapes have to be determined by the water carrying requirements and must have the most favourable hydraulic qualities so as to remove the drain water in a proper manner without settlements.3 Guarantee A minimum five years guarantee period for the equipment and maintenance of effluent quality from the plant to the required standard (after commissioning of the plant) is required.4. wood.4.4. It shall be free from dust. In detailing the layout of the roads and parking areas. 20. It is to be ensured by the contractor that the surface water discharge does not cause any damage to the properties through which such water is discharge up to natural water courses as approved. Material for the hard-core shall consist of natural stone broken to pass a 100-mm ring.4. Bituminous Wearing courses shall be suitable for the extreme soil condition in the area and shall comply with an authoritative and approved standard appropriate to the locality of the work. stores.5.

20.5.5. Road shall properly graded. bridges retaining walls) shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the guide lines of the road development authority.5 Roadsides In-situ concrete kerbs or pre-cast concrete kerbs set on a concrete bed are to be laid on each side of the roads. 20. They shall be reinforced to the approval of the Employer.5 lit/m liquid bitumen shall be sprayed on in accordance with the best practice fitting to the locality of the work. cable ducts and other necessary work below road formation level shall be completed. gravel or rock or mixtures thereof shall be laid in accordance with standards to give a finished thickness of at least 200 mm or as described or directed. these shall be designed for the heavy wheel loads expected on them and shall be reinforced with mesh fabric or mild steel bars as necessary. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Trench covers shall comply with the relevant standard as approved.1 Preparation of Formation The upper 300-mm of the formation shall be of suitable soil.2 Sub-Base After the formation has been properly made.2. rolled and approved by the Employer.2. a sub-base consisting of well graded natural sand. The minimum flat form width shall be 7m and road shall surface with macadam or concrete.1 Structures for approach roads. inspected and passed by the Employer before any road work is started.2.5. to define the limits for vehicular access.3. All the cable trenches crossings canal crossings road side constructions shall be considered. 20.2 Road carriage way 20. Access roads shall be either concrete or bituminous wearing surface roads.3 Prime Coat 2 For the prime coat 0.2. Where concrete covers are required for trenches crossing roads. Concrete paving slabs shall comply with a relevant approved standard. The formation shall be rolled to an even and uniform surface.5.3. for installation and subsequent maintenance. Rolling shall be carried out with a 4 to 7 ton power driven roller unless otherwise ordered or permitted by the Employer.5. 20.3 Approach road The contractor shall construct or upgrade the approach to site that is the road from the main road to the gate of the site to allow heavy vehicles to site. which shall be parallel to the finished surface of the road or path. Roads shall be surfaced with concrete or macadam as approved by the Employer.2 Access road and structures Access roads are the roads within the switchyard area. The Contractor‘s proposed site layouts shall allow for 5 m wide vehicu